IDL Help for Goddard Utilities

 NAME:
     AD2XY
 PURPOSE:
     Compute X and Y from native coordinates and a FITS  astrometry structure
 EXPLANATION:
     If a WCS projection (Calabretta & Greisen 2002, A&A, 395, 1077) is
     present, then the procedure WCSXY2SPH is used to compute native
     coordinates.   If distortion is present then this is corrected.
     In all cases, the inverse of the CD matrix is applied and offset
     from the reference pixel to obtain X and Y.

     AD2XY is generally meant to be used internal to other procedures.   For
     interactive purposes, use ADXY.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     AD2XY, a ,d, astr, x, y

 INPUTS:
     A -     R.A. or longitude in DEGREES, scalar or vector
     D -     Dec. or longitude in DEGREES, scalar or vector
     ASTR - astrometry structure, output from EXTAST procedure containing:
        .CD   -  2 x 2 array containing the astrometry parameters CD1_1 CD1_2
               in DEGREES/PIXEL                                   CD2_1 CD2_2
        .CDELT - 2 element vector giving increment at reference point in
               DEGREES/PIXEL
        .CRPIX - 2 element vector giving X and Y coordinates of reference pixel
               (def = NAXIS/2) in FITS convention (first pixel is 1,1)
        .CRVAL - 2 element vector giving coordinates of the reference pixel
               in DEGREES
        .CTYPE - 2 element vector giving projection types
        .LONGPOLE - scalar longitude of north pole (default = 180)
        .PV2 - Vector of additional parameter (e.g. PV2_1, PV2_2) needed in
               some projections
        .DISTORT - Optional substructure specifying distortion parameters

 OUTPUTS:
     X     - row position in pixels, scalar or vector
     Y     - column position in pixels, scalar or vector

     X,Y will be in the standard IDL convention (first pixel is 0), and
     *not* the FITS convention (first pixel is 1)
 NOTES:
      AD2XY tests for presence of WCS coordinates by the presence of a dash
      in the 5th character position in the value of CTYPE (e.g 'DEC--SIN').
 PROCEDURES USED:
       TAG_EXIST(), WCSSPH2XY
 REVISION HISTORY:
     Converted to IDL by B. Boothman, SASC Tech, 4/21/86
     Use astrometry structure,  W. Landsman      Jan. 1994
     Do computation correctly in degrees  W. Landsman       Dec. 1994
     Only pass 2 CRVAL values to WCSSPH2XY   W. Landsman      June 1995
     Don't subscript CTYPE      W. Landsman       August 1995
     Understand reversed X,Y (X-Dec, Y-RA) axes,   W. Landsman  October 1998
     Consistent conversion between CROTA and CD matrix W. Landsman October 2000
     No special case for tangent projection W. Landsman June 2003
     Work for non-WCS coordinate transformations W. Landsman Oct 2004
     Use CRVAL reference point for non-WCS transformation  W.L. March 2007
     Use post V6.0 notation  W.L. July 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/ad2xy.pro)

ADSTRING

 NAME:
       ADSTRING
 PURPOSE:
       Return RA and Dec as character string(s) in sexigesimal format.
 EXPLANATION:
       RA and Dec may be entered as either a 2 element vector or as
       two separate vectors (or scalars).  One can also specify the precision
       of the declination in digits after the decimal point.

 CALLING SEQUENCE
       result = ADSTRING( ra_dec, precision, /TRUNCATE )
               or
       result = ADSTRING( ra,dec,[ precision, /TRUNCATE ] )
               or
       result = ADSTRING( dec, [ PRECISION= ]

 INPUTS:
       RA_DEC - 2 element vector giving the Right Ascension and declination
               in decimal degrees.
                     or
       RA     - Right ascension in decimal degrees, numeric scalar or vector
       DEC    - Declination in decimal degrees, numeric scalar or vector

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       PRECISION  - Integer scalar (0-4) giving the number of digits after the
               decimal of DEClination.   The RA is automatically 1 digit more.
               This parameter may either be the third parameter after RA,DEC
               or the second parameter after [RA,DEC].  If only DEC is supplied
               then precision must be supplied as a keyword parameter.   If no
               PRECISION parameter or keyword is passed, a  precision of 1 for
               both RA and DEC is returned to maintain  compatibility with past
               ADSTRING versions.    Values of  precision larger than 4 will
               be truncated to 4.    If PRECISION is 3 or 4, then RA and Dec
               should be input as double precision.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       /TRUNCATE - if set, then the last displayed digit in the output is
               truncated in precision rather than rounded.   This option is
               useful if ADSTRING() is used to form an official IAU name
               (see http://vizier.u-strasbg.fr/Dic/iau-spec.htx) with
               coordinate specification.   The IAU name will typically be
               be created by applying STRCOMPRESS/REMOVE) after the ADSTRING()
               call, e.g.
              strcompress( adstring(ra,dec,0,/truncate), /remove)   ;IAU format
        PRECISION = Alternate method of supplying the precision parameter,
 OUTPUT:
       RESULT - Character string(s) containing HR,MIN,SEC,DEC,MIN,SEC formatted
               as ( 2I3,F5.(p+1),2I3,F4.p ) where p is the PRECISION
               parameter.    If only a single scalar is supplied it is
               converted to a sexigesimal string (2I3,F5.1).

 EXAMPLE:
       (1) Display CRVAL coordinates in a FITS header, H

       IDL> crval = sxpar(h,'CRVAL*')  ;Extract 2 element CRVAL vector (degs)
       IDL> print, adstring(crval)     ;Print CRVAL vector sexigesimal format

       (2)  print,adstring(30.42,-1.23,1)  ==>  ' 02 01 40.80  -01 13 48.0'
            print,adstring(30.42,+0.23)    ==>  ' 02 01 40.8   +00 13 48.0'
            print,adstring(+0.23)          ==>  '+00 13 48.0'

       (3) The first two calls in (2) can be combined in a single call using
           vector input
              print,adstring([30.42,30.42],[-1.23,0.23], 1)
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       RADEC, SIXTY()

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written   W. Landsman                      June 1988
       Addition of variable precision and DEC seconds precision fix.
       ver.  Aug. 1990 [E. Deutsch]
       Output formatting spiffed up       October 1991 [W. Landsman]
       Remove ZPARCHECK call, accept 1 element vector  April 1992 [W. Landsman]
       Call ROUND() instead of NINT()    February 1996  [W. Landsman]
       Check roundoff past 60s           October 1997   [W. Landsman]
       Work for Precision =4             November 1997  [W. Landsman]
       Major rewrite to allow vector inputs   W. Landsman  February 2000
       Fix possible error in seconds display when Precision=0
                               P. Broos/W. Landsman April 2002
       Added /TRUNCATE keyword, put leading zeros in seconds display
                               P. Broos/W. Landsman September 2002
       Fix declination zero values under vector processing W.Landsman Feb 2004
       Fix possible problem in leading zero display W. Landsman June 2004
       Assume since V5.4, omit fstring() call  W. Landsman April 2006
       Fix significant bug when round a declination with -1<dec<0
          Add PRECISION keyword    W.L. Aug 2008
       Use formatting for "+" and "0"  W. L.    May 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/adstring.pro)

ADXY

 NAME:
       ADXY
 PURPOSE:
       Use a FITS header to convert astronomical to pixel coordinates
 EXPLANATION:
       Use an image header to compute X and Y positions, given the
       RA and Dec (or longitude, latitude) in decimal degrees.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ADXY, HDR               ;Prompt for Ra and DEC
       ADXY, hdr, a, d, x, y, [ /PRINT, ALT= ]

 INPUTS:
       HDR - FITS Image header containing astrometry parameters

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       A - Right ascension in decimal DEGREES, scalar or vector
       D - Declination in decimal DEGREES, scalar or vector

       If A and D are not supplied, user will be prompted to supply
       them in either decimal degrees or HR,MIN,SEC,DEG,MN,SC format.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       X     - row position in pixels, same number of elements as A and D
       Y     - column position in pixels

       X and Y will be in standard IDL convention (first pixel is 0) and not
       the FITS convention (first pixel is 1).      As in FITS an integral
       value corresponds to the center of a pixel.
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       /PRINT - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then results are displayed
               at the terminal.
       ALT -  single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying an alternate
             astrometry system present in the FITS header.    The default is
             to use the primary astrometry or ALT = ' '.   If /ALT is set,
             then this is equivalent to ALT = 'A'.   See Section 3.3 of
             Greisen & Calabretta (2002, A&A, 395, 1061) for information about
             alternate astrometry keywords.

 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
       If less than 5 parameters are supplied, or if the /PRINT keyword is
       set, then the X and Y positions are displayed at the terminal.

       If the procedure is to be used repeatedly with the same header,
       then it would be faster to use AD2XY.

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       AD2XY, ADSTRING(), EXTAST, GETOPT(), TEN()

 REVISION HISTORY:
       W. Landsman                 HSTX          January, 1988
       Use astrometry structure   W. Landsman   January, 1994
       Changed default ADSTRING format   W. Landsman    September, 1995
       Check if latitude/longitude reversed in CTYPE keyword W. L. Feb. 2004
       Added ALT keyword   W. Landsman   September 2004
       Work for non-spherical coordinate transformation W. Landsman May 2005
       More informative error message if astrometry missing W.L. Feb 2008
       Cosmetic updates W.L. July 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/adxy.pro)

AIRTOVAC

 NAME:
       AIRTOVAC
 PURPOSE:
       Convert air wavelengths to vacuum wavelengths
 EXPLANATION:
       Wavelengths are corrected for the index of refraction of air under
       standard conditions.  Wavelength values below 2000 A will not be
       altered.  Uses relation of Ciddor (1996).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       AIRTOVAC, WAVE_AIR, [ WAVE_VAC]

 INPUT/OUTPUT:
       WAVE_AIR - Wavelength in Angstroms, scalar or vector
               If this is the only parameter supplied, it will be updated on
               output to contain double precision vacuum wavelength(s).
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
        WAVE_VAC - Vacuum wavelength in Angstroms, same number of elements as
                 WAVE_AIR, double precision

 EXAMPLE:
       If the air wavelength is  W = 6056.125 (a Krypton line), then
       AIRTOVAC, W yields an vacuum wavelength of W = 6057.8019

 METHOD:
	Formula from Ciddor 1996, Applied Optics 62, 958

 NOTES:
       Take care within 1 A of 2000 A.   Wavelengths below 2000 A *in air* are
       not altered.
 REVISION HISTORY
       Written W. Landsman                November 1991
       Use Ciddor (1996) formula for better accuracy in the infrared
           Added optional output vector, W Landsman Mar 2011
       Iterate for better precision W.L./D. Schlegel  Mar 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/airtovac.pro)

AITOFF

 NAME:
       AITOFF
 PURPOSE:
       Convert longitude, latitude to X,Y using an AITOFF projection.
 EXPLANATION:
       This procedure can be used to create an all-sky map in Galactic
       coordinates with an equal-area Aitoff projection.  Output map
       coordinates are zero longitude centered.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       AITOFF, L, B, X, Y

 INPUTS:
       L - longitude - scalar or vector, in degrees
       B - latitude - same number of elements as L, in degrees

 OUTPUTS:
       X - X coordinate, same number of elements as L.   X is normalized to
               be between -180 and 180
       Y - Y coordinate, same number of elements as L.  Y is normalized to
               be between -90 and 90.

 NOTES:
       See AIPS memo No. 46, page 4, for details of the algorithm.  This
       version of AITOFF assumes the projection is centered at b=0 degrees.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written  W.B. Landsman  STX          December 1989
       Modified for Unix:
               J. Bloch        LANL SST-9      5/16/91 1.1
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/aitoff.pro)

AITOFF_GRID

 NAME:
       AITOFF_GRID

 PURPOSE:
       Produce an overlay of latitude and longitude lines over a plot or image
 EXPLANATION:
       The grid is plotted on the current graphics device. AITOFF_GRID
       assumes that the ouput plot coordinates span the x-range of
       -180 to 180 and the y-range goes from -90 to 90.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       AITOFF_GRID [,DLONG,DLAT, LABEL=, /NEW, CHARTHICK=, CHARSIZE=,
                     FONT=, _EXTRA=]

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:

       DLONG   = Optional input longitude line spacing in degrees. If left
                 out, defaults to 30.
       DLAT    = Optional input latitude line spacing in degrees. If left
                 out, defaults to 30.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:

       LABEL           = Optional keyword specifying that the latitude and
                         longitude lines on the prime meridian and the
                         equator should be labeled in degrees. If LABELS is
                         given a value of 2, i.e. LABELS=2, then the longitude
                         labels will be in hours instead of degrees.
        CHARSIZE       = If /LABEL is set, then CHARSIZE specifies the size
                         of the label characters (passed to XYOUTS)
        CHARTHICK     =  If /LABEL is set, then CHARTHICK specifies the
                         thickness of the label characters (passed to XYOUTS)
       FONT          =   scalar font graphics keyword (-1,0 or 1) for text
       /NEW          =   If this keyword is set, then AITOFF_GRID will create
                         a new plot grid, rather than overlay an existing plot.

       Any valid keyword to OPLOT such as COLOR, LINESTYLE, THICK can be
       passed to AITOFF_GRID (though the _EXTRA facility) to to specify the
       color, style, or thickness of the grid lines.
 OUTPUTS:
       Draws grid lines on current graphics device.

 EXAMPLE:
       Create a labeled Aitoff grid of the Galaxy, and overlay stars at
       specified Galactic longitudes, glong and latitudes, glat

       IDL> aitoff_grid,/label,/new        ;Create labeled grid
       IDL> aitoff, glong, glat, x,y      ;Convert to X,Y coordinates
       IDL> plots,x,y,psym=2              ;Overlay "star" positions

 PROCEDURES USED:
       AITOFF
 NOTES:
       If labeling in hours (LABEL=2) then the longitude spacing should be
       a multiple of 15 degrees

 AUTHOR AND MODIFICATIONS:

       J. Bloch        1.2     6/2/91
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Create default plotting coords, if needed   W. Landsman  August 2000
       Added _EXTRA, CHARTHICK, CHARSIZE keywords  W. Landsman  March 2001
       Several tweaks, plot only hours not minutes W. Landsman January 2002
       Allow FONT keyword to be passed to XYOUTS.  T. Robishaw Apr. 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/aitoff_grid.pro)

ALTAZ2HADEC

  NAME:
    ALTAZ2HADEC
 PURPOSE:
    Convert Horizon (Alt-Az) coordinates to Hour Angle and Declination.
 EXPLANATION::
    Can deal with the NCP singularity.    Intended mainly to be used by
    program hor2eq.pro
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
   ALTAZ2HADEC, alt, az, lat, ha, dec

 INPUTS
   alt - the local apparent altitude, in DEGREES, scalar or vector
   az  - the local apparent azimuth, in DEGREES, scalar or vector,
         measured EAST of NORTH!!!  If you have measured azimuth west-of-south
        (like the book MEEUS does), convert it to east of north via:
                       az = (az + 180) mod 360

   lat -  the local geodetic latitude, in DEGREES, scalar or vector.

 OUTPUTS
   ha  -  the local apparent hour angle, in DEGREES.  The hour angle is the
          time that right ascension of 0 hours crosses the local meridian.
          It is unambiguously defined.
   dec -  the local apparent declination, in DEGREES.

 EXAMPLE:
     Arcturus is observed at an apparent altitude of 59d,05m,10s and an
     azimuth (measured east of north) of 133d,18m,29s while at the
     latitude of +43.07833 degrees.
     What are the local hour angle and declination of this object?

     IDL> altaz2hadec, ten(59,05,10), ten(133,18,29), 43.07833, ha, dec
     ===> Hour angle ha = 336.683 degrees
          Declination, dec = 19.1824 degrees

       The widely available XEPHEM code gets:
                 Hour Angle = 336.683
                 Declination = 19.1824

 REVISION HISTORY:
    Written  Chris O'Dell Univ. of Wisconsin-Madison May 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/altaz2hadec.pro)

AL_LEGEND

 NAME:
       AL_LEGEND
 PURPOSE:
       Create an annotation legend for a plot.
 EXPLANATION:
       This procedure was originally named LEGEND, but a distinct LEGEND()
       function was introduced into IDL V8.0.   Therefore, the
       original LEGEND procedure in the Astronomy Library is renamed to
       AL_LEGEND.

       This procedure makes a legend for a plot.  The legend can contain
       a mixture of symbols, linestyles, Hershey characters (vectorfont),
       and filled polygons (usersym).  A test procedure, legendtest.pro,
       shows legend's capabilities.  Placement of the legend is controlled
       with keywords like /right, /top, and /center or by using a position
       keyword for exact placement (position=[x,y]) or via mouse (/position).
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       AL_LEGEND [,items][,keyword options]
 EXAMPLES:
       The call:
               al_legend,['Plus sign','Asterisk','Period'],psym=[1,2,3]
         produces:
               -----------------
               |               |
               |  + Plus sign  |
               |  * Asterisk   |
               |  . Period     |
               |               |
               -----------------
         Each symbol is drawn with a cgPlots command, so they look OK.
         Other examples are given in optional output keywords.

       lines = indgen(6)                       ; for line styles
       items = 'linestyle '+strtrim(lines,2)   ; annotations
       al_legend,items,linestyle=lines         ; vertical legend---upper left
       items = ['Plus sign','Asterisk','Period']
       sym = [1,2,3]
       al_legend,items,psym=sym                   ; ditto except using symbols
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,/horizontal       ; horizontal format
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,box=0             ; sans border
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,delimiter='='     ; embed '=' betw psym & text
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,margin=2          ; 2-character margin
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,position=[x,y]    ; upper left in data coords
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,pos=[x,y],/norm   ; upper left in normal coords
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,pos=[x,y],/device ; upper left in device coords
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,/position         ; interactive position
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,/right            ; at upper right
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,/bottom           ; at lower left
       al_legenditems,psym=sym,/center           ; approximately near center
       al_legend,items,psym=sym,number=2          ; plot two symbols, not one
     Plot 3 filled colored squares
       al_legend,items,/fill,psym=[8,8,8],colors=['red','green','blue']

        Another example of the use of AL_LEGEND can be found at
        http://www.idlcoyote.com/cg_tips/al_legend.php
 INPUTS:
       items = text for the items in the legend, a string array.
               For example, items = ['diamond','asterisk','square'].
               You can omit items if you don't want any text labels.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:

       linestyle = array of linestyle numbers  If linestyle[i] < 0, then omit
               ith symbol or line to allow a multi-line entry.     If
               linestyle = -99 then text will be left-justified.
       psym = array of plot symbol numbers.  If psym[i] is negative, then a
               line connects pts for ith item.  If psym[i] = 8, then the
               procedure usersym is called with vertices define in the
               keyword usersym.   If psym[i] = 88, then use the previously
               defined user symbol.    If 11 <= psym[i] <= 46 then David
               Fanning's function SYMCAT() will be used for additional symbols.
               (http://www.idlcoyote.com/programs/symcat.pro).   Note that
               PSYM=10 (histogram plot mode) is not allowed since it
               cannot be used with the cgPlots command.
       vectorfont = vector-drawn characters for the sym/line column, e.g.,
               ['!9B!3','!9C!3','!9D!3'] produces an open square, a checkmark,
               and a partial derivative, which might have accompanying items
               ['BOX','CHECK','PARTIAL DERIVATIVE'].
               There is no check that !p.font is set properly, e.g., -1 for
               X and 0 for PostScript.  This can produce an error, e.g., use
               !20 with PostScript and !p.font=0, but allows use of Hershey
               *AND* PostScript fonts together.
       N. B.: Choose any of linestyle, psym, and/or vectorfont.  If none is
               present, only the text is output.  If more than one
               is present, all need the same number of elements, and normal
               plot behaviour occurs.
               By default, if psym is positive, you get one point so there is
               no connecting line.  If vectorfont[i] = '',
               then cgPlots is called to make a symbol or a line, but if
               vectorfont[i] is a non-null string, then cgText is called.
       /help = flag to print header
       /horizontal = flag to make the legend horizontal
       /vertical = flag to make the legend vertical (D=vertical)
       background_color - color name or number to fill the legend box.
              Automatically sets /clear.    (D = -1)
       box = flag to include/omit box around the legend (D=include)
		  outline_color = color of box outline (D = !P.color)
       bthick = thickness of the legend box (D = !P.thick)
       charsize = just like !p.charsize for plot labels
       charthick = just like !p.charthick for plot labels
       clear = flag to clear the box area before drawing the legend
       colors = array of colors names or numbers for plot symbols/lines
          See cgCOLOR for list of color names.   Default is 'Opposite'
          If you are using index colors (0-255), then supply color as a byte,
          integer or string, but not as a long, which will be interpreted as
          a decomposed color. See http://www.idlcoyote.com/cg_tips/legcolor.php
       delimiter = embedded character(s) between symbol and text (D=none)
       font = scalar font graphics keyword (-1,0 or 1) for text
       linsize = Scale factor for line length (0-1), default = 1
                 Set to 0 to give a dot, 0.5 give half default line length
       margin = margin around text measured in characters and lines
       number = number of plot symbols to plot or length of line (D=1)
       spacing = line spacing (D=bit more than character height)
       position = data coordinates of the /top (D) /left (D) of the legend
       pspacing = psym spacing (D=3 characters) (when number of symbols is
             greater than 1)
       textcolors = array of color names or numbers for text.  See cgCOLOR
          for a list of color names.   Default is 'Opposite' of background
       thick = array of line thickness numbers (D = !P.thick), if used, then
               linestyle must also be specified
       normal = use normal coordinates for position, not data
       device = use device coordinates for position, not data
       /window - if set then send legend to a resizeable graphics window
       usersym = 2-D array of vertices, cf. usersym in IDL manual.
             (/USERSYM =square, default is to use existing USERSYM definition)
       /fill = flag to fill the usersym
       /left_legend = flag to place legend snug against left side of plot
                 window (D)
       /right_legend = flag to place legend snug against right side of plot
               window.    If /right,pos=[x,y], then x is position of RHS and
               text runs right-to-left.
       /top_legend = flag to place legend snug against top of plot window (D)
       /bottom = flag to place legend snug against bottom of plot window
               /top,pos=[x,y] and /bottom,pos=[x,y] produce same positions.

       If LINESTYLE, PSYM, VECTORFONT, SYMSIZE, THICK, COLORS, or
       TEXTCOLORS are supplied as scalars, then the scalar value is set for
       every line or symbol in the legend.
 Outputs:
       legend to current plot device
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
       corners = 4-element array, like !p.position, of the normalized
         coords for the box (even if box=0): [llx,lly,urx,ury].
         Useful for multi-column or multi-line legends, for example,
         to make a 2-column legend, you might do the following:
           c1_items = ['diamond','asterisk','square']
           c1_psym = [4,2,6]
           c2_items = ['solid','dashed','dotted']
           c2_line = [0,2,1]
           al_legend,c1_items,psym=c1_psym,corners=c1,box=0
           al_legend,c2_items,line=c2_line,corners=c2,box=0,pos=[c1[2],c1[3]]
           c = [c1[0]<c2[0],c1[1]<c2[1],c1[2]>c2[2],c1[3]>c2[3]]
         cgplots,[c[0],c[0],c[2],c[2],c[0]],[c[1],c[3],c[3],c[1],c[1]],/norm

         Useful also to place the legend.  Here's an automatic way to place
         the legend in the lower right corner.  The difficulty is that the
         legend's width is unknown until it is plotted.  In this example,
         the legend is plotted twice: the first time in the upper left, the
         second time in the lower right.

         al_legend,['1','22','333','4444'],linestyle=indgen(4),corners=corners
                       ; BOGUS LEGEND---FIRST TIME TO REPORT CORNERS
           xydims = [corners[2]-corners[0],corners[3]-corners[1]]
                       ; SAVE WIDTH AND HEIGHT
           chdim=[!d.x_ch_size/float(!d.x_size),!d.y_ch_size/float(!d.y_size)]
                       ; DIMENSIONS OF ONE CHARACTER IN NORMALIZED COORDS
           pos = [!x.window[1]-chdim[0]-xydims[0] $
                       ,!y.window[0]+chdim[1]+xydims[1]]
                       ; CALCULATE POSITION FOR LOWER RIGHT
           cgplot,findgen(10)    ; SIMPLE PLOT; YOU DO WHATEVER YOU WANT HERE.
           al_legend,['1','22','333','4444'],linestyle=indgen(4),pos=pos
                       ; REDO THE LEGEND IN LOWER RIGHT CORNER
         You can modify the pos calculation to place the legend where you
         want.  For example to place it in the upper right:
           pos = [!x.window[1]-chdim[0]-xydims[0],!y.window[1]-xydims[1]]
 Common blocks:
       none
 Procedure:
       If keyword help is set, call doc_library to print header.
       See notes in the code.  Much of the code deals with placement of the
       legend.  The main problem with placement is not being
       able to sense the length of a string before it is output.  Some crude
       approximations are used for centering.
 Restrictions:
       Here are some things that aren't implemented.
       - An orientation keyword would allow lines at angles in the legend.
       - An array of usersyms would be nice---simple change.
       - An order option to interchange symbols and text might be nice.
       - Somebody might like double boxes, e.g., with box = 2.
       - Another feature might be a continuous bar with ticks and text.
       - There are no guards to avoid writing outside the plot area.
       - There is no provision for multi-line text, e.g., '1st line!c2nd line'
         Sensing !c would be easy, but !c isn't implemented for PostScript.
         A better way might be to simply output the 2nd line as another item
         but without any accompanying symbol or linestyle.  A flag to omit
         the symbol and linestyle is linestyle[i] = -1.
       - There is no ability to make a title line containing any of titles
         for the legend, for the symbols, or for the text.
 Side Effects:
 Modification history:
       write, 24-25 Aug 92, F K Knight (knight@ll.mit.edu)
       allow omission of items or omission of both psym and linestyle, add
         corners keyword to facilitate multi-column legends, improve place-
         ment of symbols and text, add guards for unequal size, 26 Aug 92, FKK
       add linestyle(i)=-1 to suppress a single symbol/line, 27 Aug 92, FKK
       add keyword vectorfont to allow characters in the sym/line column,
         28 Aug 92, FKK
       add /top, /bottom, /left, /right keywords for automatic placement at
         the four corners of the plot window.  The /right keyword forces
         right-to-left printing of menu. 18 Jun 93, FKK
       change default position to data coords and add normal, data, and
         device keywords, 17 Jan 94, FKK
       add /center keyword for positioning, but it is not precise because
         text string lengths cannot be known in advance, 17 Jan 94, FKK
       add interactive positioning with /position keyword, 17 Jan 94, FKK
       allow a legend with just text, no plotting symbols.  This helps in
         simply describing a plot or writing assumptions done, 4 Feb 94, FKK
       added thick, symsize, and clear keyword Feb 96, W. Landsman HSTX
               David Seed, HR Wallingford, d.seed@hrwallingford.co.uk
       allow scalar specification of keywords, Mar 96, W. Landsman HSTX
       added charthick keyword, June 96, W. Landsman HSTX
       Made keyword names  left,right,top,bottom,center longer,
                                 Aug 16, 2000, Kim Tolbert
       Added ability to have regular text lines in addition to plot legend
       lines in legend.  If linestyle is -99 that item is left-justified.
       Previously, only option for no sym/line was linestyle=-1, but then text
       was lined up after sym/line column.    10 Oct 2000, Kim Tolbert
       Make default value of thick = !P.thick  W. Landsman  Jan. 2001
       Don't overwrite existing USERSYM definition  W. Landsman Mar. 2002
	     Added outline_color BT 24 MAY 2004
       Pass font keyword to cgText commands.  M. Fitzgerald, Sep. 2005
       Default spacing, pspacing should be relative to charsize. M. Perrin, July 2007
       Don't modify position keyword  A. Kimball/ W. Landsman Jul 2007
       Small update to Jul 2007 for /NORMAL coords.  W. Landsman Aug 2007
       Use SYMCAT() plotting symbols for 11<=PSYM<=46   W. Landsman  Nov 2009
       Make a sharper box edge T. Robishaw/W.Landsman July 2010
       Added BTHICK keyword W. Landsman October 2010
       Added BACKGROUND_COLOR keyword  W. Landsman February 2011
       Incorporate Coyote graphics  W. Landsman  February 2011
       Added LINSIZE keyword W.L./V.Gonzalez   May 2011
       Fixed a small problem with Convert_Coord when the Window keyword is set.
                         David Fanning, May 2011.
       Fixed problem when /clear and /Window are set J. Bailin/WL   May 2011
       CGQUERY was called instead of CGCONTROL   W.L.  June 2011
       Fixed typo preventing BTHICK keyword from working W.L. Dec 2011
       Remove call to SYMCAT() W.L. Dec 2011
       Changed the way the WINDOW keyword adds commands to cgWindow, and
       now default to BACKGROUND for background color. 1 Feb 2012 David Fanning
       Allow 1 element SYMSIZE for vector input, WL Apr 2012.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/plot/al_legend.pro)

APER

 NAME:
      APER
 PURPOSE:
      Compute concentric aperture photometry (adapted from DAOPHOT)
 EXPLANATION:
     APER can compute photometry in several user-specified aperture radii.
     A separate sky value is computed for each source using specified inner
     and outer sky radii.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     APER, image, xc, yc, [ mags, errap, sky, skyerr, phpadu, apr, skyrad,
                       badpix, /NAN, /EXACT, /FLUX, PRINT = , /SILENT,
                       /MEANBACK, MINSKY=, SETSKYVAL = ]
 INPUTS:
     IMAGE -  input image array
     XC     - vector of x coordinates.
     YC     - vector of y coordinates

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
     PHPADU - Photons per Analog Digital Units, numeric scalar.  Converts
               the data numbers in IMAGE to photon units.  (APER assumes
               Poisson statistics.)
     APR    - Vector of up to 12 REAL photometry aperture radii.
     SKYRAD - Two element vector giving the inner and outer radii
               to be used for the sky annulus.   Ignored if the SETSKYVAL
              keyword is set.
     BADPIX - Two element vector giving the minimum and maximum value
               of a good pixel.   If badpix is not supplied or if BADPIX[0] is
               equal to BADPIX[1] then it is assumed that there are no bad
               pixels.     Note that fluxes will not be computed for any star
               with a bad pixel within the aperture area, but that bad pixels
               will be simply ignored for the sky computation.    The BADPIX
               parameter is ignored if the /NAN keyword is set.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
     CLIPSIG - if /MEANBACK is set, then this is the number of sigma at which
             to clip the background.  Default=3
     CONVERGE_NUM:  if /MEANBACK is set then if the proportion of
           rejected pixels is less than this fraction, the iterations stop.
           Default=0.02, i.e., iteration stops if fewer than 2% of pixels
           excluded.
     /EXACT -  By default, APER counts subpixels, but uses a polygon
             approximation for the intersection of a circular aperture with
             a square pixel (and normalizes the total area of the sum of the
             pixels to exactly match the circular area).   If the /EXACT
             keyword, then the intersection of the circular aperture with a
             square pixel is computed exactly.    The /EXACT keyword is much
             slower and is only needed when small (~2 pixels) apertures are
             used with very undersampled data.
     /FLUX - By default, APER uses a magnitude system where a magnitude of
               25 corresponds to 1 flux unit.   If set, then APER will keep
              results in flux units instead of magnitudes.
     MAXITER if /MEANBACK is set then this is the ceiling on number of
             clipping iterations of the background.  Default=5
     /MEANBACK - if set, then the background is computed using the 3 sigma
             clipped mean (using meanclip.pro) rather than using the mode
             computed with mmm.pro.    This keyword is useful for the Poisson
             count regime or where contamination is known  to be minimal.
      MINSKY - Integer giving mininum number of sky values to be used with MMM
             APER will not compute a flux if fewer valid sky elements are
               within the sky annulus.   Default = 20.
     /NAN  - If set then APER will check for NAN values in the image.   /NAN
             takes precedence over the BADPIX parameter.   Note that fluxes
             will not be computed for any star with a NAN pixel within the
             aperture area, but that NAN pixels will be simply ignored for
             the sky computation.
     PRINT - if set and non-zero then APER will also write its results to
               a file aper.prt.   One can specify the output file name by
               setting PRINT = 'filename'.
     READNOISE - Scalar giving the read noise (or minimum noise for any
              pixel.   This value is passed to the procedure mmm.pro when
              computing the sky, and is only need for images where
              the noise is low, and pixel values are quantized.
     /SILENT -  If supplied and non-zero then no output is displayed to the
               terminal.
     SETSKYVAL - Use this keyword to force the sky to a specified value
               rather than have APER compute a sky value.    SETSKYVAL
               can either be a scalar specifying the sky value to use for
               all sources, or a 3 element vector specifying the sky value,
               the sigma of the sky value, and the number of elements used
               to compute a sky value.   The 3 element form of SETSKYVAL
               is needed for accurate error budgeting.

 OUTPUTS:
     MAGS   -  NAPER by NSTAR array giving the magnitude for each star in
               each aperture.  (NAPER is the number of apertures, and NSTAR
               is the number of stars).   If the /FLUX keyword is not set, then
               a flux of 1 digital unit is assigned a zero point magnitude of
               25.
     ERRAP  -  NAPER by NSTAR array giving error for each star.  If a
               magnitude could not be determined then  ERRAP = 9.99 (if in
                magnitudes) or ERRAP = !VALUES.F_NAN (if /FLUX is set).
     SKY  -    NSTAR element vector giving sky value for each star in
               flux units
     SKYERR -  NSTAR element vector giving error in sky values

 EXAMPLE:
       Determine the flux and error for photometry radii of 3 and 5 pixels
       surrounding the position 234.2,344.3 on an image array, im.   Compute
       the partial pixel area exactly.    Assume that the flux units are in
       Poisson counts, so that PHPADU = 1, and the sky value is already known
       to be 1.3, and that the range [-32767,80000] for bad low and bad high
       pixels


       IDL> aper, im, 234.2, 344.3, flux, eflux, sky,skyerr, 1, [3,5], -1, $
            [-32767,80000],/exact, /flux, setsky = 1.3

 PROCEDURES USED:
       GETOPT, MMM, PIXWT(), STRN(), STRNUMBER()
 NOTES:
       Reasons that a valid magnitude cannot be computed include the following:
      (1) Star position is too close (within 0.5 pixels) to edge of the frame
      (2) Less than 20 valid pixels available for computing sky
      (3) Modal value of sky could not be computed by the procedure MMM
      (4) *Any* pixel within the aperture radius is a "bad" pixel
      (5) The total computed flux is negative.     In this case the negative
          flux and error are returned.


       For the case where the source is fainter than the background, APER will
       return negative fluxes if /FLUX is set, but will otherwise give
       invalid data (since negative fluxes can't be converted to magnitudes)

       APER was modified in June 2000 in two ways: (1) the /EXACT keyword was
       added (2) the approximation of the intersection of a circular aperture
       with square pixels was improved (i.e. when /EXACT is not used)
 REVISON HISTORY:
       Adapted to IDL from DAOPHOT June, 1989   B. Pfarr, STX
       FLUX keyword added                       J. E. Hollis, February, 1996
       SETSKYVAL keyword, increase maxsky       W. Landsman, May 1997
       Work for more than 32767 stars           W. Landsman, August 1997
       Don't abort for insufficient sky pixels  W. Landsman  May 2000
       Added /EXACT keyword                     W. Landsman  June 2000
       Allow SETSKYVAL = 0                      W. Landsman  December 2000
       Set BADPIX[0] = BADPIX[1] to ignore bad pixels W. L.  January 2001
       Fix chk_badpixel problem introduced Jan 01 C. Ishida/W.L. February 2001
       Set bad fluxes and error to NAN if /FLUX is set  W. Landsman Oct. 2001
       Remove restrictions on maximum sky radius W. Landsman  July 2003
       Added /NAN keyword  W. Landsman November 2004
       Set badflux=0 if neither /NAN nor badpix is set  M. Perrin December 2004
       Added READNOISE keyword   W. Landsman January 2005
       Added MEANBACK keyword   W. Landsman October 2005
       Correct typo when /EXACT and multiple apertures used.  W.L. Dec 2005
       Remove VMS-specific code W.L. Sep 2006
       Add additional keywords if /MEANBACK is set W.L  Nov 2006
       Allow negative fluxes if /FLUX is set  W.L.  Mar 2008
       Previous update would crash if first star was out of range  W.L. Mar 2008
       Fix floating equality test for bad magnitudes W.L./J.van Eyken Jul 2009
       Added MINSKY keyword W.L. Dec 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/aper.pro)

ARCBAR

 NAME:
       ARCBAR
 PURPOSE:
       Draw an arc bar on an image showing the astronomical plate scale

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ARCBAR, hdr, arclen,[  COLOR= , /DATA, LABEL= , /NORMAL, POSITION =,
                              /SECONDS, SIZE=, THICK=, FONT= ]

 INPUTS:
       hdr - image FITS header with astrometry, string array
       arclen - numeric scalar giving length of bar in arcminutes (default)
               or arcseconds (if /SECONDS is set)

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
       COLOR - name  or integer scalar specifying the color to draw the arcbar
               See cgColor for a list of available color names
       /DATA - if set and non-zero, then the POSITION keyword is given in data
              units
       LABEL - string giving user defined label for bar.  Default label is size
               of bar in arcminutes
       /NORMAL - if this keyword is set and non-zero, then POSITION is given in
               normalized units
       POSITION - 2 element vector giving the (X,Y) position in device units
               (or normalized units if /NORMAL is set, or data units if /DATA
               is set) at which to place the  scale bar.   If not supplied,
               then the user will be prompted to place the cursor at the
               desired position
       /SECONDS - if set, then arlen is specified in arcseconds rather than
               arcminutes
       SIZE  - scalar specifying character size of label, default = 1.0
       THICK -  Character thickness of the label, default = !P.THICK
       FONT - scalar font graphics keyword (-1,0 or 1) for text

 EXAMPLE:
       Place a 3' arc minute scale bar, at position 300,200 of the current
       image window, (which is associated with a FITS header, HDR)

       IDL> arcbar, HDR, 3, pos = [300,200]

 RESTRICTIONS:
       When using using a device with scalable pixels (e.g. postscript)
       the data coordinate system must be established before calling ARCBAR.
       If data coordinates are not set, then ARCBAR assumes that the displayed
       image size is given by the NAXIS1 keyword in the FITS header.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       AD2XY, EXTAST, GSSSADXY, SXPAR(), cgPlot, cgText
 REVISON HISTORY:
       written by L. Taylor (STX) from ARCBOX (Boothman)
       modified for Version 2 IDL,                     B. Pfarr, STX, 4/91
       New ASTROMETRY structures               W.Landsman,  HSTX, Jan 94
       Recognize a GSSS header                 W. Landsman June 94
       Added /NORMAL keyword                   W. Landsman Feb. 96
       Use NAXIS1 for postscript if data coords not set,  W. Landsman Aug 96
       Fixed typo for postscript W. Landsman   Oct. 96
       Account for zeropoint offset in postscript  W. Landsman   Apr 97
       Added /DATA, /SECONDS keywords   W. Landsman    July 1998
       Use device-independent label offset  W. Landsman   August 2001
       Allow font keyword to be passed.  T. Robishaw Apr. 2006
       Remove obsolete TVCURSOR command  W. Landsman Jul 2007
       Use Coyote Graphics W. Landsman  February 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/arcbar.pro)

ARROWS

 NAME:
      ARROWS
 PURPOSE:
      To display "weathervane" directional arrows on an astronomical image
 EXPLANATION:
      Overlays a graphic showing orientation of North and East.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      ARROWS,h, [ xcen, ycen, ARROWLEN= , CHARSIZE=  COLOR= , /DATA
                              FONT=, /NORMAL, /NOTVERTEX, THICK=  ]

 INPUTS:
       h - FITS header array, must include astrometry

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       xcen,ycen - numeric scalars, specifying the center position of
		arrows.   Position in device units unless the /NORMALIZED
		keyword is specified.   If not supplied, then ARROWS
		will prompt for xcen and ycen

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
       arrowlen  - length of arrows in terms of normal Y size of vector-drawn
                     character,  default  = 3.5, floating point scalar
       charsize  - character size, default = 2.0, floating point scalar
       color     -  color name or number for the arrows and NE letters.  See
                 cgCOLOR() for a list of color names.
       Data - if this keyword is set and nonzero, the input center (xcen,
                 ycen) is understood to be in data coordinates
       font - IDL vector font number (1-20) to use to display NE letters.
                 For example, set font=13 to use complex italic font.
       NotVertex - Normally (historically) the specified xcen,ycen indicated
                   the position of the vertex of the figure.  If this
                   keyword is set, the xcen,ycen coordinates refer to a sort
                   of 'center of mass' of the figure.  This allows the
                   figure to always appear with the area irregardless of
                   the rotation angle.
       Normal - if this keyword is set and nonzero, the input center
                (xcen,ycen) is taken to be in normalized coordinates.   The
                default is device coordinates.
       thick     - line thickness, default = 2.0, floating point scalar
 OUTPUTS:
       none
 EXAMPLE:
       Draw a weathervane at (400,100) on the currently active window,
       showing the orientation of the image associated with a FITS header, hdr

       IDL> arrows, hdr, 400, 100

 METHOD:
       Uses EXTAST to EXTract ASTrometry from the FITS header.   The
       directions of North and East are computed and the procedure
       ONE_ARROW called to create the "weathervane".

 PROCEDURES USED:
       GETROT - Computes rotation from the FITS header
       ONE_ARROW - Draw a labeled arrow
       ZPARCHECK
 REVISON HISTORY:
       written by B. Boothman 2/5/86
       Recoded with new procedures ONE_ARROW, ONE_RAY.  R.S.Hill,HSTX,5/20/92
       Added separate determination for N and E arrow to properly display
         arrows irregardless of handedness or other peculiarities and added
         /NotVertex keyword to improve positioning of figure. E.Deutsch 1/10/93
       Added /DATA and /NORMAL keywords W. Landsman      July 1993
       Recognize GSSS header    W. Landsman       June 1993
       Added /FONT keyword W. Landsman           April 1995
       Modified to work correctly for COLOR=0  J.Wm.Parker, HITC   1995 May 25
       Work correctly for negative CDELT values   W. Landsman   Feb. 1996
       Use GETROT to compute rotation   W. Landsman    June 2003
       Restored /NotVertex keyword which was not working after June 2003 change
                  W. Landsman  January 2004

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/arrows.pro)

ASINH

 NAME:
     ASINH
 PURPOSE:
     Return the inverse hyperbolic sine of the argument
 EXPLANATION:
     The inverse hyperbolic sine is used for the calculation of asinh
     magnitudes, see Lupton et al. (1999, AJ, 118, 1406)

 CALLING SEQUENCE
     result = asinh( x)
 INPUTS:
     X - hyperbolic sine, numeric scalar or vector or multidimensional array
        (not complex)

 OUTPUT:
     result - inverse hyperbolic sine, same number of elements as X
              double precision if X is double, otherwise floating pt.

 METHOD:
     Expression given in  Numerical Recipes, Press et al. (1992), eq. 5.6.7
     Note that asinh(-x) = -asinh(x) and that asinh(0) = 0. and that
     if y = asinh(x) then x = sinh(y).

 REVISION HISTORY:
     Written W. Landsman                 February, 2001
     Work for multi-dimensional arrays  W. Landsman    August 2002
     Simplify coding, and work for scalars again  W. Landsman October 2003

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/asinh.pro)

ASPECT

 NAME:
  ASPECT

 PURPOSE:

  This function calculates and returns the normalized position
  coordinates necessary to put a plot with a specified aspect ratio
  into the currently active graphics window. It works on the display
  output window as well as in a PostScript output window.

 AUTHOR:

   FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
   David Fanning, Ph.D.
   1645 Sheely Drive
   Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
   Phone: 970-221-0438
   E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
   Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com/

 CATEGORY:

  Graphics

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

  position = ASPECT(aspectRatio)

 INPUTS:

  aspectRatio: A floating point value that is the desired aspect
     ratio (ratio of heigth to width) of the plot in the current
     graphics output window. If this parameter is missing, an aspect
     ratio of 1.0 (a square plot) is assumed.

 KEYWORD PARAMETERS:

  MARGIN:  The margin around the edges of the plot. The value must be
     a floating point value between 0.0 and 0.5. It is expressed in
     normalized coordinate units. The default margin is 0.15.

  WINDOWASPECT: The aspect ratio of the target window. If not provided,
     the value is obtained from the current graphics window.

 OUTPUTS:

  position: A four-element floating array of normalized coordinates.
     The order of the elements is [x0, y0, x1, y1], similar to the
     !P.POSITION system variable or the POSITION keyword on any IDL
     graphic command.

 EXAMPLE:

  To create a plot with an aspect ratio of 1:2 and a margin of
  0.10 around the edge of the output window, do this:

     plotPosition = ASPECT(0.5, Margin=0.10)
     PLOT, Findgen(11), POSITION=plotPosition

  Notice this can be done in a single IDL command, like this:

     PLOT, Findgen(11), POSITION=ASPECT(0.5, Margin=0.10)

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

  Written by: David Fanning, November 1996.
       Added better error checking, 18 Feb 1997, DWF.
       Added WindowAspect keyword. 10 Feb 2000. DWF
       Added double precision tolerance for aspectRatio. 9 NOV 2001 BT

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/aspect.pro)

ASTDISP

 NAME:
	ASTDISP

 PURPOSE:
	Print astronomical and pixel coordinates in a standard format
 EXPLANATION:
	This procedure (ASTrometry DISPlay) prints the astronomical and
	pixel coordinates in a standard format.  X,Y must be supplied.  RA,DEC
	may also be supplied, and a data number (DN) may also be
	supplied.   With use of the Coords= keyword, a string containing the
	formatted data can be returned in addition or instead (with /silent)
	of printing.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	ASTDISP, x, y, [Ra, Dec, DN, COORD = , /SILENT ]

 INPUT:
	X  - The X pixel coordinate(s), scalar or vector
	Y  - The Y pixel coordinate(s), scalar or vector

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
	RA -  Right Ascension in *degrees*, scalar or vector
	DEC - DEClination in *degrees*, scalar or vector (if RA is supplied, DEC must also be supplied)
	DN -  Data Number or Flux values

	Each of the inputs X,Y, RA, DEC, DN should have the same number of
		elements
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
	SILENT    Prevents printing.  Only useful when used with Coords=
 OUTPUT:
	Printed positions in both degrees and sexigesimal format
	All passed variables remain unchanged
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUT:
	COORDS    Returns the formatted coordinates in a string
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
	ADSTRING - used to format the RA and Dec
 HISTORY:
	10-AUG-90 Version 1 written by Eric W. Deutsch
	20-AUG-91 Converted to standard header.  Vectorized Code.  E. Deutsch
	20-NOV-92 Added Coords= and /silent.  E.Deutsch
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/astdisp.pro)

ASTRO

 NAME:
     ASTRO
 PURPOSE:
     Interactive utility for precession and coordinate conversion.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     ASTRO, [ selection, EQUINOX =, /FK4]

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
      SELECTION - Scalar Integer (0-6) giving the the particular astronomical
              utility to be used.  (0) Precession, (1) RA, Dec (2000) to Galactic
              coordinates, (2) Galactic to RA,Dec (2000) (3) RA,Dec (2000) to
              Ecliptic, (4) Ecliptic to RA, Dec, (5) Ecliptic to Galactic, (6) Galactic
              to Ecliptic.   Program will prompt for SELECTION if this
              parameter is omitted.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       EQUINOX - numeric scalar specifying the equinox to use when converting
               between celestial and other coordinates.    If not supplied,
               then the RA and Dec will be assumed to be in EQUINOX J2000.
               This keyword is ignored by the precession utility.   For
               example, to convert from RA and DEC (J1975) to Galactic
               coordinates:

               IDL> astro, 1, E=1975
       /FK4 - If this keyword is set and nonzero, then calculations are done
              in the FK4 system.    For example, to convert from RA and Dec
              (B1975) to Galactic coordinates

               IDL> astro,1, E=1975,/FK4
 METHOD:
      ASTRO uses PRECESS to compute precession, and EULER to compute
      coordinate conversions.   The procedure GET_COORDS is used to
      read the coordinates, and ADSTRING to format the RA,Dec output.

 NOTES:
      (1) ASTRO temporarily sets !QUIET to suppress compilation messages and
      keep a pretty screen display.

      (2) ASTRO was changed in December 1998 to use J2000 as the default
      equinox, **and may be incompatible with earlier calls.***

      (3) A nice online page for coordinate conversions is available at
       http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/cgi-bin/Tools/convcoord/convcoord.pl
 PROCEDURES USED:
      Procedures: GET_COORDS, EULER       Function: ADSTRING
 REVISION HISTORY
      Written, W. Landsman November 1987
      Code cleaned up       W. Landsman   October 1991
      Added Equinox keyword, call to GET_COORDS, W. Landsman   April, 1992
      Allow floating point equinox input J. Parker/W. Landsman  July 1996
      Make FK5 the default, add FK4 keyword

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/astro.pro)

ASTROLIB

 NAME:
       ASTROLIB
 PURPOSE:
       Add the non-standard system variables used by the IDL Astronomy Library
 EXPLANATION:
       Also defines the environment variable ASTRO_DATA pointing to the
       directory containing data files  associated with the IDL Astronomy
       library (system dependent -- user must edit the third line in the
       program below).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ASTROLIB

 INPUTS:
       None.

 OUTPUTS:
       None.

 METHOD:
       The non-standard system variables !PRIV, !TEXTUNIT, and
       !TEXTOUT are added using DEFSYSV.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written, Wayne Landsman, July 1986.
       Use DEFSYSV instead of ADDSYSVAR           December 1990
       Test for system variable existence before definition    July 2001
       Assume since V55, remove VMS support  W. Landsman   Sep 2006
       Remove !Debug, comment out ASTRO_DATA definition  WL  Jan 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/astrolib.pro)

AUTOHIST

 NAME:
       AUTOHIST

 PURPOSE:
       Draw a histogram using automatic bin-sizing.
 EXPLANATION
       AUTOHIST chooses a number of bins (initially, SQRT(2*N). If this leads
       to a histogram in which > 1/5 of the central 50% of the bins are empty,
       it decreases the number of bins and tries again. The minimum # bins is
       5. The max=199.     Called by HISTOGAUSS and HALFAGAUSS.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       AUTOHIST, Sample, XLines, Ylines, XCenters, YCenters, [/NOPLOT, ]
                             ...Plotting Keywords
 INPUT:
       Sample = the vector to be histogrammed

 OUTPUT:
       XLINES = vector of x coordinates of the points that trace the rectangular
               histogram bins
       YLINES = vector of y coordinates. To draw the histogram plot YLINES vs
                 XLINES
       XCENTERS = the x values of the bin centers
       YCENTERS = the corresponding y values

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /NOPLOT  If set, nothing is drawn

       Any plotting keywords (e.g. XTITLE) may be supplied to AUTOHIST through
       the _EXTRA facility.
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written,   H. Freudenreich, STX, 1/91
       1998 March 17 - Changed shading of histogram.  RSH, RSTX
       V5.0 update, _EXTRA keywords  W. Landsman    April 2002
       Added NOCLIP keyword for POLYFILL call C. Paxson/W. Landsman July 2003
       Use Coyote graphics   W. Landsman  Feb 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/robust/autohist.pro)

AVG

 NAME:
       AVG
 PURPOSE:
       Return the average value of an array, or 1 dimension of an array
 EXPLANATION:
       Calculate the average value of an array, or calculate the average
       value over one dimension of an array as a function of all the other
       dimensions.

       In 2009, a DIMENSION keyword was added to the IDL MEAN() function,
       giving it the same capability as AVG().  Thus, the use of AVG() is now
       **deprecated** in favor of the MEAN() function.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       RESULT = AVG( ARRAY, [ DIMENSION, /NAN, /DOUBLE ] )

 INPUTS:
       ARRAY = Input array.  May be any type except string.

 OPTIONAL INPUT PARAMETERS:
       DIMENSION = Optional dimension to do average over, integer scalar

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
      /NAN - Set this keyword to cause the routine to check for occurrences of
            the IEEE floating-point value NaN in the input data.  Elements with
            the value NaN are treated as missing data.
      /DOUBLE - By default, if the input Array is double-precision, complex,
                or double complex, the result is of the same type;  64 bit
                integers are also returned as double.   Otherwise the result
                the  result is floating-point.   Use of the /DOUBLE keyword
                forces a double precision output.   Note that internal
                computations are always done in double precision.
 OUTPUTS:
       The average value of the array when called with one parameter.

       If DIMENSION is passed, then the result is an array with all the
       dimensions of the input array except for the dimension specified,
       each element of which is the average of the corresponding vector
       in the input array.

       For example, if A is an array with dimensions of (3,4,5), then the
       command B = AVG(A,1) is equivalent to

                       B = FLTARR(3,5)
                       FOR J = 0,4 DO BEGIN
                               FOR I = 0,2 DO BEGIN
                                       B[I,J] = TOTAL( A[I,*,J] ) / 4.
                               ENDFOR
                       ENDFOR

 RESTRICTIONS:
       Dimension specified must be valid for the array passed; otherwise the
       input array is returned as the output array.
 PROCEDURE:
       AVG(ARRAY) = TOTAL(ARRAY, /DOUBLE)/N_ELEMENTS(ARRAY) when called with
       one parameter.
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       William Thompson        Applied Research Corporation
       July, 1986              8201 Corporate Drive
                               Landover, MD  20785
       Converted to Version 2      July, 1990
       Replace SUM call with TOTAL    W. Landsman    May, 1992
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added /NAN keyword   W. Landsman      July 2000
       Accept a scalar input value    W. Landsman/jimm@berkeley   November 2000
       Internal calculations always in double precision W. Landsman March 2002
       Return NAN if all values in array are NAN  W. Landsman April 2002
       Fixed coding bug if all values in array are NAN W. Landsman Jan 2004

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/avg.pro)

BARYVEL

 NAME:
       BARYVEL
 PURPOSE:
       Calculates heliocentric and barycentric velocity components of Earth.

 EXPLANATION:
       BARYVEL takes into account the Earth-Moon motion, and is useful for
       radial velocity work to an accuracy of  ~1 m/s.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       BARYVEL, dje, deq, dvelh, dvelb, [ JPL =  ]

 INPUTS:
       DJE - (scalar) Julian ephemeris date.
       DEQ - (scalar) epoch of mean equinox of dvelh and dvelb. If deq=0
               then deq is assumed to be equal to dje.
 OUTPUTS:
       DVELH: (vector(3)) heliocentric velocity component. in km/s
       DVELB: (vector(3)) barycentric velocity component. in km/s

       The 3-vectors DVELH and DVELB are given in a right-handed coordinate
       system with the +X axis toward the Vernal Equinox, and +Z axis
       toward the celestial pole.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD SET:
       JPL - if /JPL set, then BARYVEL will call the procedure JPLEPHINTERP
             to compute the Earth velocity using the full JPL ephemeris.
             The JPL ephemeris FITS file JPLEPH.405 must exist in either the
             current directory, or in the directory specified by the
             environment variable ASTRO_DATA.   Alternatively, the JPL keyword
             can be set to the full path and name of the ephemeris file.
             A copy of the JPL ephemeris FITS file is available in
                 http://idlastro.gsfc.nasa.gov/ftp/data/
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       Function PREMAT() -- computes precession matrix
       JPLEPHREAD, JPLEPHINTERP, TDB2TDT - if /JPL keyword is set
 NOTES:
       Algorithm taken from FORTRAN program of Stumpff (1980, A&A Suppl, 41,1)
       Stumpf claimed an accuracy of 42 cm/s for the velocity.    A
       comparison with the JPL FORTRAN planetary ephemeris program PLEPH
       found agreement to within about 65 cm/s between 1986 and 1994

       If /JPL is set (using JPLEPH.405 ephemeris file) then velocities are
       given in the ICRS system; otherwise in the FK4 system.
 EXAMPLE:
       Compute the radial velocity of the Earth toward Altair on 15-Feb-1994
          using both the original Stumpf algorithm and the JPL ephemeris

       IDL> jdcnv, 1994, 2, 15, 0, jd          ;==> JD = 2449398.5
       IDL> baryvel, jd, 2000, vh, vb          ;Original algorithm
               ==> vh = [-17.07243, -22.81121, -9.889315]  ;Heliocentric km/s
               ==> vb = [-17.08083, -22.80471, -9.886582]  ;Barycentric km/s
       IDL> baryvel, jd, 2000, vh, vb, /jpl   ;JPL ephemeris
               ==> vh = [-17.07236, -22.81126, -9.889419]  ;Heliocentric km/s
               ==> vb = [-17.08083, -22.80484, -9.886409]  ;Barycentric km/s

       IDL> ra = ten(19,50,46.77)*15/!RADEG    ;RA  in radians
       IDL> dec = ten(08,52,3.5)/!RADEG        ;Dec in radians
       IDL> v = vb[0]*cos(dec)*cos(ra) + $   ;Project velocity toward star
               vb[1]*cos(dec)*sin(ra) + vb[2]*sin(dec)

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Jeff Valenti,  U.C. Berkeley    Translated BARVEL.FOR to IDL.
       W. Landsman, Cleaned up program sent by Chris McCarthy (SfSU) June 1994
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added /JPL keyword  W. Landsman   July 2001
       Documentation update W. Landsman Dec 2005

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/baryvel.pro)

BITGET

 NAME:
       BITGET

 PURPOSE:

       Returns the bit value (0 or 1) of a specified bit in a supplied number.

 AUTHOR:

       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
       David Fanning, Ph.D.
       1645 Sheely Drive
       Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
       Phone: 970-221-0438
       E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
       Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 CATEGORY:

       Utilities

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       bitValue = BitGet(number, bit)

 INPUT_PARAMETERS:

       number:          The input number. Should be a scalar integer. If not, it is converted to
                        one by rounding.

       bit:             The number of the bit you are interested in. A value between 0 and 63.
                        If not supplied, all 64 bit values of the number are returned. May be
                        an array of bit numbers.

 OUTPUT_PARAMETERS:

      bitValue:        The value, 0 or 1, of the specified bit in the number.

 KEYWORDS:

     SILENT:           If set, suppresses informational messages regarding rounding operations.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

       Written by David W. Fanning, 14 June 2006.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/bitget.pro)

BIWEIGHT_MEAN

 NAME:
	BIWEIGHT_MEAN

 PURPOSE:
	Calculate the center and dispersion (like mean and sigma) of a
	distribution using bisquare weighting.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	Mean = BIWEIGHT_MEAN( Vector, [ Sigma, Weights ] )

 INPUTS:
	Vector = Distribution in vector form

 OUTPUT:
	Mean - The location of the center.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT ARGUMENTS:

	Sigma = An outlier-resistant measure of the dispersion about the
	      center, analogous to the standard deviation.

	Weights = The weights applied to the data in the last iteration,
                 floating point vector

 NOTES:
       Since a sample mean  scaled by sigma/sqrt(N), has a Student's T
       distribution, the half-width of the  95% confidence interval for
       the sample mean  can be determined as follows:
          ABS( T_CVF( .975, .7*(N-1) )*SIGMA/SQRT(N) )
       where N = number of  points, and  0.975 = 1 - (1 - 0.95)/2.
 PROCEDURES USED:
       ROBUST_SIGMA()
 REVISION HISTORY
	Written,  H. Freudenreich, STX, 12/89
	Modified 2/94, H.T.F.: use a biweighted standard deviation rather than
		median absolute deviation.
	Modified 2/94, H.T.F.: use the fractional change in SIGMA as the
		convergence criterion rather than the change in center/SIGMA.
       Modified May 2002  Use MEDIAN(/EVEN)
       Modified October 2002, Faster computation of weights
       Corrected documentation on 95% confidence interval of mean
                 P.Broos/W. Landsman   July 2003

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/robust/biweight_mean.pro)

BLINK

 NAME:
	BLINK
 PURPOSE:
	To allow the user to alternatively examine two or more windows within
	a single window.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	BLINK, Wndw [, T]

 INPUTS:
	Wndw  A vector containing the indices of the windows to blink.
	T     The time to wait, in seconds, between blinks.  This is optional
	      and set to 1 if not present.

 OUTPUTS:
	None.

 PROCEDURE:
	The images contained in the windows given are written to a pixmap.
	The contents of the the windows are copied to a display window, in
	order, until a key is struck.

 EXAMPLE:
	Blink windows 0 and 2 with a wait time of 3 seconds

	IDL> blink, [0,2], 3

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
	Written by Michael R. Greason, STX, 2 May 1990.
	Allow different size windows   Wayne Landsman    August, 1991
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/tv/blink.pro)

BLKSHIFT

 NAME:
   BLKSHIFT

 AUTHOR:
   Craig B. Markwardt, NASA/GSFC Code 662, Greenbelt, MD 20770
   craigm@lheamail.gsfc.nasa.gov

 PURPOSE:
   Shift a block of data to a new position in a file (possibly overlapping)

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

   BLKSHIFT, UNIT, POS, [ DELTA, TO=TO, /NOZERO, ERRMSG=ERRMSG,
             BUFFERSIZE=BUFFERSIZE ]

 DESCRIPTION:

  BLKSHIFT moves a block of data forward or backward, to a new
  position in a data file.  The old and new positions of the block
  can overlap safely.

  The new position can be specified with either the DELTA parameter,
  which gives the number of bytes to move forward (positive delta) or
  backward (negative delta); or the TO keyword, which give the new
  absolute starting position of the block.

  The block can be moved beyond the current end of file point, in
  which case the intervening gap is filled with zeros (optionally).
  The gap left at the old position of the block is also optionally
  zero-filled.    If a set of data up to the end of the file is being
  moved forward (thus making the file smaller) then
  the file is truncated at the new end.using TRUNCATE_LUN.

 INPUTS:

   UNIT - a logical unit number, opened for reading and writing.

   POS - POS[0] is the position of the block in the file, in bytes,
         before moving.  POS[1], if present, is the size of the block
         in bytes.  If POS[1] is not given, then the block is from
         POS[0] to the end of the file.

   DELTA - the (optional) offset in bytes between the old and new
           positions, from the start of the block.  Positive values
           indicate moving the data forward (toward the end of file),
           and negative values indicate moving the data backward
           (toward the beginning of the file).  One of DELTA and TO
           must be specified; DELTA overrides the TO keyword.

           Attempts to move the block beyond the end of the file will
           succeed.  A block can never be moved beyond the beginning
           of the file; it will be moved to the beginning instead.

 KEYWORD PARAMETERS:

   TO - the absolute file offset in bytes for the new start of the
        block.  One of DELTA and TO must be specified; DELTA
        overrides the TO keyword.

   /NOZERO - if set, then newly created gaps will not be explicitly
            zeroed.   Note that in same systems (e.g. MacOS) the gaps will
            always be zeroed whether or not /NOZERO is set.

   ERRMSG - If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
            returned to the user in this parameter rather than
            depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors
            are encountered, then a null string is returned.

			BLKSHIFT, UNIT, POS, DElTA, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

   BUFFERSIZE - the maximum buffer size for transfers, in bytes.
                Larger values of this keyword impose larger memory
                requirements on the application; smaller values will
                lead to more transfer operations.
                Default: 32768 (bytes)

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

   Written, CM, Apr 2000
   Documented and re-written, CM, 20 Jul 2000
   Renamed from FXSHIFT to BLKSHIFT, CM, 21 Jul 2000
   Documentation, CM, 12 Dec 2002
   Truncate if moving data block forward from  the end of file
             using TRUNCATE_LUN   W. Landsman Feb. 2005
   Assume since V5.5, remove VMS support  W. Landsman  Sep 2006
   Assume since V5.6, TRUNCATE_LUN available  W. Landsman Sep 2006
   MacOS can point beyond EOF    W. Landsman   Aug 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/blkshift.pro)

BOOST_ARRAY

 NAME:
	BOOST_ARRAY
 PURPOSE:
	Append one array onto a destination array
 EXPLANATION:
	Add array APPEND to array DESTINATION, allowing the dimensions of
	DESTINATION to adjust to accommodate it.  If both input arrays have the
	same number of dimensions, then the output array will have one
	additional dimension.  Otherwise, the last dimension of DESTINATION
	will be incremented by one.
 CATEGORY:
	Utility
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	BOOST_ARRAY, DESTINATION, APPEND
 INPUT:
	DESTINATION	= Array to be expanded.
	APPEND		= Array to append to DESTINATION.
 OUTPUTS:
	DESTINATION	= Expanded output array.
 RESTRICTIONS:
	DESTINATION and APPEND have to be either both of type string or both of
	numerical types.

	APPEND cannot have more dimensions than DESTINATION.

 MODIFICATION HISTOBY:
	Written Aug'88 (DMZ, ARC)
	Modified Sep'89 to handle byte arrays (DMZ)
	Modifed to version 2, Paul Hick (ARC), Feb 1991
	Removed restriction to 2D arrays, William Thompson (ARC), Feb 1992.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/boost_array.pro)

BOXAVE

 NAME:
       BOXAVE
 PURPOSE:
       Box-average a 1 or 2 dimensional array.
 EXPLANATION:
       This procedure differs from the intrinsic REBIN function in the follow
       2 ways:

       (1) the box size parameter is specified rather than the output
               array size
       (2) for INTEGER arrays, BOXAVE computes intermediate steps using REAL*4
               (or REAL*8 for 64bit integers) arithmetic.   This is
               considerably slower than REBIN but avoids integer truncation

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       result = BOXAVE( Array, Xsize,[ Ysize ] )

 INPUTS:
       ARRAY - Two dimensional input Array to be box-averaged.  Array may be
               one or 2 dimensions and of any type except character.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       XSIZE - Size of box in the X direction, over which the array is to
               be averaged.  If omitted, program will prompt for this
               parameter.
       YSIZE - For 2 dimensional arrays, the box size in the Y direction.
               If omitted, then the box size in the X and Y directions are
               assumed to be equal

 OUTPUT:
       RESULT - Output array after box averaging.  If the input array has
               dimensions XDIM by YDIM, then RESULT has dimensions
               XDIM/NBOX by YDIM/NBOX.  The type of RESULT is the same as
               the input array.  However, the averaging is always computed
               using REAL arithmetic, so that the calculation should be exact.
               If the box size did not exactly divide the input array, then
               then not all of the input array will be boxaveraged.

 PROCEDURE:
       BOXAVE boxaverages all points simultaneously using vector subscripting

 NOTES:
       If im_int is a 512 x 512 integer array, then the two statements

               IDL> im = fix(round(rebin(float(im_int), 128, 128)))
               IDL> im  = boxave( im_int,4)

       give equivalent results.   The use of REBIN is faster, but BOXAVE is
       is less demanding on virtual memory, since one does not need to make
       a floating point copy of the entire array.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written, W. Landsman, October 1986
       Call REBIN for REAL*4 and REAL*8 input arrays, W. Landsman Jan, 1992
       Removed /NOZERO in output array definition     W. Landsman 1995
       Fixed occasional integer overflow problem      W. Landsman Sep. 1995
       Allow unsigned data types                      W. Landsman Jan. 2000
       Assume since V5.4, Allow 64bit integers        W. Landsman Apr  2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/boxave.pro)

BPRECESS

 NAME:
       BPRECESS
 PURPOSE:
       Precess positions from J2000.0 (FK5) to B1950.0 (FK4)
 EXPLANATION:
       Calculates the mean place of a star at B1950.0 on the FK4 system from
       the mean place at J2000.0 on the FK5 system.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       bprecess, ra, dec, ra_1950, dec_1950, [ MU_RADEC = , PARALLAX =
                                       RAD_VEL =, EPOCH =   ]

 INPUTS:
       RA,DEC - Input J2000 right ascension and declination in *degrees*.
               Scalar or N element vector

 OUTPUTS:
       RA_1950, DEC_1950 - The corresponding B1950 right ascension and
               declination in *degrees*.    Same number of elements as
               RA,DEC but always double precision.

 OPTIONAL INPUT-OUTPUT KEYWORDS
       MU_RADEC - 2xN element double precision vector containing the proper
                  motion in seconds of arc per tropical *century* in right
                  ascension and declination.
       PARALLAX - N_element vector giving stellar parallax (seconds of arc)
       RAD_VEL  - N_element vector giving radial velocity in km/s

       The values of MU_RADEC, PARALLAX, and RADVEL will all be modified
       upon output to contain the values of these quantities in the
       B1950 system.  The parallax and radial velocity will have a very
       minor influence on the B1950 position.

       EPOCH - scalar giving epoch of original observations, default 2000.0d
           This keyword value is only used if the MU_RADEC keyword is not set.
 NOTES:
       The algorithm is taken from the Explanatory Supplement to the
       Astronomical Almanac 1992, page 186.
       Also see Aoki et al (1983), A&A, 128,263

       BPRECESS distinguishes between the following two cases:
       (1) The proper motion is known and non-zero
       (2) the proper motion is unknown or known to be exactly zero (i.e.
               extragalactic radio sources).   In this case, the reverse of
               the algorithm in Appendix 2 of Aoki et al. (1983) is used to
               ensure that the output proper motion is  exactly zero. Better
               precision can be achieved in this case by inputting the EPOCH
               of the original observations.

       The error in using the IDL procedure PRECESS for converting between
       B1950 and J1950 can be up to 12", mainly in right ascension.   If
       better accuracy than this is needed then BPRECESS should be used.

       An unsystematic comparison of BPRECESS with the IPAC precession
       routine (http://nedwww.ipac.caltech.edu/forms/calculator.html) always
       gives differences less than 0.15".
 EXAMPLE:
       The SAO2000 catalogue gives the J2000 position and proper motion for
       the star HD 119288.   Find the B1950 position.

       RA(2000) = 13h 42m 12.740s      Dec(2000) = 8d 23' 17.69''
       Mu(RA) = -.0257 s/yr      Mu(Dec) = -.090 ''/yr

       IDL> mu_radec = 100D* [ -15D*.0257, -0.090 ]
       IDL> ra = ten(13, 42, 12.740)*15.D
       IDL> dec = ten(8, 23, 17.69)
       IDL> bprecess, ra, dec, ra1950, dec1950, mu_radec = mu_radec
       IDL> print, adstring(ra1950, dec1950,2)
               ===> 13h 39m 44.526s    +08d 38' 28.63"

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written,    W. Landsman                October, 1992
       Vectorized, W. Landsman                February, 1994
       Treat case where proper motion not known or exactly zero  November 1994
       Handling of arrays larger than 32767   Lars L. Christensen, march, 1995
       Fixed bug where A term not initialized for vector input
            W. Landsman        February 2000
       Use V6.0 notation  W. Landsman Mar 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/bprecess.pro)

BREAK_PATH()

 NAME:
    BREAK_PATH()

 PURPOSE:
     Breaks up a path string into its component directories.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     Result = BREAK_PATH( PATHS [ /NoCurrent])

 INPUTS:
     PATHS   = A string containing one or more directory paths.  The
               individual paths are separated by commas, although in UNIX,
               colons can also be used.  In other words, PATHS has the same
               format as !PATH, except that commas can be used as a separator
               regardless of operating system.

               A leading $ can be used in any path to signal that what follows
               is an environmental variable, but the $ is not necessary.
               Environmental variables can themselves contain multiple paths.

 OUTPUT:
      The result of the function is a string array of directories.
      Unless the NOCURRENT keyword is set, the first element of the array is
      always the null string, representing the current directory.  All the
      other directories will end in the correct separator character for the
      current operating system.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
      /NOCURRENT = If set, then the current directory (represented by
               the null string) will not automatically be prepended to the
               output.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
      None.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 6 May 1993.
               Added IDL for Windows compatibility.
       Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 16 May 1995
               Added keyword NOCURRENT
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 29 August 1995
               Modified to use OS_FAMILY
       Version 4, Zarro, GSFC, 4 August 1997
               Added trim to input
       Fix directory character on Macintosh system   A. Ferro   February 2000
       Use STRSPLIT instead of STR_SEP()   W. Landsman    July 2002
       Remove VMS support    W. Landsman   September 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/break_path.pro)

BSORT

 NAME:
       BSORT
 PURPOSE:
       Function to sort data into ascending order, like a simple bubble sort.
 EXPLANATION:
       Original subscript order is maintained when values are equal (FIFO).
       (This differs from the IDL SORT routine alone, which may rearrange
       order for equal values)

       A faster algorithm (radix sort) for numeric data is available  at
       http://idldatapoint.com/2012/04/19/an-lsd-radix-sort-algorithm-in-idl/
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       result = bsort( array, [ asort, /INFO, /REVERSE ] )

 INPUT:
       Array - array to be sorted

 OUTPUT:
       result - sort subscripts are returned as function value

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       Asort - sorted array

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
       /REVERSE - if this keyword is set, and non-zero, then data is sorted
                 in descending order instead of ascending order.
       /INFO = optional keyword to cause brief message about # equal values.

 HISTORY
       written by F. Varosi Oct.90:
       uses WHERE to find equal clumps, instead of looping with IF ( EQ ).
       compatible with string arrays, test for degenerate array
       20-MAY-1991     JKF/ACC via T AKE- return indexes if the array to
                       be sorted has all equal values.
       Aug - 91  Added  REVERSE keyword   W. Landsman
       Always return type LONG    W. Landsman     August 1994
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/bsort.pro)

CALZ_UNRED

 NAME:
     CALZ_UNRED
 PURPOSE:
     Deredden a galaxy spectrum using the Calzetti et al. (2000) recipe
 EXPLANATION:
     Calzetti et al.  (2000, ApJ 533, 682) developed a recipe for dereddening
     the spectra of galaxies where massive stars dominate the radiation output,
     valid between 0.12 to 2.2 microns.     (CALZ_UNRED extrapolates between
     0.12 and 0.0912 microns.)

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     CALZ_UNRED, wave, flux, ebv, [ funred, R_V = ]
 INPUT:
      WAVE - wavelength vector (Angstroms)
      FLUX - calibrated flux vector, same number of elements as WAVE
               If only 3 parameters are supplied, then this vector will
               updated on output to contain the dereddened flux.
      EBV  - color excess E(B-V), scalar.  If a negative EBV is supplied,
               then fluxes will be reddened rather than deredenned.
               Note that the supplied color excess should be that derived for
               the stellar  continuum, EBV(stars), which is related to the
               reddening derived from the gas, EBV(gas), via the Balmer
               decrement by EBV(stars) = 0.44*EBV(gas)

 OUTPUT:
      FUNRED - unreddened flux vector, same units and number of elements
               as FLUX.   FUNRED values will be zeroed outside valid domain
               Calz_unred (0.0912 - 2.2 microns).

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       R_V - Ratio of total to selective extinction, default = 4.05.
             Calzetti et al. (2000) estimate R_V = 4.05 +/- 0.80 from optical
             -IR observations of 4 starbursts.
 EXAMPLE:
       Estimate how a flat galaxy spectrum (in wavelength) between 1200 A
       and 3200 A is altered by a reddening of E(B-V) = 0.1.

       IDL> w = 1200 + findgen(40)*50      ;Create a wavelength vector
       IDL> f = w*0 + 1                    ;Create a "flat" flux vector
       IDL> calz_unred, w, f, -0.1, fnew  ;Redden (negative E(B-V)) flux vector
       IDL> plot,w,fnew

 NOTES:
       Use the 4 parameter calling sequence if you wish to save the
               original flux vector.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
      POLY()
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written   W. Landsman        Raytheon  ITSS   December, 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/calz_unred.pro)

CCM_UNRED

 NAME:
     CCM_UNRED
 PURPOSE:
     Deredden a flux vector using the CCM 1989 parameterization
 EXPLANATION:
     The reddening curve is that of Cardelli, Clayton, and Mathis (1989 ApJ.
     345, 245), including the update for the near-UV given by O'Donnell
     (1994, ApJ, 422, 158).   Parameterization is valid from the IR to the
     far-UV (3.5 microns to 0.1 microns).

     Users might wish to consider using the alternate procedure FM_UNRED
     which uses the extinction curve of Fitzpatrick (1999).
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     CCM_UNRED, wave, flux, ebv, funred, [ R_V = ]
             or
     CCM_UNRED, wave, flux, ebv, [ R_V = ]
 INPUT:
     WAVE - wavelength vector (Angstroms)
     FLUX - calibrated flux vector, same number of elements as WAVE
             If only 3 parameters are supplied, then this vector will
             updated on output to contain the dereddened flux.
     EBV  - color excess E(B-V), scalar.  If a negative EBV is supplied,
             then fluxes will be reddened rather than deredenned.

 OUTPUT:
     FUNRED - unreddened flux vector, same units and number of elements
             as FLUX

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD
     R_V - scalar specifying the ratio of total selective extinction
             R(V) = A(V) / E(B - V).    If not specified, then R_V = 3.1
             Extreme values of R(V) range from 2.75 to 5.3

 EXAMPLE:
     Determine how a flat spectrum (in wavelength) between 1200 A and 3200 A
     is altered by a reddening of E(B-V) = 0.1.   Assume an "average"
     reddening for the diffuse interstellar medium (R(V) = 3.1)

       IDL> w = 1200 + findgen(40)*50      ;Create a wavelength vector
       IDL> f = w*0 + 1                    ;Create a "flat" flux vector
       IDL> ccm_unred, w, f, -0.1, fnew  ;Redden (negative E(B-V)) flux vector
       IDL> plot,w,fnew

 NOTES:
     (1) The CCM curve shows good agreement with the Savage & Mathis (1979)
             ultraviolet curve shortward of 1400 A, but is probably
             preferable between 1200 and 1400 A.
     (2)  Many sightlines with peculiar ultraviolet interstellar extinction
             can be represented with a CCM curve, if the proper value of
             R(V) is supplied.
     (3)  Curve is extrapolated between 912 and 1000 A as suggested by
             Longo et al. (1989, ApJ, 339,474)
     (4) Use the 4 parameter calling sequence if you wish to save the
               original flux vector.
     (5) Valencic et al. (2004, ApJ, 616, 912) revise the ultraviolet CCM
             curve (3.3 -- 8.0 um-1).    But since their revised curve does
             not connect smoothly with longer and shorter wavelengths, it is
             not included here.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written   W. Landsman        Hughes/STX   January, 1992
       Extrapolate curve for wavelengths between 900 and 1000 A   Dec. 1993
       Use updated coefficients for near-UV from O'Donnell   Feb 1994
       Allow 3 parameter calling sequence      April 1998
       Converted to IDLV5.0                    April 1998

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/ccm_unred.pro)

CENTERTLB

 NAME:
       CENTERTLB

 PURPOSE:

       This is a utility routine to position a widget program
       on the display at an arbitrary location. By default the
       widget is centered on the display.

 AUTHOR:

       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
       David Fanning, Ph.D.
       1645 Sheely Drive
       Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
       Phone: 970-221-0438
       E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
       Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 CATEGORY:

       Utilities

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       CenterTLB, tlb, [x, y, /NOCENTER, /DEVICE, CENTERONTLB=wOtherTLBID]

 REQUIRED INPUTS:

       tlb: The top-level base identifier of the widget program. This must
       be a valid widget ID.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:

       x:  Set this equal to a normalized position for the center
       of the widget as measured from the left-hand side of the screen.
       The default value is 0.5 (the center)  Setting this equal to 1.0
       places the widget at the far right-hand side of the screen.

       y:  Set this equal to a normalized position for the center
       of the widget as measured from the bottom of the screen.
       The default value is 0.5 (the center) Setting this equal to 1.0
       places the widget at the top of the screen.

 KEYWORDS:

      DEVICE:  Normally, the x and y parameters are specified in normalized
      coordinates. If this keyword is set, they are taken to be in DEVICE
      coordinates.

      NOCENTER:  By default, the center of the widget is positioned at the
      location specified by the x and y parameters.  If NOCENTER is set
      to a non-zero value, then the upper left corner of the widget
      is postioned at the specifed location.

      CENTERONTLB:  If provided, the center of the widget is positioned at
      the center of the widget whose ID is provided here.

 PROCEDURE:

       The program should be called after all the widgets have
       been created, but just before the widget hierarchy is realized.
       It uses the top-level base geometry along with the display size
       to calculate offsets for the top-level base that will center the
       top-level base on the display.

 COMMENT:
       Regardless of the values set for x, y and NOCENTER, the widget
       is not permitted to run off the display.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

       Written by:  Dick Jackson, 12 Dec 98.
       Modified to use device-independent Get_Screen_Size
            function. 31 Jan 2000. DWF.
       Added x, y, NOCENTER and run-off protection. 26 Jan 2001. BT.
       Added a maximum value of 1280 for X screen size. This helps
            center the widget on a single monitor when using dual
            monitor settings with some graphics cards. 3 Feb 2003. DWF.
       Added DEVICE keyword. 4 January 2006. DWF.
       Added CenterOnTLB keyword. 7 March 2011. DJ.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/centertlb.pro)

CGAXIS

 Provides a device-independent and color-model-independent way to draw an axis into
 a graphics window. It is a wrapper to the AXIS command.

 The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
 to be installed on your machine.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Params:
    xloc: in, optional, type=depends
       The X location of the axis.
    yloc: in, optional, type=depends
       The Y location of the axis.
    zloc: in, optional, type=depends
       The Z location of the axis.

 :Keywords:
     charsize: in, optional, type=float, default=cgDefCharSize()
         The character size for axes annotations. Uses cgDefCharSize to select default
         character size, unless !P.Charsize is set, in which case !P.Charsize is always used.
     color: in, optional, type=string/integer/long
         The color of the text. Color names are those used with cgColor. By default,
         "black", unless the upper-right hand pixel in the display is black, then "white".
     data: in, optional, type=boolean
         Set this keyword to indicate xloc and yloc are in data coordinates. Data coordinates
         are the default, unless DEVICE or NORMAL is set.
     device: in, optional, type=boolean
         Set this keyword to indicate xloc and yloc are in device coordinates.
     font: in, optional, type=integer, default=!P.Font
         The type of font desired. By default, !P.Font.
     normal: in, optional, type=boolean
         Set this keyword to indicate xloc and yloc are in normalized coordinates.
     save: in, optional, type=boolean
         Set this keyword to save the scaling parameters set by the axis for subsequent use.
     t3d: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to rotate the axis is the 3D data space set up with !P.T.
     title: in, optional, type=string, default=""
         The title or annotation that appears on the axis.
     window: in, optional, type=boolean
         Set this keyword to add the command to the in the current cgWindow application.
     xaxis: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
         If set to 0, the axis is drawn under the plot with the tick marks pointing up; if set
         to 1, the axis is drawn on top of the plot with the tick marks pointing down.
     xlog: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to specify a logarithmic axis type.
     xtitle: in, optional, type=string
         An alternative way to set the `Title` keyword for X axes. Use `Title` instead.
     yaxis: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
         If set to 0, the axis is drawn on the left of the plot with the tick marks pointing
         to the right. If set to 1, the axis is drawn on the right of the plot with the tick
         marks pointing to the left.
     ylog: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to specify a logarithmic axis type.
     ynozero: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to prevent the Y axis from starting at 0.
     ytitle: in, optional, type=string
         An alternative way to set the `Title` keyword for Y axes. Use `Title` instead.
     zaxis: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
         Set to 0-3 to position the Z axis in various locatons. See the AXIS documentation.
     zlog: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to specify a logarithmic axis type.
     ztitle: in, optional, type=string
         An alternative way to set the `Title` keyword for Z axes. Use `Title` instead.
     _ref_extra: in, optional
          Any keywords appropriate for the AXIS command.


 :Examples:
    Used like the IDL AXIS command::
       IDL> cgPlot, cgDemoData(1), YStyle=8, Position=[0.1, 0.1, 0.85, 0.9], /Window
       IDL> cgAxis, /YAxis, Color='red', YRange=[-500, 500], /Save, /Window

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 25 Janauray 2011. DWF.
        Modified error handler to restore the entry decomposition state if there is an error. 17 March 2011. DWF
        Modifed the way I am handling brain dead AXIS command. 30 May 2011. DWF.
        Modified to use cgDefaultColor for default color selection. 24 Dec 2011. DWF.
        Added T3D keyword. 1 March 2012. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgaxis.pro)

CGCOLORFILL

 Provides a device-independent and color-model-independent way to fill a polygon
 with a particular color. This is a wrapper to the PolyFill command in IDL.

 The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
 to be installed on your machine.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Params:
     x: in, required, type=number
         A vector argument providing the X coordinates of the points to be connected.
         The vector must contain at least three elements. If only one argument is
         specified, X must be an array of either two or three vectors (i.e., (2,*)
         or (3,*)). In this special case, the vector X[0,*] specifies the X values,
         X[1,*] specifies Y, and X[2,*] contain the Z values.
     y: in, required, type=number
         A vector argument providing the Y coordinates of the points to be connected.
         Y must contain at least three elements.
     z: in, optional, type=number
         An optional vector argument providing the Z coordinates of the points to be
         connected. Z must contain at least three elements.

 :Keywords:
     color: in, optional, type=string/integer/long, default='rose'
         The name of the fill color. Color names are those used with cgColor.
         This value can also be a long integer or an index into the current color
         table.
     device: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set to indicate the polygon vertices are in device coordinates.
     normal: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set to indicate the polygon vertices are in normalized coordinates.
     window: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to add the command to the current cgWindow application.
     _ref_extra: in, optional, type=appropriate
         Any other keywords to the IDL POLYFILL command may be used.


 :Examples:
    Used like the IDL Polyfill command::
       IDL> cgColorFill, [0.25, 0.25, 0.75, 0.75, 0.25], [0.25, 0.75, 0.75, 0.25, 0.25], $
                 /NORMAL, COLOR='blue'

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 24 December 2010. DWF.
        In some cases, I was turning BYTE values to strings without converting to
            INTEGERS first. 30 Dec 2010. DWF.
        Moved setting to decomposed color before color selection process to avoid PostScript
             background problems when passed 24-bit color integers. 12 Jan 2011. DWF.
        Added WINDOW keyword. 24 Jan 2011. DWF.
        Modified error handler to restore the entry decomposition state if there is an error. 17 March 2011. DWF
        Modified to use cgDefaultColor for default color selection. 24 Dec 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2010, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgcolorfill.pro)

CGCOLOR[1]

The purpose of this function is to obtain drawing colors
by name and in a device/decomposition independent way.
The color names and values may be read in as a file, or 192 color
names and values are supplied with the program. These colors were
obtained from the file rgb.txt, found on most X-Window distributions,
and from colors in the `Brewer color tables <http://colorbrewer2.org/>`.
Representative colors were chosen from across the color spectrum.
If the color names '0', '1', '2', ..., '255' are used, they will
correspond to the colors in the current color table in effect at
the time the `cgColor` program is called.

The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
to be installed on your machine.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Examples:
To get drawing colors in a device-decomposed independent way::

axisColor = cgColor("Green", !D.Table_Size-2)
backColor = cgColor("Charcoal", !D.Table_Size-3)
dataColor = cgColor("Yellow", !D.Table_Size-4)
Plot, Findgen(11), Color=axisColor, Background=backColor, /NoData
OPlot, Findgen(11), Color=dataColor

To set the viewport color in object graphics::

theView = Obj_New('IDLgrView', Color=cgColor('Charcoal', /Triple))

To change the viewport color later::

theView->SetProperty, Color=cgColor('Antique White', /Triple)

To load the drawing colors "red", "green", and "yellow" at indices 100-102, type this::

IDL> TVLCT, cgColor(["red", "green", "yellow"], /Triple), 100

To interactively choose a color, set the SELECTCOLOR keyword::

IDL> color = cgColor(/SelectColor)

The PickColorName program is a good way to learn the names of the colors available::

IDL> color = PickColorName()

:Author:
FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
David W. Fanning
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

:History:
Change History::
Written by: David W. Fanning
Modified FSC_COLOR to create cgColor 9 February 2011. DWF.
Modified to allow a three-element color triple to be used in place of the color
name parameter. This allows one user-defined color to be used. 4 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modified to allow byte and 16-bit integer values to be used to specify colors
in the current color table. 5 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modified to allow the "opposite" pixel to be determined in the Z-graphics buffer. 24 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modified the code to handle long integers depending on the current color mode and the
number of values passed in. 10 January 2012. DWF.
Made sure the return values are BYTES not INTEGERS, in cases where this is expected. 10 Jan 2012. DWF.
Added "Background" as a color name. The opposite of "Opposite". 1 Feb 2012. DWF.
When returning a vector of color values, now making sure to return a byte array if
in indexed color mode. 27 Feb 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2009-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgcolor.pro)

CGCOLOR[2]

+
 This function accepts a [red, green, blue] triple that
 describes a particular color and returns a 24-bit long
 integer that is equivalent to (can be decomposed into)
 that color.

 :Params:
    color: in, required, type=byte
       A three-element byte array containing the color
       triple. The triple can be either a row or column
       vector of three elements or it can be an N-by-3 array of
       color triples.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgcolor.pro)

CGCOLOR[3]

 The purpose of this function is to obtain drawing colors
 by name and in a device/decomposition independent way.

 :Returns:
     The return value depends on the color mode in effect at the time
     the program is called and which keyword is used with the program.
     In normal operation, if the graphics device is using indexed color
     mode, the program will load a color at a unique (or specified)
     index and return that index number. If the graphics device is using
     decomposed color mode, the program will create a 24-bit color value
     that can be used to specify the particular color desired. In this
     case, no color is loaded in the color table. This is the preferred
     mode for working with colors in IDL.

 :Params:
    theColour: required, optional, type=varies
        Normally the name of the color desired. However, this can also be
        a string index number (e.g., '215') or a byte or short integer
        value (e.g, 215B or 215S). If this is the case, the color
        in the current color table at this index number is used for the
        color that is returned. The value may also be a vector of color names.
        The color may also be a three-element byte or integer array specifying a
        user-defined color triple. Only one color triple is allowed.

        To see a list of the color names available set the NAMES keyword. Colors available are these::

           Active            Almond     Antique White        Aquamarine             Beige            Bisque
           Black               Blue       Blue Violet             Brown         Burlywood        Cadet Blue
           Charcoal       Chartreuse         Chocolate             Coral   Cornflower Blue          Cornsilk
           Crimson              Cyan    Dark Goldenrod         Dark Gray        Dark Green        Dark Khaki
           Dark Orchid      Dark Red       Dark Salmon   Dark Slate Blue         Deep Pink       Dodger Blue
           Edge                 Face         Firebrick      Forest Green             Frame              Gold
           Goldenrod            Gray             Green      Green Yellow         Highlight          Honeydew
           Hot Pink       Indian Red             Ivory             Khaki          Lavender        Lawn Green
           Light Coral    Light Cyan        Light Gray      Light Salmon   Light Sea Green      Light Yellow
           Lime Green          Linen           Magenta            Maroon       Medium Gray     Medium Orchid
           Moccasin             Navy             Olive        Olive Drab            Orange        Orange Red
           Orchid     Pale Goldenrod        Pale Green            Papaya              Peru              Pink
           Plum          Powder Blue            Purple               Red              Rose        Rosy Brown
           Royal Blue   Saddle Brown            Salmon       Sandy Brown         Sea Green          Seashell
           Selected           Shadow            Sienna          Sky Blue        Slate Blue        Slate Gray
           Snow         Spring Green        Steel Blue               Tan              Teal              Text
           Thistle            Tomato         Turquoise            Violet        Violet Red             Wheat
           White              Yellow

        Here are the Brewer color names::

           WT1        WT2       WT3       WT4       WT5       WT6       WT7       WT8
           TAN1      TAN2      TAN3      TAN4      TAN5      TAN6      TAN7      TAN8
           BLK1      BLK2      BLK3      BLK4      BLK5      BLK6      BLK7      BLK8
           GRN1      GRN2      GRN3      GRN4      GRN5      GRN6      GRN7      GRN8
           BLU1      BLU2      BLU3      BLU4      BLU5      BLU6      BLU7      BLU8
           ORG1      ORG2      ORG3      ORG4      ORG5      ORG6      ORG7      ORG8
           RED1      RED2      RED3      RED4      RED5      RED6      RED7      RED8
           PUR1      PUR2      PUR3      PUR4      PUR5      PUR6      PUR7      PUR8
           PBG1      PBG2      PBG3      PBG4      PBG5      PBG6      PBG7      PBG8
           YGB1      YGB2      YGB3      YGB4      YGB5      YGB6      YGB7      YGB8
           RYB1      RYB2      RYB3      RYB4      RYB5      RYB6      RYB7      RYB8
           TG1        TG2       TG3       TG4       TG5       TG6       TG7       TG8

        The color name "OPPOSITE" is also available. It chooses a color "opposite" to the
        color of the pixel in the upper-right corner of the display, if a window is open.
        Otherwise, this color is "black" in PostScript and "white" everywhere else.
        The color OPPOSITE is used if this parameter is absent or a color name is mis-spelled.

         The color name "BACKGROUND" can similarly be used to select the color of the pixel
         in the upper-right corner of the display, if a window is open.

    colorindex: in, optional, type=byte
        The color table index where the color should be loaded. Colors are
        loaded into the color table only if using indexed color mode in the
        current graphics device. If this parameter is missing, the color will
        be loaded at a unique color index number, if necessary.

 :Keywords:
     allcolors: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
        Set this keyword to return indices, or 24-bit values, or color
        triples, for all the known colors, instead of for a single color.
     brewer: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
        An obsolete keyword. If used, only Brewer colors are loaded into the color
        vectors internally.
     cancel: out, optional, type=boolean, default=0
        This keyword is always set to 0, unless that SELECTCOLOR keyword is used.
        Then it will correspond to the value of the CANCEL output keyword in PICKCOLORNAME.
     check_connection: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         An obsolete keyword now completely ignored.
     colorstructure: out, optional, type=structure
        This output keyword (if set to a named variable) will return a
        structure in which the fields will be the known color names (without spaces)
        and the values of the fields will be either color table index numbers or
        24-bit color values. If you have specified a vector of color names, then
        this will be a structure containing just those color names as fields.
     decomposed: in, optional, type=boolean
        Set this keyword to 0 or 1 to force the return value to be
        a color table index or a 24-bit color value, respectively. This
        keyword is normally set by the color state of the current graphics device.
     filename: in, optional, type=string
        The  name of an ASCII file that can be opened to read in color values and color
        names. There should be one color per row in the file. Please be sure there are
        no blank lines in the file. The format of each row should be::

           redValue  greenValue  blueValue  colorName

        Color values should be between 0 and 255. Any kind of white-space
        separation (blank characters, commas, or tabs) are allowed. The color
        name should be a string, but it should NOT be in quotes. A typical
        entry into the file would look like this::

           255   255   0   Yellow
     names: in, optional, type=boolian, default=0
        If this keyword is set, the return value of the function is a string array
        containing the names of the colors. These names would be appropriate, for example,
        in building a list widget with the names of the colors. If the NAMES
        keyword is set, the COLOR and INDEX parameters are ignored.
     ncolors: out, optional, type=integer
        Returns the number of colors that cgColor "knows" about. Currently ncolors=193.
     nodisplay: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
        An obsolete keyword, now totally ignored.
     row: in, optional, type=boolean
        If this keyword is set, the return value of the function when the TRIPLE
        keyword is set is returned as a row vector, rather than as the default
        column vector. This is required, for example, when you are trying to
        use the return value to set the color for object graphics objects. This
        keyword is completely ignored, except when used in combination with the
        TRIPLE keyword.
     selectcolor: in, optional, type=boolean
       Set this keyword if you would like to select the color name with
       the PICKCOLORNAME program. Selecting this keyword automaticallys sets
       the INDEX positional parameter. If this keyword is used, any keywords
       appropriate for PICKCOLORNAME can also be used. If this keyword is used,
       the first positional parameter can be a color name that will appear in
       the SelectColor box.
     triple: in, optional, type=boolean
        Setting this keyword will force the return value of the function to
        always be a color triple, regardless of color decomposition state or
        visual depth of the machine. The value will be a three-element column
        vector unless the ROW keyword is also set.
     _ref_extra: in, optional
        Any keyword parameter appropriate for PICKCOLORNAME can be used.
       These include BOTTOM, COLUMNS, GROUP_LEADER, INDEX, and TITLE.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgcolor.pro)

CGCONTOUR

The purpose of cgContour is to create a wrapper for the traditional IDL graphics
command, Contour. The Contour command has a number of deficiencies that make it
difficult to use in a modern computing environment. cgContour corrects these
deficiencies and allows the user to produce traditional contour plots in a device
and machine independent manner.

The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
to be installed on your machine.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Params:
data: in, required, type=any
A one- or two-dimensional array containing the values that make
up the contour surface.
x: in, optional, type=any
A vector or two-dimensional array specifying the X coordinates for
the contour surface.
y: in, optional, type=any
A vector or two-dimensional array specifying the Y coordinates for
the contour surface.

:Keywords:
addcmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to add the command to an cgWindow. Setting this keyword
automatically sets the WINDOW keyword, but the command does not erase the
graphics window as it would normally.
axiscolor: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='opposite'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the axis color.
Otherwise, the keyword is assumed to be a color index into the current color table.
axescolor: in, optional, type=string/integer
Provisions for bad spellers.
background: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='background'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the background color.
Otherwise, the keyword is assumed to be a color index into the current color table.
c_colors: in, optional, type=integer/string vector
Set to the index values of the contour colors or to named colors. Must contain
the same number of colors as the number of requested contour levels.
c_labels: in, optional, type=integer
A vector that specifies which contour levels to label. If used, the LABEL
keyword is ignored.
c_charsize: in, optional, type=float
The character size of the annotations used on the contour lines themselves.
By default, 75% of `Charsize`.
cell_fill: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set to indicate filled contours should be created using the "cell fill" method.
This keyword should always be set if displaying filled contours on map projections
or if missing data is present in the data you are contouring.
charsize: in, optional, type=float, default=cgDefCharSize()
The character size for axes annotations. Uses cgDefCharSize to select default
character size, unless !P.Charsize is set, in which case !P.Charsize is always used.
color: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='black'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the data color. By default, same as AXISCOLOR.
Otherwise, the keyword is assumed to be a color index into the current color table.
font: in, optional, type=integer, default=!P.Font
The type of font desired for axis annotation.
fill: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set to indicate filled contours should be created.
irregular: in, optional, type=boolean
If this keyword is set, the data, x, and y input parameters are taken to be
irregularly gridded data, the the data is gridded for use in the contour plot
using the Triangulate and Trigrid method. The resolution of the gridded output
is set by the RESOLUTION keyword.
label: in, optional, type=integer, default=1
An number that tells how to label contour levels. A 0 means
no contour levels are labelled. A 1 (the default) means all contour levels are
labelled. A 2 means label every 2nd contour level is labelled. A 3 means every
3rd contour level is labelled, and so on.
layout: in, optional, type=intarr(3)
This keyword specifies a grid with a graphics window and determines where the
graphic should appear. The syntax of LAYOUT is three numbers: [ncolumns, nrows, location].
The grid is determined by the number of columns (ncolumns) by the number of
rows (nrows). The location of the graphic is determined by the third number. The
grid numbering starts in the upper left (1) and goes sequentually by column and then
by row.
levels: in, optional, type=any
A vector of data levels to contour. If used, NLEVELS is ignored. If missing,
NLEVELS is used to construct N equally-spaced contour levels.
map_object: in, optional, type=object
If you are overplotting (OVERPLOT=1) on a map projection set up with Map_Proj_Init
and using projected meter space, rather than lat/lon space, then you can use this
keyword to provide a cgMap object that will allow you to convert the `x` and `y`
grid parameters from longitude and latitude, respectively, to projected meter space
before the contour is displayed. Note, you MUST pass the `x` and `y` grid parameters
to cgContour if you are overplotting on a map projection. There is no checking to
be sure these parameters are in the correct longitude and latitude range, respectively.
missingvalue: in, optional, type=any
Use this keyword to identify any missing data in the input data values.
noclip: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Normally, the plot is clipped to the axes boundaries. Setting this keyword prevents
such clipping. Normally, this keyword is only used when there is a problem displaying
contour plots in 3D space.
nlevels: in, optional, type=integer, default=6
If the Contour plot LEVELS keyword is not used, this keyword will produce this
number of equally spaced contour intervals. Unlike the Contour NLEVELS keyword,
this keyword actually works!
noerase: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to prevent the window from erasing the contents before displaying
the contour plot.
olevels: out, optional
Set to a named variable to return the actual contour levels used in the program.
Unfortunately, output variables cannot be returned if the cgContour command is
being executed in a cgWindow.
onimage: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
If this keyword is set, and an image has been display previously with cgImage,
then the contour plot will determine the location of the image in the display
window and overplot itself onto that image.
outcolor: in, optional, type=string, default='charcoal'
The color of the contour lines when the `Outline` keyword is used.
outfilename: in, optional, type=string
If the `Output` keyword is set, the user will be asked to supply an output
filename, unless this keyword is set to a non-null string. In that case, the
value of this keyword will be used as the filename and there will be no dialog
presented to the user.
outline: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
This keyword applies only if the `Fill` keyword is set. It will draw the
contour lines on top of the filled contour. It draws the outline in the `OutColor`.
output: in, optional, type=string, default=""
Set this keyword to the type of output desired. Possible values are these::

'PS' - PostScript file
'EPS' - Encapsulated PostScript file
'PDF' - PDF file
'BMP' - BMP raster file
'GIF' - GIF raster file
'JPEG' - JPEG raster file
'PNG' - PNG raster file
'TIFF' - TIFF raster file

Or, you can simply set this keyword to the name of the output file, and the type of
file desired will be determined by the file extension. If you use this option, the
user will not be prompted to supply the name of the output file.

All raster file output is created through PostScript intermediate files (the
PostScript files will be deleted), so ImageMagick and Ghostview MUST be installed
to produce anything other than PostScript output. (See cgPS2PDF and PS_END for
details.) And also note that you should NOT use this keyword when doing multiple
plots. The keyword is to be used as a convenient way to get PostScript or raster
output for a single graphics command. Output parameters can be set with cgWindow_SetDefs.
overplot: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to overplot the contours onto a previously established
data coordinate system.
palette: in, optional, type=byte
A (256x3) color palette containing the RGB color vectors to use for coloring contours.
Contour colors will be sampled from the color table palette into the number
of contour levels required. If the palette is NOT 256 elements in length, then
it is assumed that the length corresponds to the number of levels to be contoured.
position: in, optional, type=float
Set this keyword to a four-element [x0,y0,x1,y1] array giving the contour plot
position in normalized coordinates.
resolution: in, optional, type=integer array, default=[41\,41]
If the IRREGULAR keyword is set, this keyword specifies the X and Y resolution
in a two element integer array of the final gridded data that is sent to the
contour plot.
t3d: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to use the 3D axis rotation matrix in !P.T3D.
traditional: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
If this keyword is set, the traditional color scheme of a black background for
graphics windows on the display is used and PostScript files always use a white background.
window: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if you want to display the plot in a resizable graphics window.
xstyle: in, optional, type=integer, default=1
If unused in the program, set to 1 to force exact axis scaling.
xthick: in, optional, type=integer, default=1
The thickness of the X axis annotations.
xticklen: in, optional, type=float, default=0.025
The length of the X tick marks. Set to a negative value to create outward
facing tick marks.
xticks: in, optional, type=integer
The number of tick intervals on the X axis.
xtickv: in, optional, type=string
A vector of tick values to use with the tick marks. See IDL documentation for
graphics keywords for additional information.
ystyle: in, optional, type=integer, default=1
If unused in the program, set to 1 to force exact axis scaling.
ythick: in, optional, type=integer, default=1
The thickness of the Y axis annotations.
yticklen: in, optional, type=float, default=0.025
The length of the Y tick marks. Set to a negative value to create outward
facing tick marks.
yticks: in, optional, type=integer
The number of tick intervals on the Y axis.
ytickv: in, optional, type=string
A vector of tick values to use with the tick marks. See IDL documentation for
graphics keywords for additional information.
_ref_extra: in, optional, type=any
Any keyword appropriate for the IDL Contour command is allowed in the program.

:Examples:
Use as you would use the IDL CONTOUR command::
data = dist(51)
cgContour, data
LoadCT, 33
cgContour, data, /FILL
cgContour, data, /OVERPLOT

If you wish to overplot on top of an image, use the ONIMAGE keyword, rather
than the OVERPLOT keyword:
cgImage, data, /SCALE, XRANGE=[-10, 10], YRANGE=[-5,5], /AXES
cgContour, data, /ONIMAGE

See `Device Independent Contour Plots <http://www.idlcoyote.com/graphics_tips/cgcontour.html>'
for additional examples.

:History:
Change History::
Written, 11 November 2010. DWF.
Restored the CELL_FILL keyword, which had been accidentally removed in
the earlier version. 12 November 2010. DWF.
Add the ability to specify the contour colors as color names. 16 November 2010. DWF.
Now setting decomposition state by calling SetDecomposedState. 16 November 2010. DWF.
Final color table restoration skipped in Z-graphics buffer. 17 November 2010. DWF.
Background keyword now applies in PostScript file as well. 17 November 2010. DWF.
Many changes after BACKGROUND changes to get !P.MULTI working again! 18 November 2010. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with the OVERPLOT keyword. 18 Nov 2010. DWF.
Changes so that color variables don't change type. 23 Nov 2010. DWF.
Added WINDOW keyword to allow graphic to be displayed in a resizable graphics window. 8 Dec 2010. DWF
Modifications to allow cgContour to be drop-in replacement for old Contour commands in
indexed color mode. 24 Dec 2010. DWF.
Previous changes introduced problems with OVERPLOT that have now been fixed. 28 Dec 2010. DWF.
Set NOERASE keyword from !P.NoErase system variable when appropriate. 28 Dec 2010. DWF.
Additional problems with NOERASE discovered and solved. 29 Dec 2010. DWF.
Change to DECOMPOSED color was using incorrect color tables. 29 Dec 2010. DWF.
In some cases, I was turning BYTE values to strings without converting to
INTEGERS first. 30 Dec 2010. DWF.
Still working on getting contour colors to work in decomposed color mode in all
circumstances. 2 Jan 2011. DWF.
Fixed problem with FILL when no contour colors (C_COLORS) are specified. 3 Jan 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem that preventing output keyword (e.g., PATH_INFO) from being returned properly.
3 Jan 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem calculating NLEVELS when LEVELS keyword was used instead. 3 Jan 2011. DWF.
TVLCT commands protected from NULL device. 4 Jan 2011. DWF.
Fixed a no color problem when CELL_FILL was set. 11 Jan 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem with overlaying filled contours with /OVERPLOT. 11 Jan 2011. DWF.
Selecting character size now with cgDefCharSize. 11 Jan 2011. DWF.
Moved setting to decomposed color before color selection process to avoid PostScript
background problems when passed 24-bit color integers. 12 Jan 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which I assumed the background color was a string. 18 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added ADDCMD keyword. 26 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added LAYOUT keyword. 28 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added PALETTE keyword. 4 Feb 2011. DWF.
Color table vectors must be obtained AFTER loading the color palette. 6 March 2011. DWF.
Modified error handler to restore the entry decomposition state if there is an error. 17 March 2011. DWF
Modifications to allow palettes of less than 256 elememts in length to be used. 1 April 2011. DWF.
Modifications to repair axes and tickmarks when creating filled contour plots. 28 May 2011. DWF.
Whoops! Last fix shouldn't apply to OVERPLOTTING. Fixed. 22 June 2011. DWF.
Still more work to get axes overplotting to work correct. 5 July 2011. DWF.
Added an ONIMAGE keyword that allows the contours to be overplotted on top of an image that
has been displayed with cgImage. This requires that the SAVE keyword is set in the
cgImage call.
Improved error handling. 26 Aug 2011. DWF.
Got the data type correct in the part of the code that creates levels. 6 Sept 2011. DWF.
Small change to allow cgWindow to set the current graphics window if it is the only
window on the display. 15 Sept 2011. DWF.
Had to add XTICKV, YTICKV, XTICKS, and YTICKS keywords to get repaired axes to work
properly on filled contour plots. There may be other keywords needed, but I am
going to add them on an as-needed basis. 30 Sept 2011. DWF.
Other keywords WERE needed! I added XTICKLEN and YTICKLEN keywords to the repaired axes
code. 3 Oct 2011. DWF.
Change from 15 Sept 2011 forgot to include the possibility of pixmap windows. Algorithm
made more robust. 27 Oct 2011. DWF.
There was a problem with axes when plotting contours in 3D that has been fixed. 18 Nov 2011. DWF.
Added OLEVELS keyword. 7 Dec 2011. DWF.
Added OUTLINE and OUTCOLOR keywords. 8 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modified the way the axes are drawn when given a negative tick length. 9 Dec 2011. DWF.
Added the ability to send the output directly to a file via the OUTPUT keyword. 9 Dec 2011, DWF.
PostScript, PDF, and Imagemagick parameters can now be tailored with cgWindow_SetDefs. 14 Dec 2001. DWF.
Made sure the OUTLINE keyword works with CELL_FILL, too. 16 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modified to use cgDefaultColor for default color selection. 24 Dec 2011. DWF.
Added MAP_OBJECT keyword. 28 Dec 2011. DWF.
Changes to allow better default colors, based on changes to cgColor and cgDefaultColor. 1 Feb 2012. DWF.
Axis repair for filled contour plots (done with AXIS) results in incorrect tick labeling with
date/time axes. Replaced repair code with actual Contour command. 9 March 2012. DWF.
Fixed a problem with color palettes by defining NLEVELS according to the number of colors
in the palette. 19 March 2012. DWF.
Now allowing the user to draw in the "background" color, if the COLOR or AXISCOLOR is "BACKGROUND". 19 March 2012. DWF.
The axis repair change on 9 March was not working in multi plots because the plot was already
advanced. Added a fix to make sure the repair is to the correct multi plot. 20 April 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2010, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgcontour.pro)

CGCONTROL

Allows the user to set various properties of an cgWindow object. This is essentially
a wrapper to the cgWindow SetProperty method.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Params:
selection: in, required, type=varies
Normally, a window index number of an cgWindow application. But, the selection
can be a widget identifier, an object reference, or a window title, depending on
which keywords are set. The cgWindow matching the selection has its properties set.

:Keywords:
all: in, optional, type=boolean
This keyword applies only to keywords that manipulate commands in the command
list (e.g., DeleteCmd). It will select all the commands in the command list to
apply the action to.
adjustsize: in, optional, type=boolean
Set this keyword to adjust default character size to the display window size.
aspect: in, optional, type=boolean
Set this keyword to the desired aspect ratio (ysize/xsize) of the window.
background: in, optional, type=string
The background color of the window. Only use if the ERASEIT property is also set.
cmdindex: in, optional, type=integer
This keyword applies only to keywords that manipulate commands in the command
list (e.g., DeleteCmd). It specifies the command index number of the command
for which the action is desired.
create_bmp: in, optional, type='string', default='cgwindow.bmp'
Set this keyword to the name of a bitmap file to create automatically from the window.
Using this keyword is a way to create a bitmap file programmatically from a cgWindow application.
The raster file will be created via ImageMagick if im_raster has been set (default).
Depreciated now in favor of the `Output` keyword.
create_gif: in, optional, type='string', default='cgwindow.gif'
Set this keyword to the name of a GIF file to create automatically from the window.
Using this keyword is a way to create a GIF file programmatically from a cgWindow application.
The raster file will be created via ImageMagick if im_raster has been set (default).
Depreciated now in favor of the `Output` keyword.
create_jpeg: in, optional, type='string', default='cgwindow.jpeg'
Set this keyword to the name of a JPEG file to create automatically from the window.
Using this keyword is a way to create a JPEG file programmatically from a cgWindow application.
The raster file will be created via ImageMagick if im_raster has been set (default).
Depreciated now in favor of the `Output` keyword.
create_pdf: in, optional, type='string', default='cgwindow.pdf'
Set this keyword to the name of a PNG file to create automatically from the window.
Using this keyword is a way to create a PDF file programmatically from a cgWindow application.
The PDF file will be created via the Coyote Graphics program cgPS2PDF.
Depreciated now in favor of the `Output` keyword.
create_png: in, optional, type='string', default='cgwindow.png'
Set this keyword to the name of a PNG file to create automatically from the window.
Using this keyword is a way to create a PNG file programmatically from a cgWindow application.
The raster file will be created via ImageMagick if im_raster has been set (default).
create_ps: in, optional, type='string', default='cgwindow.ps'
Set this keyword to the name of a PostScript file to create automatically from the window.
Using this keyword is a way to create a PostScript file programmatically from a cgWindow application.
Depreciated now in favor of the `Output` keyword.
create_tiff: in, optional, type='string', default='cgwindow.tiff'
Set this keyword to the name of a TIFF file to create automatically from the window.
Using this keyword is a way to create a TIFF file programmatically from a cgWindow application.
The raster file will be created via ImageMagick if im_raster has been set (default).
Depreciated now in favor of the `Output` keyword.
delay: in, optional, type=float
Set this keyword to the amount of "delay" you want between commands in the command list.
deletecmd: in, optional, type=boolean
Set this keyword to delete a command in the cgWindow. The keywords cmdIndex and All
are used in deleting the specified command.
destroy: in, optional, type=boolean
Set this keyword to destroy the cgWindow program. This keyword should not be used
with other keywords.
dimensions: in, optional, type=intarr(2)
Set this keyword to a two-element array giving the xsize and ysize
of the draw widget.
eraseit: in, optional, type=boolean
If this property is set, the cgWindow erases with the background color before
displaying the commands in the window's command list.
execute: in, optional, type=boolean
Set this keyword to 1 to exectute the commands in the window's command list.
Set this keyword to 0 to prevent command excution. This is useful, for example,
if you want to load commands without having them be executed immediately.
get_keycmdindex: in, optional, type=integer
Set this value to the number of the command (zero-based) for which you want to
obtain the keyword value. If not provided, the first command (command 0) is searched.
get_keyword: in, optional, type=string
The name of the keyword whose value you want to return in get_keyvalue. The name must
be spelled EXACTLY as you used the keyword, except that case does not matter. The string
is converted to UPPERCASE to locate the proper keyword. Although it was my intention to use
this to retrieve output keyword values, this is not possible using cgWindow due to the way
Call_Procedure and keyword inheritance work.
get_keyvalue: out, optional, type=any
The value of the keyword specified in get_keyword. If the keyword cannot be found, this
value will be undefined. You MUST check for this before using the return variable in your program.
im_transparent: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to allow ImageMagick to create transparent backgrounds when it
makes raster image files from PostScript output.
im_density: in, optional, type=integer, default=300
Set this keyword to the sampling density when ImageMagick creates raster image
file from PostScript outout.
im_options: in, optional, type=string, default=""
Set this keyword to any ImageMagick options you would like to pass along to the
ImageMagick convert command when creating raster image files from PostScript output.
im_resize: in, optional, type=integer, default=25
Set this keyword to percentage that the raster image file created my ImageMagick
from PostScript output should be resized.
im_raster: in, optional, type=boolean, default=1
Set this keyword to zero to create raster files using the create_png etc. keywords
directly, instead of via ImageMagick.
im_width: in, optional, type=integer
Set this keyword to the width of the output raster file in pixel units. The height of the raster
file is set to preserve the aspect ratio of the output image. Applies only to raster images (eg
PNG, JPEG, TIFF, etc.) created from PostScript files with ImageMagick.
multi: in, optional, type=Intarr(5)
Set this keyword to the !P.MULTI setting you want to use for the window.
!P.MULTI is set to this setting before command execution, and set back to
it's default value when the commands are finished executing.
object: in, optional, type=boolean
If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be an object reference.
output: in, optional, type=string
This keyword should be set to the name of an output file. It is a short-hand way of
specifying the CREATE_*** keywords. The type of file is taken from the file name
extension.
palette: in, optional, type=byte
Use this keyword to pass in an N-by-3 (or 3-by-N) byte array containing the
R, G, and B vectors of a color table. It is probably easier to use cgLoadCT or
XCOLORS to load color tables for the window, but this is provided as another option.
pdf_path: out, optional, type=string
Set this keyword to the name of the path to the Ghostscript command for converting PS to PDF.
pdf_unix_convert_cmd: out, optional, type=string
Set this keyword to the name of an alternative UNIX command to convert PostScript to PDF.
ps_charsize: in, optional, type=float
The PostScript character size.
ps_decomposed: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to zero to set the PostScript color mode to indexed color and to
one to set the PostScript color mode to decomposed color.
ps_delete: in, optional, type=boolean, default=1
Set this keyword to zero if you want to keep the PostScript output ImageMagick creates
when making raster file output.
ps_encapsulated: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to configure PSCONFIG to produce encapsulated PostScript output by default.
ps_font: in, optional, type=integer
Set this keyword to the type of font you want to use in PostScript output. It sets the
FONT keyword on the PSConfig command. Normally, 0 (hardware fonts) or 1 (true-type fonts).
ps_metric: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to configure PSCONFIG to use metric values and A4 page size in its interface.
ps_quiet: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to set the QUIET keyword on PS_Start.
ps_scale_factor: in, optional, type=float
Set his keyword to the PostScript scale factor you wish to use in creating PostScript output.
ps_tt_font: in, optional, type=string
Set this keyword to the name of a true-type font to use in creating PostScript output.
restore_visualization: in, optional, type=string
Set this keyword to the name of a visualization save file to restore.
save_visualization: in, optional, type=string, default='graphic.cgs'
Set this keyword to the name of a file where the visualization should be saved.
title: in, optional, type=boolean
If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be a window title. All
matching is done in uppercase characters.
update: in, optional, type=boolean, default=1
Set this keyword to zero if you do not want the updates to be done immediately
after the properties are changed.
widgetid: in, optional, type=boolean
If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be a widget identifier.
xomargin: in, optional, type=intarr(2)
Sets the !X.OMargin system variable when multiple plots are displayed in the window.
yomargin: in, optional, type=intarr(2)
Sets the !Y.OMargin system variable when multiple plots are displayed in the window.

:Examples:
Used to set cgWindow properties::
IDL> cgControl, Background='gray', EraseIt=1
IDL> cgControl, Multi=[0,2,2]

:History:
Change History::
Written, 28 January 2011. DWF.
Added CREATE_PS keyword. 16 Feb 2011. DWF.
Added PS_QUIET, GET_KEYCMDINDEX, GET_KEYWORD, and GET_KEYVALUE keywords. 17 Feb 2011. DWF.
Added im_raster and the create_... raster options. 18 Feb 2011. Jeremy Bailin
Added the ability to set and unset adjustable text size in
cgWindow with ADJUSTSIZE keyword. 24 April 2011. DWF.
Added the ability to set the dimensions of the draw widget programmatically. 14 June 2011.
Added PS_DECOMPOSED keyword to set the PostScript color mode. 30 Aug 2011. DWF.
Added SAVE_VISUALIZATION and RESTORE_VISUALIZATION keywords. 15 Sept 2011. DWF.
Added ASPECT keyword to control window aspect ratio. 9 Nov 2011. DWF.
Added CREATE_PDF, PDF_UNIX_CONVERT_CMD, and PDF_PATH keywords. 11 Dec 2011. DWF.
Added IM_WIDTH keyword. 3 April 2012. DWF.
Added the OUTPUT keyword. 3 April 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2011-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgcontrol.pro)

CGDEFAULTCOLOR

The purpose of this function is to choose a default color for Coyote Graphics routines.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Returns:
Returns a scalar or vector (depends on the type of the input color) of color
names (strings) to be used as the "color" in Coyote Graphics routines. If the
MODE is 1 and the inputColor is of type LONG, then the return value is an array
or scalar of type LONG.

:Params:
inputcolour: in, optional
The input color. May be undefined, a byte, integer, long, or string. If the
device is in indexed color mode at the time the request is made, then all,
byte, integer, and long values will be treated as indices into the current
color table. The variable may be a vector.

:Keywords:
background: in, optional, type=boolean
If this keyword is set, the color is treated as a background color. Otherwise,
it is treated as a drawing color.
default: in, optional
A color of any type allowed as the `inputColour`. Used if the `inputColour` is undefined.
mode: in, optional, type=boolean
The color mode. A 0 mean indexed color mode. A 1 means decomposed color mode.
If not supplied in the call, the color mode is determined at run-time with `GetDecomposedState`.
The color mode is *always* determined at run time if the current graphics device
is the PostScript device.
traditional: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if you are using the traditional color scheme of white foreground
and black background. If this keyword is set, and the current graphics device is
the PostScript device, the colors will be reversed, in the traditional IDL graphics
way.

:Examples:
Use as a device independent way to get a color::
background = cgDefaultColor(bColor, /Background)
color = cgDefaultColor(bColor)
cgPlot, cgDemoData, Background=background, Color=color

:History:
Change History::
Written, 24 December 2011. David W. Fanning.
Modified to make sure a LONG integer in indexed color mode is in the range 0-255. 10 Jan 2012. DWF.
Modified to make sure MODE is always determined at run-time for PostScript device. 14 Jan 2012. DWF.
Allow other data types to be treated as color table index numbers, as long as they are in the
range 0 to 255, and the MODE indicates indexed color. 7 March 2012. DWF.
Modified so that the variable MODE will not change in the calling program program. 8 March 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgdefaultcolor.pro)

CGDEFCHARSIZE

   Defines a default character size for Coyote Graphics routines (cgPlot, cgContour, etc.)
   IF !P.Charsize is set, the function simply returns !P.Charsize.

 :Categories:
    Graphics, Utilities

 :Keywords:
     adjustsize: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
        If this keyword is set, the output character size is adjusted to
        fit the size of the output graphics window. No adjustment is ever
        done in PostScript. Applies only when !P.Charsize=0.
     font: in, optional, type=integer, default=!P.Font
        The font type: -1 = Hershey, 0 = hardware, 1 = true-type.

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 11 January 2011. DWF.
        Added an ADJUSTSIZE keyword to allow adjustable sizing of characters
           in resizeable graphics windows. 24 April 2011. DWF.
        Made sure this program only adjusts text size on devices that support
           windows. 20 July 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgdefcharsize.pro)

CGDISPLAY

The purpose of cgDisplay is to open a graphics window on the display, or in the
PostScript device, or in the Z-graphics buffer, depending upon the current graphics
device. In PostScript a window of the proper aspect ratio is created with PSWindow.
Using cgDisplay to open "windows" will allow you to more easily write device-independent
IDL programs.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Params:
pxsize: in, optional, type=integer, default=640
The X size of the graphics window created. By default, 640.
pysize: in, optional, type=integer, default=512
The Y size of the graphics window created. By default, 512.

:Keywords:
aspect, in, optional, type=float
Set this keyword to create a window with this aspect ratio (ysize/xsize).
If aspect is greater than 1, then the ysize will be used in the aspect
ratio calculation. If the aspect is less than or equal to 1, then the
xsize will be used in the aspect ratio calculation of the final window size.
If the input to the ASPECT keyword is an image, then the aspect ratio will
be calculated from the image itself.
color: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='white'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the data color. By default, 'white'.
Color names are those used with cgColor. Otherwise, the keyword is assumed
to be a color index into the current color table. The color is not used if
the "window" is opened in PostScript on the Z-graphics buffer.
force: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Because of the way cgDisplay is designed to work in many devices and in resizeable
graphics windows, it is sometimes the case that it won't create a window for you.
If you set this keyword, a graphics window will be created while in any device that
supports graphics windows.
free: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to open a window with a free or unused window index number.
This keyword applied only to graphics windows created on the computer display.
match: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
If this keyword is set, the new display window will match the size of the current
display window, if there is one.
wid: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
The window index number of the IDL graphics window to create.
window: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
Because I want to use cgDisplay everywhere, including in resizeable graphics
windows, and I don't want it opening windows then, it first checks to be sure
there are no resizeable graphics windows on the display before it creates a window.
Setting this keyword will overrule this check and create a normal IDL graphics window
on the display. This will allow you to open a normal graphics window at the same
time a resizeable graphics window exists on the display.
xsize: in, optional, type=integer, default=640
The X size of the graphics window created. By default, 640. The PXSIZE parameter
is used in preference to the XSIZE keyword value.
ysize: in, optional, type=integer, default=512
The Y size of the graphics window created. By default, 512. The PYSIZE parameter
is used in preference to the YSIZE keyword value.
_extra: in, optional, type=any
Any keywords supported by the WINDOW command are allowed.

:Examples:
Use like the IDL WINDOW command::
IDL> cgDisplay, XSIZE=500 YSIZE=400
IDL> cgDisplay, 500, 500, WID=1, COLOR='gray'

:History:
Change History::
Written, 15 November 2010. DWF.
Changes so that color variables don't change type. 23 Nov 2010. DWF.
Moved the window index argument to the WID keyword. 9 Dec 2010. DWF.
Modified to produce a window in PostScript and the Z-buffer, too. 15 Dec 2010. DWF.
Added the FREE keyword. 3 January 2011. DWF.
I made a change that allows you to call cgDisplay inside a program that is
going to be added to a cgWindow. The program will not open a graphics window
if the current graphics window ID is found in a list of cgWindow window IDs.
It is now possible to use cgDisplay in any graphics program, even those that
will be run in cgWindow. 17 Nov 2011. DWF.
Added ASPECT keyword. 18 Nov 2011. DWF.
Allowed the window ASPECT to be set with an image argument. 25 Nov 2011. DWF.
Now use Scope_Level to always create a display when cgDisplay is called from
the main IDL level. 7 Feb 2012. DWF.
Added FORCE and MATCH keywords. 16 Feb 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2010-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgdisplay.pro)

CGERASE

   Provides a device-independent and color-model-independent way to erase a graphics
   window with a particular color.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Params:
    background_color: in, optional, type=string/integer/long, default='white'
         The color to use in erasing the graphics window. Default is "white."
         Color names are those used with cgColor.

 :Keywords:
     color: in, optional, type=string/integer/long, default='white'
         An alternative way to specify the color to use in erasing the graphics window.
         Color names are those used with cgColor. This parameter is used in
         preference to the background_color parameter.
     layout: in, optional, type=intarr(3)
         This keyword specifies a grid with a graphics window and determines where the
         graphic should appear. The syntax of LAYOUT is three numbers: [ncolumns, nrows, location].
         The grid is determined by the number of columns (ncolumns) by the number of
         rows (nrows). The location of the graphic is determined by the third number. The
         grid numbering starts in the upper left (1) and goes sequentually by column and then
         by row. If this keyword is used, only this portion of the window is erased.
     window: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to erase the current cgWindow application. "Erasing" in
         this case means removing all the current commands.

 :Examples:
    Used to "erase" various things::
       IDL> cgErase
       IDL> cgErase, 'gray'
       IDL> cgErase, COLOR='charcoal'

       IDL> cgPlot, cgDemoData(1), /Window
       IDL> cgErase, /Window

       IDL> cgPlot, cgDemoData(17), Layout=[2,2,1]
       IDL> cgPlot, cgDemoData(17), Layout=[2,2,4]
       IDL> cgErase, Layout=[2,2,1]

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 12 November 2010. DWF.
        Modified so that input variables are not changed. 18 Nov 2010. DWF.
        Got my color selection algorithm right. COLOR keyword takes precedence
          over the parameter. 18 Nov 2010. DWF.
        Modified to erase in decomposed color, if possible.
        In some cases, I was turning BYTE values to strings without converting to
            INTEGERS first. 30 Dec 2010. DWF.
        Added WINDOW keyword. 26 Jan 2011. DWF.
        Added LAYOUT keyword. 1 Feb 2011. DWF.
        Modified error handler to restore the entry decomposition state if there is an error. 17 March 2011. DWF

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2010, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgerase.pro)

CGPICKFILE

   This is a utility program for selecting data files. It is a wrapper for DIALOG_PICKFILE,
   with the additional functionality of being able to "remember" the name and directory of
   the last file selected by the program. It basically allows you to start the next file
   selection from the location of the previous file selection.

 :Categories:
    Utility

 :Returns:
    The fully-qualified name of the selected file or a null string if the CANCEL
    button was selected.

 :Keywords:
     datadir: in, optional, type=string
         Set this keyword to the name of the data directory. If not set, the program
         assumes the data directory is rooted in the directory that holds this program
         file, or the directory directly above it. If it can't find a "data" directory
         in either of these two locations, the current directory is used as the "data"
         directory. The data directory is ONLY used if there is no "current" last
         directory. In other words, it is only used if cgPickfile has not been called
         in the current IDL session.
     demo: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, starts in the !DIR/examples/data directory.
     jpeg: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, starts in the "jpeg" directory. It assumes the jpeg directory is rooted
         in the "data" directory.
     hdf: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, starts in the "hdf" directory. It assumes the hdf directory is rooted
         in the "data" directory.
     last_file: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, the name of the last file opened is placed in the filename widget.
     lidar: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, starts in the "lidar" directory. It assumes the lidar directory is
         rooted in the "data" directory.
     ncdf: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, starts in the "ncdf" directory. It assumes the ncdf directory is
         rooted in the "data" directory.
     png: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, starts in the "png" directory. It assumes the png directory is
         rooted in the "data" directory.
     tiff: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If set, starts in the "tiff" directory. It assumes the tiff directory is
         rooted in the "data" directory.
     title: in, optional, type=string, default="Please Select a File"
         The title for the selection dialog window. If the `Write` keyword is set,
         the default title becomes "Please Select a File for Writing".
    write: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to change the default title to "Please Select a File for Writing".
     _ref_extra: in, optional
          Accepts any input keywords to DIALOG_PICKFILE (e.g., FILTER).

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Adapted from FSC_PICKFILE to be a Coyote Graphics routine by David W. Fanning, 4 Aug 2011.
        Added keywords TITLE and WRITE to work around a bug in Dialog_Pickfile that clips the
           input filenames. 25 Feb 2012. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgpickfile.pro)

CGPLOT

The purpose of cgPlot is to create a wrapper for the traditional IDL graphics
command, Plot. The primary purpose of this is to create plot commands that work
and look identically both on the display and in PostScript files.

Program default colors will depend on the IDL graphics window. If no windows are currently
open when the program is called, cgDisplay is used to create a window.

The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
to be installed on your machine.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Params:
x: in, required, type=any
If X is provided without Y, a vector representing the dependent values to be
plotted If both X and Y are provided, X is the independent parameter and
Y is the dependent parameter to be plotted.
y: in, optional, type=any
A vector representing the dependent values to be plotted.

:Keywords:
addcmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to add the command to the resizeable graphics window cgWindow.
aspect: in, optional, type=float, default=none
Set this keyword to a floating point ratio that represents the aspect ratio
(ysize/xsize) of the resulting plot. The plot position may change as a result
of setting this keyword. Note that `Aspect` cannot be used when plotting with
!P.MULTI.
axiscolor: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='opposite'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the axis color.
Otherwise, the keyword is assumed to be a color index into the current color table.
axescolor: in, optional, type=string/integer
Provisions for bad spellers.
background: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='background'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the background color.
Otherwise, the keyword is assumed to be a color index into the current color table.
charsize: in, optional, type=float, default=cgDefCharSize()
The character size for axes annotations. Uses cgDefCharSize to select default
character size, unless !P.Charsize is set, in which case !P.Charsize is always used.
color: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='black'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the data color. By default, 'black'.
Color names are those used with cgColor. Otherwise, the keyword is assumed
to be a color index into the current color table.
font: in, optional, type=integer, default=!P.Font
The type of font desired for axis annotation.
isotropic: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
A short-hand way of setting the `Aspect` keyword to 1.
layout: in, optional, type=intarr(3)
This keyword specifies a grid with a graphics window and determines where the
graphic should appear. The syntax of LAYOUT is three numbers: [ncolumns, nrows, location].
The grid is determined by the number of columns (ncolumns) by the number of
rows (nrows). The location of the graphic is determined by the third number. The
grid numbering starts in the upper left (1) and goes sequentually by column and then
by row.
nodata: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to draw axes, but no data.
noerase: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to draw the plot without erasing the display first.
outfilename: in, optional, type=string
If the `Output` keyword is set, the user will be asked to supply an output
filename, unless this keyword is set to a non-null string. In that case, the
value of this keyword will be used as the filename and there will be no dialog
presented to the user.
output: in, optional, type=string, default=""
Set this keyword to the type of output desired. Possible values are these::

:Examples:
Use as you would use the IDL PLOT command::
cgPlot, Findgen(11)
cgPlot, Findgen(11), Aspect=1.0
cgPlot, Findgen(11), Color='olive', AxisColor='red', Thick=2
cgPlot, Findgen(11), Color='blue', SymColor='red', PSym=-16

:History:
Change History::
Written, 12 November 2010. DWF.
Added SYMCOLOR keyword, and allow all 46 symbols from SYMCAT. 15 November 2010. DWF.
Added NODATA keyword. 15 November 2010. DWF.
Now setting decomposition state by calling SetDecomposedState. 16 November 2010. DWF.
Final color table restoration skipped in Z-graphics buffer. 17 November 2010. DWF.
Fixed a problem with overplotting with symbols. 17 November 2010. DWF.
Background keyword now applies in PostScript file as well. 17 November 2010. DWF.
Many changes after BACKGROUND changes to get !P.MULTI working again! 18 November 2010. DWF.
Fixed a small problem with the OVERPLOT keyword. 18 Nov 2010. DWF.
Changes so that color inputs don't change type. 23 Nov 2010. DWF.
Added WINDOW keyword to allow graphic to be displayed in a resizable graphics window. 8 Dec 2010. DWF
Modifications to allow cgPlot to be drop-in replacement for old PLOT commands in
indexed color mode. 24 Dec 2010. DWF.
Previous changes introduced problems with OVERPLOT that have now been fixed. 28 Dec 2010. DWF.
Set NOERASE keyword from !P.NoErase system variable when appropriate. 28 Dec 2010. DWF.
Additional problems with NOERASE discovered and solved. 29 Dec 2010. DWF.
In some cases, I was turning BYTE values to strings without converting to
INTEGERS first. 30 Dec 2010. DWF.
Selecting character size now with cgDefCharSize. 11 Jan 2011. DWF.
Moved setting to decomposed color before color selection process to avoid PostScript
background problems when passed 24-bit color integers. 12 Jan 2011. DWF.
Changed _EXTRA to _REF_EXTRA on procedure definition statement to be able to return
plot keywords such as XGET_TICKS. 13 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added SYMSIZE keyword. 16 Jan 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which I assumed the background color was a string. 18 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added ADDCMD keyword. 26 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added LAYOUT keyword. 28 Jan 2011. DWF.
Made a modification that allows THICK and COLOR keywords apply to symbols, too. 24 Feb 2011. DWF.
Modified error handler to restore the entry decomposition state if there is an error. 17 March 2011. DWF
Somehow I had gotten independent and dependent data reversed in the code. Put right. 16 May 2011. DWF.
Allowed ASPECT (and /ISOTROPIC) to take into account input POSITION. 15 June 2011. Jeremy Bailin.
Updated the BACKGROUND color selection from lessons learned in 27 Oct 2011 cgContour
corrections. 27 Oct 2011. DWF.
Added the ability to send the output directly to a file via the OUTPUT keyword. 9 Dec 2011, DWF.
PostScript, PDF, and Imagemagick parameters can now be tailored with cgWindow_SetDefs. 14 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modified to use cgDefaultColor for default color selection. 24 Dec 2011. DWF.
Over-zealous use of _STRICT_EXTRA when overplotting resulted in errors. Now use _EXTRA. 1 Jan 2012. DWF.
Changes to allow better default colors, based on changes to cgColor and cgDefaultColor. 1 Feb 2012. DWF.
Now allowing the user to draw in the "background" color, if the COLOR or AXISCOLOR is "BACKGROUND". 19 March 2012. DWF.
Scalar input parameters are changed to 1-element vectors to avoid annoying error messages from PLOT. 6 April 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2010-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgplot.pro)

CGPLOTS

The purpose of cgPlotS is to create a wrapper for the traditional IDL graphics
command, PlotS. The primary purpose of this is to create plot commands that work
and look identically both on the display and in PostScript files.

The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
to be installed on your machine.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Params:
X: in, required, type=any
A vector or scalar argument providing the X components of the points to be
drawn or connected. May be a 2xN or 3xN array, if Y and Z parameters are
not used.
Y: in, optional, type=any
A vector or scalar argument providing the Y components of the points to be
drawn or connected.
Z: in, optional, type=any
A vector or scalar argument providing the Z components of the points to be
drawn or connected.

:Keywords:
addcmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to add the command to an cgWindow display.
color: in, optional, type=string/integer, default='opposite'
If this keyword is a string, the name of the data color.
Color names are those used with cgColor. Otherwise, the keyword is assumed
to be a color index into the current color table. May be a vector of the same
length as X.
map_object: in, optional, type=object
If you are drawing on a map projection set up with Map_Proj_Init
and using projected meter space, rather than lat/lon space, then you can use this
keyword to provide a cgMap object that will allow you to convert the `x` and `y`
parameters from longitude and latitude, respectively, to projected meter space
before drawing. X and Y must both be present.
psym: in, optional, type=integer
Any normal IDL PSYM values, plus any value supported by the Coyote Library
routine SYMCAT. An integer between 0 and 46.
symcolor: in, optional, type=string/integer/vector, default=COLOR
If this keyword is a string, the name of the symbol color. By default, same as COLOR.
Otherwise, the keyword is assumed to be a color index into the current color table.
May be a vector of the same length as X.
symsize: in, optional, type=float/vector, default=1.0
A scalar or vector of symbol sizes. Default is 1.0. May be a vector of the same
length as X.
window: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to add the command to the current cgWindow application.
_extra: in, optional, type=any
Any keywords supported by the PLOTS command are allowed.

:Examples:
Use like the IDL PLOTS command::
IDL> cgPlot, Findgen(11)
IDL> cgPlotS, !X.CRange, [5,5], LINESTYLE=2, THICK=2, COLOR='red'

:History:
Change History::
Written, 12 November 2010. DWF.
Added SYMCOLOR keyword. PSYM accepts all values from SYMCAT. SYMCOLOR and SYMSIZE
keywords can be vectors the size of x. 15 November 2010. DWF
Added ability to support COLOR keyword as a vector the size of x. 15 November 2010. DWF
Now setting decomposition state by calling SetDecomposedState. 16 November 2010. DWF.
Final color table restoration skipped in Z-graphics buffer. 17 November 2010. DWF.
Changes so that color variables don't change type. 23 Nov 2010. DWF.
Modified to use decomposed color, if possible. 24 Dec 2010. DWF.
Whoops! Programming is like herding cats! 29 Dec 2010. DWF.
In some cases, I was turning BYTE values to strings without converting to
INTEGERS first. 30 Dec 2010. DWF.
Moved setting to decomposed color before color selection process to avoid PostScript
background problems when passed 24-bit color integers. 12 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added WINDOW keyword. 24 Jan 2011. DWF.
Made a modification that allows THICK and COLOR keywords apply to symbols, too. 24 Feb 2011. DWF.
Modified error handler to restore the entry decomposition state if there is an error. 17 March 2011. DWF
Fixed a problem in which the colors of the line was not accurate in some cases. 29 November 2011. DWF.
Added the MAP_OBJECT keyword for plotting on map projections. 2 Jan 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2010-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgplots.pro)

CGPS2PDF

 Converts a PostScript file to a PDF file. This program requires
 the `Ghostscript <http://www.ghostscript.com/download/>` program
 to be installed on the user's computer, unless you are using a
 Macintosh computer or an alterntive UNIX command to do the conversion
 for you. If you are on a Macintosh, the supplied pstopdf
 program is used instead. Use the `UNIX_Convert_Cmd` keyword to select
 an alternative UNIX command (e.g., pstopdf or epstopdf).

 The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
 to be installed on your machine.

 :Categories:
    Utilities, Graphics

 :Params:
     ps_file: in, required, type=string
         The name of the input PostScript file that is being converted to a PDF file.
         If not provided, the user will be asked to select a file.
     pdf_file: in, optional, type=string
         The name of the output PDF file. If not provided, the name is constructed from
         the input PostScript file name.

 :Keywords:
     delete_ps: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If this keyword is set, the PostScript file will be deleted after conversion.
     gs_path: in, optional, type=string
         This program assumes that UNIX users can access Ghostscript with the "gs"
         command. It assumes WINDOWS users have installed Ghostscript in either
         the C:\gs or C:\Program Files\gs directories. If either of these assumptions
         is incorrect, you can specify the directory where the Ghostscript executable
         resides with this keyword. (The Windows 32-bit executable is named gswin32c.exe
         and the 64-bit executable is named gswin64c.exe.)
     pagetype: in, optional, type=string, default="LETTER"
         Set this keyword to the "type" of page. Possible values are::

            "Letter" - 8.5 by 11 inches.
            "Legal" - 8.5 by 14 inches.
            "Ledger" - 11 by 17 inches.
            "A4" - 21.0 by 29.7 centimeters.

     showcmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
          Set this keyword to print the command that is spawned in the command output window.
     silent: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
          Set this keyword to suppress output messages.
     success: out, optional, type=boolean
          Set this keyword to a named variable that on output will contain a 1 to
          indicate successful completion of the command, or to 0 otherwise.
     unix_convert_cmd: in, optional, type=string
          There are a number of commands on UNIX machines for converting PostScript files
          to PDF files. This program assumes you are using Ghostscript to do the conversion
          for you. The Ghostscript command on most UNIX machines is "gs", which is used if
          this keyword is undefined. However, if you would prefer to use another program to do
          the conversion for you, you can specify the name of the command here. For example,
          "pstopdf" or "epstopdf". In creating the actual command, this command will be
          separated by a space from the input file name. In other words, if the alternative
          conversion command was "pstopdf", the actual command would be "pstopdf" + " " + ps_file.
          Any output filename is ignored. This command does not apply to Macintosh or Windows
          computers.
     version: out, optional, type=string
         On exit, contains the version of Ghostscipt that was used. Not available on Macs
         or if an alternative UNIX command was used.

 :Examples:
    A typical sequence of commands to create a test.pdf file::

       PS_Start, Filename='test.ps'
       cgHistoplot, cgDemoData(7), /Fill
       PS_End
       cgPS2PDF, 'test.ps'

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 6 December 2011, from code supplied to me by Paul Krummel. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgps2pdf.pro)

CGQUERY

   Provides information about any cgWindow applications currently on the display. Returns
   the window index numbers of any cgWindow applications current on the display.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Keywords:
     count: out, optional, type=long
         The number of cgWindow applications currently on the display.
     current: in, optional, type=boolean
         If set, the current cgWindow application information is returned in the result
         of the function and in the information keywords.
     dimensions: out, optional, type=integer
         The dimensions of the ctWindow application, [xdim, ydim, n].
     objectref: out, optional, type=object
         A vector of FSC_CMDWINDOW object references for each cgWindow application currently
         on the display.
     title: out, optional, type=string
         A vector of window titles for each cgWindow application currently on the display.
     widgetID: out, optional, type=long
         A vector of widget identifiers of the top-level base widget for each cgWindow
         application currently on the display.

 :Returns:
      windowIndexID: out, type=long
          An array of window index numbers for each cgWindow application currently on the display.

 :Examples:
    Used as a query routine::
       IDL> wids = cgQuery(TITLE=titles, COUNT=count)
       IDL> index = Where(StrUpCase(titles) EQ 'PLOT WINDOW', tcnt)
       IDL> IF tcnt GT 0 THEN cgSet, wids[index]
       IDL> cgWindow, 'Oplot', thisData, /AddCmd

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 23 January 2011. DWF.
        Added DIMENSIONS keyword to return current dimensions of cgWindows. 24 Feb 2011. DWF.
        Made sure this program only returns information on devices that support windows. 20 July 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgquery.pro)

CGSET

   Allows the user to select the cgWindow application to be the "current" application.
   Selection can be made based on window index number, widget identifier, object reference,
   or window title.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Params:
    selection: in, optional, type=varies
       Normally, a window index number of an cgWindow application. But, the selection
       can be a widget identifier, an object reference, or a window title, depending on
       which keywords are set. The cgWindow matching the selection is made the "current"
       cgWindow and the application is moved forward on the display.

 :Keywords:
     display: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
         If this keyword is set, the selection is made the "current" application,
         and then the graphics window of the application is made the current graphics
         window. If there is no selection, then the current cgWindow graphics window
         is made the current graphics window.
     object: in, optional, type=boolean
         If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be an object reference.
     title: in, optional, type=boolean
         If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be a window title. All
         matching is done in uppercase characters.
     widgetid: in, optional, type=boolean
         If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be a widget identifier.

 :Examples:
    Used with query routine::
       IDL> wids = cgQuery(TITLE=titles, COUNT=count)
       IDL> index = Where(StrUpCase(titles) EQ 'PLOT WINDOW', tcnt)
       IDL> IF tcnt GT 0 THEN cgSet, wids[index]
       IDL> cgWindow, 'Oplot', thisData, /AddCmd
       IDL> cgSet ; Bring current window forwad on display

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 23 January 2011. DWF.
        If selection match isn't provided, as like WShow to bring the current
           window forward on display. 26 Jan 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgset.pro)

CGSHOW

   Allows the user to select the cgWindow application to be the brought forward on the display.
   Selection can be made based on window index number, widget identifier, object reference,
   or window title. This is the equivalent of WShow for normal graphics windows.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Params:
    selection: in, required, type=varies
       Normally, a window index number of an cgWindow application. But, the selection
       can be a widget identifier, an object reference, or a window title, depending on
       which keywords are set. The cgWindow matching the selection is made the "current"
       cgWindow and the application is moved forward on the display.

 :Keywords:
     object: in, optional, type=boolean
         If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be an object reference.
     title: in, optional, type=boolean
         If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be a window title. All
         matching is done in uppercase characters.
     widgetid: in, optional, type=boolean
         If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be a widget identifier.

 :Examples:
    Used with query routine::
       IDL> wids = cgQuery(TITLE=titles, COUNT=count)
       IDL> index = Where(StrUpCase(titles) EQ 'PLOT WINDOW', tcnt)
       IDL> IF tcnt GT 0 THEN cgSet, wids[index]
       IDL> cgWindow, 'Oplot', thisData, /AddCmd
       IDL> cgShow ; Bring current window forwad on display

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 1 February 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgshow.pro)

CGSNAPSHOT

To get accurate screen dumps with the IDL command TVRD on 24-bit
PC and Macintosh computers, you have to be sure to set color
decomposition on. This program adds that capability automatically.
In addition, the program will optionally write BMP, GIF, JPEG,
PICT, PNG, and TIFF color image files of the screen dump.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Returns:
The returned image will be a 2D image on 8-bit systems and a 24-bit pixel
interleaved true-color image on 24-bit systems. A -1 will be returned if a
file output keyword is used (e.g., JPEG, TIFF, etc.).

:Params:
xstart: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
The starting column index of the rectantular area that is to be copied.
ystart: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
The starting row index of the rectantular area that is to be copied.
ncols: in, optional, type=integer
The number of columns to read in the rectantular area that is to be
copied. By default, !D.X_Size - xstart.
nrows: in, optional, type=integer
The number of rows to read in the rectantular area that is to be
copied. By default, !D.Y_Size - ystart.

:Keywords:
bmp: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color BMP file.
cancel: out, optional, type=boolean, default=0
An output keyword set to 1 if the user cancels out of a filename dialog.
Set to 0 otherwise.
colors: in, optional, type=integer, default=256
If a 24-bit image has to be quantized, this will set the number of colors in
the output image. Applies to BMP, GIF, PICT, and PNG formats written from
24-bit displays.(See the COLOR_QUAN documentation for details.)
cube: in, optional, type=integer
If this keyword is set to a value between 2 and 6 the color quantization will
use a cubic method of quantization. Applies to BMP, GIF, PICT, and PNG formats
written from 24-bit displays.(See the COLOR_QUAN documentation for details.)
dither: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
If this keyword is set the quantized image will be dithered. Applies to BMP,
GIF, PICT, and PNG formats written from 24-bit displays.(See the COLOR_QUAN
documentation for details.)
filename: in, optional, type=string
The name of the output file. If you specify a name with a file extension of the
type of file you want to create (e.g., *.jpg, *.png, etc), then you do not have
to use the file type keywords (e.g., JPEG, PNG, etc.). Otherwise, you can specify
the name of the the file without an extension, use the file keywords, and a file
extension will be added to the filename automatically, depending upon the type of
output file selected.
gif: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color GIF file.
jpeg: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color JPEG file.
nodialog: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if you wish to avoid the DIALOG_PICKFILE dialog that asks you
to name the output file. This keyword should be set, for example, if you are
processing screens in batch mode.
order: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to determine the image order for reading the display. Corresponds to
!Order and set to such as the default.
overwrite_prompt: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if you would like to get a prompt if you are overwriting a file.
This applies only to operations involving DIALOG_PICKFILE.
pict: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color PICT file.
png: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color PNG file.
tiff: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to write the screen dump as a color TIFF file.
true: in, optional, type=integer, default=1
Set this keyword to the type of interleaving you want. 1 = Pixel interleaved,
2 = row interleaved, 3 = band interleaved.
type: in, optional, type=string
Set this keyword to the type of file to write. Use this instead of
setting BMP, GIF, JPEG, PICT, PNG, or TIFF keywords: TYPE='JPEG'. The
primary purpose of this is to make widget event handlers easier to write.
quality: in, optional, type=integer, default=75
This keyword sets the amount of compression for JPEG images. It should be set to a
value between 0 and 100. (See the WRITE_JPEG documentation for details.)
wid: in, optional, type=integer
The index number of the window to read from. The current graphics window
(!D.Window) is selected by default. An error is issued if no windows are
currently open on a device that supports windows.
_ref_extra: in, optional
Any keywords that are appropriate for the WRITE_*** routines are also accepted via
keyword inheritance.

:Examples:
To obtain an image of the current graphics window::

IDL> image = cgSnapshot()

To create a PNG file, named "test.png", of the current graphics window::

IDL> void = cgSnapshot(FILENAME='test.png')

To obtain the lower quadrant of a 512-by-512 graphics window as a
band interleaved image::

IDL> image = cgSnapshot(0, 0, 256, 256, TRUE=3)

:History:
Change History::
Renamed TVRead to cgSnapshot and retired TVRead. 20 February 2011. DWF.
Added the ability to get the file type from the file name extension. 26 Dec 2011. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgsnapshot.pro)

CGTEXT

Provides a device-independent and color-model-independent way to write text into
a graphics window. It is a wrapper to the XYOUTS command.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Params:
xloc: in, required, type=depends
The X location of the text.
yloc: in, required, type=depends
The Y location of the text.
text: in, optional, type=string
The text to output. By default, the calling sequence of the program.

:Examples:
Used like the IDL XYOUTS command::
IDL> cgText, 0.5, 0.5, 'This is sample text', ALIGNMENT=0.5, /NORMAL
IDL> cgText, /PLACE, 'Use the cursor to locate this text', COLOR='dodger blue'

:History:
Change History::
Written, 19 November 2010. DWF.
Corrected a problem with setting text color and added PLACE and OUTLOC
keywords. 25 Nov 2010. DWF.
Humm, that text color problem got reset to the old way! Sheesh! Fixed. 9 Dec 2010. DWF.
Modified the way the default color is selected. Drawing with DECOMPOSED
if possible. 30 Dec 2010. DWF.
Keywords collected with _REF_EXTRA so WIDTH can be returned. Added WIDTH keyword. 6 Jan 2011. DWF.
Moved setting to decomposed color before color selection process to avoid PostScript
background problems when passed 24-bit color integers. 12 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added Window keyword. 24 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added ability to return WIDTH from resizeable graphics windows and added ADDCMD
keyword. 24 Feb 2011. DWF.
Modified error handler to restore the entry decomposition state if there is an error. 17 March 2011. DWF
Modified to allow the user to place the text in a resizeable graphics window. 13 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modified to use cgDefaultColor for default color selection. 24 Dec 2011. DWF.
Modifications to the way I obtain the WIDTH when adding the command to a cgWindow. 26 Jan 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2010, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgtext.pro)

CGWINDOW[1]

Creates a resizeable graphics window for IDL traditional commands (Plot, Contour,
Surface, etc. or for Coyote Graphics routines, `cgPlot`, `cgContour`, `cgSurf`, etc.).
In addition, the window contents can be saved as PostScript, PDF, or raster image
files. If ImageMagick is installed on your machine, the raster image files can be
created in very high quality from PostScript files.

The program is designed to work with any IDL traditional graphics routine
that is a procedure and includes no more than three positional parameters.
Any number of keywords can be used to specify properties of the graphical
output. Any number of graphics commands can be "added" the the cgWindow.
Simply use the `AddCmd` keyword to add commands.

If your program does not load its own color tables, the color tables in
effect when cgWindow is first called are used to display the graphics
commands.

To create PostScript output from within cgWindow, your graphics program
has to be written in such a way that it can work properly in the PostScript
device. This means there are no Window commands, WSet commands, and the like
that are not allowed in the PostScript device. Such commands are allowed in
programs, of course, if they are "protected". Usually such protection looks
like this::

IF (!D.Flags AND 256) NE 0 THEN Window, ...

The Coyote Graphics program `cgDisplay` is a good program for opening graphics
"windows", because such PostScript protection is built into the program. In a PostScript
device, cgDisplay produces a "window" with the same aspect ratio as the current
display graphics window, which is an aid in producing PostScript output that
looks like the same output in the display window.

Much better looking raster files can be created from the cgWindow contents,
if the raster files are created by converting PostScript files to the raster
file. If the ImageMagick "convert" command can be found on your machine, you
will have the option to create raster files using this method. I *highly*
recommend doing so, as fonts and other plot annotation will be of much higher
quality using this method.

cgWindow has been designed to work with other Coyote Graphics routines: `cgPlot`,
`cgContour`, `cgSurf`, and so on, although I expect it to work with any IDL
traditional graphics routine, if the routine is well written.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgwindow.pro)

CGWINDOW[2]

Creates a resizeable graphics window for IDL traditional commands (Plot, Contour,
Surface, etc. or for Coyote Graphics routines, cgPlot, cgContour, cgSurf, etc.).
In addition, the window contents can be saved as PostScript files or as raster image
files. If ImageMagick is installed on your machine, the raster image files can be
created in very high quality from PostScript files.

:Params:
command: in, required, type=string
The graphics procedure command to be executed. This parameter
must be a string and the the command must be a procedure. Examples
are 'Surface', 'Contour', 'Plot', 'cgPlot', cgContour, etc.
p1: in, optional, type=any
The first positional parameter appropriate for the graphics command.
p2: in, optional, type=any
The second positional parameter appropriate for the graphics command.
p3: in, optional, type=any
The third positional parameter appropriate for the graphics command.
p4: in, optional, type=any
The fourth positional parameter appropriate for the graphics command.

:Keywords:
addcmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to add an additional graphics command to an cgWindow.
The command is added to the last created cgWindow, unless the WinID
keyword is used to select another cgWindow. Adding a command causes
all the commands in the window to be immediately executed. If this is
not behavior you desire, use the LOADCMD keyword instead. If CMDINDEX
is used to select a command index, the new command is added before
the command currently occuping that index in the command list.
altps_Keywords: in, optional, type=string
A structure containing alternative keyword names (as tags) and values for
those keywords to be used when the current device is the PostScript device.
See http://www.idlcoyote.com/cg_tips/kwexpressions.php and the examples
below for details on how to use this keyword.
altps_Params: in, optional, type=IntArr(3)
A structure containing alternative parameter values to be used when
the current device is the PostScript device. Structure names are restricted
to the names "P1", "P2", "P3" and "P4" to correspond to the equivalent positional
parameter. See http://www.idlcoyote.com/cg_tips/kwexpressions.php and the
examples below for details on how to use this keyword.
cmddelay: in, optional, type=float
If this keyword is set to a value other than zero, there will be a
delay of this many seconds between command execution. This will permit
"movies" of command sequences to be displayed.
cmdindex: in, optional, type=integer
This keyword is used to select which command in an cgWindow to act on
when the AllCmd, DeleteCmd, LoadCmd and ReplaceCmd keywords are used.
See the descriptions of these keywords for details on what happens when
CmdIndex is missing.
deletecmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to delete a graphics command from an cgWindow.
If CmdIndex is undefined the last command entered into the window is
deleted. It is not possible to delete the last command in the window.
Use WinID to identify the cgWindow you are interested in. If WinID
is undefined, the last cgWindow created is used.
executecmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to immediate execute all the commands in an cgWindow.
Normally, this is used after commands have been loaded with LOADCMD.
group_leader: in, optional
The identifier of a widget to serve as a group leader for this program.
If the group leader is destroyed, this program is also destroyed. Used
when calling this program from another widget program.
listcmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
If this keyword is set, the commands currently in the cgWindow are
listed. Use WinID to identify the cgWindow you are interested in.
If WinID is undefined, the last cgWindow created is used.
loadcmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to add an additional graphics command to an cgWindow.
The command is added to the last created cgWindow, unless the WinID
keyword is used to select another cgWindow. Loaded commands are not
automatically executed. Set the EXECUTECMD keyword at the end of loading
to execute the loaded commands. If CMDINDEX is used to select a command
index, the new command is loaded before the command currently occuping
that index in the command list.
method: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if the command is an object method call rather than a
procedure call. If this keyword is set, the first positional parameter, p1,
must be present and must be a valid object reference.
replacecmd: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to replace a graphics command from an cgWindow.
If CmdIndex is undefined, *all* commands in the window are replaced. Use
WinID to identify the cgWindow you are interested in. If WinID is
undefined, the last cgWindow created is used for the replacement.
waspect: in, optional, type=float, default=normal
Set this keyword to the aspect ratio you would like the window to have.
The aspect ratio is calculated as (ysize/xsize). Must be a float value.
If this keyword is set, the window will maintain this aspect ratio,
even when it is resized.
wbackground: in, optional, type=varies, default=!P.Background
The background color of the window. Specifying a background color
automatically sets the WErase keyword.
werase: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to cause the window to be erased before graphics commands
are drawn. This may need to be set, for example, to display images.
winid: in, optional, type=integer
Use this keyword to select the window cgWindow identifier (the number between
the parentheses in the title bar of cgWindow). The AddCmd, ReplaceCmd, ListCmd,
and DeleteCmd keywords will all apply to the commands in the last cgWindow
created unless this keyword is used to select another cgWindow to apply the
commands to.
wmulti: in, optional, type=intarr(5)
Set this keyword in exactly the same way you would set the !P.Multi keyword.
It will allow you to display multi-plots in the cgWindow graphics window.
wobject: out, optional, type=object
cgWindow creates a FSC_CmdWindow object. This object reference is returned
if this keyword is present.
woxmargin: in, optional, type=float
A two-element array indicating the left and right X outside margins for the
graphical display. Used only when doing multiple plots with `WMulti`.
woymargin: in, optional, type=float
A two-element array indicating the bottom and top Y outside margins for the
graphical display. Used only when doing multiple plots with `WMulti`.
wxpos: in, optional, type=integer, default=5
The x offset in device coordinates of the cgWindow from the upper-left corner of the display.
wypos: in, optional, type=integer, default=5
The y offset in device coordinates of the cgWindow from the upper-left corner of the display.
wxsize: in, optional, type=integer, default=640
The x size in device coordinates of the graphics window.
wysize: in, optional, type=integer, default=5
The y size in device coordinates of the the graphics window.
wtitle: in, optional, type=string, default='Resizeable Graphics Window'
The title of the graphics window. A window index number is appended to the
title so multiple cgWindow programs can be selected.

:Examples:
Test code::
data = cgDemoData(17)
cgWindow, 'cgPlot', data, COLOR='red'
cgWindow, 'cgPlot', data, PSYM=2, /Overplot, COLOR='dodger blue', /AddCmd
cgWIndow, 'cgPlot', cgDemoData(17), color='olive', linestyle = 2, /Overplot, /AddCmd
cgWindow, /ListCmd
cgWindow, 'cgPlot', data, COLOR='purple', /ReplaceCMD, CMDINDEX=0

Additional examples can be found here::

http://www.idlcoyote.com/graphics_tips/cgwindow.html

Example using different keyword parameters for the display and PostScript output::

IDL> cgPlot, cgDemoData(1), /WINDOW, $
THICK=1.0, XTITLE='Distance (' + Greek('mu') + 'm)', $
ALTPS_KEYWORDS={THICK:4.0, XTITLE:'Distance (' + Greek('mu', /PS) + 'm)'}

Example using different positional parameters::

IDL> cgText, 0.20, 0.85, /Normal, 'Line of Text', ALIGNMENT=0.0, $
ALTPS_KEYWORDS={ALIGNMENT:1.0}, ALTPS_PARAMS={P1:0.88}, /ADDCMD

Additional examples can be found here::

http://www.idlcoyote.com/cg_tips/kwexpressions.php

:History:
Change History::
Written, 17 January 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem with the example code, and added EMPTY to end of Draw method
to force UNIX machines to empty the graphics buffer after CALL_PROCEDURE. 20 Jan 2011. DWF.
Improved documentation and error handling. 19 Jan 2011. DWF.
More improved error handling and messages. 26 Jan 2011. DWF.
Made changes to accommodate the new cgControl routine. 27 Jan 2011. DWF.
Added WXOMARGIN and WYOMARGIN keywords. 28 Jan 2011. DWF.
Numerous changes leading up to official release. 4 Feb 2011. DWF.
Added workaround for UNIX bug for draw widget creation. 5 Feb 2011. DWF.
Corrected a window aspect ratio problem with PostScript output by making the
window the current window before calling PS_Start. 17 Feb 2011. DWF.
Added machinery for programmatically generating raster files. 18 Feb 2011. Jeremy Bailin.
Problem with restoring visualizations fixed. 6 March 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem with CALL_METHOD, which requires one positional parameter. 8 March 2011. DWF.
Added the ability to set and unset adjustable text size in the window. 24 April 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem in the ReplaceCommand method that had input parameters reversed. 6 May 2011. DWF.
Added the ability to set the dimensions of the draw widget programmatically. 14 June 2011.
Added the keywords EvalKeywords and EvalParams to allow evaluation of command parameters and
keywords at run-time. See http://www.idlcoyote.com/cg_tips/kwexpressions.php for
additional details and explanations of how these keywords should be used. 2 Aug 2011.
Problem dereferencing a null pointer in DRAW method fixed. 3 Aug 2011. DWF.
Changes to handle inability to create raster files from PS encapsulated files in
landscape mode. 26 Aug 2011. DWF.
Added ability to set PostScript color mode. 30 Aug 2011. DWF.
The method I was using for evaluating keyword and argument parameters at run-time
was just WAY too complicated and difficult to use. I have eliminated this
method (along with the EvalKeywords and EvalParams) in favor of a method that
allows the user to supply alternative values to use in the PostScript device.
This uses keywords AltPS_Keywords and AltPS_Params to collect these alternative
arguments in structures that can be used at run-time to supply alternative values.
As before, this is explained in detail at http://www.idlcoyote.com/cg_tips/kwexpressions.php.
1 Sept 2011. DWF.
Missed a couple of places to set decomposition color mode. 7 Sept 2011. DWF.
Fixed a problem with improper filename when creating raster file vis
Imagemagick via cgControl. 10 Oct 2011. DWF.
Added WASPECT keyword to allow window aspect ratio to be set. 9 Nov 2011. DWF.
Added PDF file to the Save As menu. Requires Ghostscript to be installed on some machines. 6 Dec 2011. DWF.
Added modifications to allow PDF files to be programmatically created from cgControl. 11 Dec 2011. DWF.
Added the ability to specify a fourth positional parameter. 6 Jan 2012. DWF.
Separated off the cgCmdWindow part of the code to make an object-widget draw widget. 19 Jan 2012. DWF.
Fixed a small type with the Outside Margin keywords that was preventing these from being used. 19 April 2012. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgwindow.pro)

CGWINDOW_GETDEFS

   Allows the user to get the global defaults for resizeable cgWindow programs.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Keywords:
     adjustsize: out, optional, type=boolean
         If set, adjust the default text size to match the display window size.
     aspect: out, optional, type=float
         The aspect ratio of the window.
     background: out, optional, type=string
         The background color of the window.
     delay: out, optional, type=float
          The amount of delay between command execution.
     eraseit: out, optional, type=boolean
         The Erase status of the window.
     im_density: out, optional, type=integer
         The sampling density.
     im_png8: out, optional, type=boolean
         If set, ImageMagick will create 8-bit PNG files, rather than 24-bit.
     im_options: out, optional, type=string
         Current ImageMagick convert options.
     im_raster: out, optional, type=boolean
         The raster via ImageMagick setting.
     im_resize: out, optional, type=integer
         The amount PostScript output is resized.
     im_transparent: out, optional, type=boolean
         The transparent background setting.
     im_width: out, optional, type=integer
         The final width of ImageMagick raster file output.
     multi: out, optional, type=Intarr(5)
         The !P.MULTI setting for the window.
     palette: out, optional, type=byte
         The window color palette.
     pdf_path: out, optional, type=string
         The name of the path to the Ghostscript command for converting PS to PDF.
     pdf_unix_convert_cmd: out, optional, type=string
         The name of an alternative UNIX command to convert PostScript to PDF.
     ps_charsize: out, optional, type=float, default=0.0
         The PostScript character size.
     ps_decomposed: out, optional, type=boolean
         The PostScript decomposed status of the window.
     ps_delete: out, optional, type=boolean
         The delete PostScript file status of the window.
     ps_encapsulated: out, optional, type=boolean
          The PostScript encapsulated status of the window.
     ps_font: out, optional, type=integer
          The font being using for PostScript output.
     ps_metric: out, optional, type=boolean
          The metric status of the window.
     ps_quiet: out, optional, type=boolean
          Set to one of the QUIET keyword is set on PSConfig.
     ps_scale_factor: out, optional, type=float
          The PostScript scale factor.
     ps_tt_font: out, optional, type=string
          The name of the PostScript true-type font in current use.
     title: out, optional, type=boolean
         The window title.
     xomargin: out, optional, type=intarr(2)
         The !X.OMargin value for multiplots.
     xpos: out, optional, type=integer
         The X offset of the window from the upper-left corner of the display.
     xsize: out, optional, type=integer
         The starting X size of the window.
     yomargin: out, optional, type=intarr(2)
         The !Y.OMargin value for multiplots.
     ypos: out, optional, type=integer
         The Y offset of the window from the upper-left corner of the display.
     ysize: out, optional, type=integer
         The starting Y size of the window.

 :Examples:
    Used to get cgWindow global properties::
       IDL> cgWindow_GetDefs, PALETTE=palette, PS_ENCAPSULATED=encap, PS_METRIC=metric

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 29 January 2011. DWF.
        Added PS_QUIET keyword. 17 Feb 2011. DWF.
        Added Raster_IM.  18 Feb 2011. Jeremy Bailin
        Added the ability to set and unset adjustable text size in
          cgWindow with ADJUSTSIZE keyword. 24 April 2011. DWF.
        Added PS_DECOMPOSED keyword to allow getting/setting of PostScript decomposed
          value. 30 Aug 2011. DWF.
        Added ASPECT keyword to allow getting/setting of window aspect ratio. 18 Nov 2011. DWF.
        Added PDF_UNIX_CONVERT_CMD and PDF_PATH keywords. 7 Dec 2011. DWF.
        Added IM_WIDTH keyword. 3 April 2012. DWF.
        Added IM_PNG8 keyword. 3 April 2012. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgwindow_getdefs.pro)

CGWINDOW_SETDEFS

Allows the user to set global defaults for resizeable cgWindow programs.

:Categories:
Graphics

:Keywords:
adjustsize: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to have the default text size adjusted to fit the size of the
display window.
aspect: in, optional, type=float, default=0.0
Set the aspect ratio of the window. If set to 0, the normal "default" window
aspect ratio is used and nothing special is done when the window is resize.
If aspect is not 0, then the window is confined to this aspect ratio.
background: in, optional, type=string
The background color of the window. Only use if the ERASEIT property is also set.
delay: in, optional, type=float, default=0
Set this keyword to the amount of delay desired between command execution. 0
eraseit: in, optional, type=boolean
If this property is set, the cgWindow erases with the background color before
displaying the commands in the window's command list.
im_density: in, optional, type=integer, default=300
Set this keyword to the sampling density when ImageMagick creates raster image
file from PostScript outout.
im_options: in, optional, type=string, default=""
Set this keyword to any ImageMagick options you would like to pass along to the
ImageMagick convert command when creating raster image files from PostScript output.
im_raster: in, optional, type=boolean, default=1 (if ImageMagick is found)
When raster files are created programmatically, this keyword determines if the
raster file is created directly in IDL (value =0) or is created from a PostScript
intermediate file via ImageMagick (value =1). The default is via ImageMagick if the
convert program can be found on the machine running the program.
im_resize: in, optional, type=integer, default=25
Set this keyword to percentage that the raster image file created my ImageMagick
from PostScript output should be resized.
im_transparent: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to allow ImageMagick to create transparent backgrounds when it
makes raster image files from PostScript output.
im_width: in, optional, type=integer
Set this keyword to the width of the output raster file in pixel units. The height of the raster
file is set to preserve the aspect ratio of the output image. Applies only to raster images (eg
PNG, JPEG, TIFF, etc.) created from PostScript files with ImageMagick.
multi: in, optional, type=Intarr(5)
Set this keyword to the !P.MULTI setting you want to use for the window.
!P.MULTI is set to this setting before command execution, and set back to
it's default value when the commands are finished executing.
palette: in, optional, type=byte
Use this keyword to pass in an N-by-3 (or 3-by-N) byte array containing the
R, G, and B vectors of a color table. It is probably easier to use cgLoadCT or
XCOLORS to load color tables for the window, but this is provided as another option.
pdf_path: out, optional, type=string
Set this keyword to the name of the path to the Ghostscript command for converting PS to PDF.
pdf_unix_convert_cmd: out, optional, type=string
Set this keyword to the name of an alternative UNIX command to convert PostScript to PDF.
ps_charsize: in, optional, type=float, default=0.0
Set this value to the !P.Charsize value to use when creating PostScript output. This
value is not used if !P.Charsize is set to anything other than 0.0.
ps_decomposed: in, optional, type=boolean
If set, use decomposed color in the PostScript device.
ps_delete: in, optional, type=boolean, default=1
Set this keyword to zero if you want to keep the PostScript output ImageMagick creates
when making raster file output.
ps_encapsulated: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to configure PSCONFIG to produce encapsulated PostScript output by default.
ps_font: in, optional, type=integer, default=0
Set this to the !P.Font value to use for creating PostScript files.
ps_metric: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to configure PSCONFIG to use metric values and A4 page size in its interface.
ps_quiet: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to suppress output messages from PS_Start and PS_End.
ps_scale_factor: in, optional, type=float, default=1.0
Set this keyword to the PostScript scale factor you want to use for PostScript output.
ps_tt_font: in, optional, type=string, default="Helvetica"
Set this keyword to the name of the PostScript true-type font to use for PostScript output.
Not used, unless !P.Font=1.
reset: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to reset all values to their default values.
title: in, optional, type=boolean
If this keyword is set, the selection is assumed to be a window title. All
matching is done in uppercase characters.
xomargin: in, optional, type=intarr(2)
Set this keyword to set !X.OMargin to this value for multiplots.
xpos: in, optional, type=integer
Set this keyword to the X offset of the window from the upper-left corner of the display.
xsize: in, optional, type=integer, default=640
Set this keyword to the starting X size of the window.
yomargin: in, optional, type=intarr(2)
Set this keyword to set !Y.OMargin to this value for multiplots.
ypos: in, optional, type=integer
Set this keyword to the Y offset of the window from the upper-left corner of the display.
ysize: in, optional, type=integer, default=512
Set this keyword to the starting Y size of the window.

:Examples:
Used to set cgWindow global properties::
IDL> cgLoadCT, 5, RGB_TABLE=palette
IDL> cgWindow_SetDefs, PALETTE=palette, $
ERASEIT=1, XSIZE=800, YSIZE=400, XPOS=100, YPOS=200, $
PS_ENCAPSULATED=1, PS_METRIC=1
IDL> cgImage, cgDemoData(7), /WINDOW, MARGIN=0.1

:History:
Change History::
Written, 29 January 2011. DWF.
Small bug fixes, and addition of PS_QUIET keyword. 17 Feb 2011. DWF.
Added Raster_IM, 18 February 2011. Jeremy Bailin.
Added the ability to set and unset adjustable text size in
cgWindow with ADJUSTSIZE keyword. 24 April 2011. DWF.
Added PS_DECOMPOSED keyword to set the PostScript color mode. 30 Aug 2011. DWF.
Added ASPECT keyword to allow getting/setting of window aspect ratio. 18 Nov 2011. DWF.
Added PDF_UNIX_CONVERT_CMD and PDF_PATH keywords. 7 Dec 2011. DWF.
Added IM_WIDTH keyword. 3 April 2012. DWF.
Added IM_PNG8 keyword. 3 April 2012. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/cgwindow_setdefs.pro)

CHECKSUM32

 NAME:
       CHECKSUM32

 PURPOSE:
       To compute the 32bit checksum of an array (ones-complement arithmetic)

 EXPLANATION:
       The 32bit checksum is adopted in the FITS Checksum convention
       http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/docs/heasarc/fits/checksum.html

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       CHECKSUM32, array, checksum, [/FROM_IEEE, /NoSAVE]

 INPUTS:
       array - any numeric idl array.  If the number of bytes in the array is
               not a multiple of four then it is padded with zeros internally
               (the array is returned unchanged).   Convert a string array
               (e.g. a FITS header) to bytes prior to calling CHECKSUM32.

 OUTPUTS:
       checksum - unsigned long scalar, giving sum of array elements using
                  ones-complement arithmetic
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:

      /FROM_IEEE - If this keyword is set, then the input is assumed to be in
           big endian format (e.g. an untranslated FITS array).   This keyword
           only has an effect on little endian machines (e.g. Linux boxes).

      /NoSAVE - if set, then the input array is not saved upon exiting.   Use
           the /NoSave keyword to save time if the input array is not needed
           in further computations.
 METHOD:
       Uses TOTAL() to sum the array into a double precision variable.  The
       overflow bits beyond 2^32 are then shifted back to the least significant
       bits.    Due to the limited precision of a DOUBLE variable, the summing
       is done in chunks determined by MACHAR(). Adapted from FORTRAN code in
      heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/docs/heasarc/ofwg/docs/general/checksum/node30.html

      Could probably be done in a cleverer way (similar to the C
      implementation) but then the array-oriented TOTAL() function could not
      be used.
 RESTRICTIONS:
       (1) Not valid for object or pointer data types
 EXAMPLE:
       Find the 32 bit checksum of the array x = findgen(35)

       IDL> checksum32, x, s    ===> s =  2920022024
 FUNCTION CALLED:
       HOST_TO_IEEE, IS_IEEE_BIG(), N_BYTES()
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written    W. Landsman          June 2001
       Work correctly on little endian machines, added /FROM_IEEE and /NoSave
                  W. Landsman          November 2002
       Pad with zeros when array size not a multiple of 4 W.Landsman Aug 2003
       Always copy to new array, somewhat slower but more robust algorithm
           especially for Linux boxes   W. Landsman Sep. 2004
       Sep. 2004 update not implemented correctly (sigh) W. Landsman Dec 2004
       No need to byteswap 4 byte datatypes on little endian W. L. May 2009
       Use /INTEGER keyword to TOTAL() function W.L. June 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/checksum32.pro)

CHECK_FITS

 NAME:
       CHECK_FITS
 PURPOSE:
       Check that keywords in a FITS header array match the associated data
 EXPLANATION:
       Given a FITS array IM, and a associated FITS header HDR, this
       procedure will check that
               (1) HDR is a string array, and IM is defined and numeric
               (2) The NAXISi values in HDR are appropriate to the dimensions
                   of IM
               (3) The BITPIX value in HDR is appropriate to the datatype of IM
       If the /UPDATE keyword is present, then the FITS header will be
       modified, if necessary, to force agreement with the image array

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       check_FITS, im, hdr, [ dimen, idltype, /UPDATE, /NOTYPE, /SILENT
                              ERRMSG = ]'

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
       IM -  FITS array, e.g. as read by READFITS
       HDR - FITS header (string array) associated with IM

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
       dimen - vector containing actual array dimensions
       idltype- data type of the FITS array as specified in the IDL SIZE
               function (1 for BYTE, 2 for INTEGER*2, 3 for INTEGER*4, etc.)

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
       /NOTYPE - If this keyword is set, then only agreement of the array
               dimensions with the FITS header are checked, and not the
               data type.
       /UPDATE - If this keyword is set then the BITPIX, NAXIS and NAXISi
               FITS keywords will be updated to agree with the array
       /FITS, /SDAS -  these are obsolete keywords that now do nothing
       /SILENT - If keyword is set and nonzero, the informational messages
               will not be printed
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUT:
       ERRMSG  = If this keyword is present, then any error messages will be
                 returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                 depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
                 encountered, then a null string is returned.

 PROCEDURE:
       Program checks the NAXIS and NAXISi keywords in the header to
       see if they match the image array dimensions, and checks whether
       the BITPIX keyword agrees with the array type.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       FXADDPAR, FXPAR(), SXDELPAR
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, December 1991  W. Landsman Hughes/STX to replace CHKIMHD
       No error returned if NAXIS=0 and IM is a scalar   W. Landsman  Feb 93
       Fixed bug for REAL*8 STSDAS data W. Landsman July 93
       Make sure NAXIS agrees with NAXISi  W. Landsman  October 93
        Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Allow unsigned data types   W. Landsman December 1999
       Allow BZERO = 0 for unsigned data types   W. Landsman January 2000
       Added ERRMSG keyword, W. Landsman February 2000
       Use FXADDPAR to put NAXISi in proper order   W. Landsman August 2000
       Improper FXADDPAR call for DATATYPE keyword  W. Landsman December 2000
       Remove explicit setting of obsolete !err W. Landsman February 2004
       Remove SDAS support   W. Landsman       November 2006
       Fix dimension errors introduced Nov 2006
       Work again for null arrays W. Landsman/E. Hivon May 2007
       Use V6.0 notation  W.L.  Feb. 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/check_fits.pro)

CIC

 NAME:
       CIC

 PURPOSE:
       Interpolate an irregularly sampled field using Cloud in Cell method

 EXPLANATION:
       This function interpolates an irregularly sampled field to a
       regular grid using Cloud In Cell (nearest grid point gets
       weight 1-dngp, point on other side gets weight dngp, where
       dngp is the distance to the nearest grid point in units of the
       cell size).

 CATEGORY:
       Mathematical functions, Interpolation

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Result = CIC, VALUE, POSX, NX[, POSY, NY, POSZ, NZ,
                     AVERAGE = average, WRAPAROUND =  wraparound,
                     ISOLATED = isolated, NO_MESSAGE = no_message]

 INPUTS:
       VALUE: Array of sample weights (field values). For e.g. a
              temperature field this would be the temperature and the
              keyword AVERAGE should be set. For e.g. a density field
              this could be either the particle mass (AVERAGE should
              not be set) or the density (AVERAGE should be set).
       POSX:  Array of X coordinates of field samples, unit indices: [0,NX>.
       NX:    Desired number of grid points in X-direction.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
      POSY: Array of Y coordinates of field samples, unit indices: [0,NY>.
      NY:   Desired number of grid points in Y-direction.
      POSZ: Array of Z coordinates of field samples, unit indices: [0,NZ>.
      NZ:   Desired number of grid points in Z-direction.

 KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       AVERAGE:    Set this keyword if the nodes contain field samples
                   (e.g. a temperature field). The value at each grid
                   point will then be the weighted average of all the
                   samples allocated to it. If this keyword is not
                   set, the value at each grid point will be the
                   weighted sum of all the nodes allocated to it
                   (e.g. for a density field from a distribution of
                   particles). (D=0).
       WRAPAROUND: Set this keyword if you want the first grid point
                   to contain samples of both sides of the volume
                   (see below).
       ISOLATED:   Set this keyword if the data is isolated, i.e. not
                   periodic. In that case total `mass' is not conserved.
                   This keyword cannot be used in combination with the
                   keyword WRAPAROUND.
       NO_MESSAGE: Suppress informational messages.

 Example of default allocation of nearest grid points: n0=4, *=gridpoint.

     0   1   2   3     Index of gridpoints
     *   *   *   *     Grid points
   |---|---|---|---|   Range allocated to gridpoints ([0.0,1.0> --> 0, etc.)
   0   1   2   3   4   posx

 Example of ngp allocation for WRAPAROUND: n0=4, *=gridpoint.

   0   1   2   3         Index of gridpoints
   *   *   *   *         Grid points
 |---|---|---|---|--     Range allocated to gridpoints ([0.5,1.5> --> 1, etc.)
   0   1   2   3   4=0   posx


 OUTPUTS:
       Prints that a CIC interpolation is being performed of x
       samples to y grid points, unless NO_MESSAGE is set.

 RESTRICTIONS:
       Field data is assumed to be periodic with the sampled volume
       the basic cell, unless ISOLATED is set.
       All input arrays must have the same dimensions.
       Postition coordinates should be in `index units' of the
       desired grid: POSX=[0,NX>, etc.
       Keywords ISOLATED and WRAPAROUND cannot both be set.

 PROCEDURE:
       Nearest grid point is determined for each sample.
       CIC weights are computed for each sample.
       Samples are interpolated to the grid.
       Grid point values are computed (sum or average of samples).
 NOTES:
       Use tsc.pro for a higher-order interpolation scheme, ngp.pro for a lower
       order interpolation scheme.    A standard reference for these
       interpolation methods is:   R.W. Hockney and J.W. Eastwood, Computer
       Simulations Using Particles (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1981).
 EXAMPLE:
       nx=20
       ny=10
       posx=randomu(s,1000)
       posy=randomu(s,1000)
       value=posx^2+posy^2
       field=cic(value,posx*nx,nx,posy*ny,ny,/average)
       surface,field,/lego

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Joop Schaye, Feb 1999.
       Avoid integer overflow for large dimensions P.Riley/W.Landsman Dec. 1999

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/cic.pro)

CIRRANGE

 NAME:
       CIRRANGE
 PURPOSE:
       To force an angle into the range 0 <= ang < 360.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       CIRRANGE, ang, [/RADIANS]

 INPUTS/OUTPUT:
       ang     - The angle to modify, in degrees.  This parameter is
                 changed by this procedure.  Can be a scalar or vector.
                 The type of ANG is always converted to double precision
                 on output.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /RADIANS - If present and non-zero, the angle is specified in
                 radians rather than degrees.  It is forced into the range
                 0 <= ang < 2 PI.
 PROCEDURE:
       The angle is transformed between -360 and 360 using the MOD operator.
       Negative values (if any) are then transformed between 0 and 360
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Michael R. Greason, Hughes STX, 10 February 1994.
       Get rid of WHILE loop, W. Landsman, Hughes STX, May 1996
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/cirrange.pro)

CLEANPLOT

 NAME:
       CLEANPLOT
 PURPOSE:
       Reset all plotting system variables (!P,!X,!Y,!Z) to their default values
 EXPLANATION:
       Reset all system variables (!P,!X,!Y,!Z) which are set by the user
       and which affect plotting to their default values.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Cleanplot, [ /Silent, /ShowOnly]

 INPUTS:
       None

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       /SHOWONLY - If set, then CLEANPLOT will display the plotting system
                 variables with nondefault values, but it will not reset them.

       /SILENT - If set, then CLEANPLOT will not display a message giving the
                 the system variables tags being reset.    One cannot set
                  both /SILENT and /SHOWONLY
 OUTPUTS:
       None

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       The system variables that concern plotting are reset to their default
       values.  A message is output for each variable changed.
       The !P.CLIP and CRANGE, S, WINDOW, and REGION fields of the
       !X, !Y, and !Z system variables are not checked since these are
       set by the graphics device and not by the user.

 PROCEDURE:
       This does NOT reset the plotting device.
       This does not change any system variables that don't control plotting.

 RESTRICTIONS:
       If user default values for !P, !X, !Y and !Z are different from
       the defaults adopted below, user should change P_old etc accordingly

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written IDL Version 2.3.0  W. Landsman & K. Venkatakrishna May '92
       Handle new system variables in V3.0.0     W. Landsman   Dec 92
       Assume user has at least V3.0.0           W. Landsman   August 95
       V5.0 has 60 instead of 30 TICKV values    W. Landsman   Sep. 97
       Change !D.N_COLORS to !D.TABLE_SIZE for 24 bit displays
               W. Landsman  April 1998
       Added silent keyword to supress output & modified X_old to
       handle the new !X and !Y tags in IDL 5.4   S. Penton     July 2000
       Test for visual depth if > V5.1   W. Landsman     July 2000
       Macs can report a visual depth of 32  W. Landsman  March 2001
       Call device,get_visual_depth only for device which allow it
                W. Landsman  June 2001
       Default !P.color is 16777215 for 16 bit systems
                       W. Landsman/M. Hadfield   November 2001
       Added ShowOnly keyword   W. Landsman      April 2002
       Use V6.0 notation W. Landsman April 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/plot/cleanplot.pro)

CNTRD

  NAME:
       CNTRD
  PURPOSE:
       Compute the centroid  of a star using a derivative search
 EXPLANATION:
       CNTRD uses an early DAOPHOT "FIND" centroid algorithm by locating the
       position where the X and Y derivatives go to zero.   This is usually a
       more "robust"  determination than a "center of mass" or fitting a 2d
       Gaussian  if the wings in one direction are affected by the presence
       of a neighboring star.

  CALLING SEQUENCE:
       CNTRD, img, x, y, xcen, ycen, [ fwhm , /KEEPCENTER, /SILENT, /DEBUG
                                       EXTENDBOX = ]

  INPUTS:
       IMG - Two dimensional image array
       X,Y - Scalar or vector integers giving approximate integer stellar
             center

  OPTIONAL INPUT:
       FWHM - floating scalar; Centroid is computed using a box of half
               width equal to 1.5 sigma = 0.637* FWHM.  CNTRD will prompt
               for FWHM if not supplied

  OUTPUTS:
       XCEN - the computed X centroid position, same number of points as X
       YCEN - computed Y centroid position, same number of points as Y,
              floating point

       Values for XCEN and YCEN will not be computed if the computed
       centroid falls outside of the box, or if the computed derivatives
       are non-decreasing.   If the centroid cannot be computed, then a
       message is displayed and XCEN and YCEN are set to -1.

  OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
       /SILENT - Normally CNTRD prints an error message if it is unable
               to compute the centroid.   Set /SILENT to suppress this.
       /DEBUG - If this keyword is set, then CNTRD will display the subarray
               it is using to compute the centroid.
       EXTENDBOX = {non-negative positive integer}.   CNTRD searches a box with
              a half width equal to 1.5 sigma  = 0.637* FWHM to find the
              maximum pixel.    To search a larger area, set EXTENDBOX to
              the number of pixels to enlarge the half-width of the box.
              Default is 0; prior to June 2004, the default was EXTENDBOX= 3
       /KeepCenter = By default, CNTRD finds the maximum pixel in a box
              centered on the input X,Y coordinates, and then extracts a new
              box about this maximum pixel.   Set the /KeepCenter keyword
              to skip then step of finding the maximum pixel, and instead use
              a box centered on the input X,Y coordinates.
  PROCEDURE:
       Maximum pixel within distance from input pixel X, Y  determined
       from FHWM is found and used as the center of a square, within
       which the centroid is computed as the value (XCEN,YCEN) at which
       the derivatives of the partial sums of the input image over (y,x)
       with respect to (x,y) = 0.    In order to minimize contamination from
       neighboring stars stars, a weighting factor W is defined as unity in
       center, 0.5 at end, and linear in between

  RESTRICTIONS:
       (1) Does not recognize (bad) pixels.   Use the procedure GCNTRD.PRO
           in this situation.
       (2) DAOPHOT now uses a newer algorithm (implemented in GCNTRD.PRO) in
           which centroids are determined by fitting 1-d Gaussians to the
           marginal distributions in the X and Y directions.
       (3) The default behavior of CNTRD changed in June 2004 (from EXTENDBOX=3
           to EXTENDBOX = 0).
       (4) Stone (1989, AJ, 97, 1227) concludes that the derivative search
           algorithm in CNTRD is not as effective (though faster) as a
            Gaussian fit (used in GCNTRD.PRO).
  MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written 2/25/86, by J. K. Hill, S.A.S.C., following
       algorithm used by P. Stetson in DAOPHOT.
       Allowed input vectors        G. Hennessy       April,  1992
       Fixed to prevent wrong answer if floating pt. X & Y supplied
               W. Landsman        March, 1993
       Convert byte, integer subimages to float  W. Landsman  May 1995
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Better checking of edge of frame David Hogg October 2000
       Avoid integer wraparound for unsigned arrays W.Landsman January 2001
       Handle case where more than 1 pixel has maximum value W.L. July 2002
       Added /KEEPCENTER, EXTENDBOX (with default = 0) keywords WL June 2004
       Some errrors were returning X,Y = NaN rather than -1,-1  WL Aug 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/cntrd.pro)

COLOR24

 The purpose of this function is to convert a RGB color triple
 into the equivalent 24-bit long integer. The 24-bit integer
 can be decomposed into the appropriate color by interpreting
 the lowest 8 bits as red, the middle 8 bits as green, and the
 highest 8 bits as blue. This routine was written to be used with
 device-independent color programs like `cgColor`.

 :Categories:
    Graphics, Utilities

 :Params:
    color: in, required
       A three-element column or row array representing a color triple. Or an
       N-by-three element array of color triples. The values of the elements
       must be between 0 and 255.

 :Examples:
    To convert the color triple for the color YELLOW, (255, 255, 0), to the
    hexadecimal value '00FFFF'x or the decimal number 65535, type::

       color = COLOR24([255, 255, 0])

 :Author:
    FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
       David W. Fanning
       1645 Sheely Drive
       Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
       Phone: 970-221-0438
       E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
       Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written by:  David Fanning, 3 February 96.
        Completely revised the algorithm to accept color arrays. 19 October 2000. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 1996-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/color24.pro)

COLORSAREIDENTICAL

 :Description:
   Returns a 1 if the two input colors refer to the same color, otherwise returns a 0.

 :Categories:
    Graphics Utility

 :Params:
    color_1: in, required, type=string/integer/long
         The first color to compare for "equality".
    color_2: in, required, type=string/integer/long
         The second color to compare for "equality".

 :Keywords:
     None.

 :Examples:
    Used to compare if two different colors are the same color::
       IDL> Print, ColorsAreIdentical('white', cgColor('white'))
       IDL> Print, ColorsAreIdentical(252, !P.Color)
       IDL> Print, ColorsAreIdentical('white', '255')

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 24 December 2010. DWF.
        Fixed a typo when first color is INTEGER and second color is STRING. 3 Jan 2011. DWF.
        Added error handling for out of bounds color values. 25 May 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2010, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/colorsareidentical.pro)

COMPARE_STRUCT

 NAME:
       COMPARE_STRUCT
 PURPOSE:
       Compare all matching tag names and return differences

 EXPLANATION:
       Compare all matching Tags names (except for "except_Tags")
       between two structure arrays (may have different struct.definitions),
       and return a structured List of fields found different.

       The Exelis contrib library has a faster but less powerful procedure
       struct_equal.pro, see
       http://www.exelisvis.com/Default.aspx?tabid=1540&id=1175

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       diff_List = compare_struct( struct_A, struct_B [ EXCEPT=, /BRIEF,
                                    /FULL, /NaN, /RECUR_A, /RECUR_B )
 INPUTS:
       struct_A, struct_B : the two structure arrays to compare.
       Struct_Name : for internal recursion use only.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
               EXCEPT = string array of Tag names to ignore (NOT to compare).
               /BRIEF = number of differences found for each matching field
                                               of two structures is printed.
               /FULL = option to print even if zero differences found.
               /NaN = if set, then tag values are considered equal if they
                      are both set to NaN
               /RECUR_A = option to search for Tag names
                               in sub-structures of struct_A,
                               and then call compare_struct recursively
                               for those nested sub-structures.
               /RECUR_B = search for sub-structures of struct_B,
                               and then call compare_struct recursively
                               for those nested sub-structures.
       Note:
               compare_struct is automatically called recursively
               for those nested sub-structures in both struct_A and struct_B
               (otherwise cannot take difference)
 OUTPUT:
       Returns a structure array describing differences found.
       which can be examined using print,diff_List or help,/st,diff_List.
       The tags are
       TAG_NUM_A - the tag number in structure A
       TAG_NUM_B - the tag number in structure B
       FIELD - the tag name
       NDIFF - number of differences (always 1 for a scalar tag).
 PROCEDURE:
       Match Tag names and then use where function on tags.
 EXAMPLE:
       Find the tags in the !X system variable which are changed after a
       simple plot.
       IDL> x = !X              ;Save original values
       IDL> plot, indgen(25)    ;Make a simple plot
       IDL> help,/str,compare_struct(x,!X)    ;See how structure has changed

            and one will see that the tags  !X.crange and !X.S are changed
            by the plot.
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       written 1990 Frank Varosi STX @ NASA/GSFC (using copy_struct)
       modif Aug.90 by F.V. to check and compare same # of elements only.
       Added /NaN keyword W. Landsman  March 2004
       Don't test string for NaN values W. Landsman March 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/structure/compare_struct.pro)

CONCAT_DIR()

 NAME:
       CONCAT_DIR()

 PURPOSE:
       To concatenate directory and file names for current OS.
 EXPLANATION:
       The given file name is appended to the given directory name with the
       format appropriate to the current operating system.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       result = concat_dir( directory, file)

 INPUTS:
       directory  - the directory path (string)
       file       - the basic file name and extension (string)
                                   can be an array of filenames.

 OUTPUTS:
       The function returns the concatenated string.  If the file input
       is a string array then the output will be a string array also.

 EXAMPLES:
       IDL> pixfile = concat_dir('$DIR_GIS_MODEL','pixels.dat')

       IDL> file = ['f1.dat','f2.dat','f3.dat']
       IDL> dir = '$DIR_NIS_CAL'
       IDL>


 RESTRICTIONS:

       The version of CONCAT_DIR available at
       http://sohowww.nascom.nasa.gov/solarsoft/gen/idl/system/concat_dir.pro
       includes (mostly) additional VMS-specific keywords.

 CATEGORY
        Utilities, Strings

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Prev Hist. : Yohkoh routine by M. Morrison
       Written     : CDS version by C D Pike, RAL, 19/3/93
       Version     : Version 1  19/3/93
       Documentation modified Nov-94   W. Landsman
       Add V4.0 support for Windows    W. Landsman   Aug 95
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Changed loops to long integer   W. Landsman   December 1998
       Added Mac support, translate Windows environment variables,
       & treat case where dirname ends in '/' W. Landsman  Feb. 2000
       Assume since V5.5, remove VMS support W. Landsman  Sep. 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/concat_dir.pro)

CONS_DEC

 NAME:
       CONS_DEC
 PURPOSE:
       Obtain the X and Y coordinates of a line of constant declination
 EXPLANATION:
       Returns a set of Y pixels values, given an image with astrometry, and
            either
       (1)  A set of X pixel values, and a scalar declination value, or
       (2)  A set of declination values, and a scalar X value

       Form (1) can be used to find the (X,Y) values of a line of constant
       declination.  Form (2) can be used to find the Y positions of a set
       declinations, along a line of constant X.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Y = CONS_DEC( DEC, X, ASTR, [ ALPHA ])

 INPUTS:
       DEC - Declination value(s) in DEGREES (-!PI/2 < DEC < !PI/2).
               If X is a vector, then DEC must be a scalar.
       X -   Specified X pixel value(s) for line of constant declination
               If DEC is a vector, then X must be a scalar.
       ASTR - Astrometry structure, as extracted from a FITS header by the
               procedure EXTAST
 OUTPUT:
       Y   - Computed set of Y pixel values.  The number of Y values is the
               same as either DEC or X, whichever is greater.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       ALPHA - the right ascensions (DEGREES) associated with the (X,Y) points

 RESTRICTIONS:
       Implemented only for the TANgent, SIN and CAR projections

 NOTES:
       The algorithm (and notation) is based on AIPS Memo 27 by Eric Greisen,
       with modifications for a coordinate description (CD) matrix as
       described in Paper II of Greisen & Calabretta (2002, A&A, 395, 1077).
       These documents are available from
       http://www.cv.nrao.edu/fits/documents/wcs/wcs.html

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written, Wayne Landsman  STX Co.                          April 1988
       Use new astrometry structure,     W. Landsman    HSTX     Jan. 1994
       Use CD matrix, add SIN projection   W. Landsman  HSTX     April, 1996
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Fix case where DEC is scalar, X is vector   W. Landsman RITSS Feb. 2000
       Fix possible sign error introduced Jan. 2000   W. Landsman  May 2000
       Work for the CARee' projection W. Landsman   May 2003

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/cons_dec.pro)

CONS_RA

 NAME:
       CONS_RA
 PURPOSE:
       Obtain the X and Y coordinates of a line of constant right ascension
 EXPLANATION:
       Return a set of X pixel values given an image with astrometry,
       and either
       (1) a set of Y pixel values, and a scalar right ascension (or
           longitude), or
       (2) a set of right ascension values, and a scalar Y value.

       In usage (1), CONS_RA can be used to determine the (X,Y) values
       of a line of constant right ascension.  In usage (2), CONS_RA can
       used to determine the X positions of specified RA values, along a
       line of constant Y.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       X = CONS_RA( RA, Y, ASTR, [ DEC] )

 INPUTS:
       RA -  Right Ascension value in DEGREES (0 < RA < 360.).  If Y is a
               vector, then RA must be a scalar
       Y -   Specified Y pixel value(s) for line of constant right ascension
               If RA is a vector, then Y must be a scalar
       ASTR - Astrometry structure as extracted from a FITS header by the
               procedure EXTAST
 OUTPUTS
       X   - Computed set of X pixel values.   The number of elements of X
               is the maximum of the number of elements of RA and Y.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       DEC - Computed set of declinations (in DEGREES) for X,Y, coordinates
 NOTES:
       The algorithm (and notation) is based on AIPS Memo 27 by Eric Greisen,
       with modifications for a coordinate description (CD) matrix as
       described in Paper II of Calabretta & Greisen (2002, A&A, 395, 1077).
       These documents are available from
       http://www.cv.nrao.edu/fits/documents/wcs/wcs.html

 RESTRICTIONS:
       Implemented only for the TANgent, SIN and CARtesian projections

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written, Wayne Landsman  STX Co.        April, 1988
       Algorithm adapted from AIPS memo No. 27 by Eric Greisen
       New astrometry structure
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added SIN projection    W. Landsman   January 2000
       Fix possible sign error introduced Jan. 2000   W. Landsman  May 2000
       Work for the CARee' projection W. Landsman   May 2003
       For TAN projection ensure angles between -90 and 90 W. Landsman Jan 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/cons_ra.pro)

CONVERT_TO_TYPE

 NAME:
       CONVERT_TO_TYPE

 PURPOSE:

       Converts its input argument to a specified data type.

 AUTHOR:

       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
       David Fanning, Ph.D.
       1645 Sheely Drive
       Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
       Phone: 970-221-0438
       E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
       Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 CATEGORY:

       Utilities

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       result = Convert_To_Type(input, type)

 INPUT_PARAMETERS:

       input:          The input data to be converted.
       type:           The data type. Accepts values as given by Size(var, /TNAME) or Size(var, /TYPE).
                       If converting to integer types, values are truncated (similar to FLOOR keyword below),
                       unless keywords are set.

 OUTPUT_PARAMETERS:

      result:          The input data is converted to specified data type.

 KEYWORDS:

     CEILING:          If set and converting to an integer type, the CEIL function is applied before conversion.

     FLOOR:            If set and converting to an integer type, the FLOOR function is applied before conversion.

     ROUND:            If set and converting to an integer type, the ROUND function is applied before conversion.


 RESTRICTIONS:

     Data types STRUCT, POINTER, and OBJREF are not allowed.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

     Written by David W. Fanning, 19 February 2006.
     Typo had "UNIT" instead of "UINT". 23 February 2009. DWF.
     Added CEILING, FLOOR, and ROUND keywords. 1 April 2009. DWF.
     Modified so that the "type" variable is not changed by the program. 5 May 2009. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/convert_to_type.pro)

CONVOLVE

 NAME:
       CONVOLVE
 PURPOSE:
       Convolution of an image with a Point Spread Function (PSF)
 EXPLANATION:
       The default is to compute the convolution using a product of
       Fourier transforms (for speed).

       The image is padded with zeros so that a large PSF does not
       overlap one edge of the image with the opposite edge of the image.

       This routine is now partially obsolete due to the introduction of  the
       intrinsic CONVOL_FFT() function in IDL 8.1

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       imconv = convolve( image1, psf, FT_PSF = psf_FT )
  or:
       correl = convolve( image1, image2, /CORREL )
  or:
       correl = convolve( image, /AUTO )

 INPUTS:
       image = 2-D array (matrix) to be convolved with psf
       psf = the Point Spread Function, (size < or = to size of image).

       The PSF *must* be symmetric about the point
       FLOOR((n_elements-1)/2), where n_elements is the number of
       elements in each dimension.  For Gaussian PSFs, the maximum
       of the PSF must occur in this pixel (otherwise the convolution
       will shift everything in the image).

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:

       FT_PSF = passes out/in the Fourier transform of the PSF,
               (so that it can be re-used the next time function is called).
       FT_IMAGE = passes out/in the Fourier transform of image.

       /CORRELATE uses the conjugate of the Fourier transform of PSF,
               to compute the cross-correlation of image and PSF,
               (equivalent to IDL function convol() with NO rotation of PSF)

       /AUTO_CORR computes the auto-correlation function of image using FFT.

       /NO_FT overrides the use of FFT, using IDL function convol() instead.
               (then PSF is rotated by 180 degrees to give same result)

       /NO_PAD - if set, then do not pad the image to avoid edge effects.
               This will improve memory and speed of the computation at the
               expense of edge effects.   This was the default method prior
               to October 2009
 METHOD:
       When using FFT, PSF is centered & expanded to size of image.
 HISTORY:
       written, Frank Varosi, NASA/GSFC 1992.
       Appropriate precision type for result depending on input image
                               Markus Hundertmark February 2006
       Fix the bug causing the recomputation of FFT(psf) and/or FFT(image)
                               Sergey Koposov     December 2006
       Fix the centering bug
                               Kyle Penner        October 2009
       Add /No_PAD keyword for better speed and memory usage when edge effects
            are not important.    W. Landsman      March 2010
       Add warning when kernel type does not match integer array
             W. Landsman Feb 2012

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/convolve.pro)

COPY_STRUCT

 NAME:
	COPY_STRUCT
 PURPOSE:
 	Copy all fields with matching tag names from one structure to another
 EXPLANATION:
       COPY_STRUCT is similar to the intrinisc STRUCT_ASSIGN procedure but
       has optional keywords to exclude or specify specific tags.

	Fields with matching tag names are copied from one structure array to
	another structure array of different type.
	This allows copying of tag values when equating the structures of
	different types is not allowed, or when not all tags are to be copied.
	Can also recursively copy from/to structures nested within structures.
	Note that the number of elements in the output structure array
	is automatically adjusted to equal the length of input structure array.
	If this not desired then use pro copy_struct_inx which allows
	specifying via subscripts which elements are copied where in the arrays.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

	copy_struct, struct_From, struct_To, NT_copied
	copy_struct, struct_From, struct_To, EXCEPT=["image","misc"]
	copy_struct, struct_From, struct_To, /RECUR_TANDEM

 INPUTS:
	struct_From = structure array to copy from.
	struct_To = structure array to copy values to.

 KEYWORDS:

	EXCEPT_TAGS = string array of tag names to ignore (to NOT copy).
		Used at all levels of recursion.

	SELECT_TAGS = tag names to copy (takes priority over EXCEPT).
		This keyword is not passed to recursive calls in order
		to avoid the confusion of not copying tags in sub-structures.

	/RECUR_FROM = search for sub-structures in struct_From, and then
		call copy_struct recursively for those nested structures.

	/RECUR_TO = search for sub-structures of struct_To, and then
		call copy_struct recursively for those nested structures.

	/RECUR_TANDEM = call copy_struct recursively for the sub-structures
		with matching Tag names in struct_From and struct_To
		(for use when Tag names match but sub-structure types differ).

 OUTPUTS:
	struct_To = structure array to which new tag values are copied.
	NT_copied = incremented by total # of tags copied (optional)

 INTERNAL:
	Recur_Level = # of times copy_struct calls itself.
		This argument is for internal recursive execution only.
		The user call is 1, subsequent recursive calls increment it,
		and the counter is decremented before returning.
		The counter is used just to find out if argument checking
		should be performed, and to set NT_copied = 0 first call.
 EXTERNAL CALLS:
	pro match	(when keyword SELECT_TAGS is specified)
 PROCEDURE:
	Match Tag names and then use corresponding Tag numbers.
 HISTORY:
	written 1989 Frank Varosi STX @ NASA/GSFC
 	mod Jul.90 by F.V. added option to copy sub-structures RECURSIVELY.
	mod Aug.90 by F.V. adjust # elements in TO (output) to equal
			# elements in FROM (input) & count # of fields copied.
	mod Jan.91 by F.V. added Recur_Level as internal argument so that
			argument checking done just once, to avoid confusion.
			Checked against Except_Tags in RECUR_FROM option.
	mod Oct.91 by F.V. added option SELECT_TAGS= selected field names.
	mod Aug.95 by W. Landsman to fix match of a single selected tag.
	mod Mar.97 by F.V. do not pass the SELECT_TAGS keyword in recursion.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       mod May 01 by D. Schlegel use long integers

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/structure/copy_struct.pro)

COPY_STRUCT_INX

 NAME:
	COPY_STRUCT_INX
 PURPOSE:
	Copy matching tags & specified indices from one structure to another
 EXPLANATION:
 	Copy all fields with matching tag names (except for "except_Tags")
	from one structure array to another structure array of different type.
	This allows copying of tag values when equating the structures of
	different types is not allowed, or when not all tags are to be copied.
	Can also recursively copy from/to structures nested within structures.
	This procedure is same as copy_struct with option to
	specify indices (subscripts) of which array elements to copy from/to.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:

	copy_struct_inx, struct_From, struct_To, NT_copied, INDEX_FROM=subf

	copy_struct_inx, struct_From, struct_To, INDEX_FROM=subf, INDEX_TO=subto

 INPUTS:
	struct_From = structure array to copy from.
	struct_To = structure array to copy values to.

 KEYWORDS:

	INDEX_FROM = indices (subscripts) of which elements of array to copy.
		(default is all elements of input structure array)

	INDEX_TO = indices (subscripts) of which elements to copy to.
		(default is all elements of output structure array)

	EXCEPT_TAGS = string array of Tag names to ignore (to NOT copy).
		Used at all levels of recursion.

	SELECT_TAGS = Tag names to copy (takes priority over EXCEPT).
		This keyword is not passed to recursive calls in order
		to avoid the confusion of not copying tags in sub-structures.

	/RECUR_FROM = search for sub-structures in struct_From, and then
		call copy_struct recursively for those nested structures.

	/RECUR_TO = search for sub-structures of struct_To, and then
		call copy_struct recursively for those nested structures.

	/RECUR_TANDEM = call copy_struct recursively for the sub-structures
		with matching Tag names in struct_From and struct_To
		(for use when Tag names match but sub-structure types differ).

 OUTPUTS:
	struct_To = structure array to which new tag values are copied.
	NT_copied = incremented by total # of tags copied (optional)

 INTERNAL:
	Recur_Level = # of times copy_struct_inx calls itself.
		This argument is for internal recursive execution only.
		The user call is 1, subsequent recursive calls increment it,
		and the counter is decremented before returning.
		The counter is used just to find out if argument checking
		should be performed, and to set NT_copied = 0 first call.
 EXTERNAL CALLS:
	pro match	(when keyword SELECT_TAGS is specified)
 PROCEDURE:
	Match Tag names and then use corresponding Tag numbers,
	apply the sub-indices during = and recursion.
 HISTORY:
	adapted from copy_struct: 1991 Frank Varosi STX @ NASA/GSFC
	mod Aug.95 by F.V. to fix match of a single selected tag.
	mod Mar.97 by F.V. do not pass the SELECT_TAGS keyword in recursion,
		and check validity of INDEX_FROM and INDEX_TO in more detail.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Use long integers W. Landsman May 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/structure/copy_struct_inx.pro)

CORREL_IMAGES

 NAME:
	CORREL_IMAGES
 PURPOSE:
       Compute the 2-D cross-correlation function of two images
 EXPLANATION:
       Computes the 2-D cross-correlation function of two images for
       a range of (x,y) shifting by pixels of one image relative to the other.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Result = CORREL_IMAGES( image_A, image_B,
                        [XSHIFT=, YSHIFT=, XOFFSET_B=, YOFFSET_B=, REDUCTION=,
                        MAGNIFICATION=, /NUMPIX, /MONITOR  )

 INPUTS:
       image_A, image_B = the two images of interest.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       XSHIFT = the + & - shift to be applied in X direction, default=7.
       YSHIFT = the Y direction + & - shifting, default=7.

       XOFFSET_B = initial X pixel offset of image_B relative to image_A.
       YOFFSET_B = Y pixel offset, defaults are (0,0).

       REDUCTION = optional reduction factor causes computation of
                       Low resolution correlation of bin averaged images,
                       thus faster. Can be used to get approximate optimal
                       (x,y) offset of images, and then called for successive
                       lower reductions in conjunction with CorrMat_Analyze
                       until REDUCTION=1, getting offset up to single pixel.

       MAGNIFICATION = option causes computation of high resolution correlation
                       of magnified images, thus much slower.
                       Shifting distance is automatically = 2 + Magnification,
                       and optimal pixel offset should be known and specified.
                       Optimal offset can then be found to fractional pixels
                       using CorrMat_Analyze( correl_images( ) ).

       /NUMPIX - if set, causes the number of pixels for each correlation
                       to be saved in a second image, concatenated to the
                       correlation image, so Result is fltarr( Nx, Ny, 2 ).
       /MONITOR causes the progress of computation to be briefly printed.

 OUTPUTS:
       Result is the cross-correlation function, given as a matrix.

 PROCEDURE:
       Loop over all possible (x,y) shifts, compute overlap and correlation
       for each shift. Correlation set to zero when there is no overlap.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, July,1991, Frank Varosi, STX @ NASA/GSFC
       Use ROUND instead of NINT, June 1995, Wayne Landsman HSTX
       Avoid divide by zero errors, W. Landsman HSTX April 1996
	Remove use of !DEBUG    W. Landsman   June 1997
       Subtract mean of entire image before computing correlation, not just
          mean of overlap region   H. Ebeling/W. Landsman   June 1998
       Always REBIN() using floating pt arithmetic W. Landsman  Nov 2007

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/correl_images.pro)

CORREL_OPTIMIZE

 NAME:
	CORREL_OPTIMIZE

 PURPOSE:
	Find the optimal (x,y) pixel offset of image_B relative to image_A
 EXPLANATION"
	Optimal offset is computed by means of maximizing the correlation
	function of the two images.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	CORREL_OPTIMIZE, image_A, image_B, xoffset_optimum, yoffset_optimum
		[ XOFF_INIT=, YOFF_INIT=, MAGNIFICATION=, /PRINT, /NUMPIX,
		  /MONITOR, PLATEAU_THRESH=  ]

 INPUTS:
	image_A, image_B = the two images of interest.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
	XOFF_INIT = initial X pixel offset of image_B relative to image_A,
	YOFF_INIT = Y pixel offset, (default offsets are 0 and 0).
	MAGNIFICATION = option to determine offsets up to fractional pixels,
			(example: MAG=2 means 1/2 pixel accuracy, default=1).
	/NUMPIX: sqrt( sqrt( # pixels )) used as correlation weighting factor.
	/MONITOR causes the progress of computation to be briefly printed.
	/PRINT causes the results of analysis to be printed.
	PLATEAU_THRESH = threshold used for detecting plateaus in
		the cross-correlation matrix near maximum, (default=0.01),
		used only if MAGNIFICATION > 1.    Decrease this value for
		high signal-to-noise data

 OUTPUTS:
	xoffset_optimum = optimal X pixel offset of image_B relative to image_A.
	yoffset_optimum = optimal Y pixel offset.

 CALLS:
	function  correl_images( image_A, image_B )
	pro  corrmat_analyze

 PROCEDURE:
	The combination of function correl_images( image_A, image_B ) and
	corrmat_analyze of the result is used to obtain the (x,y) offset
	yielding maximal correlation. The combination is first executed at
	large REDUCTION factors to speed up computation, then zooming in
	recursively on the optimal (x,y) offset by factors of 2.
	Finally, the MAGNIFICATION option (if specified)
	is executed to determine the (x,y) offset up to fractional pixels.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
	Written, July,1991, Frank Varosi, STX @ NASA/GSFC
	Added PLATEAU_THRESH keyword  June 1997,  Wayne Landsman  STX
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/correl_optimize.pro)

CORRMAT_ANALYZE

 NAME:
	CORRMAT_ANALYZE
 PURPOSE:
	Find the optimal (x,y) offset to maximize correlation of 2 images
 EXPLANATION:
	Analyzes the 2-D cross-correlation function of two images
	and finds the optimal(x,y) pixel offsets.
	Intended for use with function CORREL_IMAGES.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	corrmat_analyze, correl_mat, xoffset_optimum, yoffset_optimum,
		max_corr, edge, plateau, [XOFF_INIT=, YOFF_INIT=, REDUCTION=,
		MAGNIFICATION=, PLATEAU_THRESH=, /PRINT]

 INPUTS:
	correl_mat = the cross-correlation matrix of 2 images.
			(as computed by function CORREL_IMAGES( imA, imB ) ).

 NOTE:
	If correl_mat(*,*,1) is the number of pixels for each correlation,
	(the case when /NUMPIX was specified in call to CORREL_IMAGES)
	then sqrt( sqrt( # pixels )) is used as correlation weighting factor.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
	XOFF_INIT = initial X pixel offset of image_B relative to image_A.
	YOFF_INIT = Y pixel offset, (both as specified to correl_images).
	REDUCTION = reduction factor used in call to CORREL_IMAGES.
	MAGNIFICATION = magnification factor used in call to CORREL_IMAGES,
		this allows determination of offsets up to fractions of a pixel.
	PLATEAU_THRESH = threshold used for detecting plateaus in
		the cross-correlation matrix near maximum, (default=0.01),
		used only if MAGNIFICATION > 1
	/PRINT causes the result of analysis to be printed.

 OUTPUTS:
	xoffset_optimum = optimal X pixel offset of image_B relative to image_A.
	yoffset_optimum = optimal Y pixel offset.
	max_corr = the maximal correlation corresponding to optimal offset.
	edge = 1 if maximum is at edge of correlation domain, otherwise=0.
	plateau = 1 if maximum is in a plateua of correlation function, else=0.

 PROCEDURE:
	Find point of maximum cross-correlation and calc. corresponding offsets.
	If MAGNIFICATION > 1:
	the  correl_mat is checked for plateau near maximum, and if found,
	the center of plateau is taken as point of maximum cross-correlation.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
	Written, July-1991, Frank Varosi, STX @ NASA/GSFC
	Use ROUND instead of NINT, June 1995 Wayne Landsman HSTX
	Remove use of non-standard !DEBUG system variable   W.L. HSTX
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/corrmat_analyze.pro)

COSMO_PARAM

 NAME:
     COSMO_PARAM
 PURPOSE:
     Derive full set of cosmological density parameters from a partial set
 EXPLANATION:
     This procedure is called by LUMDIST and GALAGE to allow the user a choice
     in defining any two of four cosmological density parameters.

     Given any two of the four input parameters -- (1) the normalized matter
     density Omega_m (2) the normalized cosmological constant, Omega_lambda
     (3) the normalized curvature term, Omega_k and (4) the deceleration
     parameter q0 --  this  program will derive the remaining two.     Here
     "normalized" means divided by the closure density so that
     Omega_m + Omega_lambda + Omega_k = 1.    For a more
     precise definition see Carroll, Press, & Turner (1992, ArAA, 30, 499).

     If less than two parameters are defined, this procedure sets default
     values of Omega_k=0 (flat space), Omega_lambda = 0.7, Omega_m = 0.3
     and q0 = -0.55
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       COSMO_PARAM, Omega_m, Omega_lambda, Omega_k, q0

 INPUT-OUTPUTS:
     Omega_M - normalized matter energy density, non-negative numeric scalar
     Omega_Lambda - Normalized cosmological constant, numeric scalar
     Omega_k - normalized curvature parameter, numeric scalar.   This is zero
               for a flat universe
     q0 - Deceleration parameter, numeric scalar = -R*(R'')/(R')^2
          = 0.5*Omega_m - Omega_lambda
 NOTES:
     If more than two parameters are defined upon input (overspecification),
     then the first two defined parameters in the ordered list Omega_m,
     Omega_lambda, Omega_k, q0 are used to define the cosmology.
 EXAMPLE:
     Suppose one has Omega_m = 0.3, and Omega_k = 0.5 then to determine
     Omega_lambda and q0

       IDL> cosmo_param, 0.3, omega_lambda, 0.5, q0

       which will return omega_lambda = 0.2 and q0 = -2.45
 REVISION HISTORY:
       W. Landsman         Raytheon ITSS         April 2000
       Better Error checking  W. Landsman/D. Syphers   October 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/cosmo_param.pro)

COYOTEGRAPHIC

   This simple just identifies a routine as a Coyote Graphic routine. It is written
   primarily so I can identify such routines before I assign a background color to
   a graphics window.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Examples:
    Used in graphics programs::
       IDL> IF CoyoteGraphic() THEN background = 'white'

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 18 January 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/coyotegraphic.pro)

CO_ABERRATION

  NAME:
     CO_ABERRATION
 PURPOSE:
     Calculate changes to Ra and Dec due to "the effect of aberration",
 EXPLANATION:
      as described in Meeus, Chap 23.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      co_aberration, jd, ra, dec, d_ra, d_dec, [EPS = ]
 INPUTS
       jd      : Julian Date [scalar or vector]
       ra, dec : Arrays (or scalars) of the ra  and dec's in degrees
   Note: if jd is a vector, ra and dec MUST be vectors of the same length.

 OUTPUTS
       d_ra, d_dec: the corrections to ra and dec due to aberration (must then
                     be added to ra and dec to get corrected values).
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       eps : set this to the true obliquity of the ecliptic (in radians), or
         it will be set for you if you don't know it (in that case, set it to
                 an empty variable).
 EXAMPLE:
   Compute the change in RA and Dec of Theta Persei (RA = 2h46m,11.331s, Dec =
   49d20',54.54" on 2028 Nov 13.19 TD

      IDL> jdcnv,2028,11,13,.19*24,jd      ;Get Julian date
      IDL> co_aberration,jd,ten(2,46,11.331)*15,ten(49,20,54.54),d_ra,d_dec

      ==> d_ra = 30.045"    d_dec = 6.697"
 NOTES:
  These formula are from Meeus, Chapters 23.  Accuracy is much better than 1
   arcsecond.

 REVISION HISTORY:
   Written, June 2002,      Chris O'Dell, U. of Wisconsin
   Fix error with vector input   W. Landsman   June 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/co_aberration.pro)

CO_NUTATE

  NAME:
     CO_NUTATE
  PURPOSE:
     Calculate changes in RA and Dec due to nutation of the Earth's rotation
 EXPLANATION:
     Calculates necessary changes to ra and dec due to
     the nutation of the Earth's rotation axis, as described in Meeus, Chap 23.
     Uses formulae from Astronomical Almanac, 1984, and does the calculations
     in equatorial rectangular coordinates to avoid singularities at the
     celestial poles.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     CO_NUTATE, jd, ra, dec, d_ra, d_dec, [EPS=, D_PSI =, D_EPS = ]
 INPUTS
    JD: Julian Date [scalar or vector]
    RA, DEC : Arrays (or scalars) of the ra and dec's of interest

   Note: if jd is a vector, ra and dec MUST be vectors of the same length.

 OUTPUTS:
    d_ra, d_dec: the corrections to ra and dec due to nutation (must then
                                be added to ra and dec to get corrected values).
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
    EPS: set this to a named variable that will contain the obliquity of the
             ecliptic.
    D_PSI: set this to a named variable that will contain the nutation in the
           longitude of the ecliptic
    D_EPS: set this to a named variable that will contain the nutation in the
                       obliquity of the ecliptic
 EXAMPLE:
    (1) Example 23a in Meeus: On 2028 Nov 13.19 TD the mean position of Theta
        Persei is 2h 46m 11.331s 49d 20' 54.54".    Determine the shift in
        position due to the Earth's nutation.

        IDL> jd = JULDAY(11,13,2028,.19*24)       ;Get Julian date
        IDL> CO_NUTATE, jd,ten(2,46,11.331)*15.,ten(49,20,54.54),d_ra,d_dec

              ====> d_ra = 15.843"   d_dec = 6.217"
 PROCEDURES USED:
    NUTATE
 REVISION HISTORY:
    Written  Chris O'Dell, 2002
    Vector call to NUTATE   W. Landsman   June 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/co_nutate.pro)

CO_REFRACT()

 NAME:
   CO_REFRACT()

 PURPOSE:
   Calculate correction to altitude due to atmospheric refraction.

 DESCRIPTION:
   CO_REFRACT can calculate both apparent altitude from observed altitude and
   vice-versa.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
   new_alt  = CO_REFRACT(old_alt, [ ALTITUDE= , PRESSURE= , $
                                  TEMPERATURE= , /TO_OBSERVED , EPSILON= ])

 INPUT:
   old_alt - Observed (apparent) altitude, in DEGREES.  (apparent if keyword
             /TO_OBSERVED set).    May be scalar or vector.

 OUTPUT:
     Function returns apparent (observed) altitude, in DEGREES. (observed if
         keyword /TO_OBSERVED set).    Will be of same type as input
         altitude(s).

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
      ALTITUDE :  The height of the observing location, in meters.  This is
             only used to determine an approximate temperature and pressure,
             if these are not specified separately. [default=0, i.e. sea level]
      PRESSURE :  The pressure at the observing location, in millibars.
      TEMPERATURE:    The temperature at the observing location, in Kelvin.
      EPSILON:  When keyword /TO_OBSERVED has been set, this is the accuracy
               to  obtain via the iteration, in arcseconds [default = 0.25
                arcseconds].
      /TO_OBSERVED:  Set this keyword to go from Apparent->Observed altitude,
                 using the iterative technique.

       Note, if altitude is set, but temperature or pressure are not, the
       program will make an intelligent guess for the temperature and pressure.

 DESCRIPTION:

   Because the index of refraction of air is not precisely 1.0, the atmosphere
   bends all incoming light, making a star or other celestial object appear at
   a slightly different altitude (or elevation) than it really is.  It is
   important to understand the following definitions:

   Observed Altitude:  The altitude that a star is SEEN to BE, with a telescope.
                       This is where it appears in the sky.  This is always
                       GREATER than the apparent altitude.

   Apparent Altitude:  The altitude that a star would be at, if *there were no
                     atmosphere* (sometimes called "true" altitude). This is
                     usually calculated from an object's celestial coordinates.
                     Apparent altitude is always LOWER than the observed
                     altitude.

   Thus, for example, the Sun's apparent altitude when you see it right on the
   horizon is actually -34 arcminutes.

   This program uses couple simple formulae to estimate the effect for most
   optical and radio wavelengths.  Typically, you know your observed altitude
   (from an observation), and want the apparent altitude.  To go the other way,
   this program uses an iterative approach.

 EXAMPLE:
    The lower limb of the Sun is observed to have altitude of 0d 30'.
    Calculate the the true (=apparent) altitude of the Sun's lower limb using
    mean  conditions of air pressure and temperature

    IDL> print, co_refract(0.5)     ===>  0.025degrees (1.55')
 WAVELENGTH DEPENDENCE:
    This correction is 0 at zenith, about 1 arcminute at 45 degrees, and 34
    arcminutes at the horizon FOR OPTICAL WAVELENGTHS.  The correction is
    NON-NEGLIGIBLE at all wavelengths, but is not very easily calculable.
    These formulae assume a wavelength of 550 nm, and will be accurate to
    about 4 arcseconds for all visible wavelengths, for elevations of 10
    degrees and higher.    Amazingly, they are also ACCURATE FOR RADIO
    FREQUENCIES LESS THAN ~ 100 GHz.

    It is important to understand that these formulae really can't do better
    than about 30 arcseconds of accuracy very close to the horizon, as
    variable atmospheric effects become very important.

 REFERENCES:
    1.  Meeus, Astronomical Algorithms, Chapter 15.
    2.  Explanatory Supplement to the Astronomical Almanac, 1992.
    3.  Methods of Experimental Physics, Vol 12 Part B, Astrophysics,
        Radio Telescopes, Chapter 2.5, "Refraction Effects in the Neutral
        Atmosphere", by R.K. Crane.


 DEPENDENCIES:
    CO_REFRACT_FORWARD (contained in this file and automatically compiled).

 AUTHOR:
   Chris O'Dell
       Univ. of Wisconsin-Madison
   Observational Cosmology Laboratory
   Email: odell@cmb.physics.wisc.edu

 REVISION HISTORY:
    version 1 (May 31, 2002)
    Update iteration formula,   W. Landsman    June 2002
    Corrected slight bug associated with scalar vs. vector temperature and
               pressure inputs. 6/10/2002
    Fixed problem with vector input when /TO_OBSERVED set W. Landsman Dec 2005
    Allow arrays with more than 32767 elements W.Landsman/C.Dickinson Feb 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/co_refract.pro)

CREATE_STRUCT

 NAME:
       CREATE_STRUCT
 PURPOSE:
       Create an IDL structure from a list of tag names and dimensions
 EXPLANATION:
       Dynamically create an IDL structure variable from list of tag names
       and data types of arbitrary dimensions.   Useful when the type of
       structure needed is not known until run time.

       Unlike the intrinsic function CREATE_STRUCT(), this procedure does not
       require the user to know the number of tags before run time.   (Note
       there is no name conflict since the intrinsic CREATE_STRUCT is a
       function, and this file contains a procedure.)
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       CREATE_STRUCT, STRUCT, strname, tagnames, tag_descript,
                             [ DIMEN = , /CHATTER, /NODELETE ]

 INPUTS:
       STRNAME -   name to be associated with structure (string)
               Must be unique for each structure created.   Set
               STRNAME = '' to create an anonymous structure

       TAGNAMES -  tag names for structure elements (string or string array)
                Any strings that are not valid IDL tag names (e.g. 'a\2')
                will be converted by IDL_VALIDNAME to a valid tagname by
                replacing with underscores as necessary (e.g. 'a_2')

       TAG_DESCRIPT -  String descriptor for the structure, containing the
               tag type and dimensions.  For example, 'A(2),F(3),I', would
               be the descriptor for a structure with 3 tags, strarr(2),
               fltarr(3) and Integer scalar, respectively.
               Allowed types are 'A' for strings, 'B' or 'L' for unsigned byte
               integers, 'I' for integers, 'J' for longword integers,
               'K' for 64bit integers, 'F' or 'E' for floating point,
               'D' for double precision  'C' for complex, and 'M' for double
               complex.   Uninterpretable characters in a format field are
               ignored.

               For vectors, the tag description can also be specified by
               a repeat count.  For example, '16E,2J' would specify a
               structure with two tags, fltarr(16), and lonarr(2)

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
       DIMEN -    number of dimensions of structure array (default is 1)

       CHATTER -  If set, then CREATE_STRUCT() will display
                  the dimensions of the structure to be created, and prompt
                  the user whether to continue.  Default is no prompt.

       /NODELETE - If set, then the temporary file created
                  CREATE_STRUCT will not be deleted upon exiting.   See below

 OUTPUTS:
       STRUCT -   IDL structure, created according to specifications

 EXAMPLES:

       IDL> create_struct, new, 'name',['tag1','tag2','tag3'], 'D(2),F,A(1)'

       will create a structure variable new, with structure name NAME

       To see the structure of new:

       IDL> help,new,/struc
       ** Structure NAME, 3 tags, 20 length:
          TAG1            DOUBLE         Array(2)
          TAG2            FLOAT          0.0
          TAG3            STRING         Array(1)

 PROCEDURE:
       Generates a temporary procedure file using input information with
       the desired structure data types and dimensions hard-coded.
       This file is then executed with CALL_PROCEDURE.

 NOTES:
       If CREATE_STRUCT cannot write a temporary .pro file in the current
       directory, then it will write the temporary file in the getenv('HOME')
       directory.

       Note that 'L' now specifies a LOGICAL (byte) data type and not a
       a LONG data type for consistency with FITS binary tables

 RESTRICTIONS:
       The name of the structure must be unique, for each structure created.
       Otherwise, the new variable will have the same structure as the
       previous definition (because the temporary procedure will not be
       recompiled).  ** No error message will be generated  ***

 SUBROUTINES CALLED:
       REPCHR()

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Version 1.0 RAS January 1992
       Modified 26 Feb 1992 for Rosat IDL Library (GAR)
       Modified Jun 1992 to accept arrays for tag elements -- KLV, Hughes STX
       Accept anonymous structures W. Landsman  HSTX    Sep. 92
       Accept 'E' and 'J' format specifications   W. Landsman Jan 93
       'L' format now stands for logical and not long array
       Accept repeat format for vectors        W. Landsman Feb 93
       Accept complex and double complex (for V4.0)   W. Landsman Jul 95
       Work for long structure definitions  W. Landsman Aug 97
       Write temporary file in HOME directory if necessary  W. Landsman Jul 98
       Use OPENR,/DELETE for OS-independent file removal W. Landsman Jan 99
       Use STRSPLIT() instead of GETTOK() W. Landsman  July 2002
       Assume since V5.3 W. Landsman  Feb 2004
       Added RESOLVE_ROUTINE to ensure recompilation W. Landsman Sep. 2004
       Delete temporary with FILE_DELETE   W. Landsman Sep 2006
       Assume since V5.5, delete VMS reference  W.Landsman Sep 2006
       Added 'K' format for 64 bit integers, IDL_VALIDNAME check on tags
                       W. Landsman  Feb 2007
       Use vector form of IDL_VALIDNAME() if V6.4 or later W.L. Dec 2007
       Suppress compilation mesage of temporary file A. Conley/W.L. May 2009
       Remove FDECOMP, some cleaner coding  W.L. July 2009
       Do not limit string length to 1000 chars   P. Broos,  Feb 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/structure/create_struct.pro)

CR_REJECT

 NAME:
     CR_REJECT

 PURPOSE:
     General, iterative cosmic ray rejection using two or more input images.

 EXPLANATION:
     Uses a noise model input by the user, rather than
     determining noise empirically from the images themselves.

     The image returned has the combined exposure time of all the input
     images, unless the bias flag is set, in which case the mean is
     returned.  This image is computed by summation (or taking mean)
     regardless of loop and initialization options (see below).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     cr_reject, input_cube, rd_noise_dn, dark_dn, gain, mult_noise, $
        combined_image, combined_npix, combined_noise

 MODIFIED ARGUMENT:
     input_cube - Cube in which each plane is an input image.
                  If the noise model is used (rd_noise_dn, dark_dn,
                  gain), then input_cube must be in units of DN.
                  If an input noise cube is supplied (rd_noise_dn
                  <0), then the units of input_cube and noise_cube
                  merely need to be consistent.

                  This array is used as a buffer and its contents
                  are not guaranteed on output (although for now,
                  weighting=0 with /restore_sky should give you back
                  your input unaltered).

 INPUT ARGUMENTS:
     rd_noise_dn - Read noise per pixel.  Units are DN.
                   If negative, then the user supplies an error cube
                   via the keyword noise_cube.  In the latter case,
                   mult_noise still applies, since it is basically a fudge.
     dark_dn     - Dark rate in DN per pixel per s.  This can be a scalar,
                   or it can be a dark image divided by the exposure
                   time.
     gain        - Electrons per DN.
     mult_noise  - Coefficient for multiplicative noise term -- helps
                   account for differing PSFs or subpixel image shifts.

 INPUT KEYWORDS:
     exptime    - If the images have different exposure times, pass
                  them in a vector.  You can leave this off for
                  frames with the same exposure time, but dark counts
                  won't be treated correctly.
     verbose    - If set, lots of output.
     nsig       - Rejection limit in units of pixel-to-pixel noise
                  (sigma) on each input image.  Can be specified as
                  an array, in which case the dimension gives the
                  maximum number of iterations to run.  (Default =
                  [8, 6, 4]
     dilation   - With dfactor, provides functionality similar to the
                  expansion of the CR with pfactor and radius in STSDAS
                  crrej.  Dilate gives the size of the border to be
                  tested around each initially detected CR pixel.
                  E.g., dilate=1 searches a 9 X 9 area centered on the
                  original pixel.  If dfactor is set, the default is 1.
     dfactor    - See dilation.  This parameter is equivalent to pfactor
                  in STSDAS crrej.  The current threshold for rejection
                  is multiplied by this factor when doing the search
                  with the dilated mask.  If dilation is set, the default
                  for this parameter is 0.5.
     bias       - Set if combining biases (divides through by number
                  of images at end, since exposure time is 0).
     tracking_set - Subscripts of pixels to be followed through the
                    computation.
     noskyadjust  - Sky not to be subtracted before rejection tests.  Default
                  is to do the subtraction.
     xmedsky    - Flag.  If set, the sky is computed as a 1-d array
                  which is a column-by-column median.  This is intended
                  for STIS slitless spectra.  If sky adjustment is
                  disabled, this keyword has no effect.
     input_mask - Mask cube input by the user.  Should be byte data
                  because it's boolean.  1 means use the pixel,
                  and 0 means reject the pixel - these rejections
                  are in addition to those done by the CR rejection
                  algorithm as such.

     The following keywords control how the current guess at a CR-free
     "check image" is recomputed on each iteration:

     median_loop  - If set, the check image for each iteration is
                    the pixel-by-pixel median. THE MEAN IS
                    RETURNED in combined_image even if you set
                    this option.  (Default is mean_loop.)
     minimum_loop - If set, the check image for each iteration is
                    the pixel-by-pixel minimum. THE MEAN IS
                    RETURNED in combined_image even if you set
                    this option.  (Default is mean_loop.)
     mean_loop    - If set, the check image for each iteration is
                    the pixel-by-pixel mean.  (Same as the default.)
     noclearmask  - By default, the mask of CR flags is reset before
                    every iteration, and a pixel that has been
                    rejected has a chance to get back in the game
                    if the average migrates toward its value.  If this
                    keyword is set, then any rejected pixel stays
                    rejected in subsequent iterations.  Note that what
                    stsdas.hst_calib.wfpc.crrej does is the same
                    as the default.  For this procedure, the default
                    was NOT to clear the flags, until 20 Oct. 1997.
     restore_sky  - Flag.  If set, the routine adds the sky back into
                    input_cube before returning.  Works only if
                    weighting=0.
     null_value   - Value to be used for output pixels to which no
                    input pixels contribute.  Default=0
     weighting    - Selects weighting scheme in final image
                    combination:
                     0 (default) - Poissonian weighting - co-add
                         detected DN from non-CR pixels.  (Pixel-by-
                         pixel scaling up to total exposure time,
                         for pixels in stack where some rejected.)
                         Equivalent to exptime weighting of rates.
                     1 or more - Sky and read noise weighting of rates.
                         Computed as weighted average of DN rates,
                         with total exp time multiplied back in
                         afterward.

                    In all cases, the image is returned as a sum in
                    DN with the total exposure time of the image
                    stack, and with total sky added back in.

     The following keywords allow the initial guess at a CR-free "check
     image" to be of a different kind from the iterative guesses:

     init_med  - If set, the initial check image is
                 the pixel-by-pixel median.  (Not permitted if
                 input_cube has fewer than 3 planes; default is minimum.)
     init_mean - If set, the initial check image is
                 the pixel-by-pixel mean.  (Default is minimum.)
     init_min  - If set, the initial check image is
                 the pixel-by-pixel minimum.  (Same as the default.)

 OUTPUT ARGUMENTS::
     combined_image - Mean image with CRs removed.
     combined_npix  - Byte (or integer) image of same dimensions as
                      combined_image, with each element containing
                      the number of non-CR stacked pixels that
                      went into the  result.
     combined_noise - Noise in combined image according to noise model
                      or supplied noise cube.

 OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
     mask_cube      - CR masks for each input image.  1 means
                      good pixel; 0 means CR pixel.
     skyvals        - Sky value array.  For an image cube with N planes,
                      this array is fltarr(N) if the sky is a scalar per
                      image plane, and fltarr(XDIM, N), is the XMEDSKY
                      is set.

 INPUT/OUTPUT KEYWORD:
     noise_cube     - Estimated noise in each pixel of input_cube as
                      returned (if rd_noise_dn ge 0), or input noise
                      per pixel of image_cube (if rd_noise_dn lt 0).
     skybox         - X0, X1, Y0, Y1 bounds of image section used
                      to compute sky.  If supplied by user, this
                      region is used.  If not supplied, the
                      image bounds are returned.  This parameter might
                      be used (for instance) if the imaging area
                      doesn't include the whole chip.

 COMMON BLOCKS:  none

 SIDE EFFECTS:  none

 METHOD:

     COMPARISON WITH STSDAS

     Cr_reject emulates the crrej routine in stsdas.hst_calib.wfpc.
     The two routines have been verified to give identical results
     (except for some pixels along the edge of the image) under the
     following conditions:

          no sky adjustment
          no dilation of CRs
          initialization of trial image with minimum
          taking mean for each trial image after first (no choice
             in crrej)

     Dilation introduces a difference between crrej and this routine
     around the very edge of the image, because the IDL mask
     manipulation routines don't handle the edge the same way as crrej
     does.  Away from the edge, crrej and cr_reject are the same with
     respect to dilation.

     The main difference between crrej and cr_reject is in the sky
     computation.  Cr_reject does a DAOPHOT I sky computation on a
     subset of pixels grabbed from the image, whereas crrej searches
     for a histogram mode.

     REMARKS ON USAGE

     The default is that the initial guess at a CR-free image is the
     pixel-by-pixel minimum of all the input images.  The pixels
     cut from each component image are the ones more than nsig(0) sigma
     from this minimum image.  The next iteration is based on the
     mean of the cleaned-up component images, and the cut is taken
     at nsig(1) sigma.  The next iteration is also based on the mean with
     the cut taken at nsig(2) sigma.

     The user can specify an arbitrary sequence of sigma cuts, e.g.,
     nsig=[6,2] or nsig=[10,9,8,7].  The user can also specify that
     the initial guess is the median (/init_med) rather than the
     minimum, or even the mean.  The iterated cleaned_up images after
     the first guess can be computed as the mean or the median
     (/mean_loop or /median_loop).  The minimum_loop option is also
     specified, but this is a trivial case, and you wouldn't want
     to use it except perhaps for testing.

     The routine takes into account exposure time if you want it to,
     i.e., if the pieces of the CR-split aren't exactly the same.
     For bias frames (exposure time 0), set /bias to return the mean
     rather than the total of the cleaned-up component images.

     The crrej pfactor and radius to propagate the detected CRs
     outward from their initial locations have been implemented
     in slightly different form using the IDL DILATE function.

     It is possible to end up with output pixels to which no valid
     input pixels contribute.  These end up with the value
     NULL_VALUE, and the corresponding pixels of combined_npix are
     also returned as 0.  This result can occur when the pixel is
     very noisy across the whole image stack, i.e., if all the
     values are, at any step of the process, far from the stack
     average at that position even after rejecting the real
     outliers.  Because  pixels are flagged symmetrically N sigma
     above and below the  current combined image (see code), all
     the pixels at a given  position can end up getting flagged.
     (At least, that's how I think it happens.)

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
      5 Mar. 1997 - Written.  R. S. Hill
     14 Mar. 1997 - Changed to masking approach to keep better
                    statistics and return CR-affected pixels to user.
                    Option to track subset of pixels added.
                    Dilation of initially detected CRs added.
                    Other small changes.  RSH
     17 Mar. 1997 - Arglist and treatment of exposure times fiddled
                    to mesh better with stis_cr.  RSH
     25 Mar. 1997 - Fixed bug if dilation finds nothing.  RSH
      4 Apr. 1997 - Changed name to cr_reject.  RSH
     15 Apr. 1997 - Restyled with emacs, nothing else done.  RSH
     18 Jun. 1997 - Input noise cube allowed.  RSH
     19 Jun. 1997 - Multiplicative noise deleted from final error.  RSH
     20 Jun. 1997 - Fixed error in using input noise cube.  RSH
     12 July 1997 - Sky adjustment option.  RSH
     27 Aug. 1997 - Dilation kernel made round, not square, and
                    floating-point radius allowed.  RSH
     16 Sep. 1997 - Clearmask added.  Intermediate as well as final
                    mean is exptime weighted.  RSH
     17 Sep. 1997 - Redundant zeroes around dilation kernel trimmed.  RSH
      1 Oct. 1997 - Bugfix in preceding.  RSH
     21 Oct. 1997 - Clearmask changed to noclearmask.  Bug in robust
                    array division fixed (misplaced parens).  Sky as
                    a function of X (option).  RSH
     30 Jan. 1998 - Restore_sky keyword added.  RSH
      5 Feb. 1998 - Quick help corrected and updated.  RSH
      6 Feb. 1998 - Fixed bug in execution sequence for tracking_set
                    option.  RSH
     18 Mar. 1998 - Eliminated confusing maxiter spec.  Added
                    null_value keyword.  RSH
     15 May  1998 - Input_mask keyword.  RSH
     27 May  1998 - Initialization of minimum image corrected. NRC, RSH
      9 June 1998 - Input mask cube processing corrected.  RSH
     21 Sep. 1998 - Weighting keyword added.  RSH
      7 Oct. 1998 - Fixed bug in input_mask processing (introduced
                    in preceding update).  Input_mask passed to
                    skyadj_cube.  RSH
      5 Mar. 1999 - Force init_min for 2 planes.  RSH
      1 Oct. 1999 - Make sure weighting=1 not given with noise cube.  RSH
      1 Dec. 1999 - Corrections to doc; restore_sky needs weighting=0.  RSH
     17 Mar. 2000 - SKYBOX added.  RSH

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/cr_reject.pro)

CSPLINE

 NAME:
      CSPLINE

 PURPOSE:
      Function to evaluate a natural cubic spline at specified data points
 EXPLANATION:
      Combines the Numerical Recipes functions SPL_INIT and SPL_INTERP

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      result = cspline( x, y, t, [ DERIV = ])

 INPUTS:
      x - vector of spline node positions, must be monotonic increasing or
          decreasing
      y - vector of node values
      t - x-positions at which to evaluate the spline, scalar or vector

 INPUT-OUTPUT KEYWORD:
      DERIV - values of the second derivatives of the interpolating function
               at the node points.   This is an intermediate step in the
               computation of the natural spline that requires only the X and
               Y vectors.    If repeated interpolation is to be applied to
               the same (X,Y) pair, then some computation time can be saved
               by supplying the DERIV keyword on each call.   On the first call
               DERIV will be computed and returned on output.

 OUTPUT:
       the values for positions t are returned as the function value
       If any of the input variables are double precision, then the output will
       also be double precision; otherwise the output is floating point.

 EXAMPLE:
       The following uses the example vectors from the SPL_INTERP documentation

       IDL> x = (findgen(21)/20.0)*2.0*!PI ;X vector
       IDL> y = sin(x)                     ;Y vector
       IDL> t = (findgen(11)/11.0)*!PI     ;Values at which to interpolate
       IDL> cgplot,x,y,psym=1                ;Plot original grid
       IDL> cgplot, /over, t,cspline(x,y,t),psym=2 ;Overplot interpolated values

 METHOD:
      The "Numerical Recipes" implementation of the natural cubic spline is
      used, by calling the intrinsic IDL functions SPL_INIT and SPL_INTERP.

 HISTORY:
      version 1  D. Lindler  May, 1989
      version 2  W. Landsman April, 1997
      Rewrite using the intrinsic SPL_INIT & SPL_INTERP functions
      Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
      Work for monotonic decreasing X vector    W. Landsman   February 1999

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/cspline.pro)

CT2LST

 NAME:
     CT2LST
 PURPOSE:
     To convert from Local Civil Time to Local Mean Sidereal Time.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     CT2LST, Lst, Lng, Tz, Time, [Day, Mon, Year]
                       or
     CT2LST, Lst, Lng, dummy, JD

 INPUTS:
     Lng  - The longitude in degrees (east of Greenwich) of the place for
            which the local sidereal time is desired, scalar.   The Greenwich
            mean sidereal time (GMST) can be found by setting Lng = 0.
     Tz  - The time zone of the site in hours, positive East  of the Greenwich
           meridian (ahead of GMT).  Use this parameter to easily account
           for Daylight Savings time (e.g. -4=EDT, -5 = EST/CDT), scalar
           This parameter is not needed (and ignored) if Julian date is
           supplied.    ***Note that the sign of TZ was changed in July 2008
           to match the standard definition.***
     Time or JD  - If more than four parameters are specified, then this is
               the time of day of the specified date in decimal hours.  If
               exactly four parameters are specified, then this is the
               Julian date of time in question, scalar or vector

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
      Day -  The day of the month (1-31),integer scalar or vector
      Mon -  The month, in numerical format (1-12), integer scalar or vector
      Year - The 4 digit year (e.g. 2008), integer scalar or vector

 OUTPUTS:
       Lst   The Local Sidereal Time for the date/time specified in hours.

 RESTRICTIONS:
       If specified, the date should be in numerical form.  The year should
       appear as yyyy.

 PROCEDURE:
       The Julian date of the day and time is question is used to determine
       the number of days to have passed since 0 Jan 2000.  This is used
       in conjunction with the GST of that date to extrapolate to the current
       GST; this is then used to get the LST.    See Astronomical Algorithms
       by Jean Meeus, p. 84 (Eq. 11-4) for the constants used.

 EXAMPLE:
       Find the Greenwich mean sidereal time (GMST) on 2008 Jul 30 at 15:53 pm
       in Baltimore, Maryland (longitude=-76.72 degrees).   The timezone is
       EDT or tz=-4

       IDL> CT2LST, lst, -76.72, -4,ten(15,53), 30, 07, 2008

               ==> lst =  11.356505  hours  (= 11h 21m 23.418s)

       The Web site  http://tycho.usno.navy.mil/sidereal.html contains more
       info on sidereal time, as well as an interactive calculator.
 PROCEDURES USED:
       jdcnv - Convert from year, month, day, hour to julian date

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
     Adapted from the FORTRAN program GETSD by Michael R. Greason, STX,
               27 October 1988.
     Use IAU 1984 constants Wayne Landsman, HSTX, April 1995, results
               differ by about 0.1 seconds
     Longitudes measured *east* of Greenwich   W. Landsman    December 1998
     Time zone now measure positive East of Greenwich W. Landsman July 2008
     Remove debugging print statement  W. Landsman April 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/ct2lst.pro)

CURS

 NAME:
       CURS
 PURPOSE:
       Selects an X windows cursor shape
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       curs            ;Interactively select a cursor shape.
       curs, sel       ;Make the given CURSOR_STANDARD value the cursor
                        shape.
 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       sel  -  Either an integer giving the CURSOR_STANDARD value (usually an
               even value between 0 and 152) indicating the cursor shape, or
               a string from the following menu
       a -- Up arrow
       b -- Left-angled arrow
       c -- Right-angled arrow
       d -- Crosshair
       e -- Finger pointing left
       f -- Finger pointing right
       g -- Narrow crosshair
       h -- Cycle through all possible standard cursor shapes

       The full list of available cursor values is given in
      /usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h
 OUTPUTS:
       None.
 RESTRICTIONS:
       Uses the CURSOR_STANDARD keyword of the DEVICE procedure.  Although
       this keyword is available in Windows IDL, the values
       used by this procedure are specific to the X windows device.

 PROCEDURE:
       If the user supplies a valid cursor shape value, it is set.  Otherwise,
       an interactive command loop is entered; it will continue until a valid
       value is given.
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Converted to VAX 3100 workstations / IDL V2.  M. Greason, STX, May 1990.
       Avoid bad cursor parameter values  W. Landsman   February, 1991
       Don't change value of input param        W. Landsman   August 1995
       Use SIZE(/TNAME) instead of DATATYPE()   W. Landsman  October 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/tv/curs.pro)

CURVAL

 NAME:
       CURVAL
 PURPOSE:
       Cursor controlled display of image intensities and astronomical coords
 EXPLANATION
       CURVAL displays different information depending whether the user
       supplied an image array, and/or a FITS header array

       Note that in the usual truecolor mode, the byte intensity returned by
       CURVAL does not correspond to the byte scaled image value but rather
       returns the maximum value in each color gun.
 CALLING SEQUENCE(S):
       curval          ;Display x,y and byte intensity (inten)

       curval, im   ;Display x,y,inten, and also pixel value (from image array)

       curval, hdr, [ im, OFFSET= , ZOOM=, FILENAME=, ALT=]

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       Hdr  = FITS Header array
       Im  = Array containing values that are displayed.  Any type.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
      ALT - single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying an alternate
            astrometry system present in the FITS header.    The default is
            to use the primary astrometry or ALT = ' '.   If /ALT is set,
            then this is equivalent to ALT = 'A'.   See Section 3.3 of
            Greisen & Calabretta (2002, A&A, 395, 1061) for information about
            alternate astrometry keywords.
      OFFSET - 2 element vector giving the location of the image pixel (0,0)
               on the window display.   OFFSET can be positive (e.g if the
               image is centered in a larger window) or negative (e.g. if the
               only the central region of an image much larger than the window
               is being displayed.
               Default value is [0,0], or no offset.
       ZOOM - Scalar specifying the magnification of the window with respect
               to the image variable.    Use, for example, if image has been
               REBINed before display.
       FILENAME  = name of file to where CURVAL data can be saved.
               Data will only be saved if left or center mouse button
               are pressed.

 OUTPUTS:
       None.

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       X and Y values, etc., of the pixel under the cursor are constantly
       displayed.
       Pressing left or center mouse button prints a line of output, and
       starts a new line.
       Pressing right mouse button exits the procedure.
       If the keyword FILENAME is defined, the date and time, and a heading
       will be printed in the file before the data.

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       ADSTRING(), EXTAST, GSSSXYAD, RADEC, SXPAR(), UNZOOM_XY, XY2AD
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written,  K. Rhode,  STX  May 1990
       Added keyword FILENAME  D. Alexander  June 1991
       Don't write to Journal file   W. Landsman    March 1993
       Use astrometry structure  W. Landsman      Feb 1994
       Modified for Mac IDL          I.   Freedman     April 1994
       Allow for zoomed or offset image  W. Landsman      Mar 1996
       Proper rounding of zoomed pixel values   W. Landsman/R. Hurt  Dec. 1997
       Remove unneeded calls to obsolete !ERR   W. Landsman   December 2000
       Replace remaining !ERR calls with !MOUSE.BUTTON W. Landsman Jan 2001
       Allow for non-celestial (e.g. Galactic) coordinates W. Landsman Apr 2003
       Work if RA/Dec reversed in CTYPE keyword  W. Landsman Feb. 2004
       Always call UNZOOM_XY for MOUSSE compatibility W. Landsman Sep. 2004
       Added ALT keyword  W. Landsman October 2004
       Always test if offset/zoom supplied  W. Landsman  Feb 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/tv/curval.pro)

DAOERF

 NAME:
	DAOERF
 PURPOSE:
	Calulates the intensity, and derivatives, of a 2-d Gaussian PSF
 EXPLANATION:
	Corrects for the finite size of a pixel by integrating the Gaussian
	over the size of the pixel.    Used in the IDL-DAOPHOT sequence.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	DAOERF, XIN, YIN, A, F, [ PDER ]

 INPUTS:
	XIN - input scalar, vector or array, giving X coordinate values
	YIN - input scalar, vector or array, giving Y coordinate values, must
		have same number of elements as XIN.
	A - 5 element parameter array describing the Gaussian
		A(0) - peak intensity
		A(1) - X position of peak intensity (centroid)
		A(2) - Y position of peak intensity (centroid)
		A(3) - X sigma of the gaussian (=FWHM/2.345)
		A(4) - Y sigma of gaussian

 OUTPUTS:
	F - array containing value of the function at each (XIN,YIN)
	    The number of output elements in F and PDER is identical with
		the number of elements in X and Y

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
	PDER - 2 dimensional array of size (NPTS,5) giving the analytic
		derivative at each value of F with respect to each parameter A.

 REVISION HISTORY:
	Written: W. Landsman                October, 1987
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/daoerf.pro)

DAO_VALUE

 NAME:
	DAO_VALUE
 PURPOSE:
	Returns the value of a DAOPHOT point-spread function at a set of points.
 EXPLANATION:
	The value of the point-spread function is the sum of a
	two-dimensional integral under a bivariate Gaussian function, and
	a value obtained by interpolation in a look-up table.  DAO_VALUE will
	optionally compute the derivatives wrt X and Y

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	Result = DAO_VALUE( xx, yy, gauss, psf, [ dvdx, dvdy ] )

 INPUTS:
	XX,YY   - the real coordinates of the desired point relative
		to the centroid of the point-spread function.
	GAUSS  -  5 element vector describing the bivariate Gaussian
	GAUSS(0)- the peak height of the best-fitting Gaussian profile.
	GAUSS(1,2) - x and y offsets from the centroid of the point-spread
		function to the center of the best-fitting Gaussian.
	GAUSS(3,4) - the x and y sigmas of the best-fitting Gaussian.
	PSF  -  a NPSF by NPSF array containing the look-up table.

 OUTPUTS:
    RESULT - the computed value of the point-spread function at
             a position XX, YY relative to its centroid (which
             coincides with the center of the central pixel of the
             look-up table).

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
       DVDX,DVDY - the first derivatives of the composite point-spread
             function with respect to x and y.

 NOTES
 	although the arguments XX,YY of the function DAO_VALUE
	are relative to the centroid of the PSF, the function RINTER which
	DAO_VALUE calls requires coordinates relative to the corner of the
	array (see code).

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
	DAOERF, RINTER()
 REVISON HISTORY:
	Adapted to IDL by B. Pfarr, STX, 11/17/87 from 1986 STSDAS version
	of DAOPHOT
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/dao_value.pro)

DATE

 NAME:
	DATE
 PURPOSE:
	Convert day-of-year to a DD-MMM-YYYY string

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	D_String = DATE(Year, day )

 INPUTS:
	Year - Integer scalar specifying the year.   If the year contains only
		two digits, then it is assumed to indicate the number of
		years after 1900.

	Day - Integer scalar giving number of days after Jan 0 of the
		specified year.    Can be larger than 366

 OUTPUTS:
	D_String - String giving date in format '13-MAR-1986'

 RESTRICTIONS:
	Will not work for years before 100 AD
 EXAMPLE:
	IDL> print, date(1997,279)
		'6-Oct-1997'

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       D.M. fecit  24 October,1983
	Work for years outside of the 19th century  W. Landsman  September 1997
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/date.pro)

DATE_CONV

 NAME:
     DATE_CONV
 PURPOSE:
     Procedure to perform conversion of dates to one of three possible formats.

 EXPLANATION:
     The following date formats are allowed

       format 1: real*8 scalar encoded as:
               year*1000 + day + hour/24. + min/24./60 + sec/24./60/60
               where day is the day of year (1 to 366)
       format 2: Vector encoded as:
               date[0] = year (eg. 2005)
               date[1] = day of year (1 to 366)
               date[2] = hour
               date[3] = minute
               date[4] = second
       format 3: string (ascii text) encoded as
               DD-MON-YEAR HH:MM:SS.SS
               (eg.  14-JUL-2005 15:25:44.23)
            OR
               YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.SS  (ISO standard)
               (eg.  1987-07-14 15:25:44.23 or 1987-07-14T15:25:44.23)

       format 4: three element vector giving spacecraft time words
       from a Hubble Space Telescope (HST) telemetry packet.   Based on
       total number of secs since midnight, JAN. 1, 1979

       format 5: Julian day. As this is also a scalar, like format 1,
       	the distinction between the two on input is made based on their
       	value. Numbers > 2300000 are interpreted as Julian days.

 CALLING SEQUENCE
       results = DATE_CONV( DATE, TYPE )

 INPUTS:
       DATE - input date in one of the possible formats. Must be scalar.
       TYPE - type of output format desired.  If not supplied then
               format 3 (real*8 scalar) is used.
                       valid values:
                       'REAL'  - format 1
                       'VECTOR' - format 2
                       'STRING' - format 3
                       'FITS' - YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.SS'
                       'JULIAN' - Julian date
                       'MODIFIED' - Modified Julian date (JD-2400000.5)
               TYPE can be abbreviated to the single character strings 'R',
               'V', 'S', 'F', 'J', and 'M'.
               Nobody wants to convert TO spacecraft time (I hope!)
 OUTPUTS:
       The converted date is returned as the function value.

 EXAMPLES:
       IDL> print,date_conv('2006-03-13 19:58:00.00'),f='(f15.5)'
             2006072.83194
       IDL> print,date_conv( 2006072.8319444d,'F')
             2006-03-13T19:58:00.00
       IDL> print,date_conv( 2006072.8319444d,'V')
             2006.00      72.0000      19.0000      57.0000      59.9962
       IDL> print,date_conv( 2006072.8319444d,'J'), f='(f15.5)'
             2453808.33194


 HISTORY:
      version 1  D. Lindler  July, 1987
      adapted for IDL version 2  J. Isensee  May, 1990
      Made year 2000 compliant; allow ISO format input  jls/acc Oct 1998
      DJL/ACC Jan 1998, Modified to work with dates such as 6-JAN-1996 where
               day of month has only one digit.
      DJL, Nov. 2000, Added input/output format YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.SS
      Replace spaces with '0' in output FITS format  W.Landsman April 2006
      Added Julian date capabilities on input and output.  M.Perrin, July 2007
      Removed spurious /WARN keyword to MESSAGE W.L. Feb 2012

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/date_conv.pro)

DAYCNV

 NAME:
       DAYCNV
 PURPOSE:
       Converts Julian dates to Gregorian calendar dates

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       DAYCNV, XJD, YR, MN, DAY, HR

 INPUTS:
       XJD = Julian date, positive double precision scalar or vector

 OUTPUTS:
       YR = Year (Integer)
       MN = Month (Integer)
       DAY = Day (Integer)
       HR = Hours and fractional hours (Real).   If XJD is a vector,
               then YR,MN,DAY and HR will be vectors of the same length.

 EXAMPLE:
       IDL> DAYCNV, 2440000.D, yr, mn, day, hr

       yields yr = 1968, mn =5, day = 23, hr =12.

 WARNING:
       Be sure that the Julian date is specified as double precision to
       maintain accuracy at the fractional hour level.

 METHOD:
       Uses the algorithm of Fliegel and Van Flandern (1968) as reported in
       the "Explanatory Supplement to the Astronomical Almanac" (1992), p. 604
       Works for all Gregorian calendar dates with XJD > 0, i.e., dates after
       -4713 November 23.
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Converted to IDL from Yeoman's Comet Ephemeris Generator,
       B. Pfarr, STX, 6/16/88
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/daycnv.pro)

DBBUILD

 NAME:
	DBBUILD
 PURPOSE:
	Build a database by appending new values for every item.
 EXPLANATION:
	The database must be opened for update (with DBOPEN) before calling
	DBBUILD.     This version for IDL V6.1 or later.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	DBBUILD, [ v1, v2, v3, v4......v50, /NOINDEX, /SILENT, STATUS =  ]

 INPUTS:
	v1,v2....v50 - vectors containing values for all items in the database.
         V1 contains values for the first item, V2 for the second, etc.
         The number of vectors supplied must equal the number of items
         (excluding entry number) in the database.  The number of elements
         in each vector should be the same.   A multiple valued item
         should be dimensioned NVALUE by NENTRY, where NVALUE is the number
         of values, and NENTRY is the number of entries.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
	/NOINDEX - If this keyword is supplied and non-zero then DBBUILD will
             *not* create an indexed file.    Useful to save time if
             DBBUILD is to be called several times and the indexed file need
             only be created on the last call

	/SILENT  - If the keyword SILENT is set and non-zero, then DBBUILD
	      will not print a message when the index files are generated

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
	STATUS - Returns a status code denoting whether the operation was
	      successful (1) or unsuccessful (0).  Useful when DBBUILD is
	      called from within other applications.

 EXAMPLE:
	Suppose a database named STARS contains the four items NAME,RA,DEC, and
	FLUX.   Assume that one already has the four vectors containing the
	values, and that the database definition (.DBD) file already exists.

	IDL> !PRIV=2                  ;Writing to database requires !PRIV=2
	IDL> dbcreate,'stars',1,1   ;Create database (.DBF) & index (.DBX) file
	IDL> dbopen,'stars',1         ;Open database for update
	IDL> dbbuild,name,ra,dec,flux ;Write 4 vectors into the database

 NOTES:
	Do not call DBCREATE before DBBUILD if you want to append entries to
	an existing database

	DBBUILD checks that each value vector matches the idl type given in the
	database definition (..dbd) file, and that character strings are the
	proper length.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DBCLOSE, DBINDEX, DBXPUT, DBWRT, IS_IEEE_BIG()
 REVISION HISTORY:
	Written          W. Landsman           March, 1989
	Added /NOINDEX keyword           W. Landsman        November, 1992
	User no longer need supply all items   W. Landsman  December, 1992
	Added STATUS keyword, William Thompson, GSFC, 1 April 1994
	Added /SILENT keyword, William Thompson, GSFC, October 1995
	Allow up to 30 items, fix problem if first item was multiple value
				  W. Landsman    GSFC, July 1996
	Faster build of external databases on big endian machines
				  W. Landsman    GSFC, November 1997
       Use SIZE(/TNAME) for error mesage display  W.Landsman   July 2001
       Fix message display error introduced July 2001  W. Landsman   Oct. 2001
       Make sure error message appears even if !QUIET is set W.L November 2006
       Major rewrite to use SCOPE_VARFETCH, accept 50 input items
                   W. Landsman    November 2006
      Fix warning if parameters have different # of elements W.L.  May 2010
      Fix warning if scalar parameter supplied W.L.  June 2010
      Fix for when first parameter is multi-dimensioned W.L. July 2010
      Check data type of first parameter W.L. Jan 2012

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbbuild.pro)

DBCIRCLE

 NAME:
      DBCIRCLE
 PURPOSE:
      Find sources in a database within specified radius of specified center
 EXPLANATION:
      Database must include items named 'RA' (in hours) and 'DEC' (in degrees)
      and must have previously been opened with DBOPEN

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     list = DBCIRCLE( ra_cen, dec_cen, [radius, dis, sublist, /SILENT,
                                /GALACTIC, TO_B1950, /TO_J2000, COUNT= ] )

 INPUTS:
       RA_CEN - Right ascension of the search center in decimal HOURS, scalar
       DEC_CEN - Declination of the search center in decimal DEGREES, scalar
               RA_CEN and DEC_CEN should be in the same equinox as the
               currently opened catalog.

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       RADIUS - Radius of the search field in arc minutes, scalar.
               DBCIRCLE prompts for RADIUS if not supplied.
       SUBLIST - Vector giving entry numbers in currently opened database
               to be searched.  Default is to search all entries

 OUTPUTS:
     LIST - Vector giving entry numbers in the currently opened catalog
            which have positions within the specified search circle
            LIST is set to -1 if no sources fall within the search circle

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT
       DIS -  The distance in arcminutes of each entry specified by LIST
               to the search center (given by RA_CEN and DEC_CEN)

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       /GALACTIC - if set, then the first two parameters are interpreted as
                 Galactic coordinates in degrees, and is converted internally
                 to J2000 celestial to search the database.
       /SILENT - If this keyword is set, then DBCIRCLE will not print the
               number of entries found at the terminal
       /TO_J2000 - If this keyword is set, then the entered coordinates are
               assumed to be in equinox B1950, and will be converted to
               J2000 before searching the database
       /TO_B1950 - If this keyword is set, then the entered coordinates are
               assumed to be in equinox J2000, and will be converted to
               B1950 before searching the database
               NOTE: The user must determine on his own whether the database
               is in B1950 or J2000 coordinates.
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUT:
       COUNT - - Integer scalar giving the number of valid matches
 METHOD:
       A DBFIND search is first performed on a square area of given radius.
       The list is the restricted to a circular area by using GCIRC to
       compute the distance of each object to the field center.

 RESTRICTIONS;
       The database must have items 'RA' (in hours) and 'DEC' (in degrees).
       Alternatively, the database could have items RA_OBJ and DEC_OBJ
      (both in degrees)
 EXAMPLE:
       Find all Hipparcos stars within 40' of the nucleus of M33
       (at J2000 1h 33m 50.9s 30d 39' 36.7'')

       IDL> dbopen,'hipparcos'
       IDL> list = dbcircle( ten(1,33,50.9), ten(3,39,36.7), 40)

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       BPRECESS, DBFIND(), DBEXT, DB_INFO(), GCIRC, GLACTC, JPRECESS
 REVISION HISTORY:
      Written W. Landsman     STX           January 1990
      Fixed search when crossing 0h         July 1990
      Spiffed up code a bit     October, 1991
      Leave DIS vector unchanged if no entries found W. Landsman July 1999
      Use maximum declination, rather than declination at field center to
      correct RA for latitude effect    W. Landsman   September 1999
      Added COUNT, GALACTIC keywords  W. Landsman   December 2008
      Fix problem when RA range exceeds 24h  W. Landsman   April 2009
      Work as advertised for RA_OBJ field  W. Landsman June 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbcircle.pro)

DBCLOSE

 NAME:
       DBCLOSE
 PURPOSE:
       procedure to close a data base file

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbclose

 INPUTS:
       None

 OUTPUTS
       None

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       the data base files currently opened are closed

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DB_INFO(), HOST_TO_IEEE
 HISTORY:
       version 2  D. Lindler  Oct. 1987
       For IDL version 2      August 1990
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 30 May 1994
                Added support for external (IEEE) data format
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbclose.pro)

DBCOMPARE

NAME:
DBCOMPARE
PURPOSE:
Display two entries in an IDL database side by side in a column format

CALLING SEQUENCE:
dbcompare, list1, list2, [items, TEXTOUT= , /DIFF]

INPUTS:
list1 - Integer scalar giving first entry number to be compared.
list2 - Integer scalar giving second entry number to be compared.

OPTIONAL INPUT-OUTPUT:
items - items to be compared, if not supplied then all items will be
compared. The items can be specified in any of the following ways:

form 1 scalar string giving item(s) as list of names
separated by commas
form 2 string array giving list of item names
form 3 string of form '$filename' giving name
of text file containing items (one item per line) line)
form 4 integer scalar giving single item number or
integer vector list of item numbers
form 5 Null string specifying interactive selection. This
is the default if 'items' is not supplied
form 6 '*' select all items (= default)

If items was undefined or a null string on input, then
on output it will contain the items interactively selected.

OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
/DIFF - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then only the items
in the database that differ will be printed

TEXTOUT - Scalar Integer (1-7) Used to determine output device. See
TEXTOPEN for more info.

SYSTEM VARIABLES:
Output device controlled by non-standard system variable !TEXTOUT, if
TEXTOUT keyword is not used.

EXAMPLE:
Display entries 3624 and 3625 in column form showing only the items
that differ.
IDL> dbcompare,3624,3625,/diff

PROCEDURES USED:
DB_INFO(), DB_ITEM, DB_ITEM_INFO(), DBRD, DBXVAL()
TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE
HISTORY:
Written, W. Landsman July 1996
Fix documentation, add Syntax display W. Landsman November 1998
Replace DATATYPE() with size(/TNAME) W. Landsman November 2001
Assume since V5.5, remove VMS call W. Landsman September 2006
Fix problem with multiple values when /DIFF set W. Landsman April 2007

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbcompare.pro)

DBCREATE

 NAME:
       DBCREATE
 PURPOSE:
       Create a new data base (.dbf), index (.dbx) or description (.dbh) file
 EXPLANATION:
       A database definition (.dbd) file must already exist in the current
       directory or in a ZDBASE directory.    The new .dbf, .dbx and/or .dbh
       files will be written to the same directory.   So if the .dbd file is
       in a ZDBASE directory, then the user must have write privilege to that
       directory

       This version allows record length to be larger than 32767 bytes
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbcreate, name,[ newindex, newdb, maxitems]  [,/EXTERNAL, MAXENTRY=]

 INPUTS:
       name- name of the data base (with no qualifier), scalar string.
               The description will be read from the file "NAME".dbd
               Maximum length of name is 19 characters.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       newindex - if non-zero then a new index file is created,
               otherwise it is assumed that changes do not affect the
               index file. (default=0)
       newdb - if non-zero then a new data base file (.dbf) will
               be created. Otherwise changes are assumed not to affect
               the file's present format.
       maxitems - maximum number of items in data base.
               If not supplied then the number of items is
               limited to 200.

 OUTPUTS:
       NONE.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:

       external - If set, then the database is written with an external data
               representation.  This allows the database files to be used on
               any computer platform, e.g. through NFS mounts, but some
               overhead is added to reading the files.  The default is to
               write the data in the native format of the computer being used.

               This keyword is only paid attention to if NEWDB or NEWINDEX
               are nonzero.  Otherwise, the database is opened to find
               out if it uses external representation or not.

               Extreme caution should be used if this keyword is used with
               only NEWINDEX set to a nonzero value.  This mode is allowed so
               that databases written on machines which already use the
               external data representation format, e.g. Sun workstations, to
               be marked external so that other machines can read them.


       MAXENTRY - positive integer giving the maximum number of entries in the
               database (needed to adjust the size of the index file).   This
               keyword can be used to supercede the  #maxentries line in the
               .dbd file (the larger of the two numbers will be used).
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       GETTOK(), FIND_WITH_DEF(), ZPARCHECK

 RESTRICTIONS:
       If newdb=0 is not specified, the changes to the .dbd file can
       not alter the length of the records in the data base file.
       and may not alter positions of current fields in the file.
       permissible changes are:
               1) utilization of spares to create a item or field
               2) change in field name(s)
               3) respecification of index items
               4) changes in default print formats
               5) change in data base title
               6) changes in pointer specification to other data
                       data bases

       !priv must be 2 or greater to execute this routine.


 SIDE EFFECTS:
       data base description file ZDBASE:name.dbh is created
       and optionally ZDBASE:name.dbf (data file) and
       ZDBASE.dbx (index file) if it is a new data base.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       D. Lindler, GSFC/HRS, October 1987
       Modified:  Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 29 March 1994
                  Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 28 May 1994
                  Added EXTERNAL keyword.
       Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 3 November 1994
                       Modified to allow ZDBASE to be a path string.
       8/14/95  JKF/ACC - allow EXTERNAL data for newindex OR newdb modes.
       Make sure all databases closed before starting W. Landsman June 1997
       Added new unsigned and 64 bit integer datatypes W. Landsman July 2001
       Make sure to use lowercase filenames on Unix W. Landsman May 2006
       Added MAXENTRY keyword   W. Landsman July 2006
       Assume since V5.5, remove obsolete keywords to OPEN W. Landsman Sep2006
       No longer required to be a ZDBASE directory  W. Landsman Feb 2008
       Fix Feb 2008 bug when files are in current dir W. L.  May 2008
       Fix May 2008 bug when files are not in current dir (sigh) W. L. May 2008
       Warn if database length exceeds 32767 bytes  W.L. Dec 2009
       Remove spurious warning that database name is too long W.L. April 2010
       Support entry lengths larger than 32767 bytes W.L. Oct. 2010
       Better testing for valid print formats W.L. Nov 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbcreate.pro)

DBDELETE

 NAME:
       DBDELETE
 PURPOSE:
       Deletes specified entries from data base

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       DBDELETE, list, [ name, /DEBUG ]

 INPUTS:
       list - list of entries to be deleted, scalar or vector
       name - optional name of data base, scalar string.  If not specified
               then the data base file must be previously opened for update
               by DBOPEN.

 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
       !PRIV must be at least 3 to execute.

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       The data base file (ZDBASE:name.dbf) is modified by removing the
       specified entries and reordering the remaining entry numbers
       accordingly (ie. if you delete entry 100, it will be replaced
       by entry 101 and the database will contain 1 less entry.

 EXAMPLE:
        Delete entries in a database STARS where RA=DEC = 0.0

        IDL> !PRIV= 3                           ;Set privileges
        IDL> dbopen,'STARS',1                   ;Open for update
        IDL> list = dbfind('ra=0.0,dec=0.0')    ;Obtain LIST vector
        IDL> dbdelete, list             ;Delete specified entries from db

 NOTES:
       The procedure is rather slow because the entire database is re-
       created with the specified entries deleted.
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
        DEBUG - if this keyword is set and non-zero, then additional
               diagnostics will be printed as each entry is deleted.
 COMMON BLOCKS:
       DBCOM
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DBINDEX, DB_INFO(), DBOPEN, DBPUT, ZPARCHECK
 HISTORY
       Version 2  D. Lindler  July, 1989
       Updated documentation   W. Landsman    December 1992
       William Thompson, GSFC, 28 February 1995
                       Fixed bug when external representation used.
       Fixed for case where second parameter supplied W. Landsman April 1996
       Use keyword DEBUG rather than !DEBUG   W. Landsman    May 1997
       Don't call DBINDEX if no indexed items  W. Landsman May 2006
       Use TRUNCATE_LUN if V5.6 or later W. Landsman   Sep 2006
       Fix problem when deleting last entry   W. Landsman Mar 2007
       Assume since V5.6 so TRUNCATE_LUN is available   W. Landsman

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbdelete.pro)

DBEDIT

 NAME:
      DBEDIT

 PURPOSE:
       Interactively edit specified fields in an IDL database.
 EXPLANATION:
       The value of each field is displayed, and the user has the option
       of changing or keeping the value.  Widgets will be used if they
       are available.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbedit, list, [ items ]

 INPUTS:
       list - scalar or vector of database entry numbers.  Set list = 0 to
       interactively add a new entry to a database.  Set list = -1 to edit
       all entries.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       items - list of items to be edited.  If omitted, all fields can be
               edited.

 KEYWORDS:
       BYTENUM = If set, treat byte variables as numbers instead of
                 characters.

 COMMON BLOCKS:
       DB_COM -- contains information about the opened database.
       DBW_C -- contains information intrinsic to this program.

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       Will update the database files.

 RESTRICTIIONS:
       Database must be opened for update prior to running
       this program.  User must be running DBEDIT from an
       account that has write privileges to the databases.

       If one is editing an indexed item, then after all edits are complete,
       DBINDEX will be called to reindex the entire item.    This may
       be time consuming.

       Cannot be used to edit items with multiple values

 EXAMPLE:
       Suppose one had new parallaxes for all stars fainter than 5th magnitude
       in the Yale Bright Star Catalog and wanted to update the PRLAX and
       PRLAX_CODE fields with these new numbers

       IDL> !priv=2
       IDL> dbopen, 'yale_bs', 1            ;Open catalog for update
       IDL> list = dbfind( 'v>5')     ;Find fainter than 5th magnitude
       IDL> dbedit, list, 'prlax, prlax_code'   ;Manual entry of new values

 PROCEDURE:
       (1) Use the cursor and point to the value you want to edit.
       (2) Type the new field value over the old field value.
       (3) When you are done changing all of the field values for each entry
       save the entry to the databases by pressing 'SAVE ENTRY TO DATABASES'.
       Here all of the values will be checked to see if they are the correct
       data type.  If a field value is not of the correct data type, it will
       not be saved.

       Use the buttons "PREV ENTRY" and "NEXT ENTRY" to move between entry
       numbers.  You must save each entry before going on to another entry in
       order for your changes to be saved.

       Pressing "RESET THIS ENTRY" will remove any unsaved changes to the
       current entry.

REVISION HISTORY:
       Adapted from Landsman's DBEDIT
       added widgets,  Melissa Marsh, HSTX, August 1993
       do not need to press return after entering each entry,
                       fixed layout problem on SUN,
                       Melissa Marsh, HSTX, January 1994
       Only updates the fields which are changed. Joel Offenberg, HSTX, Mar 94
       Corrected test for changed fields  Wayne Landsman  HSTX, Mar 94
       Removed a couple of redundant statements W. Landsman HSTX Jan 96
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Replace DATAYPE() with size(/TNAME)   W. Landsman   November 2001
       Work for entry numbers > 32767     W. Landsman   December 2001
       Added /BYTENUM  William Thompson        13-Mar-2006
       Use DIALOG_MESSAGE for error messages  W. Landsman  April 2006
       Assume since V5.5, remove VMS support  W. Landsman  Sep 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbedit.pro)

DBEDIT_BASIC

 NAME:
       DBEDIT_BASIC
 PURPOSE:
       Subroutine of DBEDIT_BASIC to edit a database on a dumb terminal.
 EXPLANATION:
       Interactively edit specified fields in a database.  The
       value of each field is displayed, and the user has the option
       of changing or keeping the value.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbedit_basic, list, [ items ]

 INPUTS:
       list - scalar or vector of database entry numbers.  Set LIST=0
               to interactively add a new entry to a database.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS
       items - list of items to be edited.  If not supplied, then the
               value of every field will be displayed.

 NOTES:
       (1) Database must be opened for update (dbopen,<dbname>,1) before
       calling DBEDIT_BASIC.  User must have write privileges on the database
       files.
       (2) User gets a second chance to look at edited values, before
       they are actually written to the database

 PROMPTS:
       The item values for each entry to be edited are first displayed
       User is the asked "EDIT VALUES IN THIS ENTRY (Y(es), N(o), or Q(uit))?
       If user answers 'Y' or hits RETURN, then each item is displayed
       with its current value, which the user can update.  If user answered
       'N' then DBEDIT_BASIC skips to the next  entry.   If user answers 'Q'
       then DBEDIT will exit, saving all previous changes.

 EXAMPLE:
       Suppose V magnitudes (V_MAG) in a database STARS with unknown values
       were assigned a value of 99.9.  Once the true values become known, the
       database can be edited

       IDL> !PRIV=2 & dbopen,'STARS',1         ;Open database for update
       IDL> list =  dbfind('V_MAG=99.9')       ;Get list of bad V_MAG values
       IDL> dbedit,list,'V_MAG'       ;Interactively insert good V_MAG values

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written  W. Landsman     STX        April, 1989
       Rename DBEDIT_BASIC from DBEDIT            July, 1993
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Change DATATYPE() to size(/TNAME)  W. Landsman   November 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbedit_basic.pro)

DBEXT

 NAME:
       DBEXT
 PURPOSE:
       Extract values of up to 12 items from an IDL database
 EXPLANATION:
       Procedure to extract values of up to 12 items from
       data base file, and place into IDL variables

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbext,list,items,v1,[v2,v3,v4,v5,v6,v7,v8,v9,v10,v11,v12]

 INPUTS:
       list - list of entry numbers to be printed, vector or scalar
               If list = -1, then all entries will be extracted.
               list may be converted to a vector by DBEXT
       items - standard item list specification.  See DBPRINT for
               the 6 different ways that items may be specified.

 OUTPUTS:
       v1...v12 - the vectors of values for up to 12 items.

 EXAMPLE:
       Extract all RA and DEC values from the currently opened database, and
       place into the IDL vectors, IDLRA and IDLDEC.

               IDL> DBEXT,-1,'RA,DEC',idlra,idldec

 HISTORY
       version 2  D. Lindler  NOV. 1987
       check for INDEXED items   W. Landsman   Feb. 1989
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Avoid EXECUTE() call for V6.1 or later  W. Landsman   December 2006
       Assume since V6.1   W. Landsman June 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbext.pro)

DBEXT_DBF

 NAME:
       DBEXT_DBF
 PURPOSE:
       Subroutine of DBEXT to extract values of up to 18 items from a database
 EXPLANATION:
       This is a subroutine of DBEXT, which is the routine a user should
       normally use.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbext_dbf,list,dbno,sbyte,nbytes,idltype,nval,v1,[ v2,v3,v4,v5,v6,v7,
                  v8,v9,v10,v11,v12,v13,v14,v15,v16,v17,v18 ITEM_DBNO = ]

 INPUTS:
       list - list of entry numbers to extract desired items.   It is the
               entry numbers in the primary data base unless dbno is greater
               than or equal to -1.  In that case it is the entry number in
               the specified data base.
       dbno - number of the opened db file
               if set to -1 then all data bases are included
       sbyte - starting byte in the entry.  If single data base then it must
               be the starting byte for that data base only and not the
               concatenation of db records
       nbytes - number of bytes in the entry
       idltype - idl data type of each item to be extracted
       nval - number of values per entry of each item to be extracted

 OUTPUTS:
       v1...v18 - the vectors of values for up to 18 items

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       item_dbno - A vector of the individual database numbers for each item.
               Simplifies the code for linked databases
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DB_INFO(), DB_ITEM_INFO(), DBRD, DBXVAL(), IS_IEEE_BIG(), IEEE_TO_HOST
 HISTORY
       version 1  D. Lindler  Nov. 1987
       Extract multiple valued entries    W. Landsman   May 1989
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 1 June 1994
               Added support for external (IEEE) representation.
       Work with multiple element string items  W. Landsman  August 1995
       Increase speed for external databases on IEEE machines WBL August 1996
       IEEE conversion implemented on blocks of entries using BIG
       Added keyword ITEM_DBNO     R. Schwartz, GSFC/SDAC, August 1996
       Return a vector even if only 1 value W. Thompson  October 1996
       Change variable name of BYTESWAP to BSWAP  W. Thompson Mar 1997
       Use /OVERWRITE with reform   W. Landsman   May 1997
       Increase maximum number of items to 18  W. Landsman  November 1999
       2 May 2003, W. Thompson, Use DBXVAL with BSWAP instead of IEEE_TO_HOST.
       Avoid EXECUTE() for V6.1 or later  W. Landsman Jan 2007
       Assume since V6.1  W. Landsman June 2009
       Change arrays to LONG to support entries >32767 bytes WL Oct 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbext_dbf.pro)

DBEXT_IND

 NAME:
       DBEXT_IND
 PURPOSE:
       routine to read a indexed item values from index file

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbext_ind,list,item,dbno,values

 INPUTS:
       list - list of entry numbers to extract values for
               (if it is a scalar, values for all entries are extracted)
       item - item to extract
       dbno - number of the opened data base

 OUTPUT:
       values - vector of values returned as function value
 HISTORY:
       version 1  D. Lindler  Feb 88
       Faster processing of string values    W. Landsman   April, 1992
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 30 May 1994
               Added support for external (IEEE) data format
       Allow multiple valued (nonstring) index items W. Landsman  November 2000
       Use 64bit integer index for large databases W. Landsman  February 2001
       Fix sublisting of multiple valued index items W. Landsman  March 2001
       Check whether any supplied entries are valid W. Landsman Jan 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbext_ind.pro)

DBFIND()

 NAME:
    DBFIND()
 PURPOSE:
     Search data base for entries with specified characteristics
 EXPLANATION:
     Function to search data base for entries with specified
     search characteristics.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     result = dbfind(spar,[ listin, /SILENT, /FULLSTRING, ERRMSG=, Count = ])

 INPUTS:
     spar - search_parameters (string)...each search parameter
               is of the form:

               option 1) min_val < item_name < max_val
               option 2) item_name = value
               option 3) item_name = [value_1, value_10]
                       Note: option 3 is also the slowest.
               option 4) item_name > value
               option 5) item_name < value
               option 6) item_name = value(tolerance) ;eg. temp=25.0(5.2)
               option 7) item_name                     ;must be non-zero

               Multiple search parameters are separated by a comma.
               eg.     'cam_no=2,14<ra<20'

               Note: < is interpreted as less than or equal.
                     > is interpreted as greater than or equal.

               RA and DEC keyfields are stored as floating point numbers
               in the data base may be entered as HH:MM:SEC and
               DEG:MIN:SEC. Where:

                       HH:MM:SEC   equals  HH + MM/60.0  + SEC/3600.
                       DEG:MIN:SEC equals DEG + MIN/60.0 + SEC/3600.

               For example:
                       40:34:10.5 < dec < 43:25:19 , 8:22:1.0 < ra < 8:23:23.0

               Specially encoded date/time in the data base may
               be entered by  CCYY/DAY:hr:min:sec which is
               interpreted as
                       CCYY*1000+DAY+hr/24.0+min/24.0/60.+sec/24.0/3600.
               If a two digit year is supplied and YY GE 40 then it is
               understood to refer to year 1900 +YY;  if YY LT 40 then it is
               understood to refer to year 2000 +YY

               For example
                       1985/201:10:35:30<date_time<1985/302:10:33:33.4
               would specify all entries between:
                       year 1985 day 201 at 10:35:30 to
                       day 302 at 10:33:33.4
               The date/time may also be encoded as:
                       DD-MMM-YEAR HH::MM:SS.SS
                       eg.  12-JUL-86 10:23:33.45
               (this is the format of system variable !stime)

               Multiple search parameters may be stored in a string
               array (one parameter per array element) instead of
               concatenating them with commas in a single string.
               Example:
                       input_array = strarr(2)
                       input_array[0] = '14<ra<16'   ; 14-16 hrs of ra.
                       input_array[1] = '8<dec<20'   ; + 8-20 deg. decl.

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       listin - gives list of entries to be searched.  If not supplied or
               set to -1 then all entries are searched.

 OUTPUT:
       List of ENTRY numbers satisfying search characteristics
               is returned as the function value.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /SILENT  - If the keyword SILENT is set and non-zero, then DBFIND
               will not print the number of entries found.

       /FULLSTRING - By default, one has a match if a search string is
               included in any part of a database value (substring match).
               But if /FULLSTRING is set, then all characters in the database
               value must match the search string (excluding leading and
               trailing blanks).    Both types of string searches are case
               insensitive.

       ERRMSG   = If defined and passed, then any error messages will
                  be returned to the user in this parameter rather
                  than depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no
                  errors are encountered, then a null string is
                  returned.  In order to use this feature, ERRMSG must
                  be defined first, e.g.

                       ERRMSG = ''
                       DB_ITEM, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
                       IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...;

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       COUNT - Integer scalar giving the number of valid matches
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DB_INFO, DB_ITEM, DB_ITEM_INFO, DBEXT, DBEXT_IND, DBFIND_ENTRY,
       DBFIND_SORT, DBFPARSE, DBRD, DBSEARCH, ZPARCHECK,IS_IEEE_BIG

 RESTRICTIONS:
       The data base must be previously opened with DBOPEN.

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       The obsolete system variable !ERR is set to number of entries found

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written     :   D. Lindler, GSFC/HRS, November 1987
       Version 2, Wayne Landsman, GSFC/UIT (STX), 1 April 1994
                       Added FULLSTRING keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 1 April 1994
                       Added check for empty database
       Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 5 April 1994
                       Changed so that !ERR is zero when database is empty,
                       and LISTIN is returned, based on discussion with Wayne
                       Landsman.
       Version 5, Wayne Landsman, GSFC/UIT (STX), 26 May 1994
                       Added error message when database is empty.
       Version 6, William Thompson, GSFC, 14 March 1995
                       Added FULLSTRING keyword to DBFIND_SORT call
       Version 7, Richard Schwartz, GSFC/SDAC 23 August 1996
                       Move external to host conversion from DBRD to
                       operation on extracted values only.
       Version 8, William Thompson, GSFC, 3 December 1996
                       Renamed BYTESWAP variable to BSWAP--appeared to be
                       conflicting with function of same name.
       Version 9, William Thompson, GSFC, 17-Mar-1997
                       Added keyword ERRMSG
       Version 10, July, 1997  W. Landsman, added CATCH errors
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   October 1997
       Update documentation for new Y2K compliant DBFPARSE W. Landsman Nov 1998
       Suppress empty database message with /SILENT, W. Landsman Jan 1999
       Added COUNT keyword, deprecate !ERR        W. Landsman March 2000
       Added new unsigned & 64bit datatypes       W. Landsman July 2001
       Fix possible floating illegand operand error W. Landsman July 2009
       Change arrays to LONG to support entries >32767 bytes W.L. Oct. 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbfind.pro)

DBFIND_ENTRY

 NAME:
       DBFIND_ENTRY
 PURPOSE:
       Subroutine of DBFIND to perform an entry number search
 EXPLANATION:
       This is a subroutine of dbfind and is not a standalone procedure
       It performs a entry number search.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbfind_entry, type, svals, nentries, values, [COUNT = ]

 INPUTS:
       type - type of search (output from dbfparse)
       svals - search values (output from dbfparse)
       values - array of values to search
 OUTPUT:
       good - indices of good values
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       Count - integer scalar giving the number of valid matches
 SIDE EFFECTS"
       The obsolete system variable !err is set to number of good values

 REVISION HISTORY:
       D. Lindler  July,1987
       Fixed test for final entry number  W. Landsman    Sept. 95
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added COUNT keyword, deprecate !ERR  W. Landsman   March 2000
       Better checking of out of range values  W. Landsman February 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbfind_entry.pro)

DBFIND_SORT

 NAME:
       DBFIND_SORT
 PURPOSE:
       Subroutine of DBFIND to perform a search using sorted values
 EXPLANATION:
       This is a subroutine of dbfind and is not a standalone procedure
       It is used to limit the search using sorted values

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbfind_sort, it, type, svals, list, [/FULLSTRING, COUNT = ]

 INPUT:
       it - item number, scalar
       type - type of search (output from dbfparse)
       svals - search values (output from dbfparse)

 INPUT/OUTPUT:
       list - found entries

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       /FULLSTRING - By default, one has a match if a search string is
               included in any part of a database value (substring match).
               But if /FULLSTRING is set, then all characters in the database
               value must match the search string (excluding leading and
               trailing blanks).    Both types of string searches are case
               insensitive.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD
       Count - Integer scalar giving the number of matches found
 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       The obsolete system variable !err is set to number of good values
       !ERR = -2 for an invalid search
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       DB_INFO(), DB_ITEM_INFO(), DBSEARCH()
 REVISION HISTORY:
       D. Lindler  July,1987
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 30 May 1994
               Added support for external (IEEE) data format
       William Thompson, GSFC, 14 March 1995 Added keyword FULLSTRING
       Minimize use of obsolete !ERR variable   W. Landsman  February 2000
       Added COUNT keyword, deprecate !ERR W. Landsman  March 2000
       Use 64 bit integers V5.2 or later
       Include new IDL unsigned & 64 bit integer datatypes W.Landsman July 2001
       Make sure returned list vector is LONG  W. Landsman August 2001
       Work on string items   W. Landsman November 2009
       Don't use VALUE_LOCATE on a single value  W. Landsman November 2009
       Use VALUE_LOCATE even for equal values W. Landsman December 2009
       Fix bug allowing negative FIRST values, William Thompson, 10 May 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbfind_sort.pro)

DBFPARSE

 NAME:
     DBFPARSE
 PURPOSE:
     Parse the search string supplied to DBFIND.   Not a standalone routine

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     DBFPARSE, [ spar, items, stype, values ]

 INPUTS:
     spar - search parameter specification, scalar string

 OUTPUTS:
     items - list of items to search on
     stype - search type, numeric scalar
               0    item=values(j,0)
               -1   item>values(j,0)
               -2   item<values(j,1)
               -3   values(j,0)<item<values(j,1)
               -4   item is non zero
               -5   item=values(j,0) within tolerance values(j,1)
               0<   items in list values(j,i) for i=0,stype-1
     values - search values, 20 x 10 string array, can parse a string
               with up to 20 items specifications, each item can have 10
               values

 REVISION HISTORY:
     D. Lindler NOV, 1987
     Check for valid numeric values before assuming a date string
     W. Landsman                    July, 1993
     Accept four digit years when in ccyy/doy format W. Landsman   October 1998
     Don't do DATE/Time test for string items  W. Landsman   July 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbfparse.pro)

DBGET

 NAME:
       DBGET
 PURPOSE:
       Find entry numbers which contain specified values of a given item.
 EXPLANATION:
       DBGET() is useful as an alternative to DBFIND() when the desired
       search values are not easily expressed as a string.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       list = dbget( item, values, [ listin ], /SILENT, /FULLSTRING )

 INPUTS:
       item - Item name or number
       values -  scalar or vector containing item values to search for.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       listin - list of entries to be searched.  If not supplied, or
               set to -1, then all entries are searched

 OUTPUT:
       list - vector giving the entry number of entries containing desired
               item values.  The number of elements in  LIST may be different
               from that of VALUE, since a value might be located zero, once,
               or many times in the database.  Use the function DBMATCH if a
               one to one correspondence is desired between VALUES and LIST.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /SILENT - If this keyword is set, then DBGET will not display
               the number of entries found
       /FULLSTRING - By default, one has a match if a search string is
               included in any part of a database value (substring match).
               But if /FULLSTRING is set, then all characters in the database
               value must match the search string (excluding leading and
               trailing blanks).    Both types of string searches are case
               insensitive.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       COUNT - Integer scalar giving the number of valid matches

 RESTRICTIONS:
       When linked databases are opened together, DBGET can only be used to
       search on items in the primary database.
 EXAMPLE:
       Get info on selected HD stars in Bright Star catalogue

       IDL> dbopen, 'YALE_BS'
       IDL> hdno = [1141,2363,3574,4128,6192,6314,6668]    ;Desired HD numbers
       IDL> list = dbget( 'HD', hdno )        ;Get corresponding entry numbers

 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       The obsolete system variable !ERR is set to number of entries found
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written,    W. Landsman      STX     February, 1989
       William Thompson, GSFC, 14 March 1995 Added keyword FULLSTRING
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added COUNT keyword, deprecate !ERR        W. Landsman March 2000
       Fix bug introduced March 2000              W. Landsman November 2000
       Fix possible bug when sublist supplied    W. Landsman August 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbget.pro)

DBHELP

 NAME:
     DBHELP
 PURPOSE:
     List available databases or items in the currently open database
 EXPLANATION:
     Procedure to either list available databases (if no database is
     currently open) or the items in the currently open database.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     dbhelp, [ flag , TEXTOUT=, /SORT ]

 INPUT:
     flag - (optional) if set to nonzero then item or database
             descriptions are also printed
             default=0
             If flag is a string, then it is interpreted as the
             name of a data base (if no data base is opened) or a name
             of an item in the opened data base.   In this case, help
             is displayed only for the particular item or database

 OUTPUTS:
      None
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
      TEXTOUT  - Used to determine output device.  If not present, the
                value of !TEXTOUT system variable is used (see TEXTOPEN )

               textout=0       Nowhere
               textout=1       if a TTY then TERMINAL using /more option
                                   otherwise standard (Unit=-1) output
               textout=2       if a TTY then TERMINAL without /more option
                                   otherwise standard (Unit=-1) output
               textout=3       <program>.prt
               textout=4       laser.tmp
               textout=5      user must open file
               textout=7      same as 3 but text is appended to <program>.prt
                               file if it already exists.
               textout = filename (default extension of .prt)

        /SORT - If set and non-zero, then the help items will be displayed
               sorted alphabetically.    If more than one database is open,
               then this keyword does nothing.
 METHOD:
       If no data base is opened then a list of data bases are
       printed, otherwise the items in the open data base are printed.

       If a string is supplied for flag and a data base is opened
       flag is assumed to be an item name.  The information for that
       item is printed along with contents in a optional file
       zdbase:dbname_itemname.hlp
       if a string is supplied for flag and no data base is opened,
       then string is assumed to be the name of a data base file.
       only information for that file is printed along with an
       optional file zdbase:dbname.hlp.
 PROCEDURES USED:
       DB_INFO(),DB_ITEM_INFO(),FIND_WITH_DEF(), TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE, UNIQ()
 IDL VERSION:
       V5.3 or later (uses vectorized FDECOMP)
 HISTORY:
       Version 2  D. Lindler  Nov 1987 (new db format)
       Faster printing of title desc. W. Landsman  May 1989
       Keyword textout added, J. Isensee, July, 1990
       Modified to work on Unix, D. Neill, ACC, Feb 1991.
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 1 June 1994
               Added support for external (IEEE) representation.
       William Thompson, GSFC, 3 November 1994
               Modified to allow ZDBASE to be a path string.
       Remove duplicate database names  Wayne Landsman    December 1994
       8/17/95 jkf/acc - force lowercase filenames for .hlp files.
       Added /SORT keyword  J. Sandoval/W. Landsman     October 1998
       V5.3 version use vectorized FDECOMP   W. Landsman   February 2001
       Recognize 64 bit, unsigned integer datatypes W. Landsman September 2001
       Fix display of number of bytes with /SORT W. Landsman February 2002
       Assume since V5.2                 W. Landsman February 2002
       Assume since V5.5                 W. Landsman

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbhelp.pro)

DBINDEX

 NAME:
       DBINDEX
 PURPOSE:
       Procedure to create index file for data base

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbindex, [ items ]

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       items - names or numbers of items to be index -- if not supplied,
               then all indexed fields will be processed.

 OUTPUT:
       Index file <name>.dbx is created on disk location ZDBASE:

 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
       (1) Data base must have been previously opened for update
       by DBOPEN

       (2) Only 18 items can be indexed at one time.   If the database has
       more than 18 items, then two separate calls to DBINDEX are needed.
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       DBINDEX_BLK, DB_INFO(), DB_ITEM, DB_ITEM_INFO(), IEEE_TO_HOST,
       IS_IEEE_BIG()
 HISTORY:
       version 2  D. Lindler  Nov 1987 (new db format)
       W. Landsman    added optional items parameter Feb 1989
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 30 May 1994
               Added support for external (IEEE) data format
       Test if machine is bigendian  W. Landsman     May, 1996
       Change variable name of BYTESWAP to BSWAP  W. Thompson  Mar, 1997
       Increased number of fields to 15   W. Landsman   June, 1997
       Increase number of items to 18     W. Landsman  November 1999
       Allow multiple valued (nonstring) index items W. Landsman November 2000
       Use 64 bit integers for V5.2 or later  W. Landsman February 2001
       Do not use EXECUTE() for V6.1 or later, improve efficiency
                W. Landsman   December 2006
       Automatically enlarge .dbx file if needed, fix major bug in last
             update    W. Landsman Dec 2006
       Assume since V6.1    W. Landsman   June 2009
       Allow sorted string items   W. Landsman   October 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbindex.pro)

DBINDEX_BLK

 NAME:
       DBINDEX_BLK
 PURPOSE:
       Subroutine of DBINDEX to create associated variable of correct datatype
 EXPLANATION:
       DBINDEX_BLK will offset into the file by a specified amount in
       preparation for writing to the file.   V5.2 or later

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       res = dbindex_blk(unit, nb, bsz, ofb, dtype)

 INPUTS:
       unit   The unit number assigned to the file.
       nb     The number of blocks to offset into the file.
       bsz    The size of each block, in bytes, to offset into the file.
       ofb    The offset into the block, in bytes.
       dtype  The IDL datatype as defined in the SIZE function

 OUTPUTS:
       res    The returned variable.  This is an associated variable.

 RESTRICTIONS:
       The file must have been previously opened.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Michael R. Greason, STX, 14 June 1990.
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Use 64 bit integer for very large databases  W. Landsman February 2001
       Added new unsigned & 64bit integer datatypes    W. Landsman July 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbindex_blk.pro)

DBMATCH

 NAME:
       DBMATCH
 PURPOSE:
       Find the entry number in a database for each element of item values
 EXPLANATION:
       DBMATCH() is especially useful for finding a one-to-one
       correspondence between entries in different databases, and thus to
       create the vector needed for database pointers.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       list = DBMATCH( item, values, [ listin, /FULLSTRING ] )

 INPUTS:
       ITEM - Item name or number, scalar
       VALUES -  scalar or vector containing item values to search for.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       LISTIN - list of entries to be searched.  If not supplied, or
               set to -1, then all entries are searched
 OUTPUT:
       LIST - vector of entry numbers with the same number of elements as
               VALUES.  Contains a value of 0 wherever the corresponding item
               value was not found.

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       /FULLSTRING - By default, one has a match if a search string is
               included in any part of a database value (substring match).
               But if /FULLSTRING is set, then all characters in the database
               value must match the search string (excluding leading and
               trailing blanks).    Both types of string searches are case
               insensitive.

 NOTES:
       DBMATCH is meant to be used for items which do not have duplicate values
       in a database (e.g. catalog numbers).  If more than one entry is found
       for a particular item value, then only the first one is stored in LIST.

       When linked databases are opened together, DBMATCH can only be
       used to search on items in the primary database.

 EXAMPLE:
       Make a vector which points from entries in the Yale Bright Star catalog
       to those in the Hipparcos catalog, using the HD number

       IDL> dbopen, 'yale_bs'            ;Open the Yale Bright star catalog
       IDL> dbext, -1, 'HD', hd          ;Get the HD numbers
       IDL> dbopen, 'hipparcos'          ;Open the Hipparcos catalog
       IDL> list = dbmatch( 'HD', HD)    ;Get entries in Hipparcos catalog
                                         ;corresponding to each HD number.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DB_ITEM, DB_ITEM_INFO(), DBEXT, DBFIND_SORT()
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written,    W. Landsman      STX     February, 1990
       Fixed error when list in parameter used May, 1992
       Faster algorithm with sorted item when listin parameter supplied
       Added keyword FULLSTRING,check for empty database, William Thompson,
               GSFC, 15 March 1995
       Work for more than 32767 values, added CATCH W. Landsman   July 1997
       Change some loop variables to type LONG,  W. Landsman  July 1999
       Remove loop for substring searches (faster)  W. landsman August 1999
       Replace DATATYPE() with size(/TNAME)  W. Landsman  November 2001
       Fixed typo when search on sorted items W. Landsman February 2002
       Fixed bug from Nov 2001 where /FULLSTRING was always set.  W.L Feb 2007

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbmatch.pro)

DBOPEN

 NAME:
       DBOPEN
 PURPOSE:
       Routine to open an IDL database

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       dbopen, name, update

 INPUTS:
       name - (Optional) name or names of the data base files to open.
               It has one of the following forms:

               'name'          -open single data base file
               'name1,name2,...,nameN' - open N files which are
                               connected via pointers.
               'name,*'        -Open the data base with all data
                               bases connected via pointers
               ''              -Interactively allow selection of
                               the data base files.

               If not supplied then '' is assumed.
               name may optionally be a string array with one name
               per element.

       update - (Optional) Integer flag specifing openning for update.
               0       - Open for read only
               1       - Open for update
               2       - Open index file for update only
               !PRIV must be 2 or greater to open a file for update.
               If a file is opened for update only a single data base
               can be specified.

 OUTPUTS:
       none

 INPUT-OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       UNAVAIL - If present, a "database doesn't exit" flag is returned
                 through it.  0 = the database exists and was opened (if
                 no other errors arose).  1 = the database doesn't exist.
                 Also if present, the error message for non-existent databases
                 is suppressed.  The action, however, remains the same.
 SIDE EFFECTS:
       The .DBF and .dbx files are opened using unit numbers obtained by
       GET_LUN.  Descriptions of the files are placed in the common block
       DB_COM.

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       DBCLOSE, DB_INFO(), SELECT_W, ZPARCHECK
 HISTORY:
       For IDL Version 2  W. Landsman May 1990 -- Will require further
           modfication once SCREEN_SELECT is working
       Modified to work under Unix, D. Neill, ACC, Feb 1991.
       UNAVAIL keyword added.  M. Greason, Hughes STX, Feb 1993.
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 1 June 1994
               Added support for external (IEEE) representation.
       William Thompson, GSFC, 3 November 1994
                       Modified to allow ZDBASE to be a path string.
       8/29/95 JKF/ACC - forces lowercase for input database names.
       W. Landsman, Use CATCH to catch errors    July, 1997
       W. Landsman Use vector call to FDECOMP, STRSPLIT()    Sep 2006
       W. Landsman Remove obsolete keywords to OPEN   Sep 2006
       Replace SCREEN_SELECT with SELECT_W, remove IEEE_TO_HOST  WL  Jan 2009
       Fix typos in BYTEORDER introduced Jan 2009 G. Scandariato/W.L.Feb. 2009
       Support new DB format which allows entry lengths > 32767 bytes
              W.L. October 2010
       William Thompson, fixed bug opening multiple databases Dec 2010
       Fix problem with external databases WL Sep 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbopen.pro)

DBPRINT

 NAME:
     DBPRINT
 PURPOSE:
     Procedure to print specified items from a list of database entries

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     dbprint, list, [items, FORMS= , TEXTOUT= , /AdjustFormat, /NoHeader]

 INPUTS:
     list  - list of entry numbers to be printed, vector or scalar
               if list = -1, then all entries will be printed.
               An error message is returned if any entry number is larger
               than the number of entries in the database

 OPTIONAL INPUT-OUTPUT:
     items - items to be printed, specified in any of the following ways:

               form 1  scalar string giving item(s) as list of names
                       separated by commas
               form 2  string array giving list of item names
               form 3  string of form '$filename' giving name
                       of text file containing items (one item per
                       line)
               form 4  integer scalar giving single item number or
                         integer vector list of item numbers
               form 5  Null string specifying interactive selection.   This
                       is the default if 'items' is not supplied
               form 6  '*'     select all items, printout will be in
                       table format.

            If items was undefined or a null string on input, then
            on output it will contain the items interactively selected.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /ADJUSTFORMAT -  If set, then the format length for string items will
               be adjusted to the maximum length for the entries to be printed.
               This option will slow down DBPRINT because it requires the
               string items be extracted and their maximum length determined
               prior to any printing.   However, it enables the display of
               string items without any truncation or wasted space.

       FORMS - The number of printed lines per page. If forms is not
               present, output assumed to be in PORTRAIT form, and
               a heading and 47 lines are printed on each page, with
               a page eject between each page.  For LANDSCAPE form with
               headings on each page, and a page eject between pages, set
               forms = 34.  For a heading only on the first page, and no
               page eject, set forms = 0.   This is the default for output
               to the terminal.

       TEXTOUT - Integer (0-7) or string used to determine output device (see
               TEXTOPEN for more info).  If not present, the !TEXTOUT system
               variable is used.
               textout=0       Nowhere
               textout=1       if a TTY then TERMINAL using /more option
                                   otherwise standard (Unit=-1) output
               textout=2       if a TTY then TERMINAL without /more option
                                   otherwise standard (Unit=-1) output
               textout=3       dbprint.prt (file)
               textout=4       laser.tmp
               textout=5       user must open file
               textout=7      same as 3 but text is appended to <program>.prt
               textout = filename   (default extension of .prt)

       /NOHEADER - If this keyword is set, then the column headers will not
               be printed

 EXAMPLE:
       The following example shows how a multiple valued item DATAMAX can be
       printed as separate columns.   In the WFPC2 target database, DATAMAX
       is an item with 4 values, one for each of the 4 chips

       IDL> dbopen,'wflog'
       IDL> dbprint,list,'entry,datamax(0),datamax(1),datamax(2),datamax(3)'

 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       Output device controlled by non-standard system varaible !TEXTOUT, if
       TEXTOUT keyword is not used.

 NOTES:
       Users may want to adjust the default lines_per_page value given at
       the beginning of the program for their own particular printer.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       db_info(), db_item_info(), dbtitle(), dbxval(), textopen, textclose
       zparcheck
 HISTORY:
       version 2  D. Lindler  Nov. 1987 (new db format)
       Test if user pressed 'Q' in response to /MORE W. Landsman  Sep 1991
       Apply STRTRIM to free form (table) output    W. Landsman   Dec 1992
       Test for string value of TEXTOUT         W. Landsman   Feb 1994
       William Thompson, GSFC, 3 November 1994
                       Modified to allow ZDBASE to be a path string.
       W. Landsman, GSFC, July, 1997, Use CATCH to catch errors
       Removed STRTRIM in table format output to handle byte values April 1999
       Fixed occasional problem when /NOHEADER is supplied   Sep. 1999
       Only byteswap when necessary for improved performance  Feb. 2000
       Change loop index for table listing to type LONG  W. Landsman Aug 2000
       Entry vector can be any integer type   W. Landsman Aug. 2001
       Replace DATATYPE() with size(/TNAME)   W. Landsman  Nov. 2001
       No page eject for TEXTOUT =5           W. Landsman  Nov. 2001
       No initial page eject                  W. Landsman  Jan. 2002
       Added AdjustFormat keyword             W. Landsman  Sep. 2002
       Assume since V5.3 (STRJOIN)            W. Landsman Feb. 2004
       Fix display on GUI terminals           W. Landsman March 2006
       Remove VMS statements                  W. Landsman Sep 2006
       Remove EXECUTE statement               W. Landsman Jan 2007
       Fix display of multi element items     W. Landsman  Aug 2010
       Fix problem with linked databases      W. Landsman Dec 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbprint.pro)

DBPUT

 NAME:
	DBPUT
 PURPOSE:
	Procedure to place a new value for a specified item into
	a data base file entry.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	dbput, item, val, entry

 INPUTS:
	item - item name or number
	val - item value(s)

 INPUT/OUTPUT:
	entry - entry (byte array) or scalar entry number.
	        if entry is a scalar entry number then the data
	        base file will be updated.  Otherwise the change
	        will be only made to the entry array which must
	        be written latter using DBWRT.

 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
	If entry is a scalar entry number or the input file name
	is supplied, the entry in the data base will be updated
	instead of a supplied entry variable.  In this case, !priv
	must be greater than 1.
 EXAMPLE:
       IDL> dbput,'WAVELEN',1215.6,entry
 PROCEDURES USED:
       DB_ITEM, DBRD, DBXPUT, DBWRT
 HISTORY:
	version 2  D. Lindler  Feb 1988 (new db formats)
	modified to convert blanks into zeros correctly D. Neill Jan 1991
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       V5.2 version support unsigned, 64bit integers W. Landsman  Sep. 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbput.pro)

DBRD

 NAME:
	DBRD
 PURPOSE:
	procedure to read an entry from a data base file or from
	linked multiple databases.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	dbrd, enum, entry, [available, dbno, /NoConvert]

 INPUTS:
	enum - entry number to read, integer scalar

 OUTPUT:
	entry - byte array containing the entry

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
	available - byte array with length equal to number of data
		bases opened.  available(i) eq 1 if an entry (pointed
		to) is available.  It always equals 1 for the first
		data base, otherwise it is an error condition.

 OPTIONAL  INPUT:
	dbno - specification of the data base number to return.  If
		supplied, only the record for the requested data base
		number is returned in entry.  Normally this input should
		not be supplied.  dbno is numbered for 0 to n-1 and gives
		the number of the data base opened.  The data bases are
		numbered in the order supplied to dbopen.  If dbno is supplied
		then the entry number refers to that data base and not the
		primary or first data base. If set to -1, then it means all
		data bases opened (same as not supplying it)
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
	noconvert - if set then don't convert external to host format.
		Assumes that calling program will take care of this
		requirement.
 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
	If multiple data base files are opened, the records are
	concatenated with each other
 HISTORY
	version 2  D. Lindler  Nov. 1987
	William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 1 June 1994
		Added support for external (IEEE) representation.
	Version 3, Richard Schwartz, GSFC/SDAC, 23-Aug-1996
			Add noconvert keyword

	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Version 4, 2 May 2003, W. Thompson
               Use BSWAP keyword to DBXVAL instead of calling IEEE_TO_HOST.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbrd.pro)

DBSEARCH

 NAME:
	DBSEARCH
 PURPOSE:
	Subroutine of DBFIND() to search a vector for specified values

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	dbsearch, type, svals, values, good, [ /FULLSTRING, COUNT = ]

 INPUT:
	type - type of search (output from dbfparse)
	svals - search values (output from dbfparse)
	values - array of values to search

 OUTPUT:
	good - indices of good values

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
	/FULLSTRING - By default, one has a match if a search string is
		included in any part of a database value (substring match).
		But if /FULLSTRING is set, then all characters in the database
		value must match the search string (excluding leading and
		trailing blanks).    Both types of string searches are case
		insensitive.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       COUNT  - Integer scalar giving the number of valid matches
  SIDE EFFECTS:
	The obsolete system variable !ERR is set to number of good values
 REVISION HISTORY:
	D. Lindler  July,1987
       Added COUNT keyword, deprecate !ERR   W. Landsman   March 2000
      Some speed improvements W.L. August 2008
       Add compound operators, slightly faster WL November 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbsearch.pro)

DBSORT

 NAME:
       DBSORT
 PURPOSE:
       Routine to sort list of entries in data base

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       result = dbsort( list, items , [ REVERSE = ])

 INPUTS:
       list - list of entry numbers to sort
               -1 to sort all entries
       items - list of items to sort (up to 9 items)

 OUTPUT:
       result - numeric vector giving input list sorted by items

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       REVERSE - scalar or vector with the same number of elements as the
         the number of items to sort.  If the corresponding element of REVERSE
         is non-zero then that item is sorted in descending rather than
         ascending order.

 EXAMPLE:
       Sort an astronomical catalog with RA as primary sort, and declination
       as secondary sort (used when RA values are equal)

          IDL> NEWLIST = DBSORT( -1, 'RA,DEC' )

       If for some reason, one wanted the DEC sorted in descending order, but
       the RA in ascending order

          IDL> NEWLIST = DBSORT( -1, 'RA,DEC', REV = [ 0, 1 ] )

 METHOD:
       The list is sorted such that each item is sorted into
       asscending order starting with the last item.
 COMMON BLOCKS:
       DBCOM
 PROCEDURES USED:
       ZPARCHECK, BSORT, DBEXT, DB_ITEM
 HISTORY
       VERSION 1  D. Lindler  Oct. 86
       Added REVERSE keyword   W. Landsman        August, 1991
       Avoid use of EXECUTE() for V6.1 or later   W. Landsman Dec 2006
       Assume since V6.1   W. Landsman   June 2009
       Add TEMPORARY call  W. Lnadsman  July 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbsort.pro)

DBTARGET

 NAME:
      DBTARGET
 PURPOSE:
      Find sources in a database within specified radius of specified target
 EXPLANATION:
      Uses QuerySimbad to translate target name to RA and Dec, and then uses
      DBCIRCLE() to find any entries within specified radius.   Database must
      include items named 'RA' (in hours) and 'DEC' (in degrees) and must
      have previously been opened with DBOPEN

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     list = DBTARGET(target, [radius, sublist, /SILENT, DIS= ,/TO_B1950 ] )

 INPUTS:
      TARGET - A scalar string giving an astronomical target name, which
          will be  translated into J2000 celestial coordinates by QuerySimbad

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       RADIUS - Radius of the search field in arc minutes, scalar.
                Default is 5 arc minutes
       SUBLIST - Vector giving entry numbers in currently opened database
               to be searched.  Default is to search all entries

 OUTPUTS:
     LIST - Vector giving entry numbers in the currently opened catalog
            which have positions within the specified search circle
            LIST is set to -1 if no sources fall within the search circle
            !ERR is set to the number sources found.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT
       DIS -  The distance in arcminutes of each entry specified by LIST
               to the search center specified by the target.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       /SILENT - If this keyword is set, then DBTARGET will not print the
               number of entries found at the terminal
       /TO_B1950 - If this keyword is set, then the SIMBAD J2000 coordinates
               are converted to B1950 before searching the database
               NOTE: The user must determine on his own whether the database
               is in B1950 or J2000 coordinates.

 RESTRICTIONS;
       The database must have items 'RA' (in hours) and 'DEC' (in degrees).
       Alternatively, the database could have items RA_OBJ and DEC_OBJ
      (both in degrees)
 EXAMPLE:
       (1) Use the HST_CATALOG database to find all  HST observations within
           5' (the default) of M33

       IDL> dbopen,'hst_catalog'
       IDL> list = dbtarget('M33')

      (2) As above but restrict targets within 2' of the nucleus using the
          WFPC2 camara

       IDL> dbopen,'hst_catalog'
       IDL> sublist = dbfind('config=WFPC2')
       IDL> list = dbtarget('M33',2,sublist)


 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       QuerySimbad, DBCIRCLE()
 REVISION HISTORY:
      Written W. Landsman     SSAI          September 2002
      Propagate /SILENT keyword to QuerySimbad    W. Landsman Oct 2009
      Make sure a database is open  W.L. Oct 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbtarget.pro)

DBTITLE

 NAME:
	DBTITLE
 PURPOSE:
	function to create title line for routine dbprint

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	result = dbtitle( c, f )

 INPUTS:
	c = string array of titles for each item
	f = field length of each item

 OUTPUT:
	header string returned as function value

 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
	this is a subroutine of DBPRINT.

 HISTORY:
	version 1  D. Lindler  Sept 86
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbtitle.pro)

DBUPDATE

 NAME:
	DBUPDATE
 PURPOSE:
	Update columns of data in a database  -- inverse of DBEXT
 EXPLANATION:
	Database must be open for update before calling DBUPDATE

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	dbupdate, list, items, v1, [ v2, v3, v4......v14 ]

 INPUTS:
	list - entries in database to be updated, scalar or vector
		If list=-1 then all entries will be updated
	items -standard list of items that will be updated.
	v1,v2....v14 - vectors containing values for specified items.  The
		number of vectors supplied must equal the number of items
		specified.   The number of elements in each vector should be
		the same.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       /NOINDEX - If set, then DBUPDATE will not update the index file.   This
               keyword is useful to save if additional updates will occur,
               and the index file need only be updated on the last call.

 EXAMPLES:
	A database STAR contains RA and DEC in radians, convert to degrees

	IDL> !PRIV=2 & dbopen,'STAR',1          ;Open database for update
	IDL> dbext,-1,'RA,DEC',ra,dec          ;Extract RA and DEC, all entries
	IDL> ra = ra*!RADEG & dec=dec*!RADEG    ;Convert to degrees
	IDL> dbupdate,-1,'RA,DEC',ra,dec        ;Update database with new values

 NOTES:
	It is quicker to update several items simultaneously rather than use
	repeated calls to DBUPDATE.

	It is possible to update multiple valued items.  In this case, the
	input vector should be of dimension (NVAL,NLIST) where NVAL is the
	number of values per item, and NLIST is the number of entries to be
	updated.  This vector will be temporarily transposed by DBUPDATE but
	will be restored before DBUPDATE exits.

 REVISION HISTORY
	Written W. Landsman      STX       March, 1989
	Work for multiple valued items     May, 1991
	String arrays no longer need to be fixed length      December 1992
	Transpose multiple array items back on output        December 1993
	Faster update of external databases on big endian machines November 1997
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman 24-Nov-1997
       Added /NOINDEX keyword  W. Landsman  July 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbupdate.pro)

DBVAL

 NAME:
	DBVAL
 PURPOSE:
	procedure to extract value(s) of the specified item from
	a data base file entry.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	result = dbval( entry, item )

 INPUTS:
	entry - byte array containing the entry, or a scalar entry number
	item - name (string) or number (integer) of the item

 OUTPUT:
	the value(s) will be returned as the function value

 EXAMPLE:
	Extract a flux vector from entry 28 of the database FARUV
	==> flux = dbval(28,'FLUX')

 HISTORY:
   version 2  D. Lindler Nov, 1987	(new db format)
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbval.pro)

DBWRT

 NAME:
	DBWRT
 PURPOSE:
	procedure to update or add a new entry to a data base

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	dbwrt, entry, [ index, append, /NoConvert ]

 INPUTS:
	entry - entry record to be updated or added if first
		item (entry number=0)

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
	index - optional integer flag,  if set to non zero then index
		file is  updated. (default=0, do not update index file)
		(Updating the index file is time-consuming, and should
		normally be done after all changes have been made.
	append - optional integer flag, if set to non-zero the record
		is appended as a new entry, regardless of what the
		entry number in the record is.  The entry number will
		be reset to the next entry number in the file.
 OUTPUTS:
	data base file is updated.
	If index is non-zero then the index file is updated.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
	NoConvert - If set then don't convert to host format with an external
		database.    Useful when the calling program decides that
		conversion isn't needed (i.e. on a big-endian machine), or
		takes care of the conversion itself.
 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
	!PRIV must be greater than 1 to execute
 HISTORY:
	version 2  D. Lindler  Feb. 1988 (new db format)
	converted to IDL Version 2.  M. Greason, STX, June 1990.
	William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 28 May 1994
		Added support for external (IEEE) representation.
	Faster handling of byte swapping  W. L.  August 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbwrt.pro)

DBXPUT

 NAME:
	DBXPUT
 PURPOSE:
	routine to replace value of an item in a data base entry

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	dbxput, val, entry, idltype, sbyte, nbytes

 INPUT:
	val - value(s) to be placed into entry, string values might be
		truncated to fit number of allowed bytes in item
	entry - entry or entries to be updated
	idltype - idl data type for item (1-7)
	sbyte - starting byte in record
	nbytes - total number of bytes in value added

 OUTPUT:
	entry - (updated)

 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
	This routine assumes that the calling procedure or user knows what he
	or she is doing.  String items are truncated or padded to the fixed
	size specified by the database but otherwise no validity checks are
	made.

 HISTORY:
	version 1, D. Lindler   Aug, 1986
	converted to IDL Version 2.  M. Greason, STX, June 1990.
	Work with multiple element string items   W. Landsman  August 1995
	Really work with multiple element string items
			R. Bergman/W. Landsman  July 1996
	Work with multiple entries, R. Schwartz, GSFC/SDAC August 1996
	Use /overwrite with REFORM() W. Landsman May 1997
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbxput.pro)

DBXVAL

 NAME:
       DBXVAL

 PURPOSE:
       Quickly return a value of the specified item number
 EXPLANATION:
       Procedure to quickly return a value of the specified item number
       from the entry.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       result = dbxval( entry, idltype, nvalues, sbyte, nbytes )

 INPUTS
       entry - entry or entries from data base (bytarr)
       idltype - idl data type (obtained with db_item_info)
       nvalues - number of values to return (obtained with db_item)
       sbyte - starting byte in the entry (obtained with db_item)
       nbytes - number of bytes (needed only for string type)
                       (obtained with db_item)

 OUTPUTS:
       function value is value of the specified item in entry

 KEYWORDS:
       bswap - If set, then IEEE_TO_HOST is called.

 RESTRICTIONS:
       To increase speed the routine assumes that entry and item are
       valid and that the data base is already opened using dbopen.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       version 0  D. Lindler Nov. 1987  (for new db format)
       Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 28 March 1994.
                       Incorporated into CDS library.
       Version 2, Richard Schwartz, GSFC/SDAC, 23 August 1996
                       Allowed Entry to have 2 dimensions
       Version 2.1, 22 Feb 1997, JK Feggans,
                               avoid reform for strings arrays.
       Version 2.2     Use overwrite with REFORM(),  W. Landsman,  May 1997
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Work for multiple-valued strings   W. Landsman   October 2000
       Add new 64bit & unsigned integer datatypes W.Landsman   July 2001
       Version 3, 2-May-2003, JK Feggans/Sigma, W.T. Thompson
           Added BSWAP keyword to avoid floating errors on some platforms.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/dbxval.pro)

DB_ENT2EXT

 NAME:
	DB_ENT2EXT
 PURPOSE:
	Convert a database entry to external (IEEE) data format
 EXPLANATION:
	Converts a database entry to external (IEEE) data format prior to
	writing it.  Called from DBWRT.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	DB_ENT2EXT, ENTRY

 INPUTS:
	ENTRY	= Byte array containing a single record to be written to the
		  database file.

 OUTPUTS:
	ENTRY	= The converted array is returned in place of the input array.

 COMMON BLOCKS:
	DB_COM

 HISTORY:
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 1 June 1994
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 15 September 1995
			Fixed bug where only the first element in a
			multidimensional array was converted.
       Version 2.1 W. Landsman August 2010 Fix for multidimensional strings
       Version 2.2 W. Landsman Sep 2011 Work with new DB format

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/db_ent2ext.pro)

DB_ENT2HOST

 NAME:
	DB_ENT2HOST
 PURPOSE:
	Converts a database entry from external data format to host format.
 EXPLANATION:
	All items are extracted from the entry, and then converted to host
	format, and placed back into the entry.  Called from DBRD and DBEXT_DBF.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	DB_ENT2HOST, ENTRY, DBNO

 INPUTS:
	ENTRY	= Byte array containing a single record read from the
		  database file.
	DBNO	= Number of the opened database file.

 OUTPUTS:
	ENTRY	= The converted array is returned in place of the input array.

 COMMON BLOCKS:
	DB_COM

 HISTORY:
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 1 June 1994
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 15 September 1995
			Fixed bug where only the first element in a
			multidimensional array was converted.
	Version 3, Richard Schwartz, GSFC/SDAC, 23 August 1996
		Allow 2 dimensional byte arrays for entries to facilitate
		multiple entry processing.    Pass IDLTYPE onto IEEE_TO_HOST
       Version 4, 2 May 2003, W. Thompson
               Use BSWAP keyword to DBXVAL instead of calling IEEE_TO_HOST.
       Version 4.1 W. Landsman August 2010 Fix for multidimensional strings
       Version 4.2 W. Landsman Sep 2011 Work with new DB format

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/db_ent2host.pro)

DB_INFO

 NAME:
       DB_INFO
 PURPOSE:
       Function to obtain information on opened data base file(s)

 CALLING SEQUENCES:
       1)  result = db_info(request)
       2)  result = db_info(request,dbname)
 INPUTS (calling sequence 1):

       request - string specifying requested value(s)
               value of request          value returned in result
                       'open'          Flag set to 1 if data base(s) are opened
                       'number'        Number of data base files opened
                       'items'         Total number of items (all db's opened)
                       'update'        update flag (1 if opened for update)
                       'unit_dbf'      Unit number of the .dbf files
                       'unit_dbx'      Unit number of the .dbx files
                       'entries'       Number of entries in the db's
                       'length'        Record lengths for the db's
                       'external'      True if the db's are in external format

 INPUTS (calling sequence 2):

       request - string specifying requested value(s)
                  value of request       value returned in result
                       'name'          Name of the data base
                       'number'        Sequential number of the db
                       'items'         Number of items for this db
                       'item1'         Position of item1 for this db
                                       in item list for all db's
                       'item2'         Position of last item for this db.
                       'pointer'       Number of the item which points
                                       to this db. 0 for first or primary
                                       db.  -1 if link file pointers.
                       'length'        Record length for this db.
                       'title'         Title of the data base
                       'unit_dbf'      Unit number of the .dbf file
                       'unit_dbx'      Unit number of the .dbx file
                       'entries'       Number of entries in the db
                       'seqnum'        Last sequence number used
                       'alloc'         Allocated space (# entries)
                       'update'        1 if data base opened for update
                       'external'      True if data base in external format
                       'newdb'         True if new (post Oct 2010) format
                                       that allows entries > 32767 bytes

       dbname - data base name or number
 OUTPUTS:
       Requested value(s) are returned as the function value.

 HISTORY:
       version 1  D. Lindler    Oct. 1987
       changed type from 1 to 7 for IDLV2, J. Isensee, Nov., 1990
       William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 30 May 1994
               Added EXTERNAL request type.
       Support new DB format, add NEWDB request type W. Landsman Oct 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/db_info.pro)

DB_ITEM

 NAME:
       DB_ITEM
 PURPOSE:
       Returns the item numbers and other info. for an item name.
 EXPLANATION:
       Procedure to return the item numbers and other information
       of a specified item name

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       db_item, items, itnum, ivalnum, idltype, sbyte, numvals, nbytes

 INPUTS:
       items - item name or number
               form 1  scalar string giving item(s) as list of names
                       separated by commas
               form 2  string array giving list of item names
               form 3  string of form '$filename' giving name
                       of text file containing items (one item per
                       line)
               form 4  integer scalar giving single item number or
                         integer vector list of item numbers
               form 5  Null string specifying interactive selection
                       Upon return items will contain selected items
                       in form 1
               form 6  '*'     select all items

 OUTPUTS:
       itnum - item number
       ivalnum - value(s) number from multiple valued item
       idltype - data type(s) (1=string,2=byte,4=i*4,...)
       sbyte - starting byte(s) in entry
       numvals - number of data values for item(s)
               It is the full length of a vector item unless
               a subscript was supplied
       nbytes - number of bytes for each value
    All outputs are vectors even if a single item is requested

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       ERRMSG   = If defined and passed, then any error messages will
               be returned to the user in this parameter rather than depending
               on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are encountered,
               then a null string is returned.  In order to use this feature,
               ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

                               ERRMSG = ''
                               DB_ITEM, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
                               IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DB_INFO, GETTOK, SELECT_W

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written:   D. Lindler, GSFC/HRS, October 1987
       Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 17-Mar-1997
                       Added keyword ERRMSG
       Use STRSPLIT instead of GETTOK to parse form 1, W. Landsman July 2002
       Assume since V5.4 use FILE_EXPAND_PATH() instead of SPEC_DIR()
               W. Landsman April 2006
       Support new DB format allowing entry lengths > 32767 bytes WL Oct 2010
       Ignore blank lines in .items file WL February 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/db_item.pro)

DB_ITEM_INFO

 NAME:
	DB_ITEM_INFO
 PURPOSE:
	routine to return information on selected item(s) in the opened
	data bases.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	result = db_item_info( request, itnums)
 INPUTS:
	request - string giving the requested information.
		'name'		- item names
		'idltype'	- IDL data type (integers)
				  see documentation of intrinsic SIZE funtion
		'nvalues'	- vector item length (1 for scalar)
		'sbyte'		- starting byte in .dbf record (use bytepos
				  to get starting byte in record returned by
				  dbrd)
		'nbytes'	- bytes per data value
		'index'		- index types
		'description'	- description of the item
		'pflag'		- pointer item flags
		'pointer'	- data bases the items point to
		'format'	- print formats
		'flen'		- print field length
		'headers'	- print headers
		'bytepos'	- starting byte in dbrd record for the items
		'dbnumber'	- number of the opened data base
		'pnumber'	- number of db it points to (if the db is
					opened)
		'itemnumber'	- item number in the file

	itnums -(optional) Item numbers.  If not supplied info on all items
		are returned.
 OUTPUT:
	Requested information is returned as a vector.  Its type depends
	on the item requested.
 HISTORY:
	version 1  D. Lindler  Nov. 1987
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Support new DB format which allows > 32767 bytes W.L. Oct 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/db_item_info.pro)

DB_OR

 NAME:
	DB_OR
 PURPOSE:
	Combine two vectors of entry numbers, removing duplicate values.
 EXPLANATION:
	DB_OR can also be used to remove duplicate values from any longword
	vector

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	LIST = DB_OR( LIST1 )          ;Remove duplicate values from LIST1
		or
	LIST = DB_OR( LIST1, LIST2 )   ;Concatenate LIST1 and LIST2, remove dups

 INPUTS:
	LIST1, LIST2 - Vectors containing entry numbers, must be non-negative
			integers or longwords.
 OUTPUT:
	LIST - Vector containing entry numbers in either LIST1 or LIST2

 METHOD
	DB_OR returns where the histogram of the entry vectors is non-zero

 PROCEDURE CALLS
	ZPARCHECK - checks parameters
 REVISION HISTORY:
	Written,     W. Landsman             February, 1989
	Check for degenerate values  W.L.    February, 1993
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/db_or.pro)

DB_TITLES

 NAME:
	DB_TITLES

 PURPOSE:
	Print database name and title.  Called by DBHELP

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	db_titles, fnames, titles

 INPUT:
	fnames - string array of data base names

 SIDE EFFECT:
	Database name is printed along with the description in the .dbh file

 HISTORY:
	version 2  W. Landsman May, 1989
	modified to work under Unix, D. Neill, ACC, Feb 1991.
	William Thompson, GSFC/CDS (ARC), 1 June 1994
		Added support for external (IEEE) representation.
	William Thompson, GSFC, 3 November 1994
			Modified to allow ZDBASE to be a path string.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Assume since V5.5,      W. Landsman   September 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/database/db_titles.pro)

DECOMPOSEDCOLOR

NAME:
DECOMPOSEDCOLOR

PURPOSE:

This function is used to determine, in a device independent way, if the
current graphics device is using color decomposition. The function returns
a 1 if color decomposition is turned on, and a 0 if it is turned off. When
color decomposition is turned on, we say the device is using a true-color
display. If color decomposition is turned off, we say the device is using
an indexed color display.

AUTHOR:

FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
David Fanning, Ph.D.
1645 Sheely Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
Phone: 970-221-0438
E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com/

CATEGORY:

Utilities

CALLING SEQUENCE:

result = DecomposedColor()

RETURN VALUE:

result: A 1 if color decomposition is turned on. A 0 if color decomposition is turned off.

ARGUMENTS:

device: The IDL graphics device whose color decomposition state you wish to know the
current value of. If undefined, the current graphics device is used.

KEYWORDRS:

DEPTH: An output keyword that returns the depth of the graphics device. Normally,
either 8 for index color devices, with color decomposition turned off, or 24
for true-color devices with color decomposition turned on.

EXAMPLE:

IDL> Print, DecomposedColor() ; Color decomposition state of current graphics device.
1
IDL> Print, DecomposedColor('PS') ; Color decomposition state of PostScript graphics device.
0

MODIFICATION HISTORY:

Written by: David W. Fanning, May 24, 2009.
Modified the way decomposition was obtained for PostScript devices IDL 7.1 and higher. 12 Dec 2010. DWF.
Fixed a problem in the CASE statement with ELSE clause and added a NULL device segment. 4 Jan 2011. DWF.
It now appears 24-bit PostScript support was added in IDL 7.1, although the Get_Decomposed keyword
didn't work until IDL 7.1.1. 13 January 2011. DWF

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/decomposedcolor.pro)

DELVARX

 NAME:
	DELVARX
 PURPOSE:
 	Delete up to 10 variables for memory management (can call from routines)
 EXPLANATION:
	Like intrinsic DELVAR function, but can be used from any calling level

       Modified in January 2012 to always free memory associated with
       pointers/objects and remove the use EXECUTE()
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
 	DELVARX,  p0, [p1, p2......p9]

 INPUTS:
	p0, p1...p9 - variables to delete

 OBSOLETE KEYWORD:
       /FREE_MEM -  formerly freed memory associated with pointers
                   and objects.  Since this is now the DELVARX default this
                   keyword does nothing.

 METHOD:
	Uses HEAP_FREE and PTR_NEW(/NO_COPY) to delete variables and free
       memory

 REVISION HISTORY:
	Copied from the Solar library, written by slf, 25-Feb-1993
	Added to Astronomy Library,  September 1995
       Modified, 26-Mar-2003, Zarro (EER/GSFC) 26-Mar-2003
       - added FREE_MEM to free pointer/objects
       Modified, 28-Jan-2012, E. Rykoff (SLAC), W. Landsman -
               replace EXECUTE calls with SCOPE_VARFETCH.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/delvarx.pro)

DEREDD

 NAME:
     DEREDD

 PURPOSE:
     Deredden stellar Stromgren parameters given for a value of E(b-y)
 EXPLANATION:
     See the procedure UVBYBETA for more info.

  CALLING SEQUENCE:
     deredd, eby, by, m1, c1, ub, by0, m0, c0, ub0, /UPDATE

  INPUTS:
     Eby - color index E(b-y),scalar  (E(b-y) = 0.73*E(B-V) )
     by - b-y color (observed)
     m1 - Stromgren line blanketing parameter (observed)
     c1 - Stromgren Balmer discontinuity parameter (observed)
     ub - u-b color (observed)

     These input values are unaltered unless the /UPDATE keyword is set
  OUTPUTS:
     by0 - b-y color (dereddened)
     m0 - Line blanketing index (dereddened)
     c0 - Balmer discontinuity parameter (dereddened)
     ub0 - u-b color (dereddened)

  OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
     /UPDATE - If set, then input parameters are updated with the dereddened
           values (and output parameters are not used).
  REVISION HISTORY:
     Adapted from FORTRAN routine DEREDD by T.T. Moon
     W. Landsman          STX Co.        April, 1988
     Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/deredd.pro)

DETABIFY

 NAME:
	DETABIFY
 PURPOSE:
	Replaces tabs in character strings with appropriate number of spaces
 EXPLANATION:
	The number of space characters inserted is calculated to space
	out to the next effective tab stop, each of which is eight characters
	apart.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	Result = DETABIFY( CHAR_STR )

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
	CHAR_STR = Character string variable (or array) to remove tabs from.

 OUTPUT:
	Result of function is CHAR_STR with tabs replaced by spaces.

 RESTRICTIONS:
	CHAR_STR must be a character string variable.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
	William Thompson, Feb. 1992.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/detabify.pro)

DIST_CIRCLE

 NAME:
      DIST_CIRCLE
 PURPOSE:
      Form a square array where each value is its distance to a given center.
 EXPLANATION:
      Returns a square array in which the value of each element is its
      distance to a specified center. Useful for circular aperture photometry.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      DIST_CIRCLE, IM, N, [ XCEN, YCEN,  /DOUBLE ]

 INPUTS:
      N = either  a scalar specifying the size of the N x N square output
               array, or a 2 element vector specifying the size of the
               N x M rectangular output array.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
      XCEN,YCEN = Scalars designating the X,Y pixel center.  These need
               not be integers, and need not be located within the
               output image.   If not supplied then the center of the output
               image is used (XCEN = YCEN = (N-1)/2.).

 OUTPUTS:
       IM  - N by N (or M x N) floating array in which the value of each
               pixel is equal to its distance to XCEN,YCEN

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       /DOUBLE - If this keyword is set and nonzero, the output array will
               be of type DOUBLE rather than floating point.

 EXAMPLE:
       Total the flux in a circular aperture within 3' of a specified RA
       and DEC on an 512 x 512 image IM, with a header H.

       IDL> adxy, H, RA, DEC, x, y       ;Convert RA and DEC to X,Y
       IDL> getrot, H, rot, cdelt        ;CDELT gives plate scale deg/pixel
       IDL> cdelt = cdelt*3600.          ;Convert to arc sec/pixel
       IDL> dist_circle, circle, 512, x, y  ;Create a distance circle image
       IDL> circle = circle*abs(cdelt[0])   ;Distances now given in arcseconds
       IDL> good = where(circle LT 180)  ;Within 3 arc minutes
       IDL> print,total( IM[good] )      ;Total pixel values within 3'

 RESTRICTIONS:
       The speed of DIST_CIRCLE decreases and the the demands on virtual
       increase as the square of the output dimensions.   Users should
       dimension the output array as small as possible, and re-use the
       array rather than re-calling DIST_CIRCLE

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Adapted from DIST    W. Landsman            March 1991
       Allow a rectangular output array   W. Landsman     June 1994
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Add /DOUBLE keyword, make XCEN,YCEN optional  W. Landsman Jun 1998

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/dist_circle.pro)

DIST_ELLIPSE

 NAME:
       DIST_ELLIPSE
 PURPOSE:
       Create a mask array useful for elliptical aperture photemetry
 EXPLANATION:
       Form an array in which the value of each element is equal to the
       semi-major axis of the ellipse of specified center, axial ratio, and
       position  angle, which passes through that element.  Useful for
       elliptical aperture photometry.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       DIST_ELLIPSE, IM, N, XC, YC, RATIO, POS_ANG, /DOUBLE

 INPUTS:
       N = either  a scalar specifying the size of the N x N square output
               array, or a 2 element vector specifying the size of the
               M x N rectangular output array.
       XC,YC - Scalars giving the position of the ellipse center.   This does
               not necessarily have to be within the image
       RATIO - Scalar giving the ratio of the major to minor axis.   This
               should be greater than 1 for postion angle to have its
               standard meaning.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       POS_ANG - Position angle of the major axis, measured counter-clockwise
               from the Y axis.  For an image in standard orientation
               (North up, East left) this is the astronomical position angle.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       /DOUBLE - If this keyword is set and nonzero, the output array will
               be of type DOUBLE rather than floating point.

 OUTPUT:
       IM - REAL*4 elliptical mask array, of size M x N.  THe value of each
               pixel is equal to the semi-major axis of the ellipse of center
                XC,YC, axial ratio RATIO, and position angle POS_ANG, which
               passes through the pixel.

 EXAMPLE:
       Total the flux in a elliptical aperture with a major axis of 3', an
       axial ratio of 2.3, and a position angle of 25 degrees centered on
       a specified RA and DEC.   The image array, IM is 200 x 200, and has
       an associated FITS header H.

       ADXY, H, ra, dec, x, y       ;Get X and Y corresponding to RA and Dec
       GETROT, H, rot, cdelt        ;CDELT gives plate scale degrees/pixel
       cdelt = abs( cdelt)*3600.    ;CDELT now in arc seconds/pixel
       DIST_ELLIPSE, ell, 200, x, y, 2.3, 25  ;Create a elliptical image mask
       ell = ell*cdelt(0)           ;Distances now given in arcseconds
       good = where( ell lt 180 )   ;Within 3 arc minutes
       print,total( im(good) )      ;Total pixel values within 3'

 RESTRICTIONS:
       The speed of DIST_ELLIPSE decreases and the the demands on virtual
       increase as the square of the output dimensions.   Users should
       dimension the output array as small as possible, and re-use the
       array rather than re-calling DIST_ELLIPSE

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written    W. Landsman             April, 1991
       Somewhat faster algorithm          August, 1992
       Allow rectangular output array     June, 1994
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added /DOUBLE keyword   W. Landsman   July 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/dist_ellipse.pro)

ECI2GEO

 NAME:
     ECI2GEO

 PURPOSE:
     Convert Earth-centered inertial coordinates to geographic spherical coords
 EXPLANATION:
     Converts from ECI (Earth-Centered Inertial) (X,Y,Z) rectangular
     coordinates to geographic spherical coordinates (latitude, longitude,
     altitude).    JD time is also needed as input.

     ECI coordinates are in km from Earth center.
     Geographic coordinates are in degrees/degrees/km
     Geographic coordinates assume the Earth is a perfect sphere, with radius
     equal to its equatorial radius.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     gcoord=eci2geo(ECI_XYZ,JDtime)

 INPUT:
       ECI_XYZ : the ECI [X,Y,Z] coordinates (in km), can be an array [3,n]
                 of n such coordinates.
       JDtime: the Julian Day time, double precision. Can be a 1-D array of n
                 such times.

 KEYWORD INPUTS:
       None

 OUTPUT:
       a 3-element array of geographic [latitude,longitude,altitude], or an
         array [3,n] of n such coordinates, double precision

 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None

 PROCEDURES USED:
       CT2LST - Convert Local Civil Time to Local Mean Sidereal Time

 EXAMPLE:
       IDL> gcoord=eci2geo([6378.137+600,0,0], 2452343.38982663D)
       IDL> print,gcoord
       0.0000000       232.27096       600.00000

       (The above is the geographic direction of the vernal point on
       2002/03/09 21:21:21.021, in geographic coordinates. The chosen
       altitude was 600 km.)

       gcoord can be further transformed into geodetic coordinates (using
       geo2geodetic.pro) or into geomagnetic coordinates (using geo2mag.pro)

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Pascal Saint-Hilaire (Saint-Hilaire@astro.phys.ethz.ch) on
              2001/05/13
       Modified on 2002/05/13, PSH : vectorization + use of JD times

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/eci2geo.pro)

EQ2HOR

 NAME:
   EQ2HOR

 PURPOSE:
    Convert celestial  (ra-dec) coords to local horizon coords (alt-az).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

    eq2hor, ra, dec, jd, alt, az, [ha, LAT= , LON= , /WS, OBSNAME= , $
                       /B1950 , PRECESS_= 0, NUTATE_= 0, REFRACT_= 0, $
                       ABERRATION_= 0, ALTITUDE= , /VERBOSE, _EXTRA= ]

 DESCRIPTION:
  This is a nice code to calculate horizon (alt,az) coordinates from equatorial
  (ra,dec) coords.   It is typically accurate to about 1 arcsecond or better (I
  have checked the output against the publicly available XEPHEM software). It
  performs precession, nutation, aberration, and refraction corrections.  The
  perhaps best thing about it is that it can take arrays as inputs, in all
  variables and keywords EXCEPT Lat, lon, and Altitude (the code assumes these
  aren't changing), and uses vector arithmetic in every calculation except
  when calculating the precession matrices.

 INPUT VARIABLES:
       RA   : Right Ascension of object  (J2000) in degrees (FK5); scalar or
              vector.
       Dec  : Declination of object (J2000) in degrees (FK5), scalar or vector.
       JD   : Julian Date [scalar or vector]

       Note: if RA and DEC are arrays, then alt and az will also be arrays.
             If RA and DEC are arrays, JD may be a scalar OR an array of the
             same dimensionality.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       lat   : north geodetic latitude of location in degrees
       lon   : EAST longitude of location in degrees (Specify west longitude
               with a negative sign.)
       /WS    : Set this to get the azimuth measured westward from south (not
               East of North).
       obsname: Set this to a valid observatory name to be used by the
              astrolib OBSERVATORY procedure, which will return the latitude
              and longitude to be used by this program.
       /B1950 : Set this if your ra and dec are specified in B1950, FK4
              coordinates (instead of J2000, FK5)
       precess_ : Set this to 1 to force precession [default], 0 for no
               precession correction
       nutate_  : Set this to 1 to force nutation [default], 0 for no nutation.
       aberration_ : Set this to 1 to force aberration correction [default],
                     0 for no correction.
       refract_ : Set to 1 to force refraction correction [default], 0 for no
                     correction.
       altitude: The altitude of the observing location, in meters. [default=0].
       verbose: Set this for verbose output.  The default is verbose=0.
       _extra: This is for setting TEMPERATURE or PRESSURE explicitly, which are
               used by CO_REFRACT to calculate the refraction effect of the
               atmosphere. If you don't set these, the program will make an
               intelligent guess as to what they are (taking into account your
               altitude).  See CO_REFRACT for more details.

 OUTPUT VARIABLES: (all double precision)
       alt    : altitude (in degrees)
       az     : azimuth angle (in degrees, measured EAST from NORTH, but see
                keyword WS above.)
       ha     : hour angle (in degrees) (optional)

 DEPENDENCIES:
       NUTATE, PRECESS, OBSERVATORY, SUNPOS, ADSTRING() (from the astrolib)
       CO_NUTATE, CO_ABERRATION, CO_REFRACT, ALTAZ2HADEC

 BASIC STEPS
   Apply refraction correction to find apparent Alt.
   Calculate Local Mean Sidereal Time
   Calculate Local Apparent Sidereal Time
   Do Spherical Trig to find apparent hour angle, declination.
   Calculate Right Ascension from hour angle and local sidereal time.
   Nutation Correction to Ra-Dec
   Aberration correction to Ra-Dec
       Precess Ra-Dec to current equinox.


CORRECTIONS I DO NOT MAKE:
   *  Deflection of Light by the sun due to GR. (typically milliarcseconds,
        can be arseconds within one degree of the sun)
   *  The Effect of Annual Parallax (typically < 1 arcsecond)
   *  and more (see below)

 TO DO
    * Better Refraction Correction.  Need to put in wavelength dependence,
    and integrate through the atmosphere.
        * Topocentric Parallax Correction (will take into account elevation of
          the observatory)
    * Proper Motion (but this will require crazy lookup tables or something).
        * Difference between UTC and UT1 in determining LAST -- is this
          important?
        * Effect of Annual Parallax (is this the same as topocentric Parallax?)
    * Polar Motion
        * Better connection to Julian Date Calculator.

 EXAMPLE

  Find the position of the open cluster NGC 2264 at the Effelsburg Radio
  Telescope in Germany, on June 11, 2023, at local time 22:00 (METDST).
  The inputs will then be:

       Julian Date = 2460107.250
       Latitude = 50d 31m 36s
       Longitude = 06h 51m 18s
       Altitude = 369 meters
       RA (J2000) = 06h 40m 58.2s
       Dec(J2000) = 09d 53m 44.0s

  IDL> eq2hor, ten(6,40,58.2)*15., ten(9,53,44), 2460107.250d, alt, az, $
               lat=ten(50,31,36), lon=ten(6,51,18), altitude=369.0, /verb, $
                pres=980.0, temp=283.0

 The program produces this output (because the VERBOSE keyword was set)

 Latitude = +50 31 36.0   Longitude = +06 51 18.0
 Julian Date =  2460107.250000
 Ra, Dec:  06 40 58.2  +09 53 44.0   (J2000)
 Ra, Dec:  06 42 15.7  +09 52 19.2   (J2023.4422)
 Ra, Dec:  06 42 13.8  +09 52 26.9   (fully corrected)
 LMST = +11 46 42.0
 LAST = +11 46 41.4
 Hour Angle = +05 04 27.6  (hh:mm:ss)
 Az, El =  17 42 25.6  +16 25 10.3   (Apparent Coords)
 Az, El =  17 42 25.6  +16 28 22.8   (Observer Coords)

 Compare this with the result from XEPHEM:
 Az, El =  17h 42m 25.6s +16d 28m 21s

 This 1.8 arcsecond discrepancy in elevation arises primarily from slight
 differences in the way I calculate the refraction correction from XEPHEM, and
 is pretty typical.

 AUTHOR:
   Chris O'Dell
       Univ. of Wisconsin-Madison
   Observational Cosmology Laboratory
   Email: odell@cmb.physics.wisc.edu

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/eq2hor.pro)

EQPOLE

 NAME:
       EQPOLE
 PURPOSE:
       Convert RA and Dec to X,Y using an equal-area polar projection.
 EXPLANATION:
       The output X and Y coordinates are scaled to be between
       -90 and +90 to go from equator to pole to equator. Output map points
       can be centered on the north pole or south pole.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       EQPOLE, L, B, X, Y, [ /SOUTHPOLE ]

 INPUTS:
       L - longitude - scalar or vector, in degrees
       B - latitude - same number of elements as RA, in degrees

 OUTPUTS:
       X - X coordinate, same number of elements as RA.   X is normalized to
               be between -90 and 90.
       Y - Y coordinate, same number of elements as DEC.  Y is normalized to
               be between -90 and 90.

 KEYWORDS:

       /SOUTHPOLE      - Keyword to indicate that the plot is to be centered
               on the south pole instead of the north pole.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       J. Bloch        LANL, SST-9     1.1     5/16/91
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/eqpole.pro)

EQPOLE_GRID

 NAME:
       EQPOLE_GRID

 PURPOSE:
       Produce an equal area polar projection grid overlay
 EXPLANATION:
       Grid is written on the current graphics device using the equal area
       polar projection.   EQPOLE_GRID assumes that the output plot
       coordinates span the x and y ranges of -90 to 90 for a region that
       covers the equator to the chosen pole. The grid is assumed to go from
       the equator to the chosen pole.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       EQPOLE_GRID[,DLONG,DLAT,[/SOUTHPOLE, LABEL = , /NEW, _EXTRA=]

 INPUTS:

       DLONG   = Optional input longitude line spacing in degrees. If left
                 out, defaults to 30.
       DLAT    = Optional input lattitude line spacing in degrees. If left
                 out, defaults to 30.

 INPUT KEYWORDS:

       /SOUTHPOLE       = Optional flag indicating that the output plot is
                         to be centered on the south rather than the north
                         pole.
       LABEL           = Optional flag for creating labels on the output
                         grid on the prime meridian and the equator for
                         lattitude and longitude lines. If set =2, then
                         the longitude lines are labeled in hours and minutes.
       CHARSIZE       = If /LABEL is set, then CHARSIZE specifies the size
                         of the label characters (passed to XYOUTS)
       CHARTHICK     =  If /LABEL is set, then CHARTHICK specifies the
                         thickness of the label characters (passed to XYOUTS)
       /NEW          =   If this keyword is set, then EQPOLE_GRID will create
                         a new plot, rather than overlay an existing plot.

       Any valid keyword to OPLOT such as COLOR, LINESTYLE, THICK can be
       passed to AITOFF_GRID (though the _EXTRA facility) to to specify the
       color, style, or thickness of the grid lines.
 OUTPUTS:
       Draws grid lines on current graphics device.

 EXAMPLE:
       Create a labeled equal area projection grid of the Galaxy, centered on
       the South pole, and overlay stars at specified Galactic longitudes,
       glong and latitudes, glat

       IDL> eqpole_grid,/label,/new,/south       ;Create labeled grid
       IDL> eqpole, glong, glat, x,y      ;Convert to X,Y coordinates
       IDL> plots,x,y,psym=2              ;Overplot "star" positions.


 COPYRIGHT NOTICE:

       Copyright 1992, The Regents of the University of California. This
       software was produced under U.S. Government contract (W-7405-ENG-36)
       by Los Alamos National Laboratory, which is operated by the
       University of California for the U.S. Department of Energy.
       The U.S. Government is licensed to use, reproduce, and distribute
       this software. Neither the Government nor the University makes
       any warranty, express or implied, or assumes any liability or
       responsibility for the use of this software.

 AUTHOR AND MODIFICATIONS:

       J. Bloch        1.4     10/28/92
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Create default plotting coords, if needed   W. Landsman  August 2000
       Added _EXTRA, CHARTHICK, CHARSIZE keywords  W. Landsman  March 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/eqpole_grid.pro)

ERROR_MESSAGE

 NAME:
    ERROR_MESSAGE

 PURPOSE:

    The purpose of this function  is to have a device-independent
    error messaging function. The error message is reported
    to the user by using DIALOG_MESSAGE if widgets are
    supported and MESSAGE otherwise.

    In general, the ERROR_MESSAGE function is not called directly.
    Rather, it is used in a CATCH error handler. Errors are thrown
    to ERROR_MESSAGE with the MESSAGE command. A typical CATCH error
    handler is shown below.

       Catch, theError
       IF theError NE 0 THEN BEGIN
          Catch, /Cancel
          void = Error_Message()
          RETURN
       ENDIF

    Error messages would get into the ERROR_MESSAGE function by
    throwing an error with the MESSAGE command, like this:

       IF test NE 1 THEN Message, 'The test failed.'

 AUTHOR:

   FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
   David Fanning, Ph.D.
   1645 Sheely Drive
   Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
   Phone: 970-221-0438
   E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
   Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com/

 CATEGORY:

    Utility.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

    ok = Error_Message(the_Error_Message)

 INPUTS:

    the_Error_Message: This is a string argument containing the error
       message you want reported. If undefined, this variable is set
       to the string in the !Error_State.Msg system variable.

 KEYWORDS:

    ERROR: Set this keyword to cause Dialog_Message to use the ERROR
       reporting dialog. Note that a bug in IDL causes the ERROR dialog
       to be used whether this keyword is set to 0 or 1!

    INFORMATIONAL: Set this keyword to cause Dialog_Message to use the
       INFORMATION dialog instead of the WARNING dialog. Note that a bug
       in IDL causes the ERROR dialog to be used if this keyword is set to 0!

    NONAME: Normally, the name of the routine in which the error occurs is
       added to the error message. Setting this keyword will suppress this
       behavior.

    TITLE: Set this keyword to the title of the DIALOG_MESSAGE window. By
       default the keyword is set to 'System Error' unless !ERROR_STATE.NAME
       equals "IDL_M_USER_ERR", in which case it is set to "Trapped Error'.

    TRACEBACK: Setting this keyword results in an error traceback
       being printed to standard output with the PRINT command. Set to
       1 (ON) by default. Use TRACEBACK=0 to turn this functionality off.

    QUIET: Set this keyword to suppress the DIALOG_MESSAGE pop-up dialog.

 OUTPUTS:

    Currently the only output from the function is the string "OK".

 RESTRICTIONS:

    The WARNING Dialog_Message dialog is used by default.

 EXAMPLE:

    To handle an undefined variable error:

    IF N_Elements(variable) EQ 0 THEN $
       ok = Error_Message('Variable is undefined')

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

    Written by: David W. Fanning, 27 April 1999.
    Added the calling routine's name in the message and NoName keyword. 31 Jan 2000. DWF.
    Added _Extra keyword. 10 February 2000. DWF.
    Forgot to add _Extra everywhere. Fixed for MAIN errors. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
    Adding call routine's name to Traceback Report. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
    Added ERROR, INFORMATIONAL, and TITLE keywords. 19 SEP 2002. DWF.
    Removed the requirement that you use the NONAME keyword with the MESSAGE
      command when generating user-trapped errors. 19 SEP 2002. DWF.
    Added distinctions between trapped errors (errors generated with the
      MESSAGE command) and IDL system errors. Note that if you call ERROR_MESSAGE
      directly, then the state of the !ERROR_STATE.NAME variable is set
      to the *last* error generated. It is better to access ERROR_MESSAGE
      indirectly in a Catch error handler from the MESSAGE command. 19 SEP 2002. DWF.
    Change on 19 SEP 2002 to eliminate NONAME requirement did not apply to object methods.
      Fixed program to also handle messages from object methods. 30 JULY 2003. DWF.
    Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
    Made a traceback the default case without setting TRACEBACK keyword. 19 Nov 2004. DWF.
    Added check for window connection specifically for CRON jobs. 6 May 2008. DWF.
    Added QUIET keyword. 18 October 2008. DWF.
    The traceback information was bypassed when in the PostScript device. Not what I
      had in mind. Fixed. 6 July 2009. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/error_message.pro)

EULER

 NAME:
     EULER
 PURPOSE:
     Transform between Galactic, celestial, and ecliptic coordinates.
 EXPLANATION:
     Use the procedure ASTRO to use this routine interactively

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      EULER, AI, BI, AO, BO, [ SELECT, /FK4, /RADIAN, SELECT = ]

 INPUTS:
       AI - Input Longitude, scalar or vector.  In DEGREES unless /RADIAN
            is set.  If only two parameters are supplied, then  AI and BI
             will be modified to contain the output longitude and latitude.
       BI - Input Latitude in DEGREES

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       SELECT - Integer (1-6) specifying type of coordinate transformation.

      SELECT   From          To        |   SELECT      From            To
       1     RA-Dec (2000)  Galactic   |     4       Ecliptic      RA-Dec
       2     Galactic       RA-DEC     |     5       Ecliptic      Galactic
       3     RA-Dec         Ecliptic   |     6       Galactic      Ecliptic

      If not supplied as a parameter or keyword, then EULER will prompt for
      the value of SELECT
      Celestial coordinates (RA, Dec) should be given in equinox J2000
      unless the /FK4 keyword is set.
 OUTPUTS:
       AO - Output Longitude in DEGREES, always double precision
       BO - Output Latitude in DEGREES, always double precision

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       /FK4 - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then input and output
             celestial and ecliptic coordinates should be given in equinox
             B1950.
       /RADIAN - if set, then all input and output angles are in radians rather
             than degrees.
       SELECT  - The coordinate conversion integer (1-6) may alternatively be
              specified as a keyword
 EXAMPLE:
       Find the Galactic coordinates of Cyg X-1 (ra=299.590315, dec=35.201604)
       IDL> ra = 299.590315d
       IDL> dec = 35.201604d
       IDL> euler,ra,dec,glong,glat,1 & print,glong,glat
            71.334990, 3.0668335
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written W. Landsman,  February 1987
       Adapted from Fortran by Daryl Yentis NRL
       Made J2000 the default, added /FK4 keyword  W. Landsman December 1998
       Add option to specify SELECT as a keyword W. Landsman March 2003
       Use less virtual memory for large input arrays W. Landsman June 2008
       Added /RADIAN input keyword  W. Landsman   Sep 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/euler.pro)

EXPAND_TILDE()

 NAME:
      EXPAND_TILDE()

 PURPOSE:
       Expand tilde in UNIX directory names

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       IDL> output=expand_tilde(input)

 INPUTS:
       INPUT = input file or directory name, scalar string

 OUTPUT:
       Returns expanded filename, scalar string

 EXAMPLES:
       output=expand_tilde('~zarro/test.doc')
               ---> output='/usr/users/zarro'

 NOTES:
       This version of EXPAND_TILDE differs from the version in the Solar
       Library in that it does not call the functions EXIST and IDL_RELEASE.
       However, it should work identically.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       None.
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Version 1,  17-Feb-1997,  D M Zarro.  Written
       Transfered from Solar Library   W. Landsman   Sep. 1997
       Made more robust  D. Zarro/W. Landsman  Sep. 2000
       Made even more robust (since things like ~zarro weren't being expanded)
       Zarro (EITI/GSFC, Mar 2001)

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/expand_tilde.pro)

EXTAST

 NAME:
     EXTAST
 PURPOSE:
     Extract ASTrometry parameters from a FITS image header.
 EXPLANATION:
     Extract World Coordinate System information
     ( http://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov/fits_wcs.html ) from a FITS header and
     place it into an IDL structure.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     EXTAST, hdr, [ astr, noparams, ALT= ]

 INPUT:
     HDR - variable containing the FITS header (string array)

 OUTPUTS:
     ASTR - Anonymous structure containing astrometry info from the FITS
             header ASTR always contains the following tags (even though
             some projections do not require all the parameters)
       .NAXIS - 2 element array giving image size
      .CD   -  2 x 2 array containing the astrometry parameters CD1_1 CD1_2
               in DEGREES/PIXEL                                 CD2_1 CD2_2
      .CDELT - 2 element double vector giving physical increment at the
                 reference pixel
      .CRPIX - 2 element double vector giving X and Y coordinates of reference
               pixel (def = NAXIS/2) in FITS convention (first pixel is 1,1)
      .CRVAL - 2 element double precision vector giving R.A. and DEC of
             reference pixel in DEGREES
      .CTYPE - 2 element string vector giving projection types, default
             ['RA---TAN','DEC--TAN']
      .LONGPOLE - scalar giving native longitude of the celestial pole
             (default = 180 for zenithal projections)
      .LATPOLE - scalar giving native latitude of the celestial pole default=0)
      .PV2 - Vector of projection parameter associated with latitude axis
             PV2 will have up to 21 elements for the ZPN projection, up to 3
             for the SIN projection and no more than 2 for any other
             projection
      .DISTORT - optional substructure specifying any distortion parameters
                 currently implemented only for "SIP" (Spitzer Imaging
                 Polynomial) distortion parameters

       NOPARAMS -  Scalar indicating the results of EXTAST
             -1 = Failure - Header missing astrometry parameters
             1 = Success - Header contains CROTA + CDELT (AIPS-type) astrometry
             2 = Success - Header contains CDn_m astrometry, rec.
             3 = Success - Header contains PCn_m + CDELT astrometry.
             4 = Success - Header contains ST  Guide Star Survey astrometry
                           (see gsssextast.pro )
 OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
       ALT -  single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying an alternate
              astrometry system present in the FITS header.    The default is
              to use the primary astrometry or ALT = ' '.   If /ALT is set,
              then this is equivalent to ALT = 'A'.   See Section 3.3 of
              Greisen & Calabretta (2002, A&A, 395, 1061) for information about
              alternate astrometry keywords.    If not set on input, then
              ALT is set to ' ' on output.
 PROCEDURE:
       EXTAST checks for astrometry parameters in the following order:

       (1) the CD matrix PC1_1,PC1_2...plus CDELT*, CRPIX and CRVAL
       (2) the CD matrix CD1_1,CD1_2... plus CRPIX and CRVAL.
       (3) CROTA2 (or CROTA1) and CDELT plus CRPIX and CRVAL.

       All three forms are valid FITS according to the paper "Representations
       of World Coordinates in FITS by Greisen and Calabretta (2002, A&A, 395,
       1061 http://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov/fits_wcs.html ) although form (1) is
       preferred.

 NOTES:
       1.  An anonymous structure is created to avoid structure definition
       conflicts.    This is needed because some projection systems
       require additional dimensions (i.e. spherical cube
       projections require a specification of the cube face).

       2,   Some FITS headers (e.g.from HST/ACS) include SIP forward distortion
       coefficients but do not include the reverse coefficients.   Currently,
       EXTAST only gives a warning that the reverse coefficients (RA,Dec to
       X,Y) are not present.   EXTAST should actually compute
       the inverse coefficients, but this is not yet implemented..
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
      GSSSEXTAST, ZPARCHECK
 REVISION HISTORY
      Written by B. Boothman 4/15/86
      Accept CD001001 keywords               1-3-88
      Accept CD1_1, CD2_1... keywords    W. Landsman    Nov. 92
      Recognize GSSS FITS header         W. Landsman    June 94
      Get correct sign, when converting CDELT* to CD matrix for right-handed
      coordinate system                  W. Landsman   November 1998
      Consistent conversion between CROTA and CD matrix  October 2000
      CTYPE = 'PIXEL' means no astrometry params  W. Landsman January 2001
      Don't choke if only 1 CTYPE value given W. Landsman  August 2001
      Recognize PC00n00m keywords again (sigh...)  W. Landsman December 2001
      Recognize GSSS in ctype also       D. Finkbeiner Jan 2002
      Introduce ALT keyword              W. Landsman June 2003
      Fix error introduced June 2003 where free-format values would be
      truncated if more than 20 characters.  W. Landsman Aug 2003
      Further fix to free-format values -- slash need not be present Sep 2003
      Default value of LATPOLE is 90.0  W. Landsman February 2004
      Allow for distortion substructure, currently implemented only for
          SIP (Spitzer Imaging Polynomial)   W. Landsman February 2004
      Correct LONGPOLE computation if CTYPE = ['*DEC','*RA'] W. L. Feb. 2004
      Assume since V5.3 (vector STRMID)  W. Landsman Feb 2004
      Yet another fix to free-format values   W. Landsman April 2004
      Introduce PV2 tag to replace PROJP1, PROJP2.. etc.  W. Landsman May 2004
      Convert NCP projection to generalized SIN   W. Landsman Aug 2004
      Add NAXIS tag to output structure  W. Landsman Jan 2007
      .CRPIX tag now Double instead of Float   W. Landsman  Apr 2007
      If duplicate keywords use the *last* value W. Landsman Aug 2008
      Fix typo for AZP projection, nonzero longpole N. Cunningham Feb 2009
      Give warning if reverse SIP coefficient not present  W. Landsman Nov 2011
      Allow obsolete CD matrix representations W. Landsman May 2012

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/extast.pro)

EXTGRP

 NAME:
	EXTGRP
 PURPOSE:
	Extract the group parameter information out of SXREAD output
 EXPLANATION:
	This procedure extracts the group parameter information out of a
	header and parameter variable obtained from SXREAD.  This allows
	astrometry, photometry and other parameters to be easily SXPARed by
	conventional methods and allows the image and header to be saved in
	a SIMPLE format.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	ExtGrp, hdr, par

 INPUT:
	HDR - The header which is to be converted (input and output)
	PAR - The Parameter string returned from a call to SXREAD

 OUTPUT:
	HDR -  The converted header, string array

 OTHER PROCEDURES CALLED:
	SXPAR(), SXADDPAR, SXGPAR(), STRN()

 HISTORY:
	25-JUN-90 Version 1 written
	13-JUL-92 Header finally added to this ancient procedure, code spiffed up
	a bit.  Now 3 times faster.  Added PTYPE comment inclusion.  E. Deutsch
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/sdas/extgrp.pro)

EXTRAP

 NAME:
       EXTRAP

 PURPOSE:
       This procedure fills in the ends of a one-dimensional array from
       interior portions using polynomial extrapolation.

 CATEGORY:
       Image processing

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       EXTRAP, Deg, X, Y, Y2

 INPUT POSITIONAL PARAMETERS:
       Deg:   Degree of polynomial
       X:     Independent variable
       Y:     Dependent variable

 KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       LIMS:  3-element array giving range of X to be used to fit
              polynomial and starting point where extrapolation is
              to be substituted; if not given, you click on a plot;
              order of elements is [xmin, xmax, xstart]; if LIMS is
              specified, then program is silent

 OUTPUT POSITIONAL PARAMETERS:
       Y2:    Dependent variable with extrapolated portion filled in

 SIDE EFFECTS:
     May pop a window for selecting range.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
     Written by RSH, RITSS, 14 Aug 98
     Spiffed up for library.  RSH, 6 Oct 98

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/skyadj_cube.pro)

FACTOR

 NAME:
       FACTOR
 PURPOSE:
       Find prime factors of a given number.
 CATEGORY:
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       factor, x, p, n
 INPUTS:
       x = Number to factor (>1).       in
 KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       Keywords:
         /QUIET  means do not print factors.
         /DEBUG  Means list steps as they happen.
         /TRY    Go beyond 20000 primes.
 OUTPUTS:
       p = Array of prime numbers.      out
       n = Count of each element of p.  out
 COMMON BLOCKS:
 NOTES:
       Note: see also prime, numfactors, print_fact.
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       R. Sterner.  4 Oct, 1988.
       RES 25 Oct, 1990 --- converted to IDL V2.
       R. Sterner, 1999 Jun 30 --- Improved (faster, bigger).
       R. Sterner, 1999 Jul  7 --- Bigger values (used unsigned).
       R. Sterner, 1999 Jul  9 --- Tried to make backward compatable.
       R. Sterner, 2000 Jan 06 --- Fixed to ignore non-positive numbers.
       Johns Hopkins University Applied Physics Laboratory.

 Copyright (C) 1988, Johns Hopkins University/Applied Physics Laboratory
 This software may be used, copied, or redistributed as long as it is not
 sold and this copyright notice is reproduced on each copy made.  This
 routine is provided as is without any express or implied warranties
 whatsoever.  Other limitations apply as described in the file disclaimer.txt.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/jhuapl/factor.pro)

FDECOMP

 NAME:
     FDECOMP
 PURPOSE:
     Routine to decompose file name(s) for any operating system.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     FDECOMP, filename, disk, dir, name, qual, [OSFamily = ]

 INPUT:
     filename - string file name(s), scalar or vector

 OUTPUTS:
     All the output parameters will have the same number of elements as
       input filename

       disk - disk name, always '' on a Unix machine, scalar or vector string
       dir - directory name, scalar or vector string
       name - file name, scalar or vector string
       qual - qualifier, set equal to the characters beyond the last "."

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
     OSFamily -  scalar string specifying the operating system, must be either
             'Windows' or 'unix'.    If not supplied,
             then !VERSION.OS_FAMILY is used to determine the OS.
 EXAMPLES:
     Consider the following file names

     unix:    file = '/itt/idl71/avg.pro'
     Windows: file =  'd:\itt\idl71\avg.pro'

     then IDL> FDECOMP,  file, disk, dir, name, qual
       will return the following

                 Disk             Dir          Name        Qual
       Unix:      ''            '/itt/idl71/'  'avg'       'pro'
       Windows:    'd:'         \itt\idl71\    'avg'       'pro'

 NOTES:
     (1) The period is removed between the name and qualifier
     (2) Unlike the intrinsic FILE_BASENAME() and FILE_DIRNAME() functions,
         one can use FDECOMP to decompose a Windows file name on a Unix machine
         or a Unix filename on a Windows machine.

 ROUTINES CALLED:
     None.
 HISTORY
     version 1  D. Lindler  Oct 1986
     Include VMS DECNET machine name in disk    W. Landsman  HSTX  Feb. 94
     Converted to Mac IDL, I. Freedman HSTX March 1994
     Major rewrite to accept vector filenames V5.3   W. Landsman June 2000
     Fix cases where disk name not always present  W. Landsman  Sep. 2000
     Make sure version defined for Windows  W. Landsman April 2004
     Include final delimiter in directory under Windows as advertised
                W. Landsman   May 2006
     Remove VMS support, W. Landsman    September 2006
     Remove MacOS branch (same as Unix) W. Landsman  August 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/fdecomp.pro)

FILTER_IMAGE

 NAME:
       FILTER_IMAGE

 PURPOSE:
       Identical to MEDIAN or SMOOTH but handle edges and allow iterations.
 EXPLANATION:
       Computes the average and/or median of pixels in moving box,
       replacing center pixel with the computed average and/or median,
       (using the IDL SMOOTH() or MEDIAN() functions).
       The main reason for using this function is the options to
       also process the pixels at edges and corners of image, and,
       to apply iterative smoothing simulating convolution with Gaussian,
       and/or to convolve image with a Gaussian kernel.    Users might also
       look at the function ESTIMATOR_FILTER() introduced in IDL 7.1.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Result = filter_image( image, SMOOTH=width, MEDIAN = width, /ALL_PIXELS
                               /ITERATE, FWHM =,  /NO_FT_CONVOL)

 INPUT:
       image = 2-D array (matrix)

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       SMOOTH = scalar (odd) integer specifying the width of a square box
               for moving average, in # pixels.  /SMOOTH  means use box
               width = 3 pixels for smoothing.

        MEDIAN = scalar (usually odd) integer specifying the width of square
               moving box for median filter, in # pixels.   /MEDIAN  means use
               box width = 3 pixels for median filter.

       /ALL_PIXELS causes the edges of image to be filtered as well.   This
               is accomplished by reflecting pixels adjacent to edges outward
               (similar to the /EDGE_WRAP keyword in CONVOL).
               Note that this is a different algorithm from the /EDGE_TRUNCATE
               keyword to SMOOTH or CONVOL, which duplicates the nearest pixel.

       /ITERATE means apply smooth(image,3) iteratively for a count of
               (box_width-1)/2 times (=radius), when box_width >= 5.
               This is equivalent to convolution with a Gaussian PSF
               of FWHM = 2 * sqrt( radius ) as radius gets large.
               Note that /ALL_PIXELS is automatically applied,
               giving better results in the iteration limit.
               (also, MEDIAN keyword is ignored when /ITER is specified).

       FWHM_GAUSSIAN = Full-width half-max of Gaussian to convolve with image.
                       FWHM can be a single number (circular beam),
                       or 2 numbers giving axes of elliptical beam.

       /NO_FT_CONVOL causes the convolution to be computed directly,
               with intrinsic IDL CONVOL function.   The default is to use
               FFT when factors of size are all LE 13.   Note that
               external function convolve.pro handles both cases)

 OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT KEYWORD:
     PSF = Array containing the PSF used during the convolution.   This
           keyword is only active if the FWHM_GAUSSIAN keyword is also
           specified.     If PSF is undefined on input, then upon output it
           contains the Gaussian convolution specified by the FWHM_GAUSSIAN
           keyword.    If the PSF array is defined on input then it is used
           as the convolution kernel,  the value of the  FWHM_GAUSSIAN keyword
           is ignored.      Typically, on a first call set PSF to an undefined
           variable, which can be reused for subsequent calls to prevent
           recalculation of the Gaussian PSF.
 RESULT:
       Function returns the smoothed, median filtered, or convolved image.
       If both SMOOTH and MEDIAN are specified, median filter is applied first.
       If only SMOOTH is applied, then output is of same type as input.  If
       either MEDIAN or FWHM_GAUSSIAN is supplied than the output is at least
       floating (double if the input image is double).

 EXAMPLES:
       To apply 3x3 moving median filter and
       then 3x3 moving average, both applied to all pixels:

               Result = filter_image( image, /SMOOTH, /MEDIAN, /ALL )

       To iteratively apply 3x3 moving average filter for 4 = (9-1)/2 times,
       thus approximating convolution with Gaussian of FWHM = 2*sqrt(4) = 4 :

               Result = filter_image( image, SMOOTH=9, /ITER )

       To convolve all pixels with Gaussian of FWHM = 3.7 x 5.2 pixels:

               Result = filter_image( image, FWHM=[3.7,5.2], /ALL )

 EXTERNAL CALLS:
       function psf_gaussian
       function convolve
       pro factor
       function prime          ;all these called only if FWHM is specified

 PROCEDURE:
       If both /ALL_PIXELS (or /ITERATE)  keywords are set then
       create a larger image by reflecting the edges outward, then call the
       IDL MEDIAN() or SMOOTH() function on the larger image, and just return
       the central part (the original size image).

       NAN values are recognized during calls to MEDIAN() or SMOOTH(), but
       not for convolution with a Gaussian (FWHM keyword supplied).
 HISTORY:
       Written, 1991, Frank Varosi, NASA/GSFC.
       FV, 1992, added /ITERATE option.
       FV, 1993, added FWHM_GAUSSIAN= option.
       Use /EVEN call to median, recognize NAN values in SMOOTH
                  W. Landsman   June 2001
       Added PSF keyword,   Bjorn Heijligers/WL, September 2001
       Keep same output data type if /ALL_PIXELS supplied A. Steffl Mar 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/filter_image.pro)

FIND

 NAME:
	FIND
 PURPOSE:
	Find positive brightness perturbations (i.e stars) in an image
 EXPLANATION:
	Also returns centroids and shape parameters (roundness & sharpness).
	Adapted from 1991 version of DAOPHOT, but does not allow for bad pixels
       and uses a slightly different centroid algorithm.

       Modified in March 2008 to use marginal Gaussian fits to find centroids
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	FIND, image, [ x, y, flux, sharp, round, hmin, fwhm, roundlim, sharplim
		PRINT= , /SILENT, /MONITOR]

 INPUTS:
	image - 2 dimensional image array (integer or real) for which one
		wishes to identify the stars present

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
	FIND will prompt for these parameters if not supplied

	hmin -  Threshold intensity for a point source - should generally
		be 3 or 4 sigma above background RMS
	fwhm  - FWHM (in pixels) to be used in the convolve filter
	sharplim - 2 element vector giving low and high cutoff for the
		sharpness statistic (Default: [0.2,1.0] ).   Change this
		default only if the stars have significantly larger or
		or smaller concentration than a Gaussian
	roundlim - 2 element vector giving low and high cutoff for the
		roundness statistic (Default: [-1.0,1.0] ).   Change this
		default only if the stars are significantly elongated.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /MONITOR - Normally, FIND will display the results for each star
                only if no output variables are supplied.   Set /MONITOR
                to always see the result of each individual star.
	/SILENT - set /SILENT keyword to suppress all output display
	PRINT - if set and non-zero then FIND will also write its results to
		a file find.prt.   Also one can specify a different output file
		name by setting PRINT = 'filename'.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
	x - vector containing x position of all stars identified by FIND
	y-  vector containing y position of all stars identified by FIND
	flux - vector containing flux of identified stars as determined
		by a Gaussian fit.  Fluxes are NOT converted to magnitudes.
	sharp - vector containing sharpness statistic for identified stars
	round - vector containing roundness statistic for identified stars

 NOTES:
	(1) The sharpness statistic compares the central pixel to the mean of
       the surrounding pixels.   If this difference is greater than the
       originally estimated height of the Gaussian or less than 0.2 the height of the
	Gaussian (for the default values of SHARPLIM) then the star will be
	rejected.

       (2) More recent versions of FIND in DAOPHOT allow the possibility of
       ignoring bad pixels.    Unfortunately, to implement this in IDL
       would preclude the vectorization made possible with the CONVOL function
       and would run extremely slowly.

       (3) Modified in March 2008 to use marginal Gaussian distributions to
       compute centroid.   (Formerly, find.pro determined centroids by locating
       where derivatives went to zero -- see cntrd.pro for this algorithm.
       This was the method used in very old (~1984) versions of DAOPHOT. )
       As discussed in more  detail in the comments to the code, the  centroid
       computation here is  the same as in IRAF DAOFIND but differs slightly
       from the current DAOPHOT.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
	GETOPT()
 REVISION HISTORY:
	Written W. Landsman, STX  February, 1987
	ROUND now an internal function in V3.1   W. Landsman July 1993
	Change variable name DERIV to DERIVAT    W. Landsman Feb. 1996
	Use /PRINT keyword instead of TEXTOUT    W. Landsman May  1996
	Changed loop indices to type LONG       W. Landsman Aug. 1997
       Replace DATATYPE() with size(/TNAME)   W. Landsman Nov. 2001
       Fix problem when PRINT= filename   W. Landsman   October 2002
       Fix problems with >32767 stars   D. Schlegel/W. Landsman Sep. 2004
       Fix error message when no stars found  S. Carey/W. Landsman Sep 2007
       Rewrite centroid computation to use marginal Gaussians W. Landsman
                 Mar 2008
       Added Monitor keyword, /SILENT now suppresses all output
                   W. Landsman    Nov 2008
       Work when threshold is negative (difference images) W. Landsman May 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/find.pro)

FINDPRO

 NAME:
     FINDPRO
 PURPOSE:
     Find all locations of a procedure in the IDL !PATH
 EXPLANATION:
     FINDPRO searces for the procedure name (as a .pro or a .sav file) in all
     IDL libraries or directories given in the !PATH system variable.    This
     differs from the intrinsic FILE_WHICH() function which only finds the
     first occurence of the procedure name.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
    FINDPRO, [ Proc_Name, /NoPrint, DirList = , ProList = ]

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
     Proc_Name - Character string giving the name of the IDL procedure or
             function. Do not include the ".pro" extension. If Proc_Name is
             omitted, the program will prompt for PROC_NAME.  "*" wildcards
             are permitted.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
     /NoPrint - if set, then the file's path is not printed on the screen and
             absolutely no error messages are printed on the screen.  If not
             set, then - since the MESSAGE routine is used - error messages
             will be printed but the printing of informational messages
             depends on the value of the !Quiet variable.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUTS:
     DirList - The directories in which the file is located are returned in
             the keyword as a string array.
             If the procedure is an intrinsic IDL procedure, then the
             value of DirList = ['INTRINSIC'].
             If the procedure is not found, the value of DirList = [''].
     ProList - The list (full pathnames) of procedures found.  Useful if you
             are looking for the name of a procedure using wildcards.

     The order of the names in DirList and ProList is identical to the order
     in which the procedure name appears in the !PATH
 PROCEDURE:
     The system variable !PATH is parsed using EXPAND_PATH into individual
     directories.  FILE_SEARCH() is used to search the directories for
     the procedure name.  If not found in !PATH, then the name is compared
     with the list of intrinsic IDL procedures given by the ROUTINE_INFO()
     function.

 EXAMPLE:
     (1) Find the procedure CURVEFIT.  Assume for this example that the user
     also has a copy of the curvefit.pro procedure in her home directory
     on a Unix machine.

       IDL> findpro, 'curvefit', DIRLIST=DirList
       Procedure curvefit.pro found in directory  /home/user/.
       Procedure curvefit.pro found in directory  /home/idl/lib/userlib
       IDL> help, DirList
       DIRLIST         STRING    = Array(2)
       IDL> help, DirList[0], DirList[1]
       <Expression>    STRING    = '/home/user'
       <Expression>    STRING    = '/home/idl/lib/userlib'

     (2) Find all procedures in one's !path containing the characters "zoom"

       IDL> findpro,'*zoom*'
 RESTRICTIONS:
       User will be unable to find a path for a native IDL function
       or procedure, or for a FORTRAN or C routine added with CALL_EXTERNAL.
       Remember that Unix is case sensitive, and most procedures will be in
       lower case.

 PROCEDURES USED:
       FDECOMP   -- Decompose file name
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Based on code extracted from the GETPRO procedure, J. Parker 1994
       Use the intrinsic EXPAND_PATH function    W. Landsman Nov. 1994
       Use ROUTINE_NAMES() to check for intrinsic procs   W. Landsman Jul 95
       Added Macintosh, WINDOWS compatibility    W. Landsman   Sep. 95
       Removed spurious first element in PROLIST  W. Landsman  March 1997
       Don't include duplicate directories  in !PATH  WL   May 1997
       Use ROUTINE_INFO instead of undocumented ROUTINE_NAMES W.L. October 1998
       Also check for save sets   W. Landsman  October 1999
       Force lower case check for VMS  W. Landsman January 2000
       Only return .pro or .sav files in PROLIST   W. Landsman  January 2002
       Force lower case check for .pro and .sav    D. Swain  September 2002
       Use FILE_SEARCH() if V5.5 or later   W. Landsman June 2006
       Assume since V55, remove VMS support W. Landsman Sep. 2006
       Assume since V6.0, use file_basename() W.Landsman Feb 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/findpro.pro)

FIND_ALL_DIR()

 NAME:
       FIND_ALL_DIR()
 PURPOSE:
       Finds all directories under a specified directory.
 EXPLANATION:
       This routine finds all the directories in a directory tree when the
       root of the tree is specified.  This provides the same functionality as
       having a directory with a plus in front of it in the environment
       variable IDL_PATH.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Result = FIND_ALL_DIR( PATH )

               PATHS = FIND_ALL_DIR('+mypath', /PATH_FORMAT)
               PATHS = FIND_ALL_DIR('+mypath1:+mypath2')

 INPUTS:
       PATH    = The path specification for the top directory in the tree.
               Optionally this may begin with the '+' character but the action
               is the same unless the PLUS_REQUIRED keyword is set.

               One can also path a series of directories separated
               by the correct character ("," for VMS, ":" for Unix)

 OUTPUTS:
       The result of the function is a list of directories starting from the
       top directory passed and working downward from there.   Normally, this
       will be a string array with one directory per array element, but if
       the PATH_FORMAT keyword is set, then a single string will be returned,
       in the correct format to be incorporated into !PATH.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       PATH_FORMAT     = If set, then a single string is returned, in
                                 the format of !PATH.

       PLUS_REQUIRED   = If set, then a leading plus sign is required
                       in order to expand out a directory tree.
                       This is especially useful if the input is a
                       series of directories, where some components
                       should be expanded, but others shouldn't.

       RESET   = Often FIND_ALL_DIR is used with logical names.  It
               can be rather slow to search through these subdirectories.
               The /RESET keyword can be used to redefine an environment
               variable so that subsequent calls don't need to look for the
               subdirectories.

               To use /RESET, the PATH parameter must contain the name of a
               *single* environment variable.  For example

                               setenv,'FITS_DATA=+/datadisk/fits'
                               dir = find_all_dir('FITS_DATA',/reset,/plus)

               The /RESET keyword is usually combined with /PLUS_REQUIRED.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       DEF_DIRLIST, FIND_WITH_DEF(), BREAK_PATH()

 RESTRICTIONS:
       PATH must point to a directory that actually exists.

 REVISION HISTORY:
               Version 11, Zarro (SM&A/GSFC), 23-March-00
                       Removed all calls to IS_DIR
               Version 12, William Thompson, GSFC, 02-Feb-2001
                       In Windows, use built-in expand_path if able.
               Version 13, William Thompson, GSFC, 23-Apr-2002
                       Follow logical links in Unix
                       (Suggested by Pascal Saint-Hilaire)
               Version 14, Zarro (EER/GSFC), 26-Oct-2002
                       Saved/restored current directory to protect against
                       often mysterious directory changes caused by
                       spawning FIND in Unix
               Version 15, William Thompson, GSFC, 9-Feb-2004
                       Resolve environment variables in Windows.

 Version     : Version 16 W. Landsman GSFC Sep 2006
                        Remove VMS support

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/find_all_dir.pro)

FIND_WITH_DEF()

 NAME:
     FIND_WITH_DEF()
 PURPOSE:
     Searches for files with a default path and extension.
 EXPLANATION:
     Finds files using default paths and extensions,   Using this routine
     together with environment variables allows an OS-independent approach
     to finding files.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     Result = FIND_WITH_DEF( FILENAME, PATHS  [, EXTENSIONS ] )

 INPUTS:
     FILENAME   = Name of file to be searched for.  It may either be a
                    complete filename, or the path or extension could be left
                    off, in which case the routine will attempt to find the
                    file using the default paths and extensions.

     PATHS      = One or more default paths to use in the search in case
                    FILENAME does not contain a path itself.  The individual
                    paths are separated by commas, although in UNIX, colons
                    can also be used.  In other words, PATHS has the same
                    format as !PATH, except that commas can be used as a
                    separator regardless of operating system.  The current
                    directory is always searched first, unless the keyword
                    NOCURRENT is set.

                    A leading $ can be used in any path to signal that what
                    follows is an environmental variable, but the $ is not
                    necessary.  Environmental variables can themselves contain
                    multiple paths.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
     EXTENSIONS = Scalar string giving one or more extensions to append to
                  end of filename if the filename does not contain one (e.g.
                   ".dat").  The period is optional.  Multiple extensions can
                   be separated by commas or colons.
 OUTPUTS:
     The result of the function is the name of the file if successful, or
     the null string if unsuccessful.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
     NOCURRENT = If set, then the current directory is not searched.

      RESET      = The FIND_WITH_DEF routine supports paths which are
                    preceeded with the plus sign to signal that all
                    subdirectories should also be searched.  Often this is
                    used with logical names.  It can be rather slow to search
                    through these subdirectories.  The /RESET keyword can be
                    used to redefine an environment variable so that
                    subsequent calls don't need to look for the
                    subdirectories.

                    To use /RESET, the PATHS parameter must contain the name
                    of a *single* environment variable.  For example

                     setenv,'FITS_DATA=+/datadisk/fits'
                     file = find_with_def('test.fits','FITS_DATA',/reset)

 EXAMPLE:

       FILENAME = ''
       READ, 'File to open: ', FILENAME
       FILE = FIND_WITH_DEF( FILENAME, 'SERTS_DATA', '.fix' )
       IF FILE NE '' THEN ...


 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       BREAK_PATH(), FIND_ALL_DIR(), STR_SEP()
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 3 May 1993.
               Removed trailing / and : characters.
               Fixed bugs
               Allow for commas within values of logical names.
               Added keyword NOCURRENT.
               Changed to call BREAK_PATH
       Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 3 November 1994
               Made EXTENSIONS optional.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 30 April 1996
               Call FIND_ALL_DIR to resolve any plus signs.
       Version 4, S.V. Haugan, UiO, 5 June 1996
               Using OPENR,..,ERROR=ERROR to avoid an IDL 3.6
               internal nesting error.
       Version 5, R.A. Schwartz, GSFC, 11 July 1996
               Use SPEC_DIR to interpret PATH under VMS
       Version 6, William Thompson, GSFC, 5 August 1996
               Took out call to SPEC_DIR (i.e., reverted to version 4).  The
               use of SPEC_DIR was required to support logical names defined
               via SETLOG,/CONFINE.  However, it conflicted with the ability
               to use logical names with multiple values.  Removing the
               /CONFINE made it unnecessary to call SPEC_DIR in this routine.
       Version 7, William Thompson, GSFC, 6 August 1996
               Added keyword RESET
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   October 1997
       Use STRTRIM instead of TRIM,   W. Landsman   November 1998
       Use STRSPLIT instead of STR_SEP  W. Landsman  July 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/find_with_def.pro)

FITEXY

 NAME:
       FITEXY
 PURPOSE:
       Best straight-line fit to data with errors in both coordinates
 EXPLANATION:
       Linear Least-squares approximation in one-dimension (y = a + b*x),
               when both x and y data have errors

 CALLING EXAMPLE:
       FITEXY, x, y, A, B, X_SIG= , Y_SIG= , [sigma_A_B, chi_sq, q, TOL=]

 INPUTS:
       x = array of values for independent variable.
       y = array of data values assumed to be linearly dependent on x.

 REQUIRED INPUT KEYWORDS:
       X_SIGMA = scalar or array specifying the standard deviation of x data.
       Y_SIGMA = scalar or array specifying the standard deviation of y data.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       TOLERANCE = desired accuracy of minimum & zero location, default=1.e-3.

 OUTPUTS:
       A_intercept = constant parameter result of linear fit,
       B_slope = slope parameter, so that:
                       ( A_intercept + B_slope * x ) approximates the y data.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       sigma_A_B = two element array giving standard deviation of
                A_intercept and B_slope parameters, respectively.
                The standard deviations are not meaningful if (i) the
                fit is poor (see parameter q), or (ii) b is so large that
                the data are consistent with a vertical (infinite b) line.
                If the data are consistent with *all* values of b, then
                sigma_A_B = [1e33,e33]
       chi_sq = resulting minimum Chi-Square of Linear fit, scalar
       q - chi-sq probability, scalar (0-1) giving the probability that
              a correct model would give a value equal or larger than the
              observed chi squared.   A small value of q indicates a poor
              fit, perhaps because the errors are underestimated.   As
              discussed by Tremaine et al. (2002, ApJ, 574, 740) an
              underestimate of the errors (e.g. due to an intrinsic dispersion)
              can lead to a bias in the derived slope, and it may be worth
              enlarging the error bars to get a reduced chi_sq ~ 1

 COMMON:
       common fitexy, communicates the data for computation of chi-square.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       CHISQ_FITEXY()            ;Included in this file
       MINF_BRACKET, MINF_PARABOLIC, ZBRENT    ;In IDL Astronomy Library
       MOMENT(), CHISQR_PDF()     ;In standard IDL distribution

 PROCEDURE:
       From "Numerical Recipes" column by Press and Teukolsky:
       in "Computer in Physics",  May, 1992 Vol.6 No.3
       Also see the 2nd edition of the book "Numerical Recipes" by Press et al.

       In order to avoid  problems with data sets where X and Y are of very
       different order of magnitude the data are normalized before the fitting
       process is started.     The following normalization is used:
       xx = (x - xm) / xs    and    sigx = x_sigma / xs
                             where xm = MEAN(x) and xs = STDDEV(x)
       yy = (y - ym) / ys    and    sigy = y_sigma / ys
                             where ym = MEAN(y) and ys = STDDEV(y)


 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, Frank Varosi NASA/GSFC  September 1992.
       Now returns q rather than 1-q   W. Landsman  December 1992
       Use CHISQR_PDF, MOMENT instead of STDEV,CHI_SQR1 W. Landsman April 1998
       Fixed typo for initial guess of slope, this error was nearly
             always insignificant          W. Landsman   March 2000
       Normalize X,Y before calculation (from F. Holland) W. Landsman Nov 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/fitexy.pro)

FITSDIR

 NAME:
     FITSDIR
 PURPOSE:
     Display selected FITS keywords from the headers of FITS files.
 EXPLANATION:

     The values of either user-specified or default FITS keywords are
     displayed in either the primary header and/or the first extension header.
     Unless the /NOSIZE keyword is set, the data size is also displayed.
     The default keywords are as follows (with keywords in 2nd row used if
     those in the first row not found, and the 3rd row if neither the keywords
     in the first or second rows found:)

     DATE-OBS     TELESCOP   OBJECT    EXPTIME
     TDATEOBS     TELNAME    TARGNAME  INTEG        ;First Alternative
     DATE         OBSERVAT             EXPOSURE     ;Second Alternative
                  INSTRUME             EXPTIM       ;Third Alternative

      FITSDIR will also recognize gzip compressed files (must have a .gz
      or FTZ extension).
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     FITSDIR , [ directory, TEXTOUT =, EXTEN=, KEYWORDS=, /NOSIZE, /NoTELESCOPE
                            ALT1_KEYWORDS= ,ALT2_KEYWORDS = ,ALT3_KEYWORDS =

 OPTIONAL INPUT PARAMETERS:
     DIRECTORY - Scalar string giving file name, disk or directory to be
             searched.   Wildcard file names are allowed.    Examples of
             valid names include 'iraf/*.fits' (Unix), d:\myfiles\f*.fits',
             (Windows) or 'Macintosh HD:Files:*c0f.fits' (Macintosh).

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT PARAMETER
      KEYWORDS - FITS keywords to display, as either a vector of strings or as
                 a comma delimited scalar string, e.g.'testname,dewar,filter'
                 If not supplied, then the default keywords are 'DATE-OBS',
                 'TELESCOP','OBJECT','EXPTIME'
      ALT1_KEYWORDS - A list (either a vector of strings or a comma delimited
                 strings of alternative keywords to use if the default
                 KEYWORDS cannot be found.   By default, 'TDATEOBS', is the
                 alternative to DATE-OBS, 'TELNAME' for 'TELESCOP','TARGNAME'
                 for 'OBJECT', and 'INTEG' for EXPTIME
      ALT2_KEYWORDS - A list (either a vector of strings or a comma delimited
                 strings of alternative keywords to use if neither KEYWORDS
                 nor ALT1_KEYWORDS can be found.
      ALT3_KEYWORDS - A list (either a vector of strings or a comma delimited
                 strings of alternative keywords to use if neither KEYWORDS
                 nor ALT1_KEYWORDS nor ALT2_KEYWORDS can be found.
      /NOSIZE - if set then information about the image size is not displayed
      TEXTOUT - Controls output device as described in TEXTOPEN procedure
               textout=1       TERMINAL using /more option
               textout=2       TERMINAL without /more option
               textout=3       <program>.prt
               textout=4       laser.tmp
               textout=5       user must open file
               textout=7       Append to existing <program>.prt file
               textout = filename (default extension of .prt)
       EXTEN - Specifies an extension number (/EXTEN works for first extension)
               which is  checked for the  desired keywords.
       /NOTELESCOPE - If set, then if the default keywords are used, then the
                TELESCOPE (or TELNAME, OBSERVAT, INSTRUME) keywords are omitted
                to give more room for display other keywords.   The /NOTELESCOP
                 keyword has no effect if the default keywords are not used.
 OUTPUT PARAMETERS:
       None.

 EXAMPLES:
  (1) Print info on all'*.fits' files in the current  directory using default
          keywords.   Include information from the extension header
       IDL> fitsdir,/exten

  (2) Write a driver program to display selected keywords in HST/ACS drizzled
       (*drz) images
         pro acsdir
        keywords = 'date-obs,targname,detector,filter1,filter2,exptime'
        fitsdir,'*drz.fits',key=keywords,/exten
        return & end

   (3)  Write info on all *.fits files in the Unix directory /usr2/smith, to a
       file 'smith.txt' using the default keywords, but don't display the value
        of the TELESCOPE keyword

       IDL> fitsdir ,'/usr2/smith/*.fits',t='smith.txt', /NoTel

 PROCEDURE:
       FILE_SEARCH()  is used to find the specified FITS files.   The
       header of each file is read, and the selected keywords are extracted.
       The formatting is adjusted so that no value is truncated on display.

 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       TEXTOPEN (called by FITSDIR) will automatically define the following
       non-standard system variables if they are not previously defined:

       DEFSYSV,'!TEXTOUT',1
       DEFSYSV,'!TEXTUNIT',0

 PROCEDURES USED:
       FDECOMP, FXMOVE, MRD_HREAD, REMCHAR
       TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, W. Landsman,  HSTX    February, 1993
       Search alternate keyword names    W.Landsman    October 1998
       Avoid integer truncation for NAXISi >32767  W. Landsman  July 2000
       Don't leave open unit    W. Landsman  July 2000
       Added EXTEN keyword, work with compressed files, additional alternate
       keywords W. Landsman     December 2000
       Don't assume floating pt. exposure time W. Landsman   September 2001
       Major rewrite, KEYWORD & ALT*_KEYWORDS keywords, no truncation,
             /NOSIZE keyword     W. Landsman,  SSAI   August 2002
       Assume V5.3 or later W. Landsman November 2002
       Fix case where no keywords supplied  W. Landsman January 2003
       NAXIS* values must be integers W. Landsman SSAI  June 2003
       Trim spaces off of input KEYWORD values W. Landsman March 2004
       Treat .FTZ extension as gzip compressed  W. Landsman September 2004
       Assume since V5.5, file_search() available W. Landsman Aug 2006
       Don't assume all images compressed or uncompressed W. L. Apr 2010
       Use V6.0 notation W.L. Feb 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fitsdir.pro)

FITSRGB_TO_TIFF

 NAME:
       FITSRGB_to_TIFF
 PURPOSE:
       Combine separate red, green, and blue FITS images into TIFF format
 EXPLANATION:
       The output TIFF (class R) file can have colors interleaved either
       by pixel or image.  The colour mix is also adjustable.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FITSRGB_to_TIFF, path, rgb_files, tiff_name [,/BY_PIXEL, /PREVIEW,
                         RED= , GREEN =, BLUE =]

 INPUTS:
       path = file system directory path to the RGB files required.
       rgb_files = string array with three components - the red FITS file
                   filename, the blue FITS file filename and the green FITS
                   file filename

 OUTPUTS:
       tiff_name = string containing name of tiff file to be produced

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       Header = String array containing the header from the FITS file.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       BY_PIXEL = This causes TIFF file RGB to be interleaved by pixel
                  rather than the default of by image.
       PREVIEW  = Allows a 24 bit image to be displayed on the screen
                  to check the colour mix.
       RED = Real number containing the fractional mix of red
       GREEN = Real number containing the fractional mix of green
       BLUE = Real number containing the fractional mix of blue

 EXAMPLE:
       Read three FITS files, 'red.fits', 'blue.fits' and 'green.fits' from
       the directory '/data/images/space' and output a TIFF file named
       'colour.tiff'

               IDL> FITSRGB_to_TIFF, '/data/images/space', ['red.fits', $
                    'blue.fits', 'green.fits'], 'colour.tiff'

       Read three FITS files, 'red.fits', 'blue.fits' and 'green.fits' from
       the current directory and output a TIFF file named '/images/out.tiff'
       In this case, the red image is twice as strong as the green and the
       blue is a third more intense.  A preview on screen is also wanted.

               IDL> FITSRGB_to_TIFF, '.', ['red.fits', $
                    'blue.fits', 'green.fits'], '/images/out.tiff', $
                    /PREVIEW, RED=0.5, GREEN=1.0, BLUE=0.666


 RESTRICTIONS:
       (1) Limited to the ability of the routine READFITS

 NOTES:
       None

 PROCEDURES USED:
     Functions:   READFITS, CONCAT_DIR
     Procedures:  WRITE_TIFF

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
     16th January 1995 - Written by Carl Shaw, Queen's University Belfast
	27 Jan 1995 - W. Landsman, Add CONCAT_DIR for VMS, Windows compatibility
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
    Use WRITE_TIFF instead of obsolete TIFF_WRITE  W. Landsman  December 1998
    Cosmetic changes  W. Landsman    February 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fitsrgb_to_tiff.pro)

FITS_ADD_CHECKSUM

 NAME:
    FITS_ADD_CHECKSUM
 PURPOSE:
    Add or update the CHECKSUM and DATASUM keywords in a FITS header
 EXPLANATION:
     Follows the 23 May 2002 version of the FITS checksum proposal at
     http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/docs/heasarc/fits/checksum.html
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     FITS_ADD_CHECKSUM, Hdr, [ Data, /No_TIMESTAMP, /FROM_IEEE ]
 INPUT-OUTPUT:
     Hdr - FITS header (string array), it will be updated with new
           (or modfied) CHECKSUM and DATASUM keywords
 OPTIONAL INPUT:
     Data - data array associated with the FITS header.   If not supplied, or
           set to a scalar, then the program checks whether there is a
           DATASUM keyword already in the FITS header containing the 32bit
           checksum for the data.   if there is no such keyword then there
           assumed to be no data array associated with the FITS header.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
    /FROM_IEEE - If this keyword is set, then the input is assumed to be in
             big endian format (e.g. an untranslated FITS array).    This
             keyword only has an effect on little endian machines (e.g.
             a Linux box).
    /No_TIMESTAMP - If set, then a time stamp is not included in the comment
             field of the CHECKSUM and DATASUM keywords.   Unless the
             /No_TIMESTAMP keyword is set, repeated calls to FITS_ADD_CHECKSUM
             with the same header and data will yield different values of
             CHECKSUM (as the date stamp always changes).   However, use of the
             date stamp is recommended in the checksum proposal.
 PROCEDURES USED:
     CHECKSUM32, FITS_ASCII_ENCODE(), GET_DATE, SXADDPAR, SXPAR()
 REVISION HISTORY:
     W. Landsman    SSAI    December 2002
     Fix problem with images with a multiple of 2880 bytes.  W.L. May 2008
     Avoid conversion error when DATASUM is an empty string  W.L.  June 2008
     Don't update DATASUM if not already present and no data array supplied
                       W.L. July 2008
     Make sure input header array has 80 chars/line  W.L. Aug 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_add_checksum.pro)

FITS_ASCII_ENCODE()

 NAME:
    FITS_ASCII_ENCODE()
 PURPOSE:
    Encode an unsigned longword as an ASCII string to insert in a FITS header
 EXPLANATION:
     Follows the 23 May 2002 version of the FITS checksum proposal at
     http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/docs/heasarc/fits/checksum.html
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     result = FITS_ASCII_ENCODE( sum32)
 INPUTS:
     sum32 - 32bit *unsigned longword* (e.g. as returned by CHECKSUM32)
 RESULT:
     A 16 character scalar string suitable for the CHECKSUM keyword
 EXAMPLE:
      A FITS header/data unit has a checksum of 868229149.  Encode the
      complement of this value (3426738146) into an ASCII string

      IDL> print,FITS_ASCII_ENCODE(3426738146U)
           ===> "hcHjjc9ghcEghc9g"

 METHOD:
      The 32bit value is interpreted as a sequence of 4 unsigned 8 bit
      integers, and divided by 4.    Add an offset of 48b (ASCII '0').
      Remove non-alphanumeric ASCII characters (byte values 58-64 and 91-96)
      by simultaneously incrementing and decrementing the values in pairs.
      Cyclicly shift the string one place to the right.

 REVISION HISTORY:
     Written  W. Landsman  SSAI              December 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_ascii_encode.pro)

FITS_CD_FIX

 NAME:
    FITS_CD_FIX

 PURPOSE:
    Update obsolete representations of the CD matrix in a FITS header

 EXPLANATION:
    According the paper, "Representations of Celestial Coordinates in FITS"
    by Calabretta & Greisen (2002, A&A, 395, 1077, available at
    http://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov/fits_wcs.html) the rotation of an image from
    standard coordinates is represented by a coordinate description (CD)
    matrix.    The standard representation of the CD matrix are PCn_m
    keywords, but CDn_m keywords (which include the scale factors) are
    also allowed.    However, earliers drafts of the standard allowed the
    keywords forms CD00n00m and PC00n00m.      This procedure will convert
    FITS CD matrix keywords containing zeros into the standard forms
    CDn_m and PCn_m containing only underscores.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
    FITS_CD_FIX, Hdr

 INPUT-OUTPUT:
       HDR - FITS header, 80 x N string array.   If the header does not
           contain 'CD00n00m' or 'PC00n00m' keywords then it is left
           unmodified.  Otherwise, the keywords containing integers are
           replaced with those containing underscores.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT
      /REVERSE - this keyword does nothing, but is kept for compatibility with
            earlier versions.
 PROCEDURES USED:
    SXADDPAR, SXDELPAR, SXPAR()
 REVISION HISTORY:
    Written   W. Landsman             Feb 1990
    Major rewrite                     Feb 1994
    Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
    Use double precision formatting of CD matrix   W. Landsman  April 2000
    Major rewrite to convert only to forms recognized by the Greisen
       & Calabretta standard   W. Landsman   July 2003

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/fits_cd_fix.pro)

FITS_CLOSE

 NAME:
      FITS_CLOSE

*PURPOSE:
       Close a FITS data file

*CATEGORY:
       INPUT/OUTPUT

*CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FITS_CLOSE,fcb

*INPUTS:
       FCB: FITS control block returned by FITS_OPEN.

*KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       /NO_ABORT: Set to return to calling program instead of a RETALL
               when an I/O error is encountered.  If set, the routine will
               return  a non-null string (containing the error message) in the
               keyword MESSAGE.   If /NO_ABORT not set, then FITS_CLOSE will
               print the message and issue a RETALL
       MESSAGE = value: Output error message

*EXAMPLES:
       Open a FITS file, read some data, and close it with FITS_CLOSE

               FITS_OPEN,'infile',fcb
               FITS_READ,fcb,data
               FITS_READ,fcb,moredata
               FITS_CLOSE,fcb

*HISTORY:
       Written by:     D. Lindler      August, 1995
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Do nothing if fcb an invalid structure D. Schlegel/W. Landsman Oct. 2000
       Return Message='' for to signal normal operation W. Landsman Nov. 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_close.pro)

FITS_HELP

 NAME:
       FITS_HELP

 PURPOSE:
       To print a summary of the primary data units and extensions in a
       FITS file.
;
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FITS_HELP,filename_or_fcb

 INPUTS:
       FILENAME_OR_FCB - name of the fits file or the FITS Control Block (FCB)
               structure returned by FITS_OPEN.     The  file name is allowed
               to be gzip compressed (with a .gz  extension)

 OUTPUTS:
       A summary of the FITS file is printed.   For each extension, the values
       of the XTENSION, EXTNAME EXTVER EXTLEVEL BITPIX GCOUNT, PCOUNT NAXIS
       and NAXIS* keywords are displayed.


 EXAMPLES:
       FITS_HELP,'myfile.fits'

       FITS_OPEN,'anotherfile.fits',fcb
       FITS_HELP,fcb

 PROCEDURES USED:
       FITS_OPEN, FITS_CLOSE
 HISTORY:
       Written by:     D. Lindler      August, 1995
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Don't truncate EXTNAME values at 10 chars  W. Landsman Feb. 2005
       Use V6.0 notation W. Landsman Jan 2012

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_help.pro)

FITS_INFO

 NAME:
     FITS_INFO
 PURPOSE:
     Provide information about the contents of a FITS file
 EXPLANATION:
     Information includes number of header records and size of data array.
     Applies to primary header and all extensions.    Information can be
     printed at the terminal and/or stored in a common block

     This routine is mostly obsolete, and better results can be usually be
     performed with FITS_HELP (for display) or FITS_OPEN (to read FITS
     information into a structure)

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     FITS_INFO, Filename, [ /SILENT , TEXTOUT = , N_ext =, EXTNAME= ]

 INPUT:
     Filename - Scalar string giving the name of the FITS file(s)
               Can include wildcards such as '*.fits', or regular expressions
               allowed by the FILE_SEARCH() function.     One can also search
               gzip compressed  FITS files, but their extension must
               end in .gz or .ftz.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
     /SILENT - If set, then the display of the file description on the
                terminal will be suppressed

      TEXTOUT - specifies output device.
               textout=1        TERMINAL using /more option
               textout=2        TERMINAL without /more option
               textout=3        <program>.prt
               textout=4        laser.tmp
               textout=5        user must open file, see TEXTOPEN
               textout=7       append to existing <program.prt> file
               textout = filename (default extension of .prt)

               If TEXTOUT is not supplied, then !TEXTOUT is used
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
       N_ext - Returns an integer scalar giving the number of extensions in
               the FITS file
       extname - returns a list containing the EXTNAME keywords for each
       		extension.

 COMMON BLOCKS
       DESCRIPTOR =  File descriptor string of the form N_hdrrec Naxis IDL_type
               Naxis1 Naxis2 ... Naxisn [N_hdrrec table_type Naxis
               IDL_type Naxis1 ... Naxisn] (repeated for each extension)
               For example, the following descriptor
                    167 2 4 3839 4 55 BINTABLE 2 1 89 5

               indicates that the  primary header containing 167 lines, and
               the primary (2D) floating point image (IDL type 4)
               is of size 3839 x 4.    The first extension header contains
               55 lines, and the  byte (IDL type 1) table array is of size
               89 x 5.

               The DESCRIPTOR is *only* computed if /SILENT is set.
 EXAMPLE:
       Display info about all FITS files of the form '*.fit' in the current
               directory

               IDL> fits_info, '*.fit'

       Any time a *.fit file is found which is *not* in FITS format, an error
       message is displayed at the terminal and the program continues

 PROCEDURES USED:
       GETTOK(), MRD_SKIP, STRN(), SXPAR(), TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE

 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       The non-standard system variables !TEXTOUT and !TEXTUNIT will be
       created by FITS_INFO if they are not previously defined.

       DEFSYSV,'!TEXTOUT',1
       DEFSYSV,'!TEXTUNIT',0

       See TEXTOPEN.PRO for more info
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, K. Venkatakrishna, Hughes STX, May 1992
       Added N_ext keyword, and table_name info, G. Reichert
       Work on *very* large FITS files   October 92
       More checks to recognize corrupted FITS files     February, 1993
       Proper check for END keyword    December 1994
       Correctly size variable length binary tables  WBL December 1994
       EXTNAME keyword can be anywhere in extension header WBL  January 1998
       Correctly skip past extensions with no data   WBL   April 1998
       Converted to IDL V5.0, W. Landsman, April 1998
       No need for !TEXTOUT if /SILENT D.Finkbeiner   February 2002
       Define !TEXTOUT if needed.  R. Sterner, 2002 Aug 27
       Work on gzip compressed files for V5.3 or later  W. Landsman 2003 Jan
       Improve speed by only reading first 36 lines of header
       Count headers with more than 32767 lines         W. Landsman Feb. 2003
       Assume since V5.3 (OPENR,/COMPRESS)   W. Landsman Feb 2004
       EXTNAME keyword can be anywhere in extension header again
                         WBL/S. Bansal Dec 2004
       Read more than 200 extensions  WBL   March 2005
       Work for FITS files with SIMPLE=F   WBL July 2005
       Assume since V5.4, fstat.compress available WBL April 2006
       Added EXTNAME as an IDL keyword to return values. M. Perrin Dec 2007
       make Ndata a long64 to deal with large files. E. Hivon Mar 2008
       For GDL compatibility, first check if file is compressed  before using
          OPENR,/COMPRESS  B. Roukema/WL    Apr 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_info.pro)

FITS_OPEN

 NAME:
       FITS_OPEN

 PURPOSE:
       Opens a FITS (Flexible Image Transport System) data file.

 EXPLANATION:
       Used by FITS_READ and FITS_WRITE

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FITS_OPEN, filename, fcb

 INPUTS:
       filename : name of the FITS file to open, scalar string
                  FITS_OPEN can also open gzip compressed (.gz) file *for
                  reading only*, although there is a performance penalty
                  FPACK ( http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/fitsio/fpack/ )
                  compressed FITS files can be read provided that the FPACK
                  software is installed.
*OUTPUTS:
       fcb : (FITS Control Block) a IDL structure containing information
               concerning the file.  It is an input to FITS_READ, FITS_WRITE
               FITS_CLOSE and MODFITS.
 INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       /APPEND: Set to append to an existing file.
       /FPACK - Signal that the file is compressed with the FPACK software.
               http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/fitsio/fpack/ ) By default,
               FITS_OPEN assumes that if the file name extension ends in
               .fz that it is fpack compressed.     The FPACK software must
               be installed on the system
       /HPRINT - print headers with routine HPRINT as they are read.
               (useful for debugging a strange file)
       /NO_ABORT: Set to quietly return to calling program when an I/O error
               is encountered, and return  a non-null string
               (containing the error message) in the keyword MESSAGE.
               If /NO_ABORT not set, then FITS_OPEN will display the error
               message and return to the calling program.
       /UPDATE Set this keyword to open an existing file for update
       /WRITE: Set this keyword to open a new file for writing.

 OUTPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       MESSAGE = value: Output error message.    If the FITS file was opened
               successfully, then message = ''.

 NOTES:
       The output FCB should be passed to the other FITS routines (FITS_OPEN,
       FITS_READ, FITS_HELP, and FITS_WRITE).  It has the following structure
       when FITS_OPEN is called without /WRITE or /APPEND keywords set.

           FCB.FILENAME - name of the input file
               .UNIT - unit number the file is opened to
               .FCOMPRESS - 1 if unit is a FPACK compressed file opened with
                    a pipe to SPAWN
               .NEXTEND - number of extensions in the file.
               .XTENSION - string array giving the extension type for each
                       extension.
               .EXTNAME - string array giving the extension name for each
                       extension. (null string if not defined the extension)
               .EXTVER - vector of extension version numbers (0 if not
                       defined)
               .EXTLEVEL - vector of extension levels (0 if not defined)
               .GCOUNT - vector with the number of groups in each extension.
               .PCOUNT - vector with parameter count for each group
               .BITPIX - BITPIX for each extension with values
                                  8    byte data
                                16     short word integers
                                32     long word integers
                               -32     IEEE floating point
                               -64     IEEE double precision floating point
               .NAXIS - number of axes for each extension.  (0 for null data
                       units)
               .AXIS - 2-D array where axis(*,N) gives the size of each axes
                       for extension N
               .START_HEADER - vector giving the starting byte in the file
                               where each extension header begins
               .START_DATA - vector giving the starting byte in the file
                               where the data for each extension begins

               .HMAIN - keyword parameters (less standard required FITS
                               keywords) for the primary data unit.
               .OPEN_FOR_WRITE - flag (0= open for read, 1=open for write,
                                                2=open for update)
               .LAST_EXTENSION - last extension number read.
               .RANDOM_GROUPS - 1 if the PDU is random groups format,
                               0 otherwise
               .NBYTES - total number of (uncompressed) bytes in the FITS file

       When FITS open is called with the /WRITE or /APPEND option, FCB
       contains:

           FCB.FILENAME - name of the input file
               .UNIT - unit number the file is opened to
               .NEXTEND - number of extensions in the file.
               .OPEN_FOR_WRITE - flag (1=open for write, 2=open for append
                                       3=open for update)


 EXAMPLES:
       Open a FITS file for reading:
               FITS_OPEN,'myfile.fits',fcb

       Open a new FITS file for output:
               FITS_OPEN,'newfile.fits',fcb,/write
 PROCEDURES USED:
       GET_PIPE_FILESIZE (for Fcompress'ed files) HPRINT, SXDELPAR, SXPAR()
 HISTORY:
       Written by:     D. Lindler      August, 1995
       July, 1996      NICMOS  Modified to allow open for overwrite
                               to allow primary header to be modified
       DJL Oct. 15, 1996   corrected to properly extend AXIS when more
                       than 100 extensions present
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Use Message = '' rather than !ERR =1 as preferred signal of normal
           operation   W. Landsman  November 2000
       Lindler, Dec, 2001, Modified to use 64 bit words for storing byte
             positions within the file to allow support for very large
             files
       Work with gzip compressed files W. Landsman    January 2003
       Fix gzip compress for V5.4 and earlier  W.Landsman/M.Fitzgerald Dec 2003
       Assume since V5.3 (STRSPLIT, OPENR,/COMPRESS) W. Landsman Feb 2004
       Treat FTZ extension as gzip compressed W. Landsman Sep 2004
       Assume since V5.4 fstat.compress available W. Landsman Apr 2006
       FCB.Filename  now expands any wildcards W. Landsman July 2006
       Make ndata 64bit for very large files B. Garwood/W. Landsman Sep 2006
       Open with /SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN, remove obsolete keywords to OPEN
                W. Landsman  Sep 2006
       Warn that one cannot open a compressed file for update W.L. April 2007
       Use post-V6.0 notation W.L. October 2010
       Support FPACK compressed files, new .FCOMPRESS tag to FCB structure
               W.L.  December 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_open.pro)

FITS_READ

 NAME:
       FITS_READ
 PURPOSE:
       To read a FITS file.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FITS_READ, filename_or_fcb, data [,header, group_par]

 INPUTS:
       FILENAME_OR_FCB - this parameter can be the FITS Control Block (FCB)
               returned by FITS_OPEN or the file name of the FITS file.  If
               a file name is supplied, FITS_READ will open the file with
               FITS_OPEN and close the file with FITS_CLOSE before exiting.
               When multiple extensions are to be read from the file, it is
               more efficient for the user to call FITS_OPEN and leave the
               file open until all extensions are read. FPACK
               ( http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/fitsio/fpack/ ) compressed FITS
               files can be read provided that the FPACK software is installed.

 OUTPUTS:
       DATA - data array.  If /NOSCALE is specified, BSCALE and BZERO
               (if present in the header) will not be used to scale the data.
               If Keywords FIRST and LAST are used to read a portion of the
               data or the heap portion of an extension, no scaling is done
               and data is returned as a 1-D vector. The user can use the IDL
               function REFORM to convert the data to the correct dimensions
               if desired.  If /DATA_ONLY is specified, no scaling is done.
       HEADER - FITS Header.  The STScI inheritance convention is recognized
               http://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov/registry/inherit/fits_inheritance.txt
               If an extension is read, and the INHERIT keyword exists with a
               value of T, and the /NO_PDU keyword keyword is not supplied,
               then the primary data unit header and the extension header will
                be combined.  The header will have the form:

                       <required keywords for the extension: XTENSION, BITPIX,
                               NAXIS, ...>
                       BEGIN MAIN HEADER --------------------------------
                       <PDU header keyword and history less required keywords:
                               SIMPLE, BITPIX, NAXIS, ...>
                       BEGIN EXTENSION HEADER ---------------------------
                       <extension header less required keywords that were
                               placed at the beginning of the header.
                       END

               The structure of the header is such that if a keyword is
               duplicated in both the PDU and extension headers, routine
               SXPAR will print a warning and return the extension value of
               the keyword.

       GROUP_PAR - Group parameter block for FITS random groups format files
               or the heap area for variable length binary tables.
               Any scale factors in the header (PSCALn and PZEROn) are not
               applied to the group parameters.

 INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:

       /NOSCALE: Set to return the FITS data without applying the scale
               factors BZERO and BSCALE.
       /HEADER_ONLY: set to read the header only.
       /DATA_ONLY: set to read the data only.  If set, if any scale factors
               are present (BSCALE or BZERO), they will not be applied.
       /NO_PDU: By default, FITS_READ will add the primary data unit header
               keywords to the output header, *if* the header includes
               INHERIT = T.   Set /NO_PDU to never append the primary header.
       /NO_ABORT: Set to return to calling program instead of a RETALL
               when an I/O error is encountered.  If set, the routine will
               return  a non-null string (containing the error message) in the
               keyword MESSAGE.    (For backward compatibility, the obsolete
               system variable !ERR is also set to -1 in case of an error.)
               If /NO_ABORT not set, then FITS_READ will print the message and
               issue a RETALL
       /NO_UNSIGNED - By default, if  the header indicates an unsigned integer
              (BITPIX = 16, BZERO=2^15, BSCALE=1) then FITS_READ will output
               an IDL unsigned integer data type (UINT).   But if /NO_UNSIGNED
               is set, then the data is converted to type LONG.
       /PDU - If set, then always add the primary data unit header keywords
              to the output header, even if the INHERIT=T keyword is not found
              This was the default behavior of FITS_READ prior to April 2007
       EXTEN_NO - extension number to read.  If not set, the next extension
               in the file is read.  Set to 0 to read the primary data unit.
       XTENSION - string name of the xtension to read
       EXTNAME - string name of the extname to read
       EXTVER - integer version number to read
       EXTLEVEL - integer extension level to read
       FIRST - set this keyword to only read a portion of the data.  It gives
               the first word of the data to read
       LAST - set this keyword to only read a portion of the data.  It gives
               the last word number of the data to read
       GROUP - group number to read for GCOUNT>1.  (Default=0, the first group)

 OUTPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       ENUM - Output extension number that was read.
       MESSAGE = value: Output error message

 NOTES:
       Determination or which extension to read.
               case 1: EXTEN_NO specified. EXTEN_NO will give the number of the
                       extension to read.  The primary data unit is refered
                       to as extension 0. If EXTEN_NO is specified, XTENSION,
                       EXTNAME, EXTVER, and EXTLEVEL parameters are ignored.
               case 2: if EXTEN_NO is not specified, the first extension
                       with the specified XTENSION, EXTNAME, EXTVER, and
                       EXTLEVEL will be read.  If any of the 4 parameters
                       are not specified, they will not be used in the search.
                       Setting EXTLEVEL=0, EXTVER=0, EXTNAME='', or
                       XTENSION='' is the same as not supplying them.
               case 3: if none of the keyword parameters, EXTEN_NO, XTENSION,
                       EXTNAME, EXTVER, or EXTLEVEL are supplied.  FITS_READ
                       will read the next extension in the file.  If the
                       primary data unit (PDU), extension 0, is null, the
                       first call to FITS_READ will read the first extension
                       of the file.

               The only way to read a null PDU is to use EXTEN_NO = 0.

       If FIRST and LAST are specified, the data is returned without applying
       any scale factors (BSCALE and BZERO) and the data is returned in a
       1-D vector.  This will allow you to read any portion of a multiple
       dimension data set.  Once returned, the IDL function REFORM can be
       used to place the correct dimensions on the data.

       IMPLICIT IMAGES: FITS_READ will construct an implicit image
               for cases where NAXIS=0 and the NPIX1, NPIX2, and PIXVALUE
               keywords are present.  The output image will be:
                       image = replicate(PIXVALUE,NPIX1,NPIX2)

      FPACK compressed files are always closed and reopened when exiting
      FITS_READ so that the pointer is set to the beginning of the file. (Since
      FPACK files are opened with a bidirectional pipe rather than OPEN, one
      cannot use POINT_LUN to move to a specified position in the file.)

 EXAMPLES:
       Read the primary data unit of a FITS file, if it is null read the
       first extension:
               FITS_READ, 'myfile.fits', data, header

       Read the first two extensions of a FITS file and the extension with
       EXTNAME = 'FLUX' and EXTVER = 4
               FITS_OPEN, 'myfile.fits', fcb
               FITS_READ, fcb,data1, header2, exten_no = 1
               FITS_READ, fcb,data1, header2, exten_no = 2
               FITS_READ, fcb,data3, header3, extname='flux', extver=4
               FITS_CLOSE, fcb

       Read the sixth image in a data cube for the fourth extension.

               FITS_OPEN, 'myfile.fits', fcb
               image_number = 6
               ns = fcb.axis(0,4)
               nl = fcb.axis(1,4)
               i1 = (ns*nl)*(image_number-1)
               i2 = i2 + ns*nl-1
               FITS_READ,fcb,image,header,first=i1,last=i2
               image = reform(image,ns,nl,/overwrite)
               FITS_CLOSE

 PROCEDURES USED:
       FITS_CLOSE, FITS_OPEN
       SXADDPAR, SXDELPAR, SXPAR()
 WARNINGS:
       In Sep 2006, FITS_OPEN was modified to open FITS files using the
       /SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN keyword to OPEN, so that subsequent routines
       (FITS_READ, FITS_WRITE) did not require any byte swapping.    An error
       may result if an pre-Sep 2006 version of FITS_OPEN is used with a
       post Sep 2006 version of FITS_READ, FITS_WRITE or MODFITS.
 HISTORY:
       Written by:     D. Lindler, August 1995
       Avoid use of !ERR       W. Landsman   August 1999
       Read unsigned datatypes, added /no_unsigned   W. Landsman December 1999
       Don't call FITS_CLOSE unless fcb is defined   W. Landsman January 2000
       Set BZERO = 0 for unsigned integer data   W. Landsman  January 2000
       Only call IEEE_TO_HOST if needed          W. Landsman February 2000
       Ensure EXTEND keyword in primary header   W. Landsman April 2001
       Don't erase ERROR message when closing file  W. Landsman April 2002
       Assume at least V5.1 remove NANValue keyword  W. Landsman November 2002
       Work with compress files (read file size from fcb),
       requires updated (Jan 2003) version of FITS_OPEN W. Landsman Jan 2003
       Do not modify BSCALE/BZERO for  unsigned integers W. Landsman April 2006
       Asuume FITS_OPEN has opened the file with /SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN
                         W. Landsman   September 2006
       Fix problem with /DATA_ONLY keyword  M.Buie/W.Landsman  October 2006
       Only append primary header if INHERIT=T  W. Landsman  April 2007
       Make ndata 64bit for very large files E. Hivon/W. Landsman May 2007
       Added /PDU keyword to always append primary header W. Landsman June 2007
       Use PRODUCT to compute # of data points   W. Landsman  May 2009
       Make sure FIRST is long64 when computing position W.L. October 2009
       Read FPACK compressed files, W.L.  December 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_read.pro)

FITS_TEST_CHECKSUM()

 NAME:
    FITS_TEST_CHECKSUM()
 PURPOSE:
    Verify the values of the CHECKSUM and DATASUM keywords in a FITS header
 EXPLANATION:
     Follows the 2007 version of the FITS checksum proposal at
     http://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov/registry/checksum.html

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
    result = FITS_TEST_CHECKSUM(HDR, [ DATA, ERRMSG=, /FROM_IEEE ])
 INPUTS:
    HDR - FITS header (vector string)
 OPTIONAL DATA:
    DATA - data array associated with the FITS header.   If not supplied, or
           set to a scalar, then there is assumed to be no data array
           associated with the FITS header.
 RESULT:
     An integer -1, 0 or 1 indicating the following conditions:
           1 - CHECKSUM (and DATASUM) keywords are present with correct values
           0 - CHECKSUM keyword is not present
          -1 - CHECKSUM or DATASUM keyword does not have the correct value
               indicating possible data corruption.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
    /FROM_IEEE - If this keyword is set, then the input is assumed to be in
             big endian format (e.g. an untranslated FITS array).    This
             keyword only has an effect on little endian machines (e.g.
             a Linux box).
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
     ERRMSG - will contain a scalar string giving the error condition.   If
              RESULT = 1 then ERRMSG will be an empty string.   If this
              output keyword is not supplied, then the error message will be
              printed at the terminal.
 NOTES:
     The header and data must be *exactly* as originally written in the FITS
     file.  By default, some FITS readers may alter keyword values (e.g.
     BSCALE) or append information (e.g. HISTORY or an inherited primary
     header) and this will alter the checksum value.
 PROCEDURES USED:
    CHECKSUM32, FITS_ASCII_ENCODE(), SXPAR()
 EXAMPLE:
     Verify the CHECKSUM keywords in the primary header/data unit of a FITS
     file 'test.fits'

     FITS_READ,'test.fits',data,hdr,/no_PDU,/NoSCALE
     print,FITS_TEST_CHECKSUM(hdr,data)

     Note the use of the /No_PDU and /NoSCALE keywords to avoid any alteration
     of the FITS header
 REVISION HISTORY:
     W. Landsman  SSAI               December 2002
     Return quietly if CHECKSUM keywords not found W. Landsman May 2003
     Add /NOSAVE to CHECKSUM32 calls when possible W. Landsman Sep 2004

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_test_checksum.pro)

FITS_WRITE

 NAME:
	FITS_WRITE

 PURPOSE:
	To write a FITS primary data unit or extension.

 EXPLANATION:
       ***NOTE** This version of FITS_READ must be used with a post Sep 2006
          version of FITS_OPEN.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	FITS_WRITE, filename_or_fcb, data, [header_in]

 INPUTS:
	FILENAME_OR_FCB: name of the output data file or the FITS control
		block returned by FITS_OPEN (called with the /WRITE or
		/APPEND) parameters.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
	DATA: data array to write.  If not supplied or set to a scalar, a
		null image is written.
	HEADER_IN: FITS header keyword.  If not supplied, a minimal basic
		header will be created.  Required FITS keywords, SIMPLE,
		BITPIX, XTENSION, NAXIS, ... are added by FITS_WRITE and
		do not need to be supplied with the header.  If supplied,
		their values will be updated as necessary to reflect DATA.

 INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:

	XTENSION: type of extension to write (Default="IMAGE"). If not
		supplied, it will be taken from HEADER_IN.  If not in either
		place, the default is "IMAGE".  This parameter is ignored
		when writing the primary data unit.     Note that binary and
               and ASCII table extensions already have a properly formatted
               header (e.g. with TTYPE* keywords) and byte array data.
	EXTNAME: EXTNAME for the extension.  If not supplied, it will be taken
		from HEADER_IN.  If not supplied and not in HEADER_IN, no
		EXTNAME will be written into the output extension.
	EXTVER: EXTVER for the extension.  If not supplied, it will be taken
               from HEADER_IN.  If not supplied and not in HEADER_IN, no
               EXTVER will be written into the output extension.
	EXTLEVEL: EXTLEVEL for the extension.  If not supplied, it will be taken
               from HEADER_IN.  If not supplied and not in HEADER_IN, no
               EXTLEVEL will be written into the output extension.
       /NO_ABORT: Set to return to calling program instead of a RETALL
               when an I/O error is encountered.  If set, the routine will
               return  a non-null string (containing the error message) in the
               keyword MESSAGE.   If /NO_ABORT not set, then FITS_WRITE will
               print the message and issue a RETALL
	/NO_DATA: Set if you only want FITS_WRITE to write a header.  The
		header supplied will be written without modification and
		the user is expected to write the data using WRITEU to unit
		FCB.UNIT. When FITS_WRITE is called with /NO_DATA, the user is
		responsible for the validity of the header, and must write
		the correct amount and format of the data.  When FITS_WRITE
		is used in this fashion, it will pad the data from a previously
		written extension to 2880 blocks before writting the header.

 OUTPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       MESSAGE: value of the error message for use with /NO_ABORT
	HEADER: actual output header written to the FITS file.

 NOTES:
	If the first call to FITS_WRITE is an extension, FITS_WRITE will
	automatically write a null image as the primary data unit.

	Keywords and history in the input header will be properly separated
	into the primary data unit and extension portions when constructing
	the output header (See FITS_READ for information on the internal
	Header format which separates the extension and PDU header portions).

 EXAMPLES:
	Write an IDL variable to a FITS file with the minimal required header.
		FITS_WRITE,'newfile.fits',ARRAY

	Write the same array as an image extension, with a null Primary data
	unit.
		FITS_WRITE,'newfile.fits',ARRAY,xtension='IMAGE'

	Write 4 additional image extensions to the same file.
		FITS_OPEN,'newfile.fits',fcb
		FITS_WRITE,fcb,data1,extname='FLUX',extver=1
		FITS_WRITE,fcb,err1,extname'ERR',extver=1
		FITS_WRITE,fcb,data2,extname='FLUX',extver=2
		FITS_WRITE,fcb,err2,extname='ERR',extver=2
		FITS_CLOSE,FCB

 WARNING:
       FITS_WRITE currently does not completely update the file control block.
       When mixing FITS_READ and FITS_WRITE commands it is safer to use
       file names, rather than passing the file control block.
 PROCEDURES USED:
	FITS_OPEN, SXADDPAR, SXDELPAR, SXPAR()
 HISTORY:
	Written by:	D. Lindler	August, 1995
	Work for variable length extensions  W. Landsman   August 1997
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
	PCOUNT and GCOUNT added for IMAGE extensions   J. Graham  October 1999
       Write unsigned data types      W. Landsman   December 1999
       Pad data area with zeros not blanks  W. McCann/W. Landsman October 2000
       Return Message='' to signal normal operation W. Landsman Nov. 2000
       Ensure that required extension table keywords are in proper order
             W.V. Dixon/W. Landsman          March 2001
       Assume since V5.1, remove NaNValue keyword   W. Landsman Nov. 2002
       Removed obsolete !ERR system variable  W. Landsman Feb 2004
       Check that byte array supplied with table extension W. Landsman Mar 2004
       Make number of bytes 64bit to avoid possible overflow W.L  Apr 2006
       Asuume FITS_OPEN has opened the file with /SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN
                         W. Landsman   September 2006
       Removes BZERO and BSCALE for floating point output, D. Lindler, Sep 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fits_write.pro)

FIXPS

This program modifies an IDL-produced PostScript landscape mode file so that the output
is right side up rather than upside down. In other words, it turns a so-called seascape
file into an actual landscape file. Files that are not currently in landscape mode will
be ignored. Tested with single and multiple page PostScript output from IDL 7.0.1 and 7.1.

The program requires the `Coyote Library <http://www.idlcoyote.com/documents/programs.php>`
to be installed on your machine.

:Categories:
Graphics, Utilities

:Params:
in_filename: in, required, type=string
The name of an IDL-produced PostScript file in landscape mode.
out_filename: in, optional, type=string
The name of the fixed output PostScript file. If not provided, the input
file is overwritten. Overwritting assumes proper read/write permission in
TEMP directory and in the directory where the input file is located.

:Keywords:
a4: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if the PostScript file is using a A4 Europeran sized page.
ledger: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if the PostScript file is using a US ledger size (11 x 17 inch) page.
legal: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if the PostScript file is using a US legal size (8.5 x 14 inch) page.
letter: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword if the PostScript file is using a US letter size (8.5 x 11 inch) page.
pagetype: in, optional, type=string, default="Letter"
A generic way to set the page size. A string of "LETTER", "LEDGER", "LEGAL", or "A4".
quiet: in, optional, type=boolean, default=0
Set this keyword to suppress error messages from the program.
success: out, optional, type=boolean
If this keyword is set to a named variable, then on output the variable will
return a 1 if the operation was successful, and a 0 otherwise. Using this
keyword also supresses the program's ability to "throw" an error. Informational
messages are issued about program developments, but this program will allow the
program caller to decide what to do with unsuccessful program completion.

:History:
Change History::
Written by: David W. Fanning, 6 August 2009.
Change to overwrite input file if output filename is not provided. 6 August 2009. DWF.
Incorporated checks for non-landscape mode files and files that have already been fixed. 6 August 2009. DWF.
Modified to fix multiple-page PostScript files and to work seamlessly with PS_START output. 8 August 2009. DWF.
Ran into a problem in which the PostScript file is stored in the directory pointed
to by the IDL_TMPDIR environment variable. Now check to see if the input filename
is the same as the output filename and make a change, if necessary. 22 July 2010. DWF.
Retreated to standard error handling with ERROR_MESSAGE as there are inevitable errors. 2 August 2010. DWF.
Output file was created, even if not used. Now deleting file and issuing messages to
explain why output file was not created. 1 November 2010. DWF.
Added SUCCESS and QUIET keywords. 15 Novemember 2010. DWF.
PostScript file structure changed in IDL 8. Made adjustment to find the
PageBoundingBox line. 19 Dec 2010. DWF.

:Copyright:
Copyright (c) 2009-2012, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fixps.pro)

FLEGENDRE

 NAME:
        FLEGENDRE
 PURPOSE:
       Compute the first M terms in a Legendre polynomial expansion.
 EXPLANATION:
       Meant to be used as a supplied function to SVDFIT.

       This procedure became partially obsolete in IDL V5.0 with the
       introduction of the /LEGENDRE keyword to SVDFIT and the associated
       SVDLEG function.    However, note that, unlike SVDLEG, FLEGENDRE works
       on vector values of X.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       result = FLEGENDRE( X, M)

 INPUTS:
       X - the value of the independent variable, scalar or vector
       M - number of term of the Legendre expansion to compute, integer scalar

 OUTPUTS:
       result - (N,M) array, where N is the number of elements in X and M
               is the order.   Contains the value of each Legendre term for
               each value of X
 EXAMPLE:
       (1) If x = 2.88 and M = 3 then
       IDL> print, flegendre(x,3)   ==>   [1.00, 2.88, 11.9416]

       This result can be checked by explicitly computing the first 3 Legendre
       terms, 1.0, x, 0.5*( 3*x^2 -1)

       (2) Find the coefficients to an M term Legendre polynomial that gives
               the best least-squares fit to a dataset (x,y)
               IDL> coeff = SVDFIT( x,y,M,func='flegendre')

           The coefficients can then be supplied to the function POLYLEG to
               compute the best YFIT values for any X.
 METHOD:
       The recurrence relation for the Legendre polynomials is used to compute
       each term.   Compare with the function FLEG in "Numerical Recipes"
       by Press et al. (1992), p. 674

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written     Wayne Landsman    Hughes STX      April 1995
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/flegendre.pro)

FLUX2MAG

 NAME:
     FLUX2MAG
 PURPOSE:
     Convert from flux (ergs/s/cm^2/A) to magnitudes.
 EXPLANATION:
     Use MAG2FLUX() for the opposite direction.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     mag = flux2mag( flux, [ zero_pt, ABwave=  ] )

 INPUTS:
     flux - scalar or vector flux vector, in erg cm-2 s-1 A-1

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
     zero_pt - scalar giving the zero point level of the magnitude.
               If not supplied then zero_pt = 21.1 (Code et al 1976)
               Ignored if the ABwave keyword is supplied

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
     ABwave - wavelength scalar or vector in Angstroms.   If supplied, then
           FLUX2MAG() returns Oke AB magnitudes (Oke & Gunn 1983, ApJ, 266,
           713).

 OUTPUT:
     mag - magnitude vector.   If the ABwave keyword is set then mag
           is given by the expression
           ABMAG = -2.5*alog10(f) - 5*alog10(ABwave) - 2.406

           Otherwise, mag is given by the expression
           mag = -2.5*alog10(flux) - zero_pt
 EXAMPLE:
       Suppose one is given wavelength and flux vectors, w (in Angstroms) and
       f (in erg cm-2 s-1 A-1).   Plot the spectrum in AB magnitudes

       IDL> plot, w, flux2mag(f,ABwave = w), /nozero

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written    J. Hill        STX Co.       1988
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added ABwave keyword    W. Landsman   September 1998

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/flux2mag.pro)

FM_UNRED

 NAME:
     FM_UNRED
 PURPOSE:
     Deredden a flux vector using the Fitzpatrick (1999) parameterization
 EXPLANATION:
     The R-dependent Galactic extinction curve is that of Fitzpatrick & Massa
     (Fitzpatrick, 1999, PASP, 111, 63; astro-ph/9809387 ).
     Parameterization is valid from the IR to the far-UV (3.5 microns to 0.1
     microns).    UV extinction curve is extrapolated down to 912 Angstroms.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     FM_UNRED, wave, flux, ebv, [ funred, R_V = , /LMC2, /AVGLMC, ExtCurve=
                       gamma =, x0=, c1=, c2=, c3=, c4= ]
 INPUT:
      WAVE - wavelength vector (Angstroms)
      FLUX - calibrated flux vector, same number of elements as WAVE
               If only 3 parameters are supplied, then this vector will
               updated on output to contain the dereddened flux.
      EBV  - color excess E(B-V), scalar.  If a negative EBV is supplied,
               then fluxes will be reddened rather than dereddened.

 OUTPUT:
      FUNRED - unreddened flux vector, same units and number of elements
               as FLUX

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS
      R_V - scalar specifying the ratio of total to selective extinction
               R(V) = A(V) / E(B - V).    If not specified, then R = 3.1
               Extreme values of R(V) range from 2.3 to 5.3

      /AVGLMC - if set, then the default fit parameters c1,c2,c3,c4,gamma,x0
             are set to the average values determined for reddening in the
             general Large Magellanic Cloud (LMC) field by Misselt et al.
            (1999, ApJ, 515, 128)
      /LMC2 - if set, then the fit parameters are set to the values determined
             for the LMC2 field (including 30 Dor) by Misselt et al.
             Note that neither /AVGLMC or /LMC2 will alter the default value
             of R_V which is poorly known for the LMC.

      The following five input keyword parameters allow the user to customize
      the adopted extinction curve.    For example, see Clayton et al. (2003,
      ApJ, 588, 871) for examples of these parameters in different interstellar
      environments.

      x0 - Centroid of 2200 A bump in microns (default = 4.596)
      gamma - Width of 2200 A bump in microns (default  =0.99)
      c3 - Strength of the 2200 A bump (default = 3.23)
      c4 - FUV curvature (default = 0.41)
      c2 - Slope of the linear UV extinction component
           (default = -0.824 + 4.717/R)
      c1 - Intercept of the linear UV extinction component
           (default = 2.030 - 3.007*c2

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
      ExtCurve - Returns the E(wave-V)/E(B-V) extinction curve, interpolated
                 onto the input wavelength vector

 EXAMPLE:
       Determine how a flat spectrum (in wavelength) between 1200 A and 3200 A
       is altered by a reddening of E(B-V) = 0.1.   Assume an "average"
       reddening for the diffuse interstellar medium (R(V) = 3.1)

       IDL> w = 1200 + findgen(40)*50      ;Create a wavelength vector
       IDL> f = w*0 + 1                    ;Create a "flat" flux vector
       IDL> fm_unred, w, f, -0.1, fnew  ;Redden (negative E(B-V)) flux vector
       IDL> plot,w,fnew

 NOTES:
       (1) The following comparisons between the FM curve and that of Cardelli,
           Clayton, & Mathis (1989), (see ccm_unred.pro):
           (a) - In the UV, the FM and CCM curves are similar for R < 4.0, but
                 diverge for larger R
           (b) - In the optical region, the FM more closely matches the
                 monochromatic extinction, especially near the R band.
       (2)  Many sightlines with peculiar ultraviolet interstellar extinction
               can be represented with the FM curve, if the proper value of
               R(V) is supplied.
       (3) Use the 4 parameter calling sequence if you wish to save the
               original flux vector.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       CSPLINE(), POLY()
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written   W. Landsman        Raytheon  STX   October, 1998
       Based on FMRCurve by E. Fitzpatrick (Villanova)
       Added /LMC2 and /AVGLMC keywords,  W. Landsman   August 2000
       Added ExtCurve keyword, J. Wm. Parker   August 2000
       Assume since V5.4 use COMPLEMENT to WHERE  W. Landsman April 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/fm_unred.pro)

FORPRINT

 NAME:
       FORPRINT
 PURPOSE:
       Print a set of vectors by looping over each index value.

 EXPLANATION:
       If W and F are equal length vectors, then the statement
               IDL> forprint, w, f
       is equivalent to
               IDL> for i = 0L, N_elements(w)-1 do print,w[i],f[i]

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       forprint, v1,[ v2, v3, v4,....v18, FORMAT = , TEXTOUT = ,STARTLINE =,
                                  SUBSET=, NUMLINE =, /SILENT, COMMENT= ]

 INPUTS:
       V1,V2,...V18 - Arbitary IDL vectors.  If the vectors are not of
               equal length then the number of rows printed will be equal
               to the length of the smallest vector.   Up to 18 vectors
               can be supplied.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:

       TEXTOUT - Controls print output device, defaults to !TEXTOUT

               textout=1       TERMINAL using /more option if available
               textout=2       TERMINAL without /more option
               textout=3       file 'forprint.prt'
               textout=4       file 'laser.tmp'
               textout=5      user must open file
               textout =      filename (default extension of .prt)
               textout=7       Append to <program>.prt file if it exists

       COMMENT - String scalar or vector to write to the first line of output
                file if  TEXTOUT > 2.    By default, FORPRINT will write a time
                stamp on the first line.   Use /NOCOMMENT if you don't want
                FORPRINT to write anything in the output file.    If COMMENT
                is a vector then one line will be written for each element.
       FORMAT - Scalar format string as in the PRINT procedure.  The use
               of outer parenthesis is optional.   Ex. - format="(F10.3,I7)"
               This program will automatically remove a leading "$" from
               incoming format statements. Ex. - "$(I4)" would become "(I4)".
               If omitted, then IDL default formats are used.
       /NOCOMMENT  - Set this keyword if you don't want any comment line
               line written as the first line in a harcopy output file.
       /SILENT - Normally, with a hardcopy output (TEXTOUT > 2), FORPRINT will
                print an informational message.    If the SILENT keyword
               is set and non-zero, then this message is suppressed.
       SUBSET - Index vector specifying elements to print.   No error checking
               is done to make sure the indicies are valid.  The statement

              IDL> forprint,x,y,z,subset=s
                       is equivalent to
              IDL> for i=0,n-1 do print, x[s[i]], y[s[i]], z[s[i]]

       STARTLINE - Integer scalar specifying the first line in the arrays
               to print.   Default is STARTLINE = 1, i.e. start at the
               beginning of the arrays.    (If a SUBSET keyword is supplied
               then STARTLINE refers to first element in the subscript vector.)
      /STDOUT - If set, the force standard output unit (=-1) if not writing
               to a file.   This allows the FORPINT output to be captured
               in a journal file.    Only needed for non-GUI terminals
       WIDTH - Line width for wrapping, passed onto OPENW when using hardcopy.

 OUTPUTS:
       None
 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       If keyword TEXTOUT is not used, the default is the nonstandard
       keyword !TEXTOUT.    If you want to use FORPRINT to write more than
       once to the same file, or use a different file name then set
       TEXTOUT=5, and open and close then file yourself (see documentation
       of TEXTOPEN for more info).

       One way to add the non-standard system variables !TEXTOUT and !TEXTUNIT
       is to use the procedure ASTROLIB
 EXAMPLE:
       Suppose W,F, and E are the wavelength, flux, and epsilon vectors for
       a spectrum.   Print these values to a file 'output.dat' in a nice
       format.

       IDL> fmt = '(F10.3,1PE12.2,I7)'
       IDL> forprint, F = fmt, w, f, e, TEXT = 'output.dat'

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written    W. Landsman             April, 1989
       Keywords textout and format added, J. Isensee, July, 1990
       Made use of parenthesis in FORMAT optional  W. Landsman  May 1992
       Added STARTLINE keyword W. Landsman    November 1992
       Set up so can handle 18 input vectors. J. Isensee, HSTX Corp. July 1993
       Handle string value of TEXTOUT   W. Landsman, HSTX September 1993
       Added NUMLINE keyword            W. Landsman, HSTX February 1996
       Added SILENT keyword             W. Landsman, RSTX, April 1998
       Much faster printing to a file   W. Landsman, RITSS, August, 2001
       Use SIZE(/TNAME) instead of DATATYPE() W. Landsman SSAI October 2001
       Fix skipping of first line bug introduced Aug 2001  W. Landsman Nov2001
       Added /NOCOMMENT keyword, the SILENT keyword now controls only
       the display of informational messages.  W. Landsman June 2002
       Skip PRINTF if IDL in demo mode  W. Landsman  October 2004
       Assume since V5.4 use BREAK instead of GOTO W. Landsman April 2006
       Add SUBSET keyword, warning if different size vectors passed.
                                     P.Broos,W.Landsman. Aug 2006
       Change keyword_set() to N_elements W. Landsman  Oct 2006
       Added /STDOUT keyword  W. Landsman Oct 2006
       Fix error message for undefined variable W. Landsman  April 2007
       Added WIDTH keyword    J. Bailin  Nov 2010
       Allow multiple (vector) comment lines  W. Landsman April 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/forprint.pro)

FPUFIX

 NAME:
       FPUFIX

 PURPOSE:

       This is a utility routine to examine a variable and fix problems
       that will create floating point underflow errors.

 AUTHOR:

       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
       David Fanning, Ph.D.
       1645 Sheely Drive
       Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
       Phone: 970-221-0438
       E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
       Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 CATEGORY:

       Utilities

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       fixedData = FPUFIX(data)

 ARGUMENTS:

       data :         A numerical variable to be checked for values that will cause
                      floating point underflow errors. Suspect values are set to 0.

 KEYWORDS:

       None.

 RETURN VALUE:

       fixedData:    The output is the same as the input, except that any values that
                     will cause subsequent floating point underflow errors are set to 0.

 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None.

 EXAMPLES:

       data = FPTFIX(data)

 RESTRICTIONS:

     None.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

       Written by David W. Fanning, from Mati Meron's example FPU_FIX. Mati's
          program is more robust that this (ftp://cars3.uchicago.edu/midl/),
          but this serves my needs and doesn't require other programs from
          Mati's library.  24 February 2006.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fpufix.pro)

FREBIN

 NAME:
   FREBIN

 PURPOSE:
   Shrink or expand the size of an array an arbitary amount using interpolation

 EXPLANATION:
   FREBIN is an alternative to CONGRID or REBIN.    Like CONGRID it
   allows expansion or contraction by an arbitary amount. ( REBIN requires
   integral factors of the original image size.)    Like REBIN it conserves
   flux by ensuring that each input pixel is equally represented in the output
   array.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
   result = FREBIN( image, nsout, nlout, [ /TOTAL] )

 INPUTS:
    image - input image, 1-d or 2-d numeric array
    nsout - number of samples in the output image, numeric scalar

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
    nlout - number of lines in the output image, numeric scalar
            If not supplied, then set equal to 1

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
   /total - if set, the output pixels will be the sum of pixels within
          the appropriate box of the input image.  Otherwise they will
          be the average.    Use of the /TOTAL keyword conserves surface flux.

 OUTPUTS:
    The resized image is returned as the function result.    If the input
    image is of type DOUBLE or FLOAT then the resized image is of the same
    type.     If the input image is BYTE, INTEGER or LONG then the output
    image is usually of type FLOAT.   The one exception is expansion by
    integral amount (pixel duplication), when the output image is the same
    type as the input image.

 EXAMPLE:
     Suppose one has an 800 x 800 image array, im, that must be expanded to
     a size 850 x 900 while conserving surface flux:

     IDL> im1 = frebin(im,850,900,/total)

     im1 will be a 850 x 900 array, and total(im1) = total(im)
 NOTES:
    If the input image sizes are a multiple of the output image sizes
    then FREBIN is equivalent to the IDL REBIN function for compression,
    and simple pixel duplication on expansion.

    If the number of output pixels are not integers, the output image
    size will be truncated to an integer.  The platescale, however, will
    reflect the non-integer number of pixels.  For example, if you want to
    bin a 100 x 100 integer image such that each output pixel is 3.1
    input pixels in each direction use:
           n = 100/3.1   ; 32.2581
          image_out = frebin(image,n,n)

     The output image will be 32 x 32 and a small portion at the trailing
     edges of the input image will be ignored.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
    None.
 HISTORY:
    Adapted from May 1998 STIS  version, written D. Lindler, ACC
    Added /NOZERO, use INTERPOLATE instead of CONGRID, June 98 W. Landsman
    Fixed for nsout non-integral but a multiple of image size  Aug 98 D.Lindler
    DJL, Oct 20, 1998, Modified to work for floating point image sizes when
		expanding the image.
    Improve speed by addressing arrays in memory order W.Landsman Dec/Jan 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/image/frebin.pro)

FSC_BASE_FILENAME

NAME:
FSC_BASE_FILENAME

PURPOSE:

The purpose of this is to extract from a long file path, the
base file name. That is, the name of the actual file without
the preceeding directory information or the final file extension.
The directory information and file extension can be obtained via
keywords. The file is named so as not to interfere with FILE_BASENAME,
which was introduced in IDL 6.0 and performs a similar function.

AUTHOR:

CATEGORY:

Utility.

CALLING SEQUENCE:

baseFilename = FSC_Base_Filename(thePath)

INPUTS:

thePath: This is the file path you wish to extract a base file name from.
It is a string variable of the sort returned from Dialog_Pickfile.

KEYWORDS:

DIRECTORY: The directory information obtained from the input file path.
The directory always ends in a directory separator character.

EXTENSION: The file extension associated with the input file path.

PATH_SEPARATOR: The string to use as a path separator. If undefined, the output
of PATH_SEP() will be used.

RETURN_VALUE:

baseFilename: The base filename, stripped of directory and file extension information.

RESTRICTIONS:

This is a quick and dirty program. It has been tested on Windows machines and *lightly*
tested on UNIX machines. Please contact me at the e-mail address above if you discover
problems.

EXAMPLE:

IDL> thePath = "C:\rsi\idl7.8\lib\jester.pro"
IDL> Print, FSC_Base_Filename(thePath, Directory=theDirectory, Extension=theExtension)
jester
IDL> Print, theDirectory
C:\rsi\idl7.8\lib\
IDL> Print, theExtension
pro

MODIFICATION HISTORY:

Written by: David W. Fanning, 31 July 2003.
Modified by KaRo, 13 Feb. 2005 to allow dots in the filename.
Added PATH_SEPARATOR keyword. 25 July 2005. DWF.
Added ability to recongnize directory by path separator in last character. 19 Sept 2005. DWF.
If directory is blank (because a relative filename was passed), set to current directory. 6 Aug 2009. DWF.
There were a couple of instances where the directory did NOT end in a path separator. Fixed. 24 Feb 2012. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fsc_base_filename.pro)

FSC_DROPLIST

 NAME:
   FSC_DROPLIST

 PURPOSE:

   The purpose of this compound widget is to provide an alternative
   to the DROPLIST widget offered in the IDL distribution. What has
   always annoyed me about a droplist is that you can't get the current
   "value" of a droplist easily. This compound widget makes this and
   other tasks much easier.

 AUTHOR:

   FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
   David Fanning, Ph.D.
   1645 Sheely Drive
   Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
   Phone: 970-221-0438
   E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
   Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com/

 CATEGORY:

   General programming.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

   droplistObj = FSC_Droplist(parent, Title='Animals: ", Value=['Dog'. 'Cat', 'Coyote'], Index=2)

   The return value of the FSC_Droplist (droplistObj in this example) is
   an object reference. Interaction with the droplist will occur through
   object methods.

 INPUT PARAMETERS:

   parent -- The parent widget ID of the compound widget. Required.

 INPUT KEYWORDS:

 Any keyword that is appropriate for the Widget_Droplist function can be used.
 In addition, these keywords are explicitly defined.

   EVENT_FUNC -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Handler Function.
   EVENT_PRO -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Handler Procedure.
   FORMAT -- A format specifier for the "format" of the values in the droplist.
   INDEX -- The index number of the current selection.
   SPACES -- A two-element array that indicates the number of blank spaces to be added
             to the the beginning and end of the formatted values. If a single number
             is provided, this number of blank spaces is added to both the beginning
             and the end of the value.
   TITLE -- The title of the droplist widget.
   UNAME -- The user name of the droplist widget. (Only available in IDL 5.2 and higher.)
   UVALUE -- The normal "user value" of the droplist.
   VALUE -- An array of the droplist "selections". May be any data type.

 COMMON BLOCKS:

   None.

 DEPENDENCIES:

   Requires ERROR_MESSAGE from the Coyote Library..

 EVENT STRUCTURE:

   An event is returned each time the droplist value is changed. The event structure
   is defined like this:

   event = { FSC_DROPLIST_EVENT, $ ; The name of the event structure.
             ID: 0L, $             ; The ID of the compound widget's top-level base.
             TOP: 0L, $            ; The widget ID of the top-level base of the hierarchy.
             HANDLER: 0L, $        ; The event handler ID. Filled out by IDL.
             INDEX: 0L, $          ; The index number of the current selection.
             SELECTION:Ptr_New() $ ; A pointer to the current selection "value".
             SELF:Obj_New() }      ; The object reference of the compound widget.

 PUBLIC OBJECT METHODS:

   GetID -- A function with no arguments that returns the widget identifier
      of the droplist widget.

      droplistID = droplistObj->GetID()

   GetIndex -- A function with no arguments that returns the index
      number of the current droplist selection.

      currentIndex = droplistObj->GetIndex()

   GetSelection -- A function with no arguments that returns the current
      droplist selection.

      currentSelection = droplistObj->GetSelection()

   GetUValue -- A function with no arguments that returns the "user value"
      of the compound widget i.e., the value set with the UVALUE keyword).

      myUValue = droplistObj->GetUValue()

   GetValues -- A function with no arguments that returns the "values" or
      "selections" for the droplist.

      possibleSelections = droplistObj->GetValues()

   Resize -- A procedure that sets the X screen size of the droplist. It is
      defined like this:

      PRO Resize, newSize, ParentSize=parentSize

      The "newSize" keyword is the new X screen size. If this argument is
      missing, the screen X size of the compound widget's parent is used.
      The parentSize keyword is an output keyword that returns the X screen
      size of the compound widget's parent.

      droplistObj->Resize, 400

      Note that not all devices (e.g., X Windows devices) support droplist resizing.

   SetIndex -- A procedure that sets the current droplist selection based on
      the given index. This is equivalent to Widget_Control, droplistID, Set_Droplist_Select=newIndex

      droplistObj->SetIndex, newIndex

   SetSelection -- Whereas a regular droplist widget can only be set by index
      number, this compound widget can also be set by a "selection". The new selection
      can be any data type and corresponds to one of the "values" of the droplist.

      droplistObj->SetSelection, newSelection

   SetValues -- Sets the possible selections of the droplist widget. The CurrentIndex keyword
      will allow the current index of the selection to be changed to:

      newChoices = ['dog', 'cat', 'coyote']
      droplistObj->SetValues, newChoices, CurrentIndex=2


 EXAMPLE:

   An example program is provided at the end of the FSC_DROPLIST code. To run it,
   type these commands:

      IDL> .Compile FSC_DROPLIST
      IDL> Example

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

   Written by: David W Fanning, 17 Jan 2000. DWF.
   Added FORMAT and SPACES keywords 28 April 2000. DWF.
   Fixed a small problem with event processing when the EVENT_FUNC keyword
      was used. 29 Dec 2000. DWF.
   Attached the UNAME value to the TLB of the compound widget instead
      of to the droplist widget itself. 11 Jan 2001. DWF.
   Fixed a problem when the droplist was part of a modal widget and used the
      EVENT_PRO keyword. 27 Oct 2003. DWF.
   Added a SetValue method for setting all the values in the droplist at once. 12 Nov 2004. DWF.
   Fixed type on line 346/ 6 Feb 2008. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fsc_droplist.pro)

FSC_FIELD

NAME:
FSC_FIELD

PURPOSE:

The purpose of this compound widget is to provide an alternative
to the CW_FIELD widget offered in the IDL distribution. One weakness
of the CW_FIELD compound widget is that the text widgets do not
look editable to the users on Windows platforms. This program
corrects that deficiency and adds some features that I think
will be helpful. For example, you can now assign an event handler
to the compound widget, ask for positive numbers only, and limit
the number of digits in a number, or the number of digits to the
right of a decimal point. The program is written as a widget object,
which allows the user to call object methods directly, affording
even more flexibility in use. This program replaces the earlier
programs FSC_INPUTFIELD and COYOTE_FIELD.

The program consists of a label widget next to a one-line text widget.
The "value" of the compound widget is shown in the text widget. If the
value is a number, it will not be possible (generally) to type
alphanumeric values in the text widget. String values behave like
strings in any one-line text widget.

AUTHOR:

CATEGORY:

General programming.

TYPICAL CALLING SEQUENCE:

fieldID = FSC_FIELD(parent, Title="X Size:", Value=256, Object=fieldObject, Digits=3)

INPUT PARAMETERS:

parent -- The parent widget ID of the compound widget. Required.

INPUT KEYWORDS:

COLUMN Set this keyword to have the Label widget above the Text widget.
The default is to have the Label widget in a row with the Text widget.

CR_ONLY Set this keyword if you only want Carriage Return events returned to
your event handler. If this keyword is not set, all events are returned.
Setting this keyword has no effect unless either the EVENT_PRO or
EVENT_FUNC keyword is used.

DECIMAL Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in floating point or double precision numbers. Ignored for STRING values.

DIGITS Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in integer numbers.

EVENT_FUNC Set this keyword to the name of an event handler function. If this
keyword is undefined and the Event_Pro keyword is undefined,
all compound widget events are handled internally and not
passed on to the parent widget.

EVENT_PRO Set this keyword to the name of an event handler procedure. If this
keyword is undefined and the Event_Func keyword is undefined,
all compound widget events are handled internally and not
passed on to the parent widget.

FIELDFONT The font name for the text in the text widget.

FRAME Set this keyword to put a frame around the compound widget.

FOCUS_EVENTS Set this keyword to enable event generation for keyboard focus
events. Ignored unless EVENT_FUNC or EVENT_PRO keywords are specified.

HIGHLIGHT Set this keyword to highlight the existing text if the widget gain
the keyboard focus. This keyword MUST be set for tabbing to work naturally
in IDL 6.2 and higher.

LABEL_LEFT Set this keyword to align the text on the label to the left.

LABEL_RIGHT Set this keyword to align the text on the label to the right.

LABELFONT The font name for the text in the label widget.

LABELSIZE The X screen size of the label widget.

NAME A string containing the name of the object. The default is ''.

NOEDIT Set this keyword to allow no user editing of the input text widget.

NONSENSITIVE Set this keyword to make the input text widget non-sensitive.

POSITIVE Set this keyword if you want only positive numbers allowed.

SCR_XSIZE The X screen size of the compound widget.

SCR_YSIZE The Y screen size of the compound widget.

TITLE The string text placed on the label widget.

UNDEFINED Set this keyword to the value to use for "undefined" values. If
not set, then !Value.F_NAN is used for numerical fields and a
NULL string is used for string fields. This applies to values
obtained with the GET_VALUE method or the GET_VALUE function.

UVALUE A user value for any purpose.

VALUE The "value" of the compound widget. Any type of integer, floating, or string
variable is allowed. The data "type" is determined automatically from the
value supplied with this keyword. Be sure you set the type appropriately for
your intended use of the value.

XSIZE The X size of the text widget in the usual character units.

OUTPUT KEYWORDS:

OBJECT Set this keyword to a named variable to receive the compound widget's
object reference. This is required if you wish to call methods on the object.
Note that the object reference is also available in the event structure
generated by the widget object. Note that the object reference will be
necessary if you want to get or set values in the compound widget.

COMMON BLOCKS:

None.

RESTRICTIONS:

Requires DBLTOSTR from the Coyote Library:
http://www.idlcoyote.com/programs/dbltostr.pro

EVENT STRUCTURE:

All events are handled internally unless either the Event_Pro or Event_Func
keywords are used to assign an event handler to the compound widget. By
default all events generated by the text widget are passed to the assigned
event handler. If you wish to receive only Carriage Return events, set the
CR_Only keyword.

event = { FSC_FIELD_EVENT, $ ; The name of the event structure.
ID: 0L, $ ; The ID of the compound widget's top-level base.
TOP: 0L, $ ; The widget ID of the top-level base of the hierarchy.
HANDLER: 0L, $ ; The event handler ID. Filled out by IDL.
OBJECT: Obj_New(), $ ; The "self" object reference. Provided so you can call methods.
VALUE: Ptr_New(), $ ; A pointer to the widget value.
TYPE:"" ; A string indicating the type of data in the VALUE field.
}

Note that if the field is "empty", the VALUE will be a pointer
to an undefined variable. You should check this value before you
use it. You code will look something like this:

IF N_Elements(*event.value) EQ 0 THEN $
Print, 'Current Value UNDEFINED.' ELSE $
Print, 'Current Value: ', *event.value

GETTING and SETTING VALUES:

Almost all the properties of the widget can be obtained or set via
the object's GetProperty and SetProperty methods (described below).
Traditional compound widgets have the ability to get and set the "value"
of the compound widget identifier (e.g., fieldID in the calling
sequence above). Unfortunately, it is impossible to retreive a variable
in this way when the variable is undefined. In practical terms, this
means that the undefined variable must be set to *something*. You can
determine what that something is with the UNDEFINED keyword, or I will set
it to !VALUES.F_NAN for numerical fields and to the null string for string
fields. In any case, you will have to check for undefined variables before
you try to do something with the value. For a numerical field, the code
might look something like this:

fieldID = FSC_FIELD(parent, Title="X Size:", Value=256, Object=fieldObject, Digits=3)
currentValue = fieldObject->Get_Value()
IF Finite(currentValue) EQ 0 THEN Print, 'Value is Undefined' ELSE Print, currentValue

Additional examples are provided in the numerical example fields in Example Program below.

Setting the value of the compound widget is the same as calling the Set_Value
method on the object reference. In other words, these two statements are equivalent.

fieldObject->Set_Value, 45.4
Widget_Control, fieldID, Set_Value=45.4

The data type of the value is determined from the value itself. Be sure you set it appropriately.

OBJECT PROCEDURE METHODS:

GetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
returned via output keywords. The keywords that are available are:

CR_Only -- A flag, if set, means only report carriage return events.
DataType -- The data type of the field variable.
Decimal -- Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in FLOATVALUE and DOUBLEVALUE numbers.
Digits -- Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in INTERGERVALUE and LONGVALUE numbers.
Event_Func -- The name of the event handler function.
Event_Pro -- The name of the event handler function.
Has_Focus -- Set to 1 if the text widget currently has the keyboard focus.
Highlight -- The highlight flag.
NoEdit -- The NoEdit flag.
NonSensitive -- The NonSensitive flag.
Undefined -- The "value" of any undefined value.
UValue -- The user value assigned to the compound widget.
Value -- The "value" of the compound widget.
Name -- A scalar string name of the object.

Resize -- This method allows you to resize the compound widget's text field.
The value parameter is an X screen size for the entire widget. The text
widget is sized by using the value obtained from this value minus the
X screen size of the label widget.

objectRef->Resize, screen_xsize_value

Set_Value -- This method allows you to set the "value" of the field. It takes
one positional parameter, which is the value.

objectRef->Set_Value, 5

SetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
set via input keywords. The keywords that are available are:

CR_Only -- Set this keyword if you only want Carriage Return events.
Decimal -- Set this keyword to the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point in FLOAT and DOUBLE numbers.
Digits -- Set this keyword to the number of digits permitted in INTERGER and LONG numbers.
Event_Func -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Function.
Event_Pro -- Set this keyword to the name of an Event Procedure.
Highlight -- Set this keyword to highlight the existing text
when the widget gets the keyboard focus
LabelSize -- The X screen size of the Label Widget.
Name -- A scalar string name of the object. (default = '')
NoEdit -- Set this keyword to make the text widget uneditable
NonSensitive -- Set this keyword to make the widget nonsensitive
Scr_XSize -- The X screen size of the text widget.
Scr_YSize -- The Y screen size of the text widget.
Title -- The text to go on the Label Widget.
UValue -- A user value for any purpose.
Value -- The "value" of the compound widget.
XSize -- The X size of the Text Widget.

SetTabNext -- This method allows you to specify which field to go to when a TAB character
is typed in the text widget. See the Example program below for an example of how to
use this method.

OBJECT FUNCTIONS METHODS:

Get_Value -- Returns the "value" of the field. No parameters. Will be undefined
if a "number" field is blank. Should be checked before using:

IF N_Elements(objectRef->Get_Value()) NE 0 THEN Print, Value is: ', objectRef->Get_Value()

GetID -- Returns the widget identifier of the compound widget's top-level base.
(The first child of the parent widget.) No parameters.

GetLabelSize -- Returns the X screen size of the label widget. No parameters.

GetTextID -- Returns the widget identifier of the compound widget's text widget.
No parameters.

GetTextSize -- Returns the X screen size of the text widget. No parameters.

PRIVATE OBJECT METHODS:

Although there is really no such thing as a "private" method in IDL's
object implementation, some methods are used internally and not meant to
be acessed publicly. Here are a few of those methods. I list them because
it may be these private methods are ones you wish to override in subclassed
objects.

MoveTab -- This method moves the focus to the widget identified in the "next" field,
which must be set with the SetTabNext method. No parameters. Called automatically
when a TAB character is typed in the text widget.

Text_Events -- The main event handler method for the compound widget. All
text widget events are processed here.

ReturnValue -- This function method accepts a string input value and converts
it to the type of data requested by the user.

Validate -- This function method examines all text input and removes unwanted
characters, depending upon the requested data type for the field. It makes it
impossible, for example, to type alphanumeric characters in an INTEGER field.

EXAMPLE:

An example program is provided at the end of the FSC_FIELD code. To run it,
type these commands:

IDL> .Compile FSC_Field
IDL> Example

MODIFICATION HISTORY:

Written by: David W. Fanning, 18 October 2000. Based heavily on an earlier
FSC_INPUTFIELD program and new ideas about the best way to write
widget objects.
Added LABEL_LEFT, LABEL_RIGHT, and UNDEFINED keywords. 29 Dec 2000. DWF.
Modified the way the value is returned in the GET_VALUE method and the
GET_VALUE function. Modified Example program to demonstrate. 30 Dec 2000. DWF.
Added NOEDIT and NONSENSITIVE keywords, with corresponding SETEDIT and SETSENNSITIVE
methods. 19 Jan 2001. DWF.
Actually followed through with the changes I _said_" I made 29 Dec 2000. (Don't ask....) 13 June 2001. DWF.
Added GetTextSize and GetLabelSize methods for obtaining the X screen
size of the text and label widgets, respectively. 21 July 2001. DWF.
Fixed a problem in SetProperty method where I was setting self.xsize, which doesn't exist. 24 April 2002. DWF.
Small modification to the SetEdit method. 6 August 2003. DWF.
Added Highlight keyword. Ported Focus_Events keyword from
fsc_inputfield.pro. Updated documentation. 17 November
2004. DWF and Benjamin Hornberger
Added Has_Focus keyword to the GetProperty method. 18 November
2004. Benjamin Hornberger
Fixed bug in GetProperty method (set value to *self.undefined if
*self.value is undefined. 24 Feb 2004. Benjamin Hornberger
Modified FOCUS_EVENTS keyword handling so that *all* focus events are now
passed to specified event handlers. Check event.select to see if the
widget is gaining or losing focus. 10 August 2005. DWF.
Added new tabbing functionality, introduced in IDL 6.2. To use tabbing
functionality natually, the HIGHTLIGHT keywords must be set.
See included EXAMPLE program for details. 10 August 2005. DWF.
Added functionality to covert double precision values to strings properly. 30 Nov 2005. DWF.
Set the default fonts to be the current widget font, rather than the default widget font. 4 Oct 2008. DWF.
Fixed a problem with validating a float or double value when it was written with
exponential notation. 2 April 2010. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fsc_field.pro)

FSC_FILESELECT

 NAME:
   FSC_FILESELECT

 PURPOSE:

   The purpose of this compound widget is to provide a means
   by which the user can type or select a file name. The
   program is written as an "object widget", meaning that
   the guts of the program is an object of class FSC_FILESELECT.
   This is meant to be an example of the obvious advantages of
   writing compound widget programs as objects.

 AUTHOR:

   FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
   David Fanning, Ph.D.
   1645 Sheely Drive
   Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
   Phone: 970-221-0438
   E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
   Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com/

 CATEGORY:

   General programming.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

   filenameID = FSC_FileSelect(parent)

 INPUT PARAMETERS:

   parent -- The parent widget ID of the compound widget. Required.

 INPUT KEYWORDS:

   Event_Pro -- The event handler procedure for this compound widget.By default: "".
   Event_Func -- The event handler function for this compound widget. By default: "".

      If neither EVENT_PRO or EVENT_FUNC is defined, program events are handled internally by the compound widget.

   DirectoryName -- The initial name of the directory. By defaut: current directory.
   Filename -- The initial file name in the filename text widget.
   Filter -- The file filter. By default: "*".
   Frame -- Set this keyword for a frame around the compound widget.
   LabelFont -- The font for the label widget. By default: "".
   LabelName -- The text on the label widgt. By default: "Filename: ".
   LabelSize -- The X screen size of the label widget. By default: 0.
   MustExist -- A flag that indicates selected files must exist. By default: 0.
   NoMaxSize -- A flag to prohibit automatic text widget sizing. By default: 0.

     If this keyword is not set, the compound widget will automatically resize itself to
     the largest widget in its parent base widget. It will do this by changing the size of
     the text widgets holding the file and directory names.

   Read -- Set this keyword to have file selection for reading a file. By default: 1.
   SelectDirectory -- The default directory for file selection. In other words, this is the
     default directory for DIALOG_PICKFILE, which is accessed via the BROWSE buttons.
   SelectFont -- The font for the "Browse" button. By default: "".
   SelectTitle -- The title bar text on the file selection dialog. By default: "Select a File...".
   TextFont -- The font for the filename text widget. By default: "".
   UValue -- User value for any purpose.
   Write -- Set this keyword to open a file for writing. By default: 0.
   XSize -- The X size of the text widget holding the filename. By default: StrLen(filename) * 1.5 > 40.

 OUTPUT KEYWORDS:

   ObjectRef -- Assign this keyword to an output variable that will hold the internal object reference.
                With the object reference you can call object methods to easily change many properties of
                the compound widget.

 COMMON BLOCKS:

   None.

 RESTRICTIONS:

   Requires the folling files from the Coyote Library:

      http://www.idlcoyote.com/programs/error_message.pro

 EVENT STRUCTURE:

   All events are handled internally unless either the Event_Pro or Event_Func
   keywords are used to assign an event handler to the compound widget. All events
   generated by the text widgets are passed to the assigned event handler.

   event = { CW_FILESELECT, $     ; The name of the event structure.
             ID: 0L, $            ; The ID of the compound widget's top-level base.
             TOP: 0L, $           ; The widget ID of the top-level base of the hierarchy.
             HANDLER: 0L, $       ; The event handler ID. Filled out by IDL.
             Basename: "", $      ; The base filename without directory specifiers.
             Filename: "", $      ; The fully qualified filename.
             Directory: "", $     ; The name of the current file directory.
           }

 EXAMPLE:

   An example program is provided at the end of the FSC_FILESELECT code. To run it,
   type these commands:

      IDL> .Compile fsc_fileselect
      IDL> Example

   Or, if you want to obtain the object reference, type this:

      IDL> Example, theObject

   Now you can call the object's methods. For example:

      IDL theObject->SetProperty, XSize=150

 GETTING and SETTING VALUES:

   So as not to disrupt the accepted paradigm in using compound widgets, you
   can use the return value of the FSC_FILESELECT function with WIDGET_CONTROL to
   get and set the "value" of the widget.

       Widget_Control, filenameID, Set_Value='C:\RSI\IDL52\DATA\cyclone.dat'

   The program will automatically separate the file name portion of the value
   from the directory portion and put things in the correct text widgets.

   Similarly, you can get the "value" of the widget:

       Widget_Control, filenameID, Get_Value=theValue
       Print, theValue

           C:\RSI\IDL52\DATA\cyclone.dat

   The return value is the fully qualified file path to the file.

 USING OBJECT METHODS to CHANGE PROGRAM PROPERTIES:

   If you obtain the object reference, you have a great deal more control
   over the properties of the compound widget. You obtain the object reference
   by calling the function like this:

      filenameID = FSC_FILESELECT(parent, ObjectRef=theObject)

 OBJECT PROCEDURE METHODS:

   GetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
       returned via output keywords. The keywords that are available are:

      DirectoryName -- The current directory.
      Event_Func -- The name of the event handler function for this compound widget.
      Event_Pro -- The name of the event handler procedure for this compound widget.
      Filename -- The current base filename.
      Filter -- The current file filter.
      LabelName -- The text on the label widget.
      LabelSize -- The X screen size of the label widget.
      MustExist -- A flag that indicates selected files must exist to be selected.
      Parent -- The parent widget of the compound widget.
      Read=read -- The file selection for reading flag.
      SelectTitle -- The title bar text on the file selection dialog.
      TLB -- The top-level base of the compound widget.
      UValue -- The user value of the compound widget.
      Write -- The file selection for writing flag.
      XSize -- The X size of the text widget holding the filename.

   LabelSize -- This method makes sure that the directory name and file name labels
      are the same size. Normally, this procedure is called internally. No parameters.

   MatchSize -- This method resizes the compound widget so that it is as long as the
      the longest widget in the parent base widget. This is done automatically upon
      realization unless the NOMAXSIZE keyword is set. The method aids in writing
      resizeable widget programs.

   SetProperty -- This method allows various properties of the widget to be
       set via input keywords. The keywords that are available are:

      DirectoryName -- The current directory.
      Event_Func -- The name of the event handler function for this compound widget.
      Event_Pro -- The name of the event handler procedure for this compound widget.
      Filename -- The current base filename.
      Filter -- The current file filter.
      LabelName -- The text on the label widget.
      LabelSize -- The X screen size of the label widget.
      MustExist -- A flag that indicates selected files must exist to be selected.
      Read -- The file selection for reading flag.
      SelectTitle -- The title bar text on the file selection dialog.
      UValue -- The user value of the compound widget.
      Write -- The file selection for writing flag.
      XSize -- The X size of the text widget holding the filename.

   TextSelect - Allows you to create a selection in filename text widget. See the
                documentation for the SET_TEXT_SELECT keyword to Widget_Control.

      selection -- A two-element array containing the starting position and selection length.

 OBJECT FUNCTION METHODS:

      GetFileName -- Returns the fully qualified filename. No parameters.

      GetTLB -- Returns the top-level base ID of the compound widget. No Parameters.

      Inspect_DirectoryName -- Inspects the directory name for correctness. Requires one positional parameter.

        directoryName -- The name of the directory from the directory text widget.
        textSelection -- The current text selection position.

        At the moment all this does is remove any blank characters from either
        end of the directory name and makes sure the last character of the directory
        name does not end in a subdirectory specifier (except for VMS).

     Inspect_Filename -- Inspects the file name for correctness. Requires one positional parameter.

        filename -- The name of the file from the filename text widget.
        textSelection -- The current text selection position.

        At the moment all this does is remove any blank characters from either
        end of the file name

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

   Written by: David W. Fanning, 21 NOV 1999.
   Fixed bug in File Name selection button. 18 MAR 2000. DWF.
   Fixed an error in which directory the Browse buttons should start
       searching. 29 SEP 2000. DWF.
   Previously returned events only for typing in text widgets. Now
       Browse button events are also returned. 29 SEP 2000. DWF.
   Fixed a bug in setting the file filter. 29 SEP 2000. DWF.
   Removed the Directory Browse button 10 AUG 2002. DWF.
   Added ERROR_MESSAGE to error handling. 10 AUG 2002. DWF.
   Changed the ability to specify a file filter as a string array, instead
       of just as a scalar string. This required the use of a pointer, which
       meant that I had to remove the FILTER field from the CW_FILESELECT
       event structure to avoid likely memory leakage. This is a dangerous
       change because it means programs that relied on this (I expect there
       are very, very few) will break and it goes against my philosopy of
       keeping my programs backward compatible. Let me know if you have
       problems. In testing, I discoved no problems in my own code. 31 OCT 2002. DWF.
   Fixed a problem with DIALOG_PICKFILE that sometimes allowed users to change
       directories without selecting a file. 3 Nov 2002. DWF.
   Fixed a problem with widget resizing with the help of Bob Portman that had plagued
       me from the beginning. Thanks, Bob! 5 August 2003. DWF
   Added TEXTSELECT method. 5 Aug 2003. DWF.
   Had to add FORWARD_FUNCTION statement to get error handler compiled when using
       DIRECTORY keyword. 24 Nov 2003. DWF.
   Fixed a problem with too many events going to an event handler specified with
       the EVENT_PRO or EVENT_FUNC keyword from the text widget. Now only Carriage
       Return events are passed on to the user-specified event handler. 8 July 2004. DWF.
   Replace all "\" characters with "/" characters in directory names. 8 Januay 2006. DWF.
   Set the default fonts to be the current widget font, rather than the default widget font. 4 Oct 2008. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fsc_fileselect.pro)

FSC_PLOTWINDOW

NAME:
FSC_PLOTWINDOW

PURPOSE:

The purpose of this compound widget is to create a resizeable
"plot window" inside a larger "page window". I'm not sure it
has any value except as a utility routine for the PostScript
configuration object FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE, but it's a neat
program anyway. :-)

AUTHOR:

CATEGORY:

Utility routine for FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE.

CALLING SEQUENCE:

plotwindowObject = CW_PlotWindow(parent)

REQUIRED INPUT PARAMETERS:

parent - The parent base widget of this compound widget.

RETURN VALUE:

plotwindowObject - The object reference of the compound widget.

KEYWORDS:

COLOR - If set, display the window in "color". This is the default on 24-bit devices.
DEBUG - Set this keyword to turn traceback error handling on in the error handling code.
EVENT_PRO - The event procedure for the widget. Required for events to be generated. Otherwise, all events are handled internally.
LANDSCAPE - If set, display the page in landscape mode. Otherwise the page is display in portrait mode.
PAGESIZE - The "pagesize" of the widget. Possible values are: "LETTER", "LEDGER", "LEGAL", "A4", and "DISPLAY".
UNITS - A string indicating INCHES or CENTIMETER units. DEVICE units represented by a null string, "".
UVALUE - A user value for the caller of this program.
WINDOWCOLOR - A three-element array specifying the background window color (RGB).
WINDOWSIZE - The size of the "window" on the page. A four-element array of normalized coordinates in the form [x0, y0, x1, y1].

EVENT STRUCTURE:

The event structure that is returned from this compound widget is defined like this,
where the sizes and offsets locate the target "window" on the page in normalized units:

event = {ID:0L, TOP:0L, HANDLER:0L, XSize:0.0, YSize:0.0, XOffset:0.0, YOffset:0.0}

MODIFICATIONS:

Written by David Fanning, 31 January 2000.
Fixed a small bug that prevented it working on Macintosh computers. 26 Sept 2000. DWF.
Added a "DISPLAY" page size, so the program can be used to position
plots and other graphics in a display window. The "page area" will
have the same aspect ratio is the current graphics window. 17 March 2001. DWF.
Changed some of the tolerances for "closeness" from 0.1 to 0.025 to allow smaller
sizing for colorbars and other small objects. 6 July 2005. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fsc_plotwindow.pro)

FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE

NAME:
FSC_PSCONFIG__DEFINE

PURPOSE:

The purpose of this program is to implement an object that
can keep track of--and allow the user to change--the current
configuration of the PostScript device.

AUTHOR:

CATEGORY:

General programming.

DOCUMENTATION:

Complete documentation for the FSC_PSCONFIG object, including
keyword and method descriptions, and example programs using the object
can be found on the Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming web page:

http://www.idlcoyote.com/programs/docs/fsc_psconfig.html

Or, if you would prefer, you can download a self-contained PDF file:

http://www.idlcoyote.com/programs/docs/fsc_psconfig.pdf

KEYWORDS:

Any keyword accepted by the FSC_PSCONFIG object can be used with
this program. Here are a few of the most popular keywords.

Bits_per_Pixel - The number of image bits saved for each image pixel: 2, 4, or 8. The default is 8.
Color - Set this keyword to select Color PostScript output. Turned on by default.
Decomposed - Set this keyword to 0 to select indexed color and to 1 to select decomposed color.
DefaultSetup - Set this keyword to the "name" of a default style. Current styles (you can easily
create and add your own to the source code) are the following:

"System (Portrait)" - The normal "default" system set-up. Also, "System".
"System (Landscape)" - The normal "default" landscape system set-up.
"Centered (Portrait)" - The window centered on the page. Also, "Center" or "Centered".
"Centered (Landscape)" - The window centered on the landscape page. Also, "Landscape".
"Square (Portrait)" - A square plot, centered on the page.
"Square (Landscape)" - A square plot, centered on the landscape page.
"Figure (Small)" - A small encapsulated figure size, centered on page. Also, "Encapsulated" or "Encapsulate".
"Figure (Large)" - A larger encapsulated figure size, centered on page. Also, "Figure".
"Color (Portrait)" - A "centered" plot, with color turned on. Also, "Color".
"Color (Landscape)" - A "centered" landscape plot, with color turned on.

Directory - Set this keyword to the name of the starting directory. The current directory is used by default.
Encapsulated - Set this keyword to select Encapsulated PostScript output. Turned off by default.
European - This keyword has been depreciated in favor of METRIC.
Filename - Set thie keyword to the name of the PostScript file. The default is "idl.ps".
Inches - Set this keyword to indicate sizes and offsets are in inches as opposed to centimeters. Set by Metric keyword by default.
Landscape - Set this keyword to select Landscape page output. Portrait page output is the default.
Language_Level - Set this keyword to select the Language Level interpreter. Default is 1.
Metric - Set this keyword to indicate metric mode (i.e., A4 page and centimeter units). Turned off by default.
PageType - Set this keyword to the "type" of page. Possible values are:
"Letter" - 8.5 by 11 inches. (Default, unless the Metric keyword is set.)
"Legal" - 8.5 by 14 inches.
"Ledger" - 11 by 17 inches.
"A4" - 21.0 by 29.7 centimeters. (Default, if the Metric keyword is set.)
XOffset - Set this keyword to the X Offset. Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults. (Note: offset calculated from lower-left corner of page.)
XSize - Set this keyword to the X size of the PostScript "window". Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults.
YOffset - Set this keyword to the Y Offset. Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults. (Note: offset calculated from lower-left corner of page.)
YSize - Set this keyword to the Y size of the PostScript "window". Uses "System (Portrait)" defaults.

In addition, the following keywords can be used:

CANCEL -- An output keyword that will be set to 1 if the user
chooses the Cancel button on the form. It will be 0 otherwise.

FONTINFO -- Set this keyword is you wish to have font information
appear on the form. The default is to not include font information.

FONTTYPE -- Set this keyword to a named variable that will indicate
the user's preference for font type. Values will be -1 (Hershey fonts),
0 (hardware fonts), and 1 (true-type fonts). This keyword will always
return -1 unless the FONTINFO keyword has also been set.

GROUP_LEADER -- Set this keyword to a widget identifier of the widget
you wish to be a group leader for this program.

EXAMPLE:

A simple sequence of using the object would look something like this:

psObject = Obj_New("FSC_PSCONFIG")
psObject->GUI
psKeywords = psObject->GetKeywords()
thisDevice = !D.Name
Set_Plot, 'PS'
Device, _Extra=psKeywords
cgImage, image
Device, /Close_File
Set_Plot, thisDevice
Obj_Destroy, psObject

Note that the object can also be called from the PS_CONFIG interface:

psKeywords = PSConfig()

OTHER PROGRAMS NEEDED:

The following programs are required to run this one:

fsc_droplist.pro
fsc_fileselect.pro
fsc_field.pro
fsc_plotwindow

MODIFICATIONS:

Written by David W. Fanning, 31 January 2000.
Added capability to call GUI methods when the current graphics device
doesn't support windows. Device is restored when the GUI exits. 11 May 2000. DWF.
Changed the default value for the Color keyword to 1. 16 May 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug where filename changed when switching Setups. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug when saving setup in Landscape mode. 8 AUG 2000. DWF.
Added the ability to Get and Set the object's name via the SetProperty
and a very abbreviated GetProperty method. Also added a GetName method. 26 SEP 2000. DWF.
Fixed a problem in which the proper configuration was not restored if in Landscape mode. 20 Nov 2000. DWF.
Made a number of modifications at the request of Martin Schultz. 4 Dec 2000. DWF.
Fixed a bug when setting file and directory names with the SetProperty method. 18 Dec 2000. DWF.
Fixed a small problem in initializing the page size properly. 3 Jan 2001. DWF.
Corrected a problem that resulted from a change to FSC_DROPLIST. 6 Jan 2001. DWF.
Added the ability to restore the font type instead of always reverting to !P.Font. 7 Jan 2001. DWF.
Increased the length of the file/directory name fields. 7 Jan 2001. DWF.
Fixed another problem with Landscape mode interacting with A4 paper size. 7 Jan 2001. DWF.
Seems I only half fixed the previous problem. :-( 26 April 2001. DWF.
Forgot to update program to reflect change in FSC_FIELD. Fixed 26 April 2001. DWF.
Changed BOOKMAN keyword to BKMAN to avoid conflict with BOOKSTYLE keyword. 26 April 2001. DWF.
Modified the System Defaults to say "None" if none is used. Improved documentation. 10 September 2001. DWF.
Added the ability to specify a filename at the same time as a Default Setup. 10 September 2001. DWF.
Fixed a small problem in not setting new page sizes appropriately. 22 May 2002. DWF.
Fixed a problem that occurred when the Accept button was not named "Accept". 6 May 2003.DWF.
Whoops! I was a bit overly agressive on that last fix. :-( 17 July 2003. DWF.
Fixed a problem with setting page types when using the DEFAULTSETUP keyword. 31 July 2003. DWF.
Fixed a problem with turning encapsulation on in the GUI. Renamed ENCAPSULATE keyword ENCAPSULATED
to avoid obvious errors. 31 July 2003. DWF.
Removed obsolete STR_SEP and replaced with STRSPLIT. 27 Oct 2004. DWF.
Now honoring EUROPEAN keyword when setting system default setups in the INIT method. 12 Nov 2004. DWF.
Added CMYK output option 24 August 2007. Assumes LANGUAGE_LEVEL=2 printer. L. Anderson.
Fixed a problem with the filename on WINDOWS computers coming back with forward slashes instead of
backward slashes. 20 May 2008. DWF.
Modified the program to return as the default, ISOLATIN1=1. 18 July 2008. DWF.
Fixed a problem with filenames when a DEFAULTSETUP was used with it. 12 Nov 2008. DWF.
Changed default window size when LANDSCAPE keyword is set. 10 April 2009. DWF.
Changed the default window size for PORTRAIT mode to be a bit larger. 10 April 2009. DWF.
Updated for IDL 7.1 and 24-bit color PostScript support. 24 May 2009. DWF.
Added PAGETYPE field to returned structure to allow PostScript page type to be determined. 8 August 2009. DWF.
Fixed a problem with 24-bit color support that allowed only IDL 7 versions to work correctly. 20 Sept 2009. DWF.
Added a LANGUAGE_LEVEL keyword. 13 Dec 2010. DWF.
Added the FONTYPE value to the keyword return structure. 14 Dec 2010. DWF.
Modified the return structure to turn landscape mode off and set offsets to zero if in
encapsulated mode. 19 Feb 2011. DWF.
Changes to handle inability to create raster files from PS encapsulated files in
landscape mode. Also removed changes of 19 Feb 2011 as no longer needed. 26 Aug 2011. DWF.
The PAGETYPE was not getting set properly in the return keywords when the Metric
option was selected on the GUI. 12 October 2011. DWF.
The program now remembers the last directory you used and will start in that
directory, unless told otherwise. 26 Oct 2011. DWF.
Parsing of full filename failing. Fixed 27 Oct 2011. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fsc_psconfig__define.pro)

FSC_PS_SETUP__DEFINE

 NAME:
   FSC_PS_SETUP__DEFINE

 PURPOSE:

    The purpose of FSC_PS_SETUP__DEFINE is to define a structure that is
    use with PS_START and PS_END, programs that make it easy to set-up
    for and close a PostScript file. The programs work in close conjunction
    with PSCONFIG, another program from the Coyote Library.

 AUTHOR:

   FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING
   David Fanning, Ph.D.
   1645 Sheely Drive
   Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
   Phone: 970-221-0438
   E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
   Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com/

 CATEGORY:

       Graphics, File Output, PostScript

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

       Used internally in PS_START and PS_END.

 COMMON BLOCKS:

       _$FSC_PS_START_   Contains the PS_STRUCT structure for communication between
                         PS_START and PS_END.

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

       Separated from PS_START file, 7 April 2009, by David W. Fanning.
       Added PAGETYPE field to structure. 8 August 2009. DWF.
       Changes to handle inability to create raster files from PS encapsulated files in
           landscape mode. Added "encapsulated" field to structure. 26 Aug 2011. DWF.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/fsc_ps_setup__define.pro)

FTAB_DELROW

 NAME:
       FTAB_DELROW
 PURPOSE:
       Delete rows of data from a FITS ASCII or binary table extension

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ftab_delrow, filename, rows, EXTEN_NO =, NEWFILE = ]

 INPUTS-OUPUTS
       filename - scalar string giving name of the FITS file containing an
               ASCII or binary table extension.

       rows  -  scalar or vector, specifying the row numbers to delete
               First row has index 0.   If a vector, it will be sorted and
               duplicates will be removed

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
       EXTEN_NO - scalar integer specifying which extension number to process
               Default is to process the first extension
       NEWFILE - scalar string specifying the name of the new output FITS file
               FTAB_DELROW will prompt for this parameter if not supplied

 EXAMPLE:
       Compress the first extension of a FITS file 'test.fits' to include
       only non-negative values in the 'FLUX' column

       ftab_ext,'test.fits','flux',flux       ;Obtain original flux vector
       bad = where(flux lt 0)                 ;Find negative fluxes
       ftab_delrow,'test.fits',bad,new='test1.fits'  ;Delete specified rows

 RESTRICTIONS:
       Does not work for variable length binary tables

 PROCEDURES USED:
       FITS_CLOSE, FITS_OPEN, FITS_READ, FITS_WRITE, FTDELROW, TBDELROW

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written   W. Landsman        STX Co.     August, 1997
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Use COPY_LUN if V5.6 or later     W. Landsman   February 2003
       Assume since V5.6, COPY_LUN available   W. Landsman   Sep 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftab_delrow.pro)

FTAB_EXT

 NAME:
       FTAB_EXT
 PURPOSE:
       Routine to extract columns from a FITS (binary or ASCII) table.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FTAB_EXT, name_or_fcb, columns, v1, [v2,..,v9, ROWS=, EXTEN_NO= ]
 INPUTS:
       name_or_fcb - either a scalar string giving the name of a FITS file
               containing a (binary or ASCII) table, or an IDL structure
               containing as file control block (FCB) returned by FITS_OPEN
               If FTAB_EXT is to be called repeatedly on the same file, then
               it is quicker to first open the file with FITS_OPEN, and then
               pass the FCB structure to FTAB_EXT
       columns - table columns to extract.  Can be either
               (1) String with names separated by commas
               (2) Scalar or vector of column numbers

 OUTPUTS:
       v1,...,v30 - values for the columns.   Up to 30 columns can be extracted

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       ROWS -  scalar or vector giving row number(s) to extract
               Row numbers start at 0.  If not supplied or set to
               -1 then values for all rows are returned
       EXTEN_NO - Extension number to process.   If not set, then data is
               extracted from the first extension in the file (EXTEN_NO=1)

 EXAMPLES:
       Read wavelength and flux vectors from the first extension of a
       FITS file, 'spec.fit'.   Using FTAB_HELP,'spec.fit' we find that this
       information is in columns named 'WAVELENGTH' and 'FLUX' (in columns 1
       and 2).   To read the data

       IDL> ftab_ext,'spec.fit','wavelength,flux',w,f
               or
       IDL> ftab_ext,'spec.fit',[1,2],w,f

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       FITS_READ, FITS_CLOSE, FTINFO, FTGET(), TBINFO, TBGET()
 HISTORY:
       version 1        W.   Landsman         August 1997
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Improve speed processing binary tables  W. Landsman   March 2000
       Use new FTINFO calling sequence  W. Landsman   May 2000
       Don't call fits_close if fcb supplied W. Landsman May 2001
       Use STRSPLIT to parse column string  W. Landsman July 2002
       Cleanup pointers in TBINFO structure  W. Landsman November 2003
       Avoid EXECUTE() if V6.1 or later  W. Landsamn   December 2006
       Assume since V6.1  W. Landsman   June 2009
       Read up to 30 columns  W.L. Aug 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftab_ext.pro)

FTAB_HELP

 NAME:
       FTAB_HELP
 PURPOSE:
       Describe the columns of a FITS binary or ASCII table extension(s).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FTAB_HELP, filename, [ EXTEN_No = , TEXTOUT= ]
               or
       FTAB_HELP, fcb, [EXTEN_No=, TEXTOUT= ]

 INPUTS:
       filename - scalar string giving name of the FITS file.
       fcb - FITS control block returned by a previous call to FITS_OPEN

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
       EXTEN_NO - integer scalar or vector specifying which FITS extensions
               to display.    Default is to display all FITS extension.
       TEXTOUT - scalar number (0-7) or string (file name) determining
               output device (see TEXTOPEN).  Default is TEXTOUT=1, output
               to the user's terminal

 EXAMPLE:
       Describe the columns in the second and fourth extensions of a FITS
       file spec.fits and write the results to a file 'spec24.lis'

       IDL> ftab_help,'spec.fits',exten=[2,4],t='spec24.lis'

 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
        Uses the non-standard system variables !TEXTOUT and !TEXTUNIT
       which must be defined (e.g. with ASTROLIB) before compilation
 NOTES:
       The behavior of FTAB_HELP was changed in August 2005 to display
       all extensions by default, rather than just the first extension
 PROCEDURES USED:
       FITS_READ, FITS_CLOSE, FITS_OPEN, FTHELP, TBHELP, TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE
 HISTORY:
       version 1  W. Landsman    August 1997
       Corrected documentation W. Landsman   September 1997
       Don't call fits_close if fcb supplied W. Landsman May 2001
       Default now is to display all extensions, EXTEN keyword can now
        be a vector   W. Landsman Aug 2005

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftab_help.pro)

FTAB_PRINT

 NAME:
       FTAB_PRINT
 PURPOSE:
       Print the contents of a FITS (binary or ASCII) table extension.
 EXPLANATION:
       User can specify which rows or columns to print

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FTAB_PRINT, filename, columns, rows,
                   [ TEXTOUT=, FMT=, EXTEN_NO= NUM_HEADER_LINES ]

 INPUTS:
       filename - scalar string giving name of a FITS file containing a
               binary or ASCII table
       columns - string giving column names, or vector giving
               column numbers (beginning with 1).  If a string
               supplied then column names should be separated by comma's.
               if not supplied, then all columns are printed.
               If set to '*' then all columns are printed in table format
               (1 row per line, binary tables only).
       rows - (optional) vector of row numbers to print (beginning with 0).
               If not supplied or set to scalar, -1, then all rows
               are printed.
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       EXTEN_NO - Extension number to read.   If not set, then the first
               extension is printed (EXTEN_NO=1)
       FMT = Format string for print display (binary tables only).   If not
               supplied, then any formats in the TDISP keyword fields will be
               used, otherwise IDL default formats.    For ASCII tables, the
               format used is always as stored in the FITS table.
       NUM_HEADER_LINES - Number of lines to display the column headers (default
               = 1).  By setting NUM_HEADER_LINES to an integer larger than 1,
               one can avoid truncation of the headers.   In addition, setting
               NUM_HEADER_LINES will display commented lines indicating
               a FORMAT for reading the data, and a suggested call to
              readfmt.pro.    Works for binary tables only
       NVAL_PER_LINE - The maximum number of values displayed from a
               multivalued column when printing in table format.   Default = 6
       TEXTOUT - scalar number (0-7) or string (file name) determining
               output device (see TEXTOPEN).  Default is TEXTOUT=1, output
               to the user's terminal
 EXAMPLE:
       (1) Print all rows of the first 5 columns of the first extension of the
       file 'wfpc.fits'
               IDL> ftab_print,'vizier.fits',indgen(5)+1

       (2) Print all columns of the first row to a file 'vizier.dat' in
       'table' format
               IDL> ftab_print,'vizier.fits',t='vizier.dat','*',0
 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       Uses the non-standard system variables !TEXTOUT and !TEXTUNIT
       which must be defined (e.g. with ASTROLIB) prior to compilation.
 PROCEDURES USED:
       FITS_CLOSE, FITS_OPEN, FITS_READ, FTPRINT, TBPRINT
 HISTORY:
       version 1  W. Landsman    August 1997
       Check whether data exists   W. Landsman    Feb 2007
       Check whether extension exists  W. Landsman  Mar 2010
       Added NUM_HEADER_LINES, NVAL_PER_LINE keywords for binary tables
                  W. Landsman Apr 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftab_print.pro)

FTADDCOL

 NAME:
      FTADDCOL
 PURPOSE:
      Routine to add a field to a FITS ASCII table

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      ftaddcol, h, tab, name, idltype, [ tform, tunit, tscal, tzero, tnull ]

 INPUTS:
      h - FITS table header.  It will be updated as appropriate
      tab - FITS table array.  Number of columns will be increased if
               neccessary.
      name - field name, scalar string
      idltype - idl data type (as returned by SIZE function) for field,
               For string data (type=7) use minus the string length.

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       tform - format specification 'qww.dd' where q = A, I, E, or D
       tunit - string giving physical units for the column.
       tscal - scale factor
       tzero - zero point for field
       tnull - null value for field

       Use '' as the value of tform,tunit,tscal,tzero,tnull if you want
       the default or no specification of them in the table header.

 OUTPUTS:
       h,tab - updated to allow new column of data

 PROCEDURES USED:
       FTINFO, FTSIZE, GETTOK(), SXADDPAR
 HISTORY:
       version 1  D. Lindler   July, 1987
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Updated call to new FTINFO   W. Landsman   April 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftaddcol.pro)

FTCREATE

 NAME:
       FTCREATE
 PURPOSE:
       Create a new (blank) FITS ASCII table and header with specified size.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ftcreate, maxcols, maxrows, h, tab

 INPUTS:
       maxcols - number of character columns allocated, integer scalar
       maxrows - maximum number of rows allocated, integer scalar

 OUTPUTS:
       h - minimal FITS Table extension header, string array
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       tab - empty table, byte array
 HISTORY:
       version 1  D. Lindler   July. 87
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Make table creation optional, allow 1 row table, add comments to
       required FITS keywords    W. Landsman    October 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftcreate.pro)

FTDELCOL

 NAME:
	FTDELCOL
 PURPOSE:
	Delete a column of data from a FITS table

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	ftdelcol, h, tab, name

 INPUTS-OUPUTS
	h,tab - FITS table header and data array.  H and TAB will
		be updated with the specified column deleted

 INPUTS:
	name - Either (1) a string giving the name of the column to delete
		or (2) a scalar giving the column number to delete

 EXAMPLE:
	Suppose it has been determined that the F7.2 format used for a field
	FLUX in a FITS table is insufficient.  The old column must first be
	deleted before a new column can be written with a new format.

	flux = FTGET(h,tab,'FLUX')       ;Save the existing values
	FTDELCOL,h,tab,'FLUX'            ;Delete the existing column
	FTADDCOL,h,tab,'FLUX',8,'F9.2'   ;Create a new column with larger format
	FTPUT,h,tab,'FLUX',0,flux        ;Put back the original values

 REVISION HISTORY:
	Written   W. Landsman        STX Co.     August, 1988
	Adapted for IDL Version 2, J. Isensee, July, 1990
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Updated call to new FTINFO   W. Landsman  May 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftdelcol.pro)

FTDELROW

 NAME:
       FTDELROW
 PURPOSE:
       Delete a row of data from a FITS table

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ftdelrow, h, tab, rows

 INPUTS-OUPUTS
       h,tab - FITS table header and data array.  H and TAB will
               be updated on output with the specified row(s) deleted.
       rows  -  scalar or vector, specifying the row numbers to delete
               This vector will be sorted and duplicates removed by FTDELROW

 EXAMPLE:
       Compress a table to include only non-negative flux values

       flux = FTGET(h,tab,'FLUX')       ;Obtain original flux vector
       bad = where(flux lt 0)           ;Find negative fluxes
       FTDELROW,h,tab,bad               ;Delete rows with negative fluxes

 PROCEDURE:
       Specified rows are deleted from the data array, TAB.  The NAXIS2
       keyword in the header is updated.

 PROCEDURES USED:
       sxaddpar

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written   W. Landsman        STX Co.     August, 1988
       Checked for IDL Version 2, J. Isensee, July, 1990
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Assume since V5.4, use BREAK instead of GOTO  W. Landsman April 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftdelrow.pro)

FTGET

 NAME:
      FTGET
 PURPOSE:
      Function to return value(s) from specified column in a FITS ASCII table

 CALLING SEQUENCE
      values = FTGET( h, tab, field, [ rows, nulls ] )
                    or
      values = FTGET( ft_str, tab, field. [rows, nulls]
 INPUTS:
      h - FITS ASCII extension header (e.g. as returned by FITS_READ)
                            or
      ft_str - FITS table structure extracted from FITS header by FTINFO
                Use of the IDL structure will improve processing speed
      tab - FITS ASCII table array (e.g. as returned by FITS_READ)
      field - field name or number

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
      rows -  scalar or vector giving row number(s)
               Row numbers start at 0.  If not supplied or set to
               -1 then values for all rows are returned

 OUTPUTS:
       the values for the row are returned as the function value.
       Null values are set to 0 or blanks for strings.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       nulls - null value flag of same length as the returned data.
               It is set to 1 at null value positions and 0 elsewhere.
               If supplied then the optional input, rows, must also
               be supplied.

 EXAMPLE:
       Read the columns labeled 'WAVELENGTH' and 'FLUX' from the second
       (ASCII table) extension of a FITS file 'spectra.fit'

       IDL> fits_read,'spectra.fit',tab,htab,exten=2     ;Read 2nd extension
       IDL> w = ftget( htab, tab,'wavelength')      ;Wavelength vector
       IDL> f = ftget( htab, tab,'flux')            ;Flux vector

       Slightly more efficient would be to first call FTINFO
       IDL> ftinfo, htab, ft_str                     ;Extract structure
       IDL> w = ftget(ft_str, tab,'wavelength')      ;Wavelength vector
       IDL> f = ftget(ft_str, tab,'flux')            ;Flux vector

 NOTES:
       (1) Use the higher-level procedure FTAB_EXT to extract vectors
               directly from the FITS file.
       (2) Use FTAB_HELP or FTHELP to determine the columns in a particular
               ASCII table.
 HISTORY:
       coded by D. Lindler  July, 1987
       Always check for null values    W. Landsman          August 1990
       More informative error message  W. Landsman          Feb. 1996
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Allow structure rather than FITS header  W. Landsman   May 2000
       No case sensitivity in TTYPE name      W. Landsman   February 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftget.pro)

FTHELP

 NAME:
       FTHELP
 PURPOSE:
       Routine to print a description of a FITS ASCII table extension

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FTHELP, H, [ TEXTOUT = ]

 INPUTS:
       H - FITS header for ASCII table extension, string array

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD
       TEXTOUT - scalar number (0-7) or string (file name) determining
               output device (see TEXTOPEN).  Default is TEXTOUT=1, output
               to the user's terminal

 NOTES:
       FTHELP checks that the keyword XTENSION  equals 'TABLE' in the FITS
               header.

 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       Uses the non-standard system variables !TEXTOUT and !TEXTUNIT
       which must be defined (e.g. with ASTROLIB) prior to compilation.
 PROCEDURES USED:
       REMCHAR, SXPAR(), TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE, ZPARCHECK

 HISTORY:
       version 1  W. Landsman  Jan. 1988
       Add TEXTOUT option, cleaner format  W. Landsman   September 1991
       TTYPE value can be longer than 8 chars,  W. Landsman  August 1995
       Remove calls to !ERR, some vectorization  W. Landsman  February 2000
       Slightly more compact display  W. Landsman  August 2005

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/fthelp.pro)

FTHMOD

 NAME:
       FTHMOD
 PURPOSE:
       Procedure to modify header information for a specified field
       in a FITS table.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       fthmod, h, field, parameter, value

 INPUT:
       h - FITS header for the table
       field - field name or number
       parameter - string name of the parameter to modify.  Choices
               include:
                       TTYPE - field name
                       TUNIT - physical units for field (eg. 'ANGSTROMS')
                       TNULL - null value (string) for field, (eg. '***')
                       TFORM - format specification for the field
                       TSCAL - scale factor
                       TZERO - zero offset
               User should be aware that the validity of the change is
               not checked.  Unless you really know what you are doing,
               this routine should only be used to change field names,
               units, or another user specified parameter.
       value - new value for the parameter.  Refer to the FITS table
               standards documentation for valid values.

 EXAMPLE:
      Change the units for a field name "FLUX" to "Janskys" in a FITS table
        header,h

      IDL> FTHMOD, h, 'FLUX', 'TUNIT','Janskys'
 METHOD:
       The header keyword <parameter><field number> is modified
       with the new value.
 HISTORY:
       version 1, D. Lindler  July 1987
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Major rewrite to use new FTINFO call   W. Landsman   May 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/fthmod.pro)

FTINFO

 NAME:
       FTINFO
 PURPOSE:
       Return an informational structure from a FITS ASCII table header.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ftinfo,h,ft_str, [Count = ]

 INPUTS:
       h - FITS ASCII table header, string array

 OUTPUTS:
       ft_str - IDL structure with extracted info from the FITS ASCII table
                header.   Tags include
        .tbcol - starting column position in bytes
        .width - width of the field in bytes
        .idltype - idltype of field.
                       7 - string, 4- real*4, 3-integer, 5-real*8
        .tunit - string unit numbers
        .tscal - scale factor
        .tzero - zero point for field
        .tnull - null value for the field
        .tform - format for the field
        .ttype - field name

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       Count - Integer scalar giving number of fields in the table
 PROCEDURES USED:
       GETTOK(), SXPAR()
 NOTES:
       This procedure underwent a major revision in May 2000, and **THE
       NEW CALLING SEQUENCE IS INCOMPATIBLE WITH THE OLD ONE **
 HISTORY:
       D. Lindler  July, 1987
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Major rewrite, return structure   W. Landsman   April 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftinfo.pro)

FTKEEPROW

 NAME:
	FTKEEPROW
 PURPOSE:
	Subscripts (and reorders) a FITS table.  A companion piece to FTDELROW.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	ftkeeprow, h, tab, subs

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
	h    = FITS table header array
	tab  = FITS table data array
	subs = subscript array of FITS table rows.  Works like any other IDL
		subscript array (0 based, of course).

 OUTPUT PARAMETERS:
	h and tab are modified

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
	Written by R. S. Hill, ST Sys. Corp., 2 May 1991.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftkeeprow.pro)

FTPRINT

  NAME:
      FTPRINT
  PURPOSE:
       Procedure to print specified columns and rows of a FITS table

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FTPRINT, h, tab, columns, [ rows, TEXTOUT = ]

 INPUTS:
       h - Fits header for table, string array
       tab - table array
       columns - string giving column names, or vector giving
               column numbers (beginning with 1).  If string
               supplied then column names should be separated by comma's.
       rows - (optional) vector of row numbers to print.  If
               not supplied or set to scalar, -1, then all rows
               are printed.

 OUTPUTS:
       None

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       TEXTOUT controls the output device; see the procedure TEXTOPEN

 SYSTEM VARIABLES:
       Uses nonstandard system variables !TEXTOUT and !TEXTOPEN
       These will be defined (using ASTROLIB) if not already present.
       Set !TEXTOUT = 3 to direct output to a disk file.   The system
       variable is overriden by the value of the keyword TEXTOUT

 EXAMPLES:

       ftprint,h,tab,'STAR ID,RA,DEC'    ;print id,ra,dec for all stars
       ftprint,h,tab,[2,3,4],indgen(100) ;print columns 2-4 for
                                         ;first 100 stars
       ftprint,h,tab,text="stars.dat"    ;Convert entire FITS table to
                                         ;an ASCII file named STARS.DAT

 PROCEDURES USED:
       FTSIZE, FTINFO, TEXTOPEN, TEXTCLOSE

 RESTRICTIONS:
       (1) Program does not check whether output length exceeds output
               device capacity (e.g. 80 or 132).
       (2) Column heading may be truncated to fit in space defined by
               the FORMAT specified for the column
       (3) Program does not check for null values

 HISTORY:
       version 1  D. Lindler Feb. 1987
       Accept undefined values of rows, columns   W. Landsman August 1997
       New FTINFO calling sequence    W. Landsman   May 2000
       Parse scalar string with STRSPLIT   W. Landsman  July 2002
       Fix format display of row number  W. Landsman March 2003
       Fix format display of row number again  W. Landsman May 2003

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftprint.pro)

FTPUT

 NAME:
       FTPUT
 PURPOSE:
       Procedure to add or update a field in an FITS ASCII table
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FTPUT, htab, tab, field, row, values, [ nulls ]

 INPUTS:
       htab - FITS ASCII table header string array
       tab - FITS ASCII table array (e.g. as read by READFITS)
       field - string field name or integer field number
       row -  either a non-negative integer scalar giving starting row to
               update, or a non-negative integer vector specifying rows to
               update.   FTPUT will append a new row to a table if the value
               of 'row' exceeds the number of rows in the tab array
       values - value(s) to add or update.   If row is a vector
               then values must contain the same number of elements.

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       nulls - null value flag of same length as values.
               It should be set to 1 at null value positions
               and 0 elsewhere.

 OUTPUTS:
       htab,tab will be updated as specified.

 EXAMPLE:
       One has a NAME and RA  and Dec vectors for 500 stars with formats A6,
       F9.5 and F9.5 respectively.   Write this information to an ASCII table
       named 'star.fits'.

       IDL> FTCREATE,24,500,h,tab       ;Create table header and (empty) data
       IDL> FTADDCOL,h,tab,'RA',8,'F9.5','DEGREES'   ;Explicity define the
       IDL> FTADDCOL,h,tab,'DEC',8,'F9.5','DEGREES'  ;RA and Dec columns
       IDL> FTPUT,h,tab,'RA',0,ra       ;Insert RA vector into table
       IDL> FTPUT,h,tab,'DEC',0,dec       ;Insert DEC vector into table
       IDL> FTPUT, h,tab, 'NAME',0,name   ;Insert NAME vector with default
       IDL> WRITEFITS,'stars.fits',tab,h ;Write to a file

      Note that (1) explicit formatting has been supplied for the (numeric)
      RA and Dec vectors, but was not needed for the NAME vector, (2) A width
      of 24 was supplied in FTCREATE based on the expected formats (6+9+9),
      though the FT* will adjust this value as necessary, and (3) WRITEFITS
      will create a minimal primary header
 NOTES:
       (1) If the specified field is not already in the table, then FTPUT will
       create a new column for that field using default formatting.   However,
        FTADDCOL should be called prior to FTPUT for explicit formatting.

 PROCEDURES CALLED
       FTADDCOL, FTINFO, FTSIZE, SXADDPAR, SXPAR()
 HISTORY:
       version 1  D. Lindler July, 1987
       Allow E format         W. Landsman          March 1992
       Write in F format if E format will overflow    April 1994
       Update documentation W. Landsman   January 1996
       Allow 1 element vector  W. Landsman   March 1996
       Adjust string length to maximum of input string array   June 1997
       Work for more than 32767 elements August 1997
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Updated call to the new FTINFO   W. Landsman   May 2000
       Fix case where header does not have any columns yet W.Landsman Sep 2002
       Assume since V5.2, omit fstring() call  W. Landsman April 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftput.pro)

FTSIZE

 NAME:
       FTSIZE
 PURPOSE:
       Procedure to return the size of a FITS ASCII table.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ftsize,h,tab,ncols,rows,tfields,ncols_all,nrows_all, [ERRMSG = ]

 INPUTS:
       h - FITS ASCII table header, string array
       tab - FITS table array, 2-d byte array

 OUTPUTS:
       ncols - number of characters per row in table
       nrows - number of rows in table
       tfields - number of fields per row
       ncols_all - number of characters/row allocated (size of tab)
       nrows_all - number of rows allocated

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       ERRMSG  = If this keyword is present, then any error messages will be
                 returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                 depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
                 encountered, then a null string is returned.
 HISTORY
       D. Lindler  July, 1987
       Fix for 1-row table,  W. Landsman    HSTX,     June 1994
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added ERRMSG keyword   W. Landsman   May 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftsize.pro)

FTSORT

NAME:
FTSORT
PURPOSE:
Sort a FITS ASCII table according to a specified field

CALLING SEQUENCE:
FTSORT,h,tab,[field, REVERSE = ] ;Sort original table header and array
or
FTSORT,h,tab,hnew,tabnew,[field, REVERSE =] ;Create new sorted header

INPUTS:
H - FITS header (string array)
TAB - FITS table (byte array) associated with H. If less than 4
parameters are supplied, then H and TAB will be updated to
contain the sorted table

OPTIONAL INPUTS:
FIELD - Field name(s) or number(s) used to sort the entire table.
If FIELD is a vector then the first element is used for the
primary sort, the second element is used for the secondary
sort, and so forth. (A secondary sort only takes effect when
values in the primary sort field are equal.) Character fields
are sorted using the ASCII collating sequence. If omitted,
the user will be prompted for the field name.

OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
HNEW,TABNEW - Header and table containing the sorted tables

EXAMPLE:
Sort a FITS ASCII table by the 'DECLINATION' field in descending order
Assume that the table header htab, and array, tab, have already been
read (e.g. with READFITS or FITS_READ):

IDL> FTSORT, htab, tab,'DECLINATION',/REVERSE
OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
REVERSE - If set then the table is sorted in reverse order (maximum
to minimum. If FIELD is a vector, then REVERSE can also be
a vector. For example, REVERSE = [1,0] indicates that the
primary sort should be in descending order, and the secondary
sort should be in ascending order.

EXAMPLE:
SIDE EFFECTS:
A HISTORY record is added to the table header.
REVISION HISTORY:
Written W. Landsman June, 1988
Converted to IDL V5.0 W. Landsman September 1997
New FTINFO calling sequence, added REVERSE keyword, allow secondary sorts
W. Landsman May 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_table/ftsort.pro)

FXADDPAR

 NAME:
       FXADDPAR
 Purpose     :
       Add or modify a parameter in a FITS header array.
 Explanation :
       This version of FXADDPAR will write string values longer than 68
       characters using the FITS continuation convention described at
       http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/docs/heasarc/ofwg/docs/ofwg_recomm/r13.html
 Use         :
       FXADDPAR, HEADER, NAME, VALUE, COMMENT
 Inputs      :
       HEADER  = String array containing FITS header.  The maximum string
                 length must be equal to 80.  If not defined, then FXADDPAR
                 will create an empty FITS header array.

       NAME    = Name of parameter.  If NAME is already in the header the
                 value and possibly comment fields are modified. Otherwise a
                 new record is added to the header.  If NAME is equal to
                 either "COMMENT" or "HISTORY" then the value will be added to
                 the record without replacement.  In this case the comment
                 parameter is ignored.

       VALUE   = Value for parameter.  The value expression must be of the
                 correct type, e.g. integer, floating or string.
                 String values of 'T' or 'F' are considered logical
                 values unless the /NOLOGICAL keyword is set.  If the value is
                 a string and is "long" (more than 69 characters), then it
                 may be continued over more than one line using the OGIP
                 CONTINUE standard.

 Opt. Inputs :
       COMMENT = String field.  The '/' is added by this routine.  Added
                 starting in position 31.  If not supplied, or set equal to ''
                 (the null string), then any previous comment field in the
                 header for that keyword is retained (when found).
 Outputs     :
       HEADER  = Updated header array.
 Opt. Outputs:
       None.
 Keywords    :
       BEFORE  = Keyword string name.  The parameter will be placed before the
                 location of this keyword.  For example, if BEFORE='HISTORY'
                 then the parameter will be placed before the first history
                 location.  This applies only when adding a new keyword;
                 keywords already in the header are kept in the same position.

       AFTER   = Same as BEFORE, but the parameter will be placed after the
                 location of this keyword.  This keyword takes precedence over
                 BEFORE.

       FORMAT  = Specifies FORTRAN-like format for parameter, e.g. "F7.3".  A
                 scalar string should be used.  For complex numbers the format
                 should be defined so that it can be applied separately to the
                 real and imaginary parts.      If not supplied, then the IDL
                 default formatting is used, except that double precision is
                 given a format of G19.12.

       /NOCONTINUE = By default, FXADDPAR will break strings longer than 68
                characters into multiple lines using the continuation
                convention.    If this keyword is set, then the line will
                instead be truncated to 68 characters.    This was the default
                behaviour of FXADDPAR prior to December 1999.

      /NOLOGICAL = If set, then the values 'T' and 'F' are not interpreted as
                logical values, and are simply added without interpretation.

	ERRMSG	 = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		   returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		   depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXADDPAR, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
       DETABIFY(), FXPAR(), FXPARPOS()
 Common      :
       None.
 Restrictions:
       Warning -- Parameters and names are not checked against valid FITS
       parameter names, values and types.

       The required FITS keywords SIMPLE (or XTENSION), BITPIX, NAXIS, NAXIS1,
       NAXIS2, etc., must be entered in order.  The actual values of these
       keywords are not checked for legality and consistency, however.

 Side effects:
       All HISTORY records are inserted in order at the end of the header.

       All COMMENT records are also inserted in order at the end of the
       header, but before the HISTORY records.  The BEFORE and AFTER keywords
       can override this.

       All records with no keyword (blank) are inserted in order at the end of
       the header, but before the COMMENT and HISTORY records.  The BEFORE and
       AFTER keywords can override this.

       All other records are inserted before any of the HISTORY, COMMENT, or
       "blank" records.  The BEFORE and AFTER keywords can override this.

       String values longer than 68 characters will be split into multiple
       lines using the OGIP CONTINUE convention, unless the /NOCONTINUE keyword
       is set.    For a description of the CONTINUE convention see
       http://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov/registry/continue_keyword.html
 Category    :
       Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
       William Thompson, Jan 1992, from SXADDPAR by D. Lindler and J. Isensee.
       Differences include:

               * LOCATION parameter replaced with keywords BEFORE and AFTER.
               * Support for COMMENT and "blank" FITS keywords.
               * Better support for standard FITS formatting of string and
                 complex values.
               * Built-in knowledge of the proper position of required
                 keywords in FITS (although not necessarily SDAS/Geis) primary
                 headers, and in TABLE and BINTABLE extension headers.

       William Thompson, May 1992, fixed bug when extending length of header,
       and new record is COMMENT, HISTORY, or blank.
 Written     :
       William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
       Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
               Incorporated into CDS library.
       Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 5 September 1997
               Fixed bug replacing strings that contain "/" character--it
               interpreted the following characters as a comment.
       Version 3, Craig Markwardt, GSFC,  December 1997
               Allow long values to extend over multiple lines
	Version 4, D. Lindler, March 2000, modified to use capital E instead
		of a lower case e for exponential format.
       Version 4.1 W. Landsman April 2000, make user-supplied format uppercase
       Version 4.2 W. Landsman July 2002, positioning of EXTEND keyword
       Version 5, 23-April-2007, William Thompson, GSFC
       Version 6, 02-Aug-2007, WTT, bug fix for OGIP long lines
       Version 6.1, 10-Feb-2009, W. Landsman, increase default format precision
       Version 6.2  30-Sep-2009, W. Landsman, added /NOLOGICAL keyword
 Version     :
       Version 6.2, 30-Sep-2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxaddpar.pro)

FXBADDCOL

 NAME:
	FXBADDCOL
 PURPOSE     :
	Adds a column to a binary table extension.
 EXPLANATION :
	Modify a basic FITS binary table extension (BINTABLE) header array to
	define a column.
 USE         :
	FXBADDCOL, INDEX, HEADER, ARRAY  [, TTYPE [, COMMENT ]]
 INPUTS      :
	HEADER	= String array containing FITS extension header.
	ARRAY	= IDL variable used to determine the data size and type
		  associated with the column.  If the column is defined as
		  containing variable length arrays, then ARRAY must be of the
		  maximum size to be stored in the column.
 Opt. Inputs :
	TTYPE	= Column label.
	COMMENT = Comment for TTYPE
 Outputs     :
	INDEX	= Index (1-999) of the created column.
	HEADER	= The header is modified to reflect the added column.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	VARIABLE= If set, then the column is defined to contain pointers to
		  variable length arrays in the heap area.
	DCOMPLEX= If set, and ARRAY is complex, with the first dimension being
		  two (real and imaginary parts), then the column is defined as
		  double-precision complex (type "M").     This keyword is
		  only needed prior to IDL Version 4.0, when the double
		  double complex datatype was unavailable in IDL
	BIT	= If passed, and ARRAY is of type byte, then the column is
		  defined as containg bit mask arrays (type "X"), with the
		  value of BIT being equal to the number of mask bits.
	LOGICAL	= If set, and array is of type byte, then the column is defined
		  as containing logical arrays (type "L").
	NO_TDIM	= If set, then the TDIMn keyword is not written out to the
		  header.  No TDIMn keywords are written for columns containing
		  variable length arrays.
	TUNIT	= If passed, then corresponding keyword is added to header.
	TSCAL	= Same.
	TZERO	= Same.
	TNULL	= Same.
	TDISP	= Same.
	TDMIN	= Same.
	TDMAX	= Same.
	TDESC	= Same.
	TCUNI	= Same.
	TROTA	= Same.
	TRPIX	= Same.
	TRVAL	= Same.
	TDELT	= Same.
	ERRMSG	= If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		  returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		  depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		  encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		  use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBADDCOL, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	FXADDPAR, FXPAR
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	Warning: No checking is done of any of the parameters defining the
	values of optional FITS keywords.

	FXBHMAKE must first be called to initialize the header.

	If ARRAY is of type character, then it must be of the maximum length
	expected for this column.  If a character string array, then the
	largest string in the array is used to determine the maximum length.

	The DCOMPLEX keyword is ignored if ARRAY is not double-precision.
	ARRAY must also have a first dimension of two representing the real and
	imaginary parts.

	The BIT and LOGICAL keywords are ignored if ARRAY is not of type byte.
	BIT takes precedence over LOGICAL.

 Side effects:
	If the data array is multidimensional, then a TDIM keyword is added to
	the header, unless either NO_TDIM or VARIABLE is set.

	No TDIMn keywords are written out for bit arrays (format 'X'), since
	the dimensions would refer to bits, not bytes.

 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Jan 1992.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, changed from function to procedure.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, modified to support variable length arrays.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 30 December 1994
		Added keyword TCUNI.
	Version 5, Wayne Landsman, GSFC, 12 Aug 1997
		Recognize double complex IDL datatype
       Version 6, Wayne Landsman, GSFC. C. Yamauchi (ISAS) 23 Feb 2006
               Support 64bit integers
       Version 7, C. Markwardt, GSFC, Allow unsigned integers, which
               have special TSCAL/TZERO values.  Feb 2009
       Version 8,  P.Broos (PSU), Wayne Landsman (GSFC) Mar 2010
               Do *not* force TTYPE* keyword to uppercase
 Version     :
       Version 8, Mar 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbaddcol.pro)

FXBCLOSE

 NAME:
	FXBCLOSE
 Purpose     :
	Close a FITS binary table extension opened for read.
 Explanation :
	Closes a FITS binary table extension that had been opened for read by
	FXBOPEN.
 Use         :
	FXBCLOSE, UNIT
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number of the file.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	None.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	ERRMSG	  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		    returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		    depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		    encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		    use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBCLOSE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	None.
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The file must have been opened with FXBOPEN.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Feb. 1992.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
 Version     :
       Version 3, 23 June 1994
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbclose.pro)

FXBCOLNUM()

 NAME:
	FXBCOLNUM()
 Purpose     :
	Returns a binary table column number.
 Explanation :
	Given a column specified either by number or name, this routine will
	return the appropriate column number.
 Use         :
	Result = FXBCOLNUM( UNIT, COL )
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number corresponding to the file containing the
		  binary table.
	COL	= Column in the binary table, given either as a character
		  string containing a column label (TTYPE), or as a numerical
		  column index starting from column one.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	The result of the function is the number of the column specified, or
	zero if no column is found (when passed by name).
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	ERRMSG	  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		    returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		    depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		    encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		    use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			Result = FXBCOLNUM( ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ... )
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	None.
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The binary table file must have been opened with FXBOPEN.

	If COL is passed as a number, rather than as a name, then it must be
	consistent with the number of columns in the table.

 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	None.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, 2 July 1993.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 2 July 1993.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 29 October 1993.
		Added error message for not finding column by name.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
 Version     :
       Version 4, 23 June 1994
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbcolnum.pro)

FXBCREATE

 NAME:
	FXBCREATE
 Purpose     :
	Open a new binary table at the end of a FITS file.
 Explanation :
	Write a binary table extension header to the end of a disk FITS file,
	and leave it open to receive the data.

	The FITS file is opened, and the pointer is positioned just after the
	last 2880 byte record.  Then the binary header is appended.  Calls to
	FXBWRITE will append the binary data to this file, and then FXBFINISH
	will close the file.

 Use         :
	FXBCREATE, UNIT, FILENAME, HEADER
 Inputs      :
	FILENAME = Name of FITS file to be opened.
	HEADER	 = String array containing the FITS binary table extension
		   header.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	UNIT	 = Logical unit number of the opened file.
       EXTENSION= Extension number of newly created extension.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	ERRMSG	  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		    returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		    depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		    encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		    use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBCREATE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	FXADDPAR, FXBFINDLUN, FXBPARSE, FXFINDEND
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The primary FITS data unit must already be written to a file.  The
	binary table extension header must already be defined (FXBHMAKE), and
	must match the data that will be written to the file.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Jan 1992, based on WRITEFITS by J. Woffard and W. Landsman.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, changed from function to procedure.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, removed all references to temporary files.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 July 1993.
		Fixed bug with variable length arrays.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
	Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 5, Antony Bird, Southampton, 25 June 1997
		Modified to allow very long tables
 Version     :
	Version 5, 25 June 1997
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added EXTENSION parameter, C. Markwardt 1999 Jul 15
       More efficient zeroing of file, C. Markwardt, 26 Feb 2001
       Recompute header size if updating THEAP keyword B. Roukema April 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbcreate.pro)

FXBDIMEN()

 NAME:
     FXBDIMEN()

 PURPOSE:
      Returns the dimensions for a column in a FITS binary table.

 Explanation : This procedure returns the dimensions associated with a column
               in a binary table opened for read with the command FXBOPEN.

 Use         : Result = FXBDIMEN(UNIT,COL)

 Inputs      : UNIT    = Logical unit number returned by FXBOPEN routine.
                         Must be a scalar integer.

               COL     = Column in the binary table to read data from, either
                         as a character string containing a column label
                         (TTYPE), or as a numerical column index starting from
                         column one.

 Opt. Inputs : None.

 Outputs     : The result of the function is an array containing the
               dimensions for the specified column in the FITS binary table
               that UNIT points to.

 Opt. Outputs: None.

 Keywords :    ERRMSG  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will
                         be returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                         depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no
                         errors are encountered, then a null string is
                         returned.  In order to use this feature, ERRMSG must
                         be defined first, e.g.

                               ERRMSG = ''
                               Result = FXBDIMEN( ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ... )
                               IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       : FXBCOLNUM, FXBFINDLUN

 Common      : Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
               information.

 Restrictions: None.

 Side effects: The dimensions will be returned whether or not the table is
               still open or not.

               If UNIT does not point to a binary table, then 0 is returned.

               If UNIT is an undefined variable, then 0 is returned.

 Category    : Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.

 Prev. Hist. : None.

 Written     : William Thompson, GSFC, 4 March 1994.

 Modified    : Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 4 March 1994.
               Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
                       Added ERRMSG keyword.
               Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
                       Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.

 Version     : Version 3, 23 June 1994
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbdimen.pro)

FXBFIND

 NAME:
	FXBFIND
 Purpose     :
	Find column keywords in a FITS binary table header.
 Explanation :
	Finds the value of a column keyword for all the columns in the binary
	table for which it is set.  For example,

		FXBFIND, UNIT, 'TTYPE', COLUMNS, VALUES, N_FOUND

	Would find all instances of the keywords TTYPE1, TTYPE2, etc.  The
	array COLUMNS would contain the column numbers for which a TTYPEn
	keyword was found, and VALUES would contain the values.  N_FOUND would
	contain the total number of instances found.

 Use         :
	FXBFIND, [UNIT or HEADER], KEYWORD, COLUMNS, VALUES, N_FOUND
		[, DEFAULT ]
 Inputs      :
	Either UNIT or HEADER must be passed.

	UNIT	= Logical unit number of file opened by FXBOPEN.
	HEADER	= FITS binary table header.
	KEYWORD	= Prefix to a series of FITS binary table column keywords.  The
		  keywords to be searched for are formed by combining this
		  prefix with the numbers 1 through the value of TFIELDS in the
		  header.
 Opt. Inputs :
	DEFAULT	= Default value to use for any column keywords that aren't
		  found.  If passed, then COLUMNS and VALUES will contain
		  entries for every column.  Otherwise, COLUMNS and VALUES only
		  contain entries for columns where values were found.
 Outputs     :
	COLUMNS	= Array containing the column numbers for which values of the
		  requested keyword series were found.
	VALUES	= Array containing the found values.
	N_FOUND	= Number of values found.  The value of this parameter is
		  unaffected by whether or not DEFAULT is passed.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Output Keywords    :
      COMMENTS = Comments associated with each keyword, if any
 Calls       :
	FXBFINDLUN, FXPAR
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	If UNIT is passed, then the file must have been opened with FXBOPEN.
	If HEADER is passed, then it must be a legal FITS binary table header.

	The type of DEFAULT must be consistent with the values of the requested
	keywords, i.e. both most be either of string or numerical type.

	The KEYWORD prefix must not have more than five characters to leave
	room for the three digits allowed for the column numbers.

 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Feb. 1992.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
       Vectorized implementation improves performance, CM 18 Nov 1999
       Added COMMENTS keyword CM Nov 2003
       Remove use of obsolete !ERR system variable W. Landsman April 2010
       Fix error introduced April 2010  W. Landsman
 Version     :
	Version 3, April 2010.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbfind.pro)

FXBFINDLUN()

 NAME:
	FXBFINDLUN()
 Purpose     :
	Find logical unit number UNIT in FXBINTABLE common block.
 Explanation :
	Finds the proper index to use for getting information about the logical
	unit number UNIT in the arrays stored in the FXBINTABLE common block.
	Called from FXBCREATE and FXBOPEN.
 Use         :
	Result = FXBFINDLUN( UNIT )
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	The result of the function is an index into the FXBINTABLE common
	block.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	None.
 Calls       :
	None.
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	None.
 Side effects:
	If UNIT is not found in the common block, then it is added to the
	common block.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Feb. 1992.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 July 1993.
		Added DHEAP variable to fix bug with variable length arrays.
	Version 3, Michael Schubnell, University of Michigan, 22 May 1996
		Change N_DIMS from short to long integer.
 Version     :
	Version 3, 22 May 1996
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Make NAXIS1, NAXIS2, HEAP, DHEAP, BYTOFF 64-bit integers to deal with large files,
         E. Hivon Mar 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbfindlun.pro)

FXBFINISH

 NAME:
	FXBFINISH
 Purpose     :
	Close a FITS binary table extension file opened for write.
 Explanation :
	Closes a FITS binary table extension file that had been opened for
	write by FXBCREATE.
 Use         :
	FXBFINISH, UNIT
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number of the file.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	None.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	ERRMSG	= If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		  returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		  depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		  encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		  use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBFINISH, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	None.
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The file must have been opened with FXBCREATE, and written with
	FXBWRITE.
 Side effects:
	Any bytes needed to pad the file out to an integral multiple of 2880
	bytes are written out to the file.  Then, the file is closed.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Jan 1992.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, modified to support variable length arrays.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, removed all references to temporary files.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 July 1993.
		Fixed bug with variable length arrays.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
 Version     :
       Version 4, 23 June 1994
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbfinish.pro)

FXBGROW

 NAME:
        FXBGROW
 PURPOSE     :
       Increase the number of rows in a binary table.
 EXPLANATION :
       Call FXBGROW to increase the size of an already-existing FITS
       binary table.  The number of rows increases to NROWS; however
       the table cannot shrink by this operation.  This procedure is
       useful when a table with an unknown number of rows must be
       created.  The caller would then call FXBCREATE to construct a
       table of some base size, and follow with calls to FXBGROW to
       lengthen the table as needed.  The extension being enlarged
       need not be the last extension in the file.  If subsequent
       extensions exist in the file, they will be shifted properly.

 CALLING SEQUENCE :
       FXBGROW, UNIT, HEADER, NROWS[, ERRMSG= , NOZERO= , BUFFERSIZE= ]

 INPUT PARAMETERS :
       UNIT     = Logical unit number of an already-opened file.
       HEADER   = String array containing the FITS binary table extension
                  header.  The header is modified in place.
       NROWS    = New number of rows, always more than the previous
                  number.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       NOZERO   = when set, FXBGROW will not zero-pad the new data if
                  it doesn't have to.
       ERRMSG    = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
                   returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                   depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
                   encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
                   use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

                       ERRMSG = ''
                       FXBGROW, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
                       IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...
       BUFFERSIZE = Size in bytes for intermediate data transfers
                    (default 32768)

 Calls       :
       FXADDPAR, FXHREAD, BLKSHIFT
 Common      :
       Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
       information.
 Restrictions:
       The file must be open with write permission.

       The binary table extension in question must already by written
       to the file (using FXBCREATE).

       A table can never shrink via this operation.

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       The FITS file will grow in size, and heap areas are
       preserved by moving them to the end of the file.

       The header is modified to reflect the new number of rows.
 CATEGORY    :
       Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
       Initially written, C. Markwardt, GSFC, Nov 1998
       Added ability to enlarge arbitrary extensions and tables with
         variable sized rows, not just the last extension in a file,
         CM, April 2000
       Fix bug in the zeroing of the output file, C. Markwardt, April 2005

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbgrow.pro)

FXBHEADER()

 NAME:
       FXBHEADER()

 PURPOSE:
       Returns the header of an open FITS binary table.

 EXPLANATION:
      This procedure returns the FITS extension header of a FITS
         binary table opened for read with the command FXBOPEN.

 Use         : Result = FXBHEADER(UNIT)

 Inputs      : UNIT    = Logical unit number returned by FXBOPEN routine.
                         Must be a scalar integer.

 Opt. Inputs : None.

 Outputs     : The result of the function is a string array containing the
               header for the FITS binary table that UNIT points to.

 Opt. Outputs: None.

 Keywords    : None.

 Calls       : FXBFINDLUN

 Common      : Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
               information.

 Restrictions: None.

 Side effects: The string array returned always has as many elements as the
               largest header read by FXBOPEN.  Any extra elements beyond the
               true header are blank or null strings.

               The header will be returned whether or not the table is still
               open or not.

               If UNIT does not point to a binary table, then a string array
               of nulls is returned.

               If UNIT is an undefined variable, then the null string is
               returned.

 Category    : Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.

 Prev. Hist. : None.

 Written     : William Thompson, GSFC, 1 July 1993.

 Modified    : Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 1 July 1993.

 Version     : Version 1, 1 July 1993.
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbheader.pro)

FXBHELP

 NAME:
	FXBHELP
 Purpose     :
	Prints short description of columns in a FITS binary table.
 Explanation :
	Prints a short description of the columns in a FITS binary table to the
	terminal screen.
 Use         :
	FXBHELP, UNIT
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number of file opened by FXBOPEN.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	None.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	None.
 Calls       :
	FXBFIND, FXBFINDLUN, FXPAR
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The file must have been opened with FXBOPEN.
 Side effects:
	Certain fields may be truncated in the display.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Feb. 1992, from TBHELP by W. Landsman.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 May 1993.
		Modified to not write to a logical unit number assigned to the
		terminal.  This makes it compatible with IDL for Windows.
       Version 3, Wayne Landsman GSFC April 2010
                Remove use of obsolete !ERR system variable
 Version     :
	Version 3, April 2010.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbhelp.pro)

FXBHMAKE

 NAME:
	FXBHMAKE
 Purpose     :
	Create basic FITS binary table extension (BINTABLE) header.
 Explanation :
	Creates a basic header array with all the required keywords, but with
	none of the table columns defined.  This defines a basic structure
	which can then be added to or modified by other routines.
 Use         :
	FXBHMAKE, HEADER, NROWS  [, EXTNAME  [, COMMENT ]]
 Inputs      :
	NROWS	= Number of rows in the binary table.
 Opt. Inputs :
	EXTNAME	= If passed, then the EXTNAME record is added with this value.
	COMMENT = Comment to go along with EXTNAME.
 Outputs     :
	HEADER = String array containing FITS extension header.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	INITIALIZE = If set, then the header is completely initialized, and any
		     previous entries are lost.
	DATE	   = If set, then the DATE keyword is added to the header.
	EXTVER	   = Extension version number (integer).
	EXTLEVEL   = Extension level number (integer).
	ERRMSG	   = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		     returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		     depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		     encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		     use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBHMAKE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	GET_DATE, FXADDPAR, FXHCLEAN
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	Warning:  No checking is done of any of the parameters.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Jan 1992.
	William Thompson, Sep 1992, added EXTVER and EXTLEVEL keywords.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
 Version     :
       Version 3, 23 June 1994
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbhmake.pro)

FXBINTABLE

 NAME:
	FXBINTABLE
 Purpose     :
	Common block FXBINTABLE used by "FXB" routines.
 Explanation :
	This is not an IDL routine as such, but contains the definition of the
	common block FXBINTABLE for inclusion into other routines.  By defining
	the common block in one place, the problem of conflicting definitions
	is avoided.

	This file is included into routines that need this common block with
	the single line (left justified)

				  @fxbintable

	FXBINTABLE contains the following arrays:

		LUN	= An array of logical unit numbers of currently (or
			  previously) opened binary table files.
		STATE	= Array containing the state of the FITS files
			  associated with the logical unit numbers, where
			  0=closed, 1=open for read, and 2=open for write.
		HEAD	= FITS binary table headers.
		MHEADER	= Array containing the positions of the first data byte
			  of the header for each file referenced by array LUN.
		NHEADER	= Array containing the positions of the first data byte
			  after the header for each file referenced by array
			  LUN.
		NAXIS1	= Values of NAXIS1 from the binary table headers.
		NAXIS2	= Values of NAXIS2 from the binary table headers.
		TFIELDS	= Values of TFIELDS from the binary table headers.
		HEAP	= The start of the first byte of the heap area
			  for variable length arrays.
		DHEAP	= The start of the first byte of the next variable
			  length array, if writing.
		BYTOFF	= Byte offset from the beginning of the row for each
			  column in the binary table headers.
		TTYPE	= Values of TTYPE for each column in the binary table
			  headers.
		FORMAT	= Character code formats of the various columns.
		IDLTYPE	= IDL type code for each column in the binary table
			  headers.
		N_ELEM	= Number of elements for each column in the binary
			  table headers.
		TSCAL	= Scale factors for the individual columns.
		TZERO	= Zero offsets for the individual columns.
		MAXVAL	= For variable length arrays, contains the maximum
			  number of elements for each column in the binary
			  table headers.
		N_DIMS	= Number of dimensions, and array of dimensions for
			  each column of type string in the binary table
			  headers.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Feb 1992.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 July 1993.
		Added DHEAP variable to fix bug with variable length arrays.
 Version     :
	Version 2, 21 July 1993.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbintable.pro)

FXBISOPEN()

 NAME:
       FXBISOPEN()

 PURPOSE:
       Returns true if UNIT points to an open FITS binary table.

 Explanation : This procedure checks to see if the logical unit number given
               by the variable UNIT corresponds to a FITS binary table opened
               for read with the command FXBOPEN, and which has not yet been
               closed with FXBCLOSE.

 Use         : Result = FXBISOPEN(UNIT)

               If FXBISOPEN(UNIT) THEN ...

 Inputs      : UNIT    = Logical unit number returned by FXBOPEN routine.
                         Must be a scalar integer.

 Opt. Inputs : None.

 Outputs     : The result of the function is either True (1) or False (0),
               depending on whether UNIT points to an open binary table or
               not.

 Opt. Outputs: None.

 Keywords    : None.

 Calls       : FXBFINDLUN

 Common      : Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
               information.

 Restrictions: None.

 Side effects: If UNIT is an undefined variable, then False (0) is returned.

               If UNIT points to a FITS binary table file that is opened for
               write, then False (0) is returned.

 Category    : Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.

 Prev. Hist. : None.

 Written     : William Thompson, GSFC, 1 July 1993.

 Modified    : Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 1 July 1993.

 Version     : Version 1, 1 July 1993.
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbisopen.pro)

FXBOPEN

 NAME:
	FXBOPEN
 Purpose     :
	Open binary table extension in a disk FITS file for reading or updating
 Explanation :
	Opens a binary table extension in a disk FITS file for reading.  The
	columns are then read using FXBREAD, and the file is closed when done
	with FXBCLOSE.
 Use         :
	FXBOPEN, UNIT, FILENAME, EXTENSION  [, HEADER ]
 Inputs      :
       FILENAME  = Name of FITS file to be opened.  Optional
                   extension *number* may be specified, in either of
                   the following formats (using the FTOOLS
                   convention): FILENAME[EXT] or FILENAME+EXT, where
                   EXT is 1 or higher.  Such an extension
                   specification takes priority over EXTENSION.

	EXTENSION = Either the number of the FITS extension, starting with the
		    first extension after the primary data unit being one; or a
		    character string containing the value of EXTNAME to search
		    for.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	UNIT	  = Logical unit number of the opened file.
 Opt. Outputs:
	HEADER	  = String array containing the FITS binary table extension
		    header.
 Keywords    :
	NO_TDIM	  = If set, then any TDIMn keywords found in the header are
		    ignored.

       ACCESS    = A scalar string describing access privileges as
                   one of READ ('R') or UPDATE ('RW').
                   DEFAULT: 'R'

       REOPEN    = If set, UNIT must be an already-opened file unit.
                   FXBOPEN will treat the file as a FITS file.

	ERRMSG	  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		    returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		    depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		    encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		    use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBOPEN, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	FXBFINDLUN, FXBPARSE, FXHREAD, FXPAR
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The file must be a valid FITS file.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, based on READFITS by J. Woffard and W. Landsman.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, changed from function to procedure.
	W. Thompson, June 1992, fixed up error handling.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 27 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Extended ERRMSG to call to FXBPARSE
       Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
       Version 4, 23 June 1994

 Added ACCESS, REOPEN keywords, and FXFILTER package, CM 1999 Feb 03
 Added FILENAME[EXT] and FILENAME+EXT extension parsing, CM 1999 Jun 28
 Some general tidying, CM 1999 Nov 18
       Allow for possible 64bit integer number of bytes W. Landsman Nov 2007
       Make Ndata a 64bit integer to deal with larger files, E. Hivon, Mar 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbopen.pro)

FXBPARSE

 NAME:
	FXBPARSE
 Purpose     :
	Parse the binary table extension header.
 Explanation :
	Parses the binary table extension header, and store the information
	about the format of the binary table in the FXBINTABLE common
	block--called from FXBCREATE and FXBOPEN.
 Use         :
	FXBPARSE, ILUN, UNIT, HEADER
 Inputs      :
	ILUN	= Index into the arrays in the FXBINTABLE common block.
	HEADER	= FITS binary table extension header.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	None.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	NO_TDIM	  = If set, then any TDIMn keywords found in the header are
		    ignored.
	ERRMSG	  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		    returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		    depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		    encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		    use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBPARSE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	FXBFIND, FXBTDIM, FXBTFORM, FXPAR
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	None.
 Side effects:
	Any TDIMn keywords found for bit arrays (format 'X') are ignored, since
	the dimensions would refer to bits, not bytes.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Feb. 1992.
	William Thompson, Jan. 1993, modified for renamed FXBTFORM and FXBTDIM.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 4, Michael Schubnell, University of Michigan, 22 May 1996
		Change N_DIMS from short to long integer.
	Version 5, W. Landsman, GSFC, 12 Aug 1997
		Use double complex datatype, if needed
	Version 6, W. Landsman GSFC 30 Aug 1997
       Optimized FXPAR; call FXBFIND for speed, CM 1999 Nov 18
       Modify DHEAP(ILUN) when opening table now, CM 2000 Feb 22
       Default the TZERO/TSCAL tables to double instead of single
         precision floating point, CM 2003 Nov 23
       Make NAXIS1 and NAXIS2 64-bit integers to deal with large files,
         E. Hivon Mar 2008
       Remove use of Obsolete !ERR system variable
  Version
       Version 8   April 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbparse.pro)

FXBREAD

 NAME:
	FXBREAD
 Purpose     :
	Read a data array from a disk FITS binary table file.
 Explanation :
	Each call to FXBREAD will read the data from one column and one row
	from the FITS data file, which should already have been opened by
	FXBOPEN.  One needs to call this routine for every column and every row
	in the binary table.  FXBCLOSE will then close the FITS data file.
 Use         :
	FXBREAD, UNIT, DATA, COL  [, ROW ]
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number corresponding to the file containing the
		  binary table.
	COL	= Column in the binary table to read data from, either as a
		  character string containing a column label (TTYPE), or as a
		  numerical column index starting from column one.
 Opt. Inputs :
	ROW	= Either row number in the binary table to read data from,
		  starting from row one, or a two element array containing a
		  range of row numbers to read.  If not passed, then the entire
		  column is read in.

		  Row must be passed for variable length arrays.

 Outputs     :
	DATA	= IDL data array to be read from the file.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	NOSCALE	= If set, then the output data will not be scaled using the
		  optional TSCAL and TZERO keywords in the FITS header.
		  Default is to scale.
       NOIEEE  = If set, then the output data is not byte-swapped to
                 machine order.  NOIEEE implies NOSCALE.
                 Default is to perform the byte-swap.
	VIRTUAL	= If set, and COL is passed as a name rather than a number,
		  then if the program can't find a column with that name, it
		  will then look for a keyword with that name in the header.
		  Such a keyword would then act as a "virtual column", with the
		  same value for every row.
	DIMENSIONS = Vector array containing the dimensions to be used to read
		  in the data.  Bypasses any dimensioning information stored in
		  the header.  Ignored for bit arrays.  If the data type is
		  double-precision complex, then an extra dimension of 2 is
		  prepended to the dimensions passed by the user.
	NANVALUE= Value signalling data dropout.  All points corresponding to
		  IEEE NaN (not-a-number) are converted to this number.
		  Ignored unless DATA is of type float, double-precision or
		  complex.
	ERRMSG	= If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		  returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		  depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		  encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		  use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBREAD, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	FXPAR, WHERE_NEGZERO, WHERENAN
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The binary table file must have been opened with FXBOPEN.

	The data must be consistent with the column definition in the binary
	table header.

	The row number must be consistent with the number of rows stored in the
	binary table header.

	The number of elements implied by the dimensions keyword must not
	exceed the number of elements stored in the file.

 Side effects:
	If the DIMENSIONS keyword is used, then the number of data points read
	in may be less than the number of points stored in the table.

	If there are no elements to read in (the number of elements is zero),
	then the program sets !ERR to -1, and DATA is unmodified.

 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Jan 1992.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, modified to support variable length arrays.
	W. Thompson, Jun 1992, modified way that row ranges are read in.  No
			       longer works reiteratively.
	W. Thompson, Jun 1992, fixed bug where NANVALUE would be modified by
			       TSCAL and TZERO keywords.
	W. Thompson, Jun 1992, fixed bug when reading character strings.
			       Treats dimensions better when reading multiple
			       rows.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 30 June 1993.
		Added overwrite keyword to REFORM call to speed up.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 July 1993.
		Fixed bug with variable length arrays.
	Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 29 October 1993.
		Added error message for not finding column by name.
	Version 5, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 6, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 7, William Thompson, GSFC, 29 December 1994
		Fixed bug where single element dimensions were lost.
	Version 8, William Thompson, GSFC, 20 March 1995
		Fixed bug introduced in version 7.
	Version 9, Wayne Landsman, GSFC, 3 July 1996
		Fixed bug involving use of virtual keyword.
	Version 10, William Thompson, GSFC, 31-Jan-1997
		Added call to WHERE_NEGZERO.
	Version 11, Wayne Landsman, GSFC, 12 Aug, 1997
		Use IDL dcomplex datatype if needed
	Version 12, Wayne Landmsan, GSFC, 20 Feb, 1998
		Remove call to WHERE_NEGZERO (now part of IEEE_TO_HOST)
	Version 13, 18 Nov 1999, CM, Add NOIEEE keyword
	Version 14, 21 Aug 2000, William Thompson, GSFC
		Catch I/O errors
       Version 15, W. Landsman GSFC 10 Dec 2009
                Fix Dimension keyword, remove  IEEE_TO_HOST
 Version     :
       Version 15, 10 Dec 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbread.pro)

FXBREADM

 NAME:
       FXBREADM
 PURPOSE:
       Read multiple columns/rows from a disk FITS binary table file.
 EXPLANATION :
       A call to FXBREADM will read data from multiple rows and
       multiple columns in a single procedure call.  Up to forty-nine
       columns may be read in a single pass; the number of rows is
       limited essentially by available memory.  The file should have
       already been opened with FXBOPEN.  FXBREADM optimizes reading
       multiple columns by first reading a large chunk of data from
       the FITS file directly, and then slicing the data into columns
       within memory.  FXBREADM can read variable-length arrays (see
       below).

       The number of columns is limited to 49 if data are passed by
       positional argument.  However, this limitation can be overcome
       by having FXBREADM return the data in an array of pointers.
       The user should set the PASS_METHOD keyword to 'POINTER', and an
       array of pointers to the data will be returned in the POINTERS keyword.
       The  user is responsible for freeing the pointers; however,
       FXBREADM will reuse any pointers  passed into the procedure, and
       hence any pointed-to data will be destroyed.

       FXBREADM can also read variable-length columns from FITS
       binary tables.  Since such data is not of a fixed size, it is
       returned as a structure.  The structure has the following
       elements:

              VARICOL:    ;; Flag: variable length column (= 1)
              N_ELEMENTS: ;; Total number of elements returned
              TYPE:       ;; IDL data type code (integer)
              N_ROWS:     ;; Number of rows read from table (integer)
              INDICES:    ;; Indices of each row's data (integer array)
              DATA:       ;; Raw data elements (variable type array)

       In order to gain access to the Ith row's data, one should
       examine DATA(INDICES(I):INDICES(I+1)-1), which is similar in
       construct to the REVERSE_INDICES keyword of the HISTOGRAM
       function.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       FXBREADM, UNIT, COL, DATA1, [ DATA2, ... DATA48, ROW=, BUFFERSIZE = ]
           /NOIEEE, /NOSCALE, /VIRTUAL, NANVALUE=, PASS_METHOD = POINTERS=,
           ERRMSG = , WARNMSG = , STATUS = , /DEFAULT_FLOAT]

 INPUT PARAMETERS :
       UNIT    = Logical unit number corresponding to the file containing the
                 binary table.
       COL     = An array of columns in the binary table to read data
                 from, either as character strings containing column
                 labels (TTYPE), or as numerical column indices
                 starting from column one.
 Outputs     :
       DATA1, DATA2...DATA48 = A named variable to accept the data values, one
                 for each column.  The columns are stored in order of the
                 list in COL.  If the read operation fails for a
                 particular column, then the corresponding output Dn
                 variable is not altered.  See the STATUS keyword.
                 Ignored if PASS_METHOD is 'POINTER'.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       ROW     = Either row number in the binary table to read data from,
                 starting from row one, or a two element array containing a
                 range of row numbers to read.  If not passed, then the entire
                 column is read in.
       /DEFAULT_FLOAT = If set, then scaling with TSCAL/TZERO is done with
                 floating point rather than double precision.
       /NOIEEE = If set, then then IEEE floating point data will not
                be converted to the host floating point format (and
                this by definition implies NOSCALE).  The user is
                responsible for their own floating point conversion.
       /NOSCALE = If set, then the output data will not be scaled using the
                 optional TSCAL and TZERO keywords in the FITS header.
                 Default is to scale.
       VIRTUAL = If set, and COL is passed as a name rather than a number,
                 then if the program can't find a column with that name, it
                 will then look for a keyword with that name in the header.
                 Such a keyword would then act as a "virtual column", with the
                 same value for every row.
       DIMENSIONS = FXBREADM ignores this keyword.  It is here for
	          compatibility only.
       NANVALUE= Value signalling data dropout.  All points corresponding to
                 IEEE NaN (not-a-number) are converted to this number.
                 Ignored unless DATA is of type float, double-precision or
                 complex.
       PASS_METHOD = A scalar string indicating method of passing
                 data from FXBREADM.  Either 'ARGUMENT' (indicating
                 pass by positional argument), or 'POINTER' (indicating
                 passing an array of pointers by the POINTERS
                 keyword).
                 Default: 'ARGUMENT'
       POINTERS = If PASS_METHOD is 'POINTER' then an array of IDL
                 pointers is returned in this keyword, one for each
                 requested column.    Any pointers passed into FXBREADM will
                 have their pointed-to data destroyed.  Ultimately the
                 user is responsible for deallocating pointers.
       BUFFERSIZE = Raw data are transferred from the file in chunks
                 to conserve memory.  This is the size in bytes of
                 each chunk.  If a value of zero is given, then all
                 of the data are transferred in one pass.  Default is
                 32768 (32 kB).
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
       ERRMSG  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
                 returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                 depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
                 encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
                 use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

                       ERRMSG = ''
                       FXBREAD, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
                       IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...
       WARNMSG = Messages which are considered to be non-fatal
                 "warnings" are returned in this output string.
                 Note that if some but not all columns are
                 unreadable, this is considered to be non-fatal.
       STATUS  = An output array containing the status for each
                 column read, 1 meaning success and 0 meaning failure.

 Calls       :
       IEEE_TO_HOST, FXPAR(), WHERENAN()
 Common      :
       Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
       information.
 Restrictions:
       The binary table file must have been opened with FXBOPEN.

       The data must be consistent with the column definition in the binary
       table header.

       The row number must be consistent with the number of rows stored in the
       binary table header.

       Generaly speaking, FXBREADM will be faster than iterative
       calls to FXBREAD when (a) a large number of columns is to be
       read or (b) the size in bytes of each cell is small, so that
       the overhead of the FOR loop in FXBREAD becomes significant.

 SIDE EFFECTS:
       If there are no elements to read in (the number of elements is zero),
       then the program sets !ERR to -1, and DATA is unmodified.

 Category    :
       Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
       C. Markwardt, based in concept on FXBREAD version 12 from
                              IDLASTRO, but with significant and
                              major changes to accomodate the
                              multiple row/column technique.  Mostly
                              the parameter checking and general data
                              flow remain.
       C. Markwardt, updated to read variable length arrays, and to
                              pass columns by handle or pointer.
                              20 Jun 2001
       C. Markwardt, try to conserve memory when creating the arrays
                              13 Oct 2001
   Handle case of GE 50 columns, C. Markwardt, 18 Apr 2002
   Handle case where TSCAL/TZERO changes type of column,
       C. Markwardt, 23 Feb 2003
   Fix bug in handling of FOUND and numeric columns,
       C. Markwardt 12 May 2003
   Removed pre-V5.0 HANDLE options  W. Landsman July 2004
   Fix bug when HANDLE options were removed, July 2004
   Handle special cases of TSCAL/TZERO which emulate unsigned
      integers, Oct 2003
   Add DEFAULT_FLOAT keyword to select float values instead of double
      for TSCAL'ed, June 2004
   Read 64bit integer columns, E. Hivon, Mar 2008
   Add support for columns with TNULLn keywords, C. Markwardt, Apr 2010
   Add support for files larger than 2 GB, C. Markwardt, 2012-04-17

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbreadm.pro)

FXBSTATE()

 NAME:
      FXBSTATE()

 PURPOSE:
       Returns the state of a FITS binary table.

 Explanation : This procedure returns the state of a FITS binary table that
               was either opened for read with the command FXBOPEN, or for
               write with the command FXBCREATE.

 Use         : Result = FXBSTATE(UNIT)

 Inputs      : UNIT    = Logical unit number returned by FXBOPEN routine.
                         Must be a scalar integer.

 Opt. Inputs : None.

 Outputs     : The result of the function is the state of the FITS binary
               table that UNIT points to.  This can be one of three values:

                       0 = Closed
                       1 = Open for read
                       2 = Open for write

 Opt. Outputs: None.

 Keywords    : None.

 Calls       : FXBFINDLUN

 Common      : Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
               information.

 Restrictions: None.

 Side effects: If UNIT is an undefined variable, then 0 (closed) is returned.

 Category    : Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.

 Prev. Hist. : None.

 Written     : William Thompson, GSFC, 1 July 1993.

 Modified    : Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 1 July 1993.

 Version     : Version 1, 1 July 1993.
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbstate.pro)

FXBTDIM()

 NAME:
	FXBTDIM()
 Purpose     :
	Parse TDIM-like kwywords.
 Explanation :
	Parses the value of a TDIM-like keyword (e.g. TDIMnnn, TDESC, etc.) to
	return the separate elements contained within.
 Use         :
	Result = FXBTDIM( TDIM_KEYWORD )
 Inputs      :
	TDIM_KEYWORD	= The value of a TDIM-like keyword.  Must be a
			  character string of the form "(value1,value2,...)".
			  If the parentheses characters are missing, then the
			  string is simply returned as is, without any further
			  processing.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	The result of the function is a character string array containing the
	values contained within the keyword parameter.  If a numerical result
	is desired, then simply call, e.g.

		Result = FIX( FXBTDIM( TDIM_KEYWORD ))

 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	None.
 Calls       :
	GETTOK
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	The input parameter must have the proper format.  The separate values
	must not contain the comma character.  TDIM_KEYWORD must not be an
	array.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Jan. 1992.
	William Thompson, Jan. 1993, renamed to be compatible with DOS
		limitations.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
 Version     :
	Version 1, 12 April 1993.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbtdim.pro)

FXBTFORM

 NAME:
	FXBTFORM
 PURPOSE     :
	Returns information about FITS binary table columns.
 EXPLANATION :
	Procedure to return information about the format of the various columns
	in a FITS binary table.
 Use         :
	FXBTFORM,HEADER,TBCOL,IDLTYPE,FORMAT,NUMVAL,MAXVAL
 Inputs      :
	HEADER	= Fits binary table header.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	TBCOL	= Array of starting column positions in bytes.
	IDLTYPE	= IDL data types of columns.
	FORMAT	= Character code defining the data types of the columns.
	NUMVAL	= Number of elements of the data arrays in the columns.
	MAXVAL	= Maximum number of elements for columns containing variable
		  length arrays, or zero otherwise.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	ERRMSG	  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		    returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		    depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		    encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		    use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBTFORM, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	FXPAR
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	None.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Feb. 1992, from TBINFO by D. Lindler.
	W. Thompson, Jan. 1993, renamed to be compatible with DOS limitations.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 9 April 1997
		Modified so that variable length arrays can be read, even if
		the maximum array size is not in the header.
	Version 5  Wayne Landsman, GSFC, August 1997
		Recognize double complex array type if since IDL version 4.0
       Version 6  Optimized FXPAR call, CM 1999 Nov 18
       Version 7: Wayne Landsman, GSFC Feb 2006
               Added support for 64bit integer K format
 Version:
       Version 8: Wayne Landsman GSFC Apr 2010
               Remove use of obsolete !ERR variable

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbtform.pro)

FXBWRITE

 NAME:
	FXBWRITE
 Purpose     :
	Write a binary data array to a disk FITS binary table file.
 Explanation :
	Each call to FXBWRITE will write to the data file, which should already
	have been created and opened by FXBCREATE.  One needs to call this
	routine for every column and every row in the binary table.  FXBFINISH
	will then close the file.
 Use         :
	FXBWRITE, UNIT, DATA, COL, ROW
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number corresponding to the file containing the
		  binary table.
	DATA	= IDL data array to be written to the file.
	COL	= Column in the binary table to place data in, starting from
		  column one.
	ROW	= Row in the binary table to place data in, starting from row
		  one.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	None.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	BIT	= Number of bits in bit mask arrays (type "X").  Only used if
		  the column is of variable size.
	NANVALUE= Value signalling data dropout.  All points corresponding to
		  this value are set to be IEEE NaN (not-a-number).  Ignored
		  unless DATA is of type float, double-precision or complex.
	ERRMSG	= If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		  returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		  depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		  encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		  use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBWRITE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	HOST_TO_IEEE
 Common      :
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 Restrictions:
	The binary table file must have been opened with FXBCREATE.

	The data must be consistent with the column definition in the binary
	table header.

	The row number must be consistent with the number of rows stored in the
	binary table header.

 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Jan 1992, based on WRITEFITS by J. Woffard and W. Landsman.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, modified to support variable length arrays.
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, removed all references to temporary files.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 July 1993.
		Fixed bug with variable length arrays.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 5, Wayne Landsman, GSFC, 12 Aug 1997
		Recognize IDL double complex data type
 Version     :
       Version 5, 12 August 1997
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbwrite.pro)

FXBWRITM

 NAME:
	FXBWRITM
 PURPOSE:
       Write multiple columns/rows to a disk FITS binary table file.
 EXPLANATION :
       A call to FXBWRITM will write multiple rows and multiple
       columns to a binary table in a single procedure call.  Up to
       fifty columns may be read in a single pass.  The file should
       have already been opened with FXBOPEN (with write access) or
       FXBCREATE.  FXBWRITM optimizes writing multiple columns by
       first writing a large chunk of data to the FITS file all at
       once.  FXBWRITM cannot write variable-length arrays; use
       FXBWRITE instead.

       The number of columns is limited to 50 if data are passed by
       positional argument.  However, this limitation can be overcome
       by passing pointers to FXBWRITM.  The user should set the PASS_METHOD
       keyword to 'POINTER'  as appropriate, and  an array of pointers to
       the data in the POINTERS keyword.  The user is responsible for freeing
        the pointers.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	FXBWRITM, UNIT, COL, D0, D1, D2, ..., [ ROW= , PASS_METHOD, NANVALUE=
                               POINTERS=,  BUFFERSIZE= ]

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
	UNIT	= Logical unit number corresponding to the file containing the
		  binary table.
	D0,..D49= An IDL data array to be written to the file, one for
                 each column.      These parameters will be igonred if data
                 is passed through the POINTERS keyword.
	COL	= Column in the binary table to place data in.   May be either
                 a list of column numbers where the first column is one, or
                 a string list of column names.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
	ROW	= Either row number in the binary table to write data to,
		  starting from row one, or a two element array containing a
		  range of row numbers to write.  If not passed, then
		  the entire column is written.
	NANVALUE= Value signalling data dropout.  All points corresponding to
		  this value are set to be IEEE NaN (not-a-number).  Ignored
		  unless DATA is of type float, double-precision or complex.
       NOSCALE = If set, then TSCAL/TZERO values are ignored, and data is
                 written exactly as supplied.
       PASS_METHOD = A scalar string indicating method of passing
                 data to FXBWRITM.  One of 'ARGUMENT' (indicating
                 pass by positional argument),  or'POINTER' (indicating
                 passing an array of pointers by the POINTERS
                 keyword).
                 Default:  'ARGUMENT'
       POINTERS = If PASS_METHOD is 'POINTER' then the user must pass
                 an array of IDL pointers to this keyword, one for
                 each column.    Ultimately the user is responsible for
                 deallocating pointers.
       BUFFERSIZE = Data are transferred in chunks to conserve
                 memory.  This is the size in bytes of each chunk.
                 If a value of zero is given, then all of the data
                 are transferred in one pass.  Default is 32768 (32
                 kB).
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
	ERRMSG	= If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		  returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		  depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		  encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		  use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXBWRITE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...
       WARNMSG = Messages which are considered to be non-fatal
                 "warnings" are returned in this  output string.
       STATUS  = An output array containing the status for each
                 read, 1 meaning success and 0 meaning failure.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
      None.
 EXAMPLE:
      Write a binary table 'sample.fits' giving 43 X,Y positions and a
      21 x 21 PSF at each position:

      (1) First, create sample values
      x = findgen(43) & y = findgen(43)+1 & psf = randomn(seed,21,21,43)

      (2) Create primary header, write it to disk, and make extension header
      fxhmake,header,/initialize,/extend,/date
      fxwrite,'sample.fits',header
      fxbhmake,header,43,'TESTEXT','Test binary table extension'

      (3) Fill extension header with desired column names
      fxbaddcol,1,header,x[0],'X'             ;Use first element in each array
      fxbaddcol,2,header,y[0],'Y'             ;to determine column properties
      fxbaddcol,3,header,psf[*,*,0],'PSF'

      (4) Write extension header to FITS file
      fxbcreate,unit,'sample.fits',header

      (5) Use FXBWRITM to write all data to the extension in a single call
      fxbwritm,unit,['X','Y','PSF'], x, y, psf
      fxbfinish,unit                 ;Close the file

 COMMON BLOCKS:
	Uses common block FXBINTABLE--see "fxbintable.pro" for more
	information.
 RESTRICTIONS:
	The binary table file must have been opened with FXBCREATE or
       FXBOPEN (with write access).

	The data must be consistent with the column definition in the binary
	table header.

	The row number must be consistent with the number of rows stored in the
	binary table header.

       A PASS_METHOD of POINTER does not use the EXECUTE() statement and can be
       used with the IDL Virtual Machine.   However, the EXECUTE() statement is
       used when the PASS_METHOD is by arguments.
 CATEGORY:
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 PREVIOUS HISTORY:
       C. Markwardt, based on FXBWRITE and FXBREADM (ver 1), Jan 1999
 WRITTEN:
	Craig Markwardt, GSFC, January 1999.
 MODIFIED:
       Version 1, Craig Markwardt, GSFC 18 January 1999.
               Documented this routine, 18 January 1999.
       C. Markwardt, added ability to pass by handle or pointer.
               Some bug fixes, 20 July 2001
       W. Landsman/B.Schulz  Allow more than 50 arguments when using pointers
       W. Landsman  Remove pre-V5.0 HANDLE options      July 2004
       W. Landsman Remove EXECUTE() call with POINTERS   May 2005
       C. Markwardt Allow the output table to have TSCAL/TZERO
          keyword values; if that is the case, then the passed values
          will be quantized to match those scale factors before being
          written.  Sep 2007
       E. Hivon: write 64bit integer and double precison columns, Mar 2008
       C. Markwardt Allow unsigned integers, which have special
          TSCAL/TZERO values.  Feb 2009
       C. Markwardt Add support for files larger than 2 GB, 2012-04-17

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxbwritm.pro)

FXFINDEND

 NAME:
	FXFINDEND
 Purpose     :
	Find the end of a FITS file.
 Explanation :
	This routine finds the end of the last logical record in a FITS file,
	which may be different from that of the physical end of the file.  Each
	FITS header is read in and parsed, and the file pointer is moved to
	where the next FITS extension header would be if there is one, or to
	the end of the file if not.
 Use         :
	FXFINDEND, UNIT [, EXTENSION]
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number for the opened file.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	None.
 Opt. Outputs:
       EXTENSION = The extension number that a new extension would
                   have if placed at the end of the file.
 Keywords    :
	None.
 Calls       :
	FXHREAD, FXPAR
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	The file must have been opened for block I/O.  There must not be any
	FITS "special records" at the end of the file.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Feb. 1992.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
 Version     :
	Version 1, 12 April 1993.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added EXTENSION parameter, CM 1999 Nov 18
       Allow for possible 64bit integer number of bytes W. Landsman Nov 2007
       make Ndata a long64 to deal with large files. E. Hivon Mar 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxfindend.pro)

FXHCLEAN

 NAME:
	FXHCLEAN
 Purpose     :
	Removes required keywords from FITS header.
 Explanation :
	Removes any keywords relevant to array structure from a FITS header,
	preparatory to recreating it with the proper values.
 Use         :
	FXHCLEAN, HEADER
 Inputs      :
	HEADER	= FITS header to be cleaned.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	HEADER	= The cleaned FITS header is returned in place of the input
		  array.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	ERRMSG	= If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		  returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		  depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		  encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		  use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXHCLEAN, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	SXDELPAR, FXPAR
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	HEADER must be a string array containing a properly formatted FITS
	header.
 Side effects:
	Warning:  when cleaning a binary table extension header, not all of the
	keywords pertaining to columns in the table may be removed.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Jan 1992.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 30 December 1994
		Added TCUNIn to list of column keywords to be removed.
 Version     :
       Version 4, 30 December 1994
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxhclean.pro)

FXHMAKE

 NAME:
	FXHMAKE
 Purpose     :
	Create a basic FITS header array.
 Explanation :
	Creates a basic header array with all the required keywords.  This
	defines a basic structure which can then be added to or modified by
	other routines.
 Use         :
	FXHMAKE, HEADER  [, DATA ]
 Inputs      :
	None required.
 Opt. Inputs :
	DATA	= IDL data array to be written to file.    It must be in the
                  primary data unit unless the XTENSION keyword is supplied.
		  This array is used to determine the values of the BITPIX and
                 NAXIS, etc. keywords.

		  If not passed, then BITPIX is set to eight, NAXIS is set to
		  zero, and no NAXISnnn keywords are included in this
		  preliminary header.
 Outputs     :
	HEADER = String array containing FITS header.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	INITIALIZE = If set, then the header is completely initialized, and any
		     previous entries are lost.
	EXTEND	= If set, then the keyword EXTEND is inserted into the file,
		  with the value of "T" (true).
	DATE	= If set, then the DATE keyword is added to the header.
	ERRMSG	= If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		  returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		  depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		  encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		  use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXHMAKE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...
       XTENSION - If set, then the header is appropriate for an image
                  extension, rather than the primary data unit.
 Calls       :
	GET_DATE, FXADDPAR, FXHCLEAN
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	Groups are not currently supported.
 Side effects:
	BITPIX, NAXIS, etc. are defined such that complex arrays are stored as
	floating point, with an extra first dimension of two elements (real and
	imaginary parts).
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Jan 1992, from SXHMAKE by D. Lindler and M. Greason.
	Differences include:

		* Use of FITS standard (negative BITPIX) to signal floating
		  point numbers instead of (SDAS/Geis) DATATYPE keyword.
		* Storage of complex numbers as pairs of real numbers.
		* Support for EXTEND keyword, and for cases where there is no
		  primary data array.
		* Insertion of DATE record made optional.  Only required FITS
		  keywords are inserted automatically.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 21 June 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 4, Wayne Landsman, GSFC, 12 August 1997
		Recognize double complex data type
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Version 6, William Thompson, GSFC, 22 September 2004
               Recognize unsigned integer types.
       Version 6.1, C. Markwardt, GSFC, 19 Jun 2005
               Add the XTENSION keyword, which writes an XTENSION
               keyword instead of SIMPLE.
 Version     :
       Version 6.1, 19 June 2005

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxhmake.pro)

FXHMODIFY

 NAME:
       FXHMODIFY
 PURPOSE     :
       Modify a FITS header in a file on disk.
 Explanation :
       Opens a FITS file, and adds or modifies a parameter in the FITS header.
       Can be used for either the main header, or for an extension header.
       The modification is performed directly on the disk file.
 Use         :
       FXHMODIFY, FILENAME, NAME, VALUE, COMMENT
 Inputs      :
       FILENAME = String containing the name of the file to be read.

       NAME    = Name of parameter, scalar string  If NAME is already in the
                 header the value and possibly comment fields are modified.
                 Otherwise a new record is added to the header.  If NAME is
                 equal to either "COMMENT" or "HISTORY" then the value will be
                 added to the record without replacement.  In this case the
                 comment parameter is ignored.

       VALUE   = Value for parameter.  The value expression must be of the
                 correct type, e.g. integer, floating or string.  String
                 values of 'T' or 'F' are considered logical values.

 Opt. Inputs :
       COMMENT = String field.  The '/' is added by this routine.  Added
                 starting in position 31.  If not supplied, or set equal to ''
                 (the null string), then any previous comment field in the
                 header for that keyword is retained (when found).
 Outputs     :
       None.
 Opt. Outputs:
       None.
 Keywords    :
       EXTENSION = Either the number of the FITS extension, starting with the
                   first extension after the primary data unit being one; or a
                   character string containing the value of EXTNAME to search
                   for.  If not passed, then the primary FITS header is
                   modified.

       BEFORE  = Keyword string name.  The parameter will be placed before the
                 location of this keyword.  For example, if BEFORE='HISTORY'
                 then the parameter will be placed before the first history
                 location.  This applies only when adding a new keyword;
                 keywords already in the header are kept in the same position.

       AFTER   = Same as BEFORE, but the parameter will be placed after the
                 location of this keyword.  This keyword takes precedence over
                 BEFORE.

       FORMAT  = Specifies FORTRAN-like format for parameter, e.g. "F7.3".  A
                 scalar string should be used.  For complex numbers the format
                 should be defined so that it can be applied separately to the
                 real and imaginary parts.
       ERRMSG  = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
                 returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                 depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
                 encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
                 use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

                       ERRMSG = ''
                       FXHMODIFY, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
                       IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
       FXHREAD, FXPAR, FXADDPAR, BLKSHIFT
 Restrictions:
       This routine can not be used to modify any of the keywords that control
       the structure of the FITS file, e.g. BITPIX, NAXIS, PCOUNT, etc.  Doing
       so could corrupt the readability of the FITS file.
 Example:
       Modify the name 'OBJECT' keyword in the primary FITS header of a FITS
       file 'spec98.ccd' to contain the value 'test domeflat'

       IDL> fxhmodify, 'spec98.ccd', 'OBJECT', 'test domeflat'

 Side effects:
       If adding a record to the FITS header would increase the
       number of 2880 byte records stored on disk, then the file is
       enlarged before modification, unless the NOGROW keyword is passed.

 Category    :
       Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
       None.
 Written     :
       William Thompson, GSFC, 3 March 1994.
 Modified    :
       Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 3 March 1994.
       Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
               Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
      Version 3.1 Wayne Landsman GSFC   17 March 2006
               Fix problem in BLKSHIFT call if primary header  extended
       Version 3.2 W. Landsman 14 November 204
               Allow for need for 64bit number of bytes
; Version     :
       Version 3.2, 14 Nov 2007

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxhmodify.pro)

FXHREAD

 NAME:
	FXHREAD
 Purpose     :
       Reads a FITS header from an opened disk file.
 Explanation :
       Reads a FITS header from an opened disk file.
 Use         :
	FXHREAD, UNIT, HEADER  [, STATUS ]
 Inputs      :
	UNIT	= Logical unit number.
 Opt. Inputs :

 Outputs     :
	HEADER	= String array containing the FITS header.
 Opt. Outputs:
	STATUS	= Condition code giving the status of the read.  Normally, this
		  is zero, but is set to !ERR if an error occurs, or if the
		  first byte of the header is zero (ASCII null).
 Keywords    :
	None.
 Calls       :
	None.
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	The file must already be positioned at the start of the header.  It
	must be a proper FITS file.
 Side effects:
	The file ends by being positioned at the end of the FITS header, unless
	an error occurs.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Feb 1992, from READFITS by J. Woffard and W. Landsman.
	W. Thompson, Aug 1992, added test for SIMPLE keyword.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, February 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
 Version     :
	Version 1, 12 April 1993.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxhread.pro)

FXMOVE

 NAME:
     FXMOVE
 PURPOSE:
     Skip to a specified extension number or name in a FITS file

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     STATUS=FXMOVE(UNIT, EXT, /Silent)
     STATUS=FXMOVE(UNIT, EXTNAME, /Silent, EXT_NO=, ERRMSG= )

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
     UNIT     = An open unit descriptor for a FITS data stream.
     EXTEN   = Number of extensions to skip.
                              or
             Scalar string giving extension name (in the EXTNAME keyword)
 OPTIONAL INPUT PARAMETER:
     /SILENT - If set, then any messages about invalid characters in the
               FITS file are suppressed.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT PARAMETER:
       ERRMSG  = If this keyword is present, then any error messages will be
                 returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                 depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
                 encountered, then a null string is returned.

 RETURNS:
     0 if successful.
    -1 if an error is encountered.

 COMMON BLOCKS:
      None.
 SIDE EFFECTS:
      Repositions the file pointer.
 PROCEDURE:
      Each FITS header is read in and parsed, and the file pointer is moved
      to where the next FITS extension header until the desired
      extension is reached.
 PROCEDURE CALLS:
      FXPAR(), MRD_HREAD, MRD_SKIP
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
      Extracted from FXPOSIT 8-March-2000 by T. McGlynn
      Added /SILENT keyword  14-Dec-2000 by W. Landsman
      Save time by not reading the full header  W. Landsman   Feb. 2003
      Allow extension name to be specified, added EXT_NO, ERRMSG keywords
         W. Landsman  December 2006
      Make search for EXTNAME case-independent  W.Landsman March 2007
      Avoid round-off error for very large extensions N. Piskunov Dec 2007
      Assume since V6.1 (/INTEGER keyword available to PRODUCT() ) Dec 2007
      Capture error message from MRD_HREAD (must be used with post-June 2009
        version of MRD-HREAD)   W. Landsman  July 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fxmove.pro)

FXPAR()

 NAME:
        FXPAR()
 PURPOSE:
       Obtain the value of a parameter in a FITS header.
 EXPLANATION:
       The first 8 chacters of each element of HDR are searched for a match to
       NAME.  If the keyword is one of those allowed to take multiple values
       ("HISTORY", "COMMENT", or "        " (blank)), then the value is taken
       as the next 72 characters.  Otherwise, it is assumed that the next
       character is "=", and the value (and optional comment) is then parsed
       from the last 71 characters.  An error occurs if there is no parameter
       with the given name.

       If the value is too long for one line, it may be continued on to the
       the next input card, using the CONTINUE Long String Keyword convention.
       For more info, http://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov/registry/continue_keyword.html


       Complex numbers are recognized as two numbers separated by one or more
       space characters.

       If a numeric value has no decimal point (or E or D) it is returned as
       type LONG.  If it contains more than 8 numerals, or contains the
       character 'D', then it is returned as type DOUBLE.  Otherwise it is
       returned as type FLOAT.    If an integer is too large to be stored as
       type LONG, then it is returned as DOUBLE.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Result = FXPAR( HDR, NAME  [, ABORT, COUNT=, COMMENT=, /NOCONTINUE ] )

       Result = FXPAR(HEADER,'DATE')           ;Finds the value of DATE
       Result = FXPAR(HEADER,'NAXIS*')         ;Returns array dimensions as
                                               ;vector
 REQUIRED INPUTS:
       HDR     = FITS header string array (e.g. as returned by FXREAD).  Each
                 element should have a length of 80 characters
       NAME    = String name of the parameter to return.  If NAME is of the
                 form 'keyword*' then an array is returned containing values
                 of keywordN where N is an integer.  The value of keywordN
                 will be placed in RESULT(N-1).  The data type of RESULT will
                 be the type of the first valid match of keywordN
                 found, unless DATATYPE is given.
 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       ABORT   = String specifying that FXPAR should do a RETALL if a
                 parameter is not found.  ABORT should contain a string to be
                 printed if the keyword parameter is not found.  If not
                 supplied, FXPAR will return with a negative !err if a keyword
                 is not found.
       DATATYPE = A scalar value, indicating the type of vector
                  data.  All keywords will be cast to this type.
                  Default: based on first keyword.
                  Example: DATATYPE=0.0D (cast data to double precision)
       START   = A best-guess starting position of the sought-after
                 keyword in the header.  If specified, then FXPAR
                 first searches for scalar keywords in the header in
                 the index range bounded by START-PRECHECK and
                 START+POSTCHECK.  This can speed up keyword searches
                 in large headers.  If the keyword is not found, then
                 FXPAR searches the entire header.

                 If not specified then the entire header is searched.
                 Searches of the form 'keyword*' also search the
                 entire header and ignore START.

                 Upon return START is changed to be the position of
                 the newly found keyword.  Thus the best way to
                 search for a series of keywords is to search for
                 them in the order they appear in the header like
                 this:

                       START = 0L
                       P1 = FXPAR('P1', START=START)
                       P2 = FXPAR('P2', START=START)
       PRECHECK = If START is specified, then PRECHECK is the number
                  of keywords preceding START to be searched.
                  Default: 5
       POSTCHECK = If START is specified, then POSTCHECK is the number
                   of keywords after START to be searched.
                   Default: 20
 OUTPUT:
       The returned value of the function is the value(s) associated with the
       requested keyword in the header array.

       If the parameter is complex, double precision, floating point, long or
       string, then the result is of that type.  Apostrophes are stripped from
       strings.  If the parameter is logical, 1 is returned for T, and 0 is
       returned for F.

       If NAME was of form 'keyword*' then a vector of values are returned.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /NOCONTINUE = If set, then continuation lines will not be read, even
                 if present in the header
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       COUNT   = Optional keyword to return a value equal to the number of
                 parameters found by FXPAR.
       COMMENTS= Array of comments associated with the returned values.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       GETTOK(), VALID_NUM
 SIDE EFFECTS:

       The system variable !err is set to -1 if parameter not found, 0 for a
       scalar value returned.  If a vector is returned it is set to the number
       of keyword matches found.

       If a keyword occurs more than once in a header, a warning is given,
       and the first occurence is used.  However, if the keyword is "HISTORY",
       "COMMENT", or "        " (blank), then multiple values are returned.

 NOTES:
	The functions SXPAR() and FXPAR() are nearly identical, although
	FXPAR() has slightly more sophisticated parsing.   There is no
	particular reason for having two nearly identical procedures, but
	both are too widely used to drop either one.

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
               Adapted from SXPAR
       Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 14 October 1994
               Modified to use VALID_NUM instead of STRNUMBER.  Inserted
               additional call to VALID_NUM to trap cases where character
               strings did not contain quotation marks.
       Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 22 December 1994
               Fixed bug with blank keywords, following suggestion by Wayne
               Landsman.
       Version 4, Mons Morrison, LMSAL, 9-Jan-98
               Made non-trailing ' for string tag just be a warning (not
               a fatal error).  It was needed because "sxaddpar" had an
               error which did not write tags properly for long strings
               (over 68 characters)
       Version 5, Wayne Landsman GSFC, 29 May 1998
               Fixed potential problem with overflow of LONG values
       Version 6, Craig Markwardt, GSFC, 28 Jan 1998,
               Added CONTINUE parsing
       Version 7, Craig Markwardt, GSFC, 18 Nov 1999,
               Added START, PRE/POSTCHECK keywords for better
               performance
       Version 8, Craig Markwardt, GSFC, 08 Oct 2003,
               Added DATATYPE keyword to cast vector keywords type
       Version 9, Paul Hick, 22 Oct 2003, Corrected bug (NHEADER-1)
       Version 10, W. Landsman, GSFC  2 May 2012
               Keywords of form "name_0" cound confuse vector extractions

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxpar.pro)

FXPARPOS()

 NAME:
	FXPARPOS()
 Purpose     :
	Finds position to insert record into FITS header.
 Explanation :
	Finds the position to insert a record into a FITS header.  Called from
	FXADDPAR.
 Use         :
	Result = FXPARPOS(KEYWRD, IEND  [, BEFORE=BEFORE ]  [, AFTER=AFTER ])
 Inputs      :
	KEYWRD	= Array of eight-character keywords in header.
	IEND	= Position of END keyword.
 Opt. Inputs :
	None.
 Outputs     :
	Result of function is position to insert record.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	BEFORE	= Keyword string name.  The parameter will be placed before the
		  location of this keyword.  For example, if BEFORE='HISTORY'
		  then the parameter will be placed before the first history
		  location.  This applies only when adding a new keyword;
		  keywords already in the header are kept in the same position.

	AFTER	= Same as BEFORE, but the parameter will be placed after the
		  location of this keyword.  This keyword takes precedence over
		  BEFORE.

	If neither BEFORE or AFTER keywords are passed, then IEND is returned.

 Calls       :
	None.
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	KEYWRD and IEND must be consistent with the relevant FITS header.
 Side effects:
	None.
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	William Thompson, Jan 1992.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
 Version     :
	Version 1, 12 April 1993.
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxparpos.pro)

FXPOSIT

NAME:
FXPOSIT
PURPOSE:
Return the unit number of a FITS file positioned at specified extension
EXPLANATION:
The FITS file will be ready to be read at the beginning of the
specified extension. Either an extension number or extension name
can be specified. Called by headfits.pro, mrdfits.pro

Modified in March 2009 to set the /SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN keyword
when opening a file, and **may not be compatible with earlier versions**
CALLING SEQUENCE:
unit=FXPOSIT(FILE, EXT_NO_OR_NAME, /READONLY, COMPRESS=program,
UNIXPIPE=, ERRMSG= , EXTNUM= , UNIT=, /SILENT
/FPACK, /NO_FPACK

INPUT PARAMETERS:
FILE = FITS file name, scalar string. If an empty string is supplied
then the user will be prompted for the file name. The user
will also be prompted if a wild card is supplied, and more than
one file matches the wildcard.
EXT_NO_OR_NAME = Either the extension to be moved to (scalar
nonnegative integer) or the name of the extension to read
(scalar string)

RETURNS:
Unit number of file or -1 if an error is detected.

OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETER:
COMPRESS - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then then treat
the file as compressed. If 1 assume a gzipped file.
and use IDLs internal decompression facility. For Unix
compressed or bzip2 compressed files spawn off a process to
decompress and use its output as the FITS stream. If the
keyword is not 1, then use its value as a string giving the
command needed for decompression.
/FPACK - Signal that the file is compressed with the FPACK software.
http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/fitsio/fpack/ ) By default,
(FXPOSIT will assume that if the file name extension ends in
.fz that it is fpack compressed.) The FPACK software must
be installed on the system
/NO_FPACK - The unit will only be used to read the FITS header. In
that case FPACK compressed files need not be uncompressed.
LUNIT - Integer giving the file unit number. Use this keyword if
you want to override the default use of GET_LUN to obtain
a unit number.
/READONLY - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then OPENR rather
than OPENU will be used to open the FITS file. Note that
compressed files are always set to /READONLY
/SILENT If set, then suppress any messages about invalid characters
in the FITS file.

OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
EXTNUM - Nonnegative integer give the extension number actually read
Useful only if the extension was specified by name.
ERRMSG = If this keyword is present, then any error messages will be
returned to the user in this parameter rather than
depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL. If no errors are
encountered, then a null string is returned.
UNIXPIPE - If set to 1, then the FITS file was opened with a UNIX pipe
rather than with the OPENR command. This is only required
when reading a FPACK, bzip or Unix compressed file. Note
that automatic byteswapping cannnot be set for a Unix pipe,
since the SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN keyword is only available for the
OPEN command, and it is the responsibilty of the calling
routine to perform the byteswapping.
SIDE EFFECTS:
Opens and returns a file unit.
PROCEDURE:
Open the appropriate file, or spawn a command and intercept
the output.
Call FXMOVE to get to the appropriate extension.
PROCEDURE CALLS:
FXMOVE()
MODIFICATION HISTORY:
Derived from William Thompson's FXFINDEND routine.
Modified by T.McGlynn, 5-October-1994.
Modified by T.McGlynn, 25-Feb-1995 to handle compressed
files. Pipes cannot be accessed using FXHREAD so
MRD_HREAD was written.
W. Landsman 23-Apr-1997 Force the /bin/sh shell when uncompressing
T. McGlynn 03-June-1999 Use /noshell option to get rid of processes left by spawn.
Use findfile to retain ability to use wildcards
W. Landsman 03-Aug-1999 Use EXPAND_TILDE under Unix to find file
T. McGlynn 04-Apr-2000 Put reading code into FXMOVE,
additional support for compression from D.Palmer.
W. Landsman/D.Zarro 04-Jul-2000 Added test for !VERSION.OS EQ 'Win32' (WinNT)
W. Landsman 12-Dec-2000 Added /SILENT keyword
W. Landsman April 2002 Use FILE_SEARCH for V5.5 or later
W. Landsman Feb 2004 Assume since V5.3 (OPENR,/COMPRESS available)
W. Landsman,W. Thompson, 2-Mar-2004, Add support for BZIP2
W. Landsman Don't leave open file if an error occurs
W. Landsman Sep 2004 Treat FTZ extension as gzip compressed
W. Landsman Feb 2006 Removed leading spaces (prior to V5.5)
W. Landsman Nov 2006 Allow specification of extension name
Added EXTNUM, ERRMSG keywords
W. Landsman/N.Piskunov Dec 2007 Added LUNIT keyword
W. Landsman Mar 2009 OPEN with /SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN
Added UNIXPIPE output keyword
N. Rich May 2009 Check if filename is an empty string
W. Landsman May 2009 Support FPACK compressed files
Added /FPACK, /HEADERONLY keywords
W.Landsman July 2009 Deprecated /HEADERONLY add /NO_FPACK
W.Landsman July 2011 Check for SIMPLE in first 8 chars
Use gunzip to decompress Unix. Z file since compress utility
often not installed anymore)

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/fxposit.pro)

FXREAD

 NAME:
	FXREAD
 Purpose     :
	Read basic FITS files.
 Explanation :
	Read an image array from a disk FITS file.  Optionally allows the
	user to read in only a subarray and/or every Nth pixel.
 Use         :
	FXREAD, FILENAME, DATA  [, HEADER  [, I1, I2  [, J1, J2 ]]  [, STEP]]
 Inputs      :
	FILENAME = String containing the name of the file to be read.
 Opt. Inputs :
	I1,I2	 = Data range to read in the first dimension.  If passed, then
		   HEADER must also be passed.  If not passed, or set to -1,-1,
		   then the entire range is read.
	J1,J2	 = Data range to read in the second dimension.  If passed, then
		   HEADER and I1,J2 must also be passed.  If not passed, or set
		   to -1,-1, then the entire range is read.
	STEP	 = Step size to use in reading the data.  If passed, then
		   HEADER must also be passed.  Default value is 1.  Ignored if
		   less than 1.
 Outputs     :
	DATA	 = Data array to be read from the file.
 Opt. Outputs:
	HEADER	 = String array containing the header for the FITS file.
 Keywords    :
       /COMPRESS - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then then treat
                the file as gzip compressed.    By default FXREAD assumes
                the file is gzip compressed if it ends in ".gz"
	NANVALUE = Value signalling data dropout.  All points corresponding to
		   IEEE NaN (not-a-number) are set to this value.  Ignored
		   unless DATA is of type float or double-precision.
       EXTENSION = FITS extension.  It can be a scalar integer,
                indicating the extension number (extension number 0
                is the primary HDU).  It can also be a scalar string,
                indicating the extension name (EXTNAME keyword).
                Default: 0 (primary HDU)
	PROMPT	 = If set, then the optional parameters are prompted for at the
		   keyboard.
	AVERAGE	 = If set, then the array size is reduced by averaging pixels
		   together rather than by subselecting pixels.  Ignored unless
		   STEP is nontrivial.  Note:  this is much slower.
	YSTEP	 = If passed, then STEP is the step size in the 1st dimension,
		   and YSTEP is the step size in the 2nd dimension.  Otherwise,
		   STEP applies to both directions.
	NOSCALE	 = If set, then the output data will not be scaled using the
		   optional BSCALE and BZERO keywords in the FITS header.
		   Default is to scale, if and only if BSCALE and BZERO are
		   present and nontrivial.
	NOUPDATE = If set, then the optional BSCALE and BZERO keywords in the
		   optional HEADER array will not be changed.  The default is
		   to reset these keywords to BSCALE=1, BZERO=0.  Ignored if
		   NOSCALE is set.
	ERRMSG   = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		   returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		   depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		   encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		   use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXREAD, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...
       NODATA   = If set, then the array is not read in, but the
                  primary header is read.

 Calls       :
	GET_DATE, IEEE_TO_HOST, FXADDPAR, FXHREAD, FXPAR, WHERENAN
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	Groups are not supported.

	The optional parameters I1, I2, and STEP only work with one or
	two-dimensional arrays.  J1 and J2 only work with two-dimensional
	arrays.

	Use of the AVERAGE keyword is not compatible with arrays with missing
	pixels.

 Side effects:
	If the keywords BSCALE and BZERO are present in the FITS header, and
	have non-trivial values, then the returned array DATA is formed by the
	equation

			DATA = BSCALE*original + BZERO

	However, this behavior can overridden by using the /NOSCALE keyword.

	If the data is scaled, then the optional HEADER array is changed so
	that BSCALE=1 and BZERO=0.  This is so that these scaling parameters
	are not applied to the data a second time by another routine.  Also,
	history records are added storing the original values of these
	constants.  Note that only the returned array is modified--the header
	in the FITS file itself is untouched.

	If the /NOUPDATE keyword is set, however, then the BSCALE and BZERO
	keywords are not changed.  It is then the user's responsibility to
	ensure that these parameters are not reapplied to the data.  In
	particular, these keywords should not be present in any header when
	writing another FITS file, unless the user wants their values to be
	applied when the file is read back in.  Otherwise, FITS readers will
	read in the wrong values for the data array.

 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, May 1992, based in part on READFITS by W. Landsman, and
			       STSUB by M. Greason and K. Venkatakrishna.
	W. Thompson, Jun 1992, added code to interpret BSCALE and BZERO
			       records, and added NOSCALE and NOUPDATE
			       keywords.
	W. Thompson, Aug 1992, changed to call FXHREAD, and to add history
			       records for BZERO, BSCALE.
 Minimium IDL Version:
       V5.3 (uses COMPRESS keyword to OPEN)
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, May 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 17 November 1993.
		Corrected bug with AVERAGE keyword on non-IEEE compatible
		machines.
		Corrected bug with subsampling on VAX machines.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
       Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
               Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
       Version 5, Zarro (SAC/GSFC), 14 Feb 1997
               Added I/O error checking
       Version 6, 20-May-1998, David Schlegel/W. Thompson
               Allow a single pixel to be read in.
               Change the signal to read in the entire array to be -1
       Version 7 C. Markwardt 22 Sep 2003
               If the image is empty (NAXIS EQ 0), or NODATA is set, then
               return only the header.
       Version 8 W. Landsman  29 June 2004
               Added COMPRESS keyword, check for .gz extension
       Version 9, William Thompson, 19-Aug-2004
               Make sure COMPRESS is treated as a scalar
       Version 10, Craig Markwardt, 01 Mar 2004
               Add EXTENSION keyword and ability to read different
               extensions than the primary one.
       Version 11,  W. Landsamn   September 2006
               Assume since V5.5, remove VMS support
       Version 11.1,  W. Landsamn   November 2007
               Allow for possibility number of bytes requires 64 bit integer
       Version 12, William Thompson, 18-Jun-2010, update BLANK value.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxread.pro)

FXWRITE

 NAME:
	FXWRITE
 Purpose     :
	Write a disk FITS file.
 Explanation :
       Creates or appends to a disk FITS file and writes a FITS
       header, and optionally an image data array.
 Use         :
	FXWRITE, FILENAME, HEADER [, DATA ]
 Inputs      :
	FILENAME = String containing the name of the file to be written.
	HEADER	 = String array containing the header for the FITS file.
 Opt. Inputs :
	DATA	 = IDL data array to be written to the file.  If not passed,
		   then it is assumed that extensions will be added to the
		   file.
 Outputs     :
	None.
 Opt. Outputs:
	None.
 Keywords    :
	NANVALUE = Value signalling data dropout.  All points corresponding to
		   this value are set to be IEEE NaN (not-a-number).  Ignored
		   unless DATA is of type float, double-precision or complex.
	NOUPDATE = If set, then the optional BSCALE and BZERO keywords in the
		   HEADER array will not be changed.  The default is to reset
		   these keywords to BSCALE=1, BZERO=0.
       APPEND = If set, then an existing file will be appended to.
                Appending to a non-existent file will create it.  If
                a primary HDU already exists then it will be modified
                to have EXTEND = T.
	ERRMSG	 = If defined and passed, then any error messages will be
		   returned to the user in this parameter rather than
		   depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
		   encountered, then a null string is returned.  In order to
		   use this feature, ERRMSG must be defined first, e.g.

			ERRMSG = ''
			FXWRITE, ERRMSG=ERRMSG, ...
			IF ERRMSG NE '' THEN ...

 Calls       :
	CHECK_FITS, GET_DATE, HOST_TO_IEEE, FXADDPAR, FXPAR
 Common      :
	None.
 Restrictions:
	If DATA is passed, then HEADER must be consistent with it.  If no data
	array is being written to the file, then HEADER must also be consistent
	with that.  The routine FXHMAKE can be used to create a FITS header.

	If found, then the optional keywords BSCALE and BZERO in the HEADER
	array is changed so that BSCALE=1 and BZERO=0.  This is so that these
	scaling parameters are not applied to the data a second time by another
	routine.  Also, history records are added storing the original values
	of these constants.  (Other values of BZERO are used for unsigned
	integers.)

	If the /NOUPDATE keyword is set, however, then the BSCALE and BZERO
	keywords are not changed.  The user should then be aware that FITS
	readers will apply these numbers to the data, even if the data is
	already converted to floating point form.

	Groups are not supported.

 Side effects:
	HEADER may be modified.  One way it may be modified is describe
       above under NOUPDATE.  The first header card may also be
       modified to conform to the FITS standard if it does not
       already agree (i.e. use of either the SIMPLE or XTENSION
       keyword depending on whether the image is the primary HDU or
       not).
 Category    :
	Data Handling, I/O, FITS, Generic.
 Prev. Hist. :
	W. Thompson, Jan 1992, from WRITEFITS by J. Woffard and W. Landsman.
	Differences include:

		* Made DATA array optional, and HEADER array mandatory.
		* Changed order of HEADER and DATA parameters.
		* No attempt made to fix HEADER array.

	W. Thompson, May 1992, changed open statement to force 2880 byte fixed
			       length records (VMS).  The software here does not
			       depend on this file configuration, but other
			       FITS readers might.
	W. Thompson, Aug 1992, added code to reset BSCALE and BZERO records,
			       and added the NOUPDATE keyword.
 Written     :
	William Thompson, GSFC, January 1992.
 Modified    :
	Version 1, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 April 1993.
		Incorporated into CDS library.
	Version 2, William Thompson, GSFC, 31 May 1994
		Added ERRMSG keyword.
	Version 3, William Thompson, GSFC, 23 June 1994
		Modified so that ERRMSG is not touched if not defined.
	Version 4, William Thompson, GSFC, 12 August 1999
		Catch error if unable to open file.
       Version 4.1 Wayne Landsman, GSFC, 02 May 2000
               Remove !ERR in call to CHECK_FITS, Use ARG_PRESENT()
       Version 5, William Thompson, GSFC, 22 September 2004
               Recognize unsigned integer types
       Version 5.1 W. Landsman 14 November 204
               Allow for need for 64bit number of bytes
       Version 6, Craig Markwardt, GSFC, 30 May 2005
               Ability to append to existing files
 Version     :
	Version 6, 30 May 2005

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits_bintable/fxwrite.pro)

F_FORMAT

 NAME:
	F_FORMAT
 PURPOSE:
	Choose a nice floating format for displaying an array of REAL data.
 EXPLANATION:
	Called by TVLIST, IMLIST.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	fmt = F_FORMAT( minval, maxval, factor, [ length ] )

 INPUTS:
	MINVAL - REAL scalar giving the minimum value of an array of numbers
		for which one desires a nice format.
	MAXVAL - REAL scalar giving maximum value in array of numbers

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
	LENGTH - length of the output F format (default = 5)
		must be an integer scalar > 2

 OUTPUT:
	FMT - an F or I format string, e.g. 'F5.1'
	FACTOR - factor of 10 by which to multiply array of numbers to achieve
		a pretty display using format FMT.

 EXAMPLE:
	Find a nice format to print an array of numbers with a minimum of 5.2e-3
	and a maximum  of 4.2e-2.

		IDL> fmt = F_FORMAT( 5.2e-3, 4.2e-2, factor )

	yields fmt = '(F5.2)' and factor = .01, i.e. the array can be displayed
	with a F5.2 format after multiplication by 100.

 REVISION HISTORY:
	Written W. Landsman              December 1988
	Deal with factors < 1.           August 1991
	Deal with factors < 1. *and* a large range    October 1992
	Now returns In format rather than Fn.0    February, 1994
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/f_format.pro)

GALAGE

 NAME:
   GALAGE

 PURPOSE:
   Determine the age of a galaxy given its redshift and a formation redshift.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
   age = galage(z, [zform,  H0 =, k=, lambda0 =, Omega_m= , q0 =, /SILENT])'

 INPUTS:
    z - positive numeric vector or scalar of measured redshifts
    zform - redshift of galaxy formation (> z), numeric positive scalar
        To determine the age of the universe at a given redshift, set zform
        to a large number (e.g. ~1000).

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
    H0 - Hubble constant in km/s/Mpc, positive scalar, default is 70
    /SILENT - If set, then the adopted cosmological parameters are not
         displayed at the terminal.

        No more than two of the following four parameters should be
        specified.   None of them need be specified -- the adopted defaults
        are given.
    k - curvature constant, normalized to the closure density.   Default is
        0, (indicating a flat universe)
    Omega_m -  Matter density, normalized to the closure density, default
        is 0.3.   Must be non-negative
    Lambda0 - Cosmological constant, normalized to the closure density,
        default is 0.7
    q0 - Deceleration parameter, numeric scalar = -R*(R'')/(R')^2, default
        is -0.55

 OUTPUTS:
    age -  age of galaxy in years, will have the same number of elements
           as the input Z vector

 EXAMPLE:
    (1) Determine the age of a galaxy observed at z = 1.5 in a cosmology with
    Omega_matter = 0.3 and Lambda = 0.0.    Assume the formation redshift was
    at z = 25, and use the default Hubble constant (=70 km/s/Mpc)

    IDL> print,galage(1.5,25,Omega_m=0.3, Lambda = 0)
             ===> 3.35 Gyr

    (2) Plot the age of a galaxy in Gyr out to a redshift of z = 5, assuming
        the default cosmology (omega_m=0.3, lambda=0.7), and zform = 100

    IDL> z = findgen(50)/10.
    IDL> plot,z,galage(z,100)/1e9,xtit='z',ytit = 'Age (Gyr)'

 PROCEDURE:
    For a given formation time zform and a measured z, integrate dt/dz from
    zform to z. Analytic formula of dt/dz in Gardner, PASP 110:291-305, 1998
    March  (eq. 7)

 COMMENTS:
    (1) Integrates using the IDL Astronomy Library procedure QSIMP.    (The
    intrinsic IDL QSIMP() function is not called because of its ridiculous
    restriction that only scalar arguments can be passed to the integrating
    function.)    The function 'dtdz' is defined at the beginning of the
    routine (so it can compile first).

    (2) Should probably be fixed to use a different integrator from QSIMP when
    computing age from an "infinite" redshift of formation.    But using a
    large value of zform seems to work adequately.

     (3) An alternative set of IDL procedures for computing cosmological
    parameters is available at
            http://cerebus.as.arizona.edu/~ioannis/research/red/
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
    COSMO_PARAM, QSIMP
 HISTORY:
     STIS version by P. Plait (ACC)                  June 1999
     IDL Astro Version   W. Landsman (Raytheon ITSS)      April 2000
     Avoid integer overflow for more than 32767 redshifts  July 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/galage.pro)

GAL_FLAT

 NAME:
	GAL_FLAT

 PURPOSE:
	Transforms the image of a galaxy so that the galaxy appears face-on
 EXPLANATION:
	Either a nearest-neighbor approximations or a bilinear interpolation
	may  be used.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	RESULT = GAL_FLAT( image, ang, inc, [, cen, /INTERP ] )

 INPUTS:
	IMAGE  - Image to be transformed
	ANG  - Angle of major axis, counterclockwise from Y-axis, degrees
		For an image in standard orientation (North up, East left)
		this is the Position Angle
	INC - Angle of inclination of galaxy, degrees

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
	CEN - Two element vector giving the X and Y position of galaxy center
		If not supplied, then the galaxy center is assumed to coincide
		 with the image center

 INPUT KEYWORDS:
	INTERP - If present, and non-zero, then bilinear interpolation will be
		performed.  Otherwise a nearest neighbor approximation  is used.

 OUTPUTS:
	RESULT - the transformed image, same dimensions and type as IMAGE

 METHOD:
	A set of 4 equal spaced control points are corrected for inclination
	using the procedure POLYWARP.   These control points are used by
	POLY_2D to correct the whole image.

 REVISION HISTORY:
	Written by R. S. Hill, SASC Technologies Inc., 4 December 1985
	Code cleaned up a bit    W. Landsman      December 1992
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/gal_flat.pro)

GAL_UVW

 NAME:
     GAL_UVW
 PURPOSE:
     Calculate the Galactic space velocity (U,V,W) of star
 EXPLANATION:
     Calculates the Galactic space velocity U, V, W of star given its
     (1) coordinates, (2) proper motion, (3) distance (or parallax), and
     (4) radial velocity.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     GAL_UVW, U, V, W, [/LSR, RA=, DEC=, PMRA= ,PMDEC=, VRAD= , DISTANCE=
              PLX= ]
 OUTPUT PARAMETERS:
      U - Velocity (km/s) positive toward the Galactic *anti*center
      V - Velocity (km/s) positive in the direction of Galactic rotation
      W - Velocity (km/s) positive toward the North Galactic Pole
 REQUIRED INPUT KEYWORDS:
      User must supply a position, proper motion,radial velocity and distance
      (or parallax).    Either scalars or vectors can be supplied.
     (1) Position:
      RA - Right Ascension in *Degrees*
      Dec - Declination in *Degrees*
     (2) Proper Motion
      PMRA = Proper motion in RA in arc units (typically milli-arcseconds/yr)
            If given mu_alpha --proper motion in seconds of time/year - then
            this is equal to 15*mu_alpha*cos(dec)
      PMDEC = Proper motion in Declination (typically mas/yr)
     (3) Radial Velocity
      VRAD = radial velocity in km/s
     (4) Distance or Parallax
      DISTANCE - distance in parsecs
                 or
      PLX - parallax with same distance units as proper motion measurements
            typically milliarcseconds (mas)

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
      /LSR - If this keyword is set, then the output velocities will be
             corrected for the solar motion (U,V,W)_Sun = (-8.5, 13.38, 6.49)
            (Coskunoglu et al. 2011 MNRAS) to the local standard of rest.
            Note that the value of the solar motion through the LSR remains
            poorly determined.
  EXAMPLE:
      (1) Compute the U,V,W coordinates for the halo star HD 6755.
          Use values from Hipparcos catalog, and correct to the LSR
      ra = ten(1,9,42.3)*15.    & dec = ten(61,32,49.5)
      pmra = 628.42  &  pmdec = 76.65         ;mas/yr
      dis = 139    &  vrad = -321.4
      gal_uvw,u,v,w,ra=ra,dec=dec,pmra=pmra,pmdec=pmdec,vrad=vrad,dis=dis,/lsr
          ===>  u=141.2  v = -491.7  w = 93.9        ;km/s

      (2) Use the Hipparcos Input and Output Catalog IDL databases (see
      http://idlastro.gsfc.nasa.gov/ftp/zdbase/) to obtain space velocities
      for all stars within 10 pc with radial velocities > 10 km/s

      dbopen,'hipp_new,hic'      ;Need Hipparcos output and input catalogs
      list = dbfind('plx>100,vrad>10')      ;Plx > 100 mas, Vrad > 10 km/s
      dbext,list,'pmra,pmdec,vrad,ra,dec,plx',pmra,pmdec,vrad,ra,dec,plx
      ra = ra*15.                 ;Need right ascension in degrees
      GAL_UVW,u,v,w,ra=ra,dec=dec,pmra=pmra,pmdec=pmdec,vrad=vrad,plx = plx
      forprint,u,v,w              ;Display results
 METHOD:
      Follows the general outline of Johnson & Soderblom (1987, AJ, 93,864)
      except that U is positive outward toward the Galactic *anti*center, and
      the J2000 transformation matrix to Galactic coordinates is taken from
      the introduction to the Hipparcos catalog.
 REVISION HISTORY:
      Written, W. Landsman                       December   2000
      fix the bug occuring if the input arrays are longer than 32767
        and update the Sun velocity           Sergey Koposov June 2008
	   vectorization of the loop -- performance on large arrays
        is now 10 times higher                Sergey Koposov December 2008
      More recent value of solar motion WL/SK   Jan 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/gal_uvw.pro)

GAUSSIAN

 NAME:
       GAUSSIAN
 PURPOSE:
       Compute the 1-d Gaussian function and optionally the derivative
 EXPLANATION:
       Compute the 1-D Gaussian function and optionally the derivative
       at an array of points.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       y = gaussian( xi, parms,[ pderiv ])

 INPUTS:
       xi = array, independent variable of Gaussian function.

       parms = parameters of Gaussian, 2, 3 or 4 element array:
               parms[0] = maximum value (factor) of Gaussian,
               parms[1] = mean value (center) of Gaussian,
               parms[2] = standard deviation (sigma) of Gaussian.
               (if parms has only 2 elements then sigma taken from previous
               call to gaussian(), which is stored in a  common block).
               parms[3] = optional, constant offset added to Gaussian.
 OUTPUT:
       y -  Function returns array of Gaussian evaluated at xi.    Values will
            be floating pt. (even if xi is double) unless the /DOUBLE keyword
            is set.

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       /DOUBLE - set this keyword to return double precision for both
             the function values and (optionally) the partial derivatives.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       pderiv = [N,3] or [N,4] output array of partial derivatives,
               computed only if parameter is present in call.

               pderiv[*,i] = partial derivative at all xi absisca values
               with respect to parms[i], i=0,1,2,[3].


 EXAMPLE:
       Evaulate a Gaussian centered at x=0, with sigma=1, and a peak value
       of 10 at the points 0.5 and 1.5.   Also compute the derivative

       IDL> f = gaussian( [0.5,1.5], [10,0,1], DERIV )
       ==> f= [8.825,3.25].   DERIV will be a 2 x 3 array containing the
       numerical derivative at the two points with respect to the 3 parameters.

 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None
 HISTORY:
       Written, Frank Varosi NASA/GSFC 1992.
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Use machar() for machine precision, added /DOUBLE keyword,
       add optional constant 4th parameter    W. Landsman   November 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/gaussian.pro)

GCIRC

 NAME:
     GCIRC
 PURPOSE:
     Computes rigorous great circle arc distances.
 EXPLANATION:
     Input position can either be either radians, sexigesimal RA, Dec or
     degrees.   All computations are double precision.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      GCIRC, U, RA1, DC1, RA2, DC2, DIS

 INPUTS:
      U    -- integer = 0,1, or 2: Describes units of inputs and output:
              0:  everything radians
              1:  RAx in decimal hours, DCx in decimal
                       degrees, DIS in arc seconds
              2:  RAx and DCx in degrees, DIS in arc seconds
      RA1  -- Right ascension or longitude of point 1
      DC1  -- Declination or latitude of point 1
      RA2  -- Right ascension or longitude of point 2
      DC2  -- Declination or latitude of point 2

 OUTPUTS:
      DIS  -- Angular distance on the sky between points 1 and 2
              See U above for units;  double precision

 PROCEDURE:
      "Haversine formula" see
      http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Great-circle_distance

 NOTES:
       (1) If RA1,DC1 are scalars, and RA2,DC2 are vectors, then DIS is a
       vector giving the distance of each element of RA2,DC2 to RA1,DC1.
       Similarly, if RA1,DC1 are vectors, and RA2, DC2 are scalars, then DIS
       is a vector giving the distance of each element of RA1, DC1 to
       RA2, DC2.    If both RA1,DC1 and RA2,DC2 are vectors then DIS is a
       vector giving the distance of each element of RA1,DC1 to the
       corresponding element of RA2,DC2.    If the input vectors are not the
       same length, then excess elements of the longer ones will be ignored.

       (2) The function SPHDIST provides an alternate method of computing
        a spherical distance.

       (3) The haversine formula can give rounding errors for antipodal
       points.

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
      None

   MODIFICATION HISTORY:
      Written in Fortran by R. Hill -- SASC Technologies -- January 3, 1986
      Translated from FORTRAN to IDL, RSH, STX, 2/6/87
      Vector arguments allowed    W. Landsman    April 1989
      Prints result if last argument not given.  RSH, RSTX, 3 Apr. 1998
      Remove ISARRAY(), V5.1 version        W. Landsman   August 2000
      Added option U=2                      W. Landsman   October 2006
      Use double precision for U=0 as advertised R. McMahon/W.L.  April 2007
      Use havesine formula, which has less roundoff error in the
             milliarcsecond regime      W.L. Mar 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/gcirc.pro)

GCNTRD

  NAME:
       GCNTRD
  PURPOSE:
       Compute the stellar centroid by Gaussian fits to marginal X,Y, sums
 EXPLANATION:
       GCNTRD uses the DAOPHOT "FIND" centroid algorithm by fitting Gaussians
       to the marginal X,Y distributions.     User can specify bad pixels
       (either by using the MAXGOOD keyword or setting them to NaN) to be
       ignored in the fit.    Pixel values are weighted toward the center to
       avoid contamination by neighboring stars.

  CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GCNTRD, img, x, y, xcen, ycen, [ fwhm , /SILENT, /DEBUG, MAXGOOD = ,
                            /KEEPCENTER ]

  INPUTS:
       IMG - Two dimensional image array
       X,Y - Scalar or vector integers giving approximate stellar center

  OPTIONAL INPUT:
       FWHM - floating scalar; Centroid is computed using a box of half
               width equal to 1.5 sigma = 0.637* FWHM.  GCNTRD will prompt
               for FWHM if not supplied

  OUTPUTS:
       XCEN - the computed X centroid position, same number of points as X
       YCEN - computed Y centroid position, same number of points as Y

       Values for XCEN and YCEN will not be computed if the computed
       centroid falls outside of the box, or if there are too many bad pixels,
       or if the best-fit Gaussian has a negative height.   If the centroid
       cannot be computed, then a  message is displayed (unless /SILENT is
       set) and XCEN and YCEN are set to -1.

  OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORDS:
       MAXGOOD=  Only pixels with values less than MAXGOOD are used to in
               Gaussian fits to determine the centroid.    For non-integer
               data, one can also flag bad pixels using NaN values.
       /SILENT - Normally GCNTRD prints an error message if it is unable
               to compute the centroid.   Set /SILENT to suppress this.
       /DEBUG - If this keyword is set, then GCNTRD will display the subarray
               it is using to compute the centroid.
       /KeepCenter  By default, GCNTRD first convolves a small region around
              the supplied position with a lowered Gaussian filter, and then
              finds the maximum pixel in a box centered on the input X,Y
              coordinates, and then extracts a new box about this maximum
              pixel.   Set the /KeepCenter keyword  to skip the convolution
              and finding the maximum pixel, and instead use a box
              centered on the input X,Y coordinates.
  PROCEDURE:
       Unless /KEEPCENTER is set, a small area around the initial X,Y is
       convolved with a Gaussian kernel, and the maximum pixel is found.
       This pixel is used as the  center of a square, within
       which the centroid is computed as the Gaussian least-squares fit
       to the  marginal sums in the X and Y directions.

  EXAMPLE:
       Find the centroid of a star in an image im, with approximate center
       631, 48.    Assume that bad (saturated) pixels have a value of 4096 or
       or higher, and that the approximate FWHM is 3 pixels.

       IDL> GCNTRD, IM, 631, 48, XCEN, YCEN, 3, MAXGOOD = 4096
  MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written June 2004, W. Landsman  following algorithm used by P. Stetson
             in DAOPHOT2.
       Modified centroid computation (as in IRAF/DAOFIND) to allow shifts of
      more than 1 pixel from initial guess.    March 2008
      First perform Gaussian convolution prior to finding maximum pixel
      to smooth out noise  W. Landsman  Jan 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/gcntrd.pro)

GEO2ECI

 NAME:
     GEO2ECI

 PURPOSE:
     Convert geographic spherical coordinates to Earth-centered inertial coords

 EXPLANATION:
     Converts from geographic spherical coordinates [latitude, longitude,
     altitude] to ECI (Earth-Centered Inertial) [X,Y,Z] rectangular
     coordinates.    JD time is also needed.

     Geographic coordinates are in degrees/degrees/km
     Geographic coordinates assume the Earth is a perfect sphere, with radius
       equal to its equatorial radius.
     ECI coordinates are in km from Earth center.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ECIcoord=geo2eci(gcoord,JDtime)

 INPUT:
       gcoord: geographic [latitude,longitude,altitude], or a an array [3,n]
                of n such coordinates
       JDtime: Julian Day time, double precision. Can be a 1-D array of n
               such times.

 KEYWORD INPUTS:
       None

 OUTPUT:
       a 3-element array of ECI [X,Y,Z] coordinates, or an array [3,n] of
                n such coordinates, double precision

 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None

 PROCEDURES USED:
       CT2LST - Convert Local Civil Time to Local Mean Sidereal Time

 EXAMPLES:

       IDL> ECIcoord=geo2eci([0,0,0], 2452343.38982663D)
       IDL> print,ECIcoord
      -3902.9606       5044.5548       0.0000000

       (The above is the ECI coordinates of the intersection of the equator and
       Greenwich's meridian on 2002/03/09 21:21:21.021)

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Pascal Saint-Hilaire (shilaire@astro.phys.ethz.ch)
             on 2002/05/14

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/geo2eci.pro)

GEO2GEODETIC

 NAME:
       GEO2GEODETIC

 PURPOSE:
       Convert from geographic/planetographic to geodetic coordinates
 EXPLANATION:
       Converts from geographic (latitude, longitude, altitude) to geodetic
       (latitude, longitude, altitude).  In geographic coordinates, the
           Earth is assumed a perfect sphere with a radius equal to its equatorial
               radius. The geodetic (or ellipsoidal) coordinate system takes into
               account the Earth's oblateness.

       Geographic and geodetic longitudes are identical.
               Geodetic latitude is the angle between local zenith and the equatorial plane.
               Geographic and geodetic altitudes are both the closest distance between
               the satellite and the ground.

       The PLANET keyword allows a similar transformation for the other
       planets  (planetographic to planetodetic coordinates).

       The EQUATORIAL_RADIUS and POLAR_RADIUS keywords allow the
       transformation for any ellipsoid.

       Latitudes and longitudes are expressed in degrees, altitudes in km.

       REF: Stephen P.  Keeler and Yves Nievergelt, "Computing geodetic
       coordinates", SIAM Rev. Vol. 40, No. 2, pp. 300-309, June 1998

       Planetary constants from "Allen's Astrophysical Quantities",
       Fourth Ed., (2000)

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       ecoord=geo2geodetic(gcoord,[ PLANET=,EQUATORIAL_RADIUS=, POLAR_RADIUS=])

 INPUT:
       gcoord = a 3-element array of geographic [latitude,longitude,altitude],
                or an array [3,n] of n such coordinates.


 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       PLANET = keyword specifying planet (default is Earth).   The planet
                may be specified either as an integer (1-9) or as one of the
                (case-independent) strings 'mercury','venus','earth','mars',
                'jupiter','saturn','uranus','neptune', or 'pluto'

       EQUATORIAL_RADIUS : Self-explanatory. In km. If not set, PLANET's
                value is used.
       POLAR_RADIUS : Self-explanatory. In km. If not set, PLANET's value is
                used.

 OUTPUT:
      a 3-element array of geodetic/planetodetic [latitude,longitude,altitude],
        or an array [3,n] of n such coordinates, double precision.

 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None

 RESTRICTIONS:

       Whereas the conversion from geodetic to geographic coordinates is given
       by an exact, analytical formula, the conversion from geographic to
       geodetic isn't. Approximative iterations (as used here) exist, but tend
       to become less good with increasing eccentricity and altitude.
       The formula used in this routine should give correct results within
       six digits for all spatial locations, for an ellipsoid (planet) with
       an eccentricity similar to or less than Earth's.
       More accurate results can be obtained via calculus, needing a
       non-determined amount of iterations.
       In any case,
          IDL> PRINT,geodetic2geo(geo2geodetic(gcoord)) - gcoord
       is a pretty good way to evaluate the accuracy of geo2geodetic.pro.

 EXAMPLES:

       Locate the geographic North pole, altitude 0., in geodetic coordinates
       IDL> geo=[90.d0,0.d0,0.d0]
       IDL> geod=geo2geodetic(geo); convert to equivalent geodetic coordinates
       IDL> PRINT,geod
       90.000000       0.0000000       21.385000

       As above, but for the case of Mars
       IDL> geod=geo2geodetic(geo,PLANET='Mars')
       IDL> PRINT,geod
       90.000000       0.0000000       18.235500

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Pascal Saint-Hilaire (shilaire@astro.phys.ethz.ch), May 2002
       Generalized for all solar system planets by Robert L. Marcialis
               (umpire@lpl.arizona.edu), May 2002
       Modified 2002/05/18, PSH: added keywords EQUATORIAL_RADIUS and
               POLAR_RADIUS

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/geo2geodetic.pro)

GEO2MAG()

 NAME:
       GEO2MAG()

 PURPOSE:
       Convert from geographic to geomagnetic coordinates
 EXPLANATION:
       Converts from GEOGRAPHIC (latitude,longitude) to GEOMAGNETIC (latitude,
       longitude).   (Altitude remains the same)

       Latitudes and longitudes are expressed in degrees.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       mcoord=geo2mag(gcoord)

 INPUT:
       gcoord = a 2-element array of geographic [latitude,longitude], or an
                array [2,n] of n such coordinates.

 KEYWORD INPUTS:
       None

 OUTPUT:
       a 2-element array of magnetic [latitude,longitude], or an array [2,n]
         of n such coordinates

 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None

 EXAMPLES:
       geographic coordinates of magnetic south pole

       IDL> mcoord=geo2mag([79.3,288.59])
       IDL> print,mcoord
       89.999992      -173.02325

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Pascal Saint-Hilaire (Saint-Hilaire@astro.phys.ethz.ch),
            May 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/geo2mag.pro)

GEODETIC2GEO

 NAME:
       GEODETIC2GEO

 PURPOSE:
       Convert from geodetic (or planetodetic) to geographic coordinates
 EXPLANATION:
       Converts from geodetic (latitude, longitude, altitude) to geographic
       (latitude, longitude, altitude).  In geographic coordinates, the
       Earth is assumed a perfect sphere with a radius equal to its equatorial
       radius. The geodetic (or ellipsoidal) coordinate system takes into
       account the Earth's oblateness.

       Geographic and geodetic longitudes are identical.
       Geodetic latitude is the angle between local zenith and the equatorial
       plane.   Geographic and geodetic altitudes are both the closest distance
       between the satellite and the ground.

       The PLANET keyword allows a similar transformation for the other
       planets  (planetodetic to planetographic coordinates).

       The EQUATORIAL_RADIUS and POLAR_RADIUS keywords allow the
       transformation for any ellipsoid.

       Latitudes and longitudes are expressed in degrees, altitudes in km.

       REF: Stephen P.  Keeler and Yves Nievergelt, "Computing geodetic
       coordinates", SIAM Rev. Vol. 40, No. 2, pp. 300-309, June 1998
       Planetary constants from "Allen's Astrophysical Quantities",
       Fourth Ed., (2000)

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       gcoord = geodetic2geo(ecoord, [ PLANET= ] )

 INPUT:
       ecoord = a 3-element array of geodetic [latitude,longitude,altitude],
                or an array [3,n] of n such coordinates.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       PLANET = keyword specifying planet (default is Earth).   The planet
                may be specified either as an integer (1-9) or as one of the
                (case-independent) strings 'mercury','venus','earth','mars',
                'jupiter','saturn','uranus','neptune', or 'pluto'

       EQUATORIAL_RADIUS : Self-explanatory. In km. If not set, PLANET's value
                is used.   Numeric scalar
       POLAR_RADIUS : Self-explanatory. In km. If not set, PLANET's value is
                 used.   Numeric scalar

 OUTPUT:
       a 3-element array of geographic [latitude,longitude,altitude], or an
         array [3,n] of n such coordinates, double precision

       The geographic and geodetic longitudes will be identical.
 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None

 EXAMPLES:

       IDL> geod=[90,0,0]  ; North pole, altitude 0., in geodetic coordinates
       IDL> geo=geodetic2geo(geod)
       IDL> PRINT,geo
       90.000000       0.0000000      -21.385000

       As above, but the equivalent planetographic coordinates for Mars
       IDL> geod=geodetic2geo(geod,PLANET='Mars');
       IDL> PRINT,geod
       90.000000       0.0000000      -18.235500

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written by Pascal Saint-Hilaire (shilaire@astro.phys.ethz.ch),
                  May 2002

       Generalized for all solar system planets by Robert L. Marcialis
               (umpire@lpl.arizona.edu), May 2002

       Modified 2002/05/18, PSH: added keywords EQUATORIAL_RADIUS and
                POLAR_RADIUS

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/geodetic2geo.pro)

GETDECOMPOSEDSTATE

  Provides a device-independent way to get the color decomposition state of the
  current graphics device.

 :Categories:
    Graphics, Utilities

 :Returns:
     Returns a 1 if color decomposition is turned on and a 0 if indexed color is used.

 :Keywords:
     Depth: out, optional, type=integer
         The depth of the color display. Typically 8 for indexed color devices
         and 24 for true-color devices.

 :Examples:
       IDL> currentState = GetDecomposedState()

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 12 December 2010 as a better named wrapper for DECOMPOSEDCOLOR program. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2010, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/getdecomposedstate.pro)

GETOPT

 NAME:
	GETOPT
 PURPOSE:
	Convert a string supplied by the user into a valid scalar or vector
 EXPLANATION:
	Distinct elements in the string may be
	separated by either a comma or a space.  The output scalar
	or vector can be specified to be  either  integer or floating
	point.   A null string is converted to a zero.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     option = GETOPT( input, [ type, numopt, COUNT = ])

 INPUTS:
	input   - string that was input by user in response to a prompt
		Arithmetic operations can be included in the string (see
		examples)

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
	type    - Either an "I" (integer) or an "F" (floating point) specifying
		the datatype of the output vector.  Default is floating point

	numopt  - number of values expected by calling procedure
		If less than NUMOPT values are supplied the output
		vector will be padded with zeros.
 OUTPUTS:
	option  - scalar or vector containing the numeric conversion of
		the fields in the string INPUT.  If NUMOPT is not
		supplied, the number of elements in OPTION will
		equal the number of distinct fields in INPUT.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       Count - integer giving the number of values actually returned by
               GETOPT.   If the input is invalid then COUNT is set to -1
 NOTES:
	(1) If an input is invalid, Count is set to -1 and the result is set
		to 999.
	(2) GETOPT uses the execute function to interpret the user string.
	 	Therefore GETOPT itself cannot be called with the EXECUTE
		function.
	(3) GETOPT has a hard limit of 10 tokens in the input string.

 EXAMPLES:
	(1)   a = getopt( '3.4,5*4 ', 'I' )    yields   a = [ 3, 20]
	(2)   a = getopt( '5/2.', 'F', 5)      yields   a = [2.5,0.,0.,0.,0.]
	(3)   a = getopt( '2*3,5,6')           yields   a = [6.,5.,6.]

 REVISON HISTORY:
	written by B. Pfarr, STX, 5/6/87
	change value of !ERR W. Landsman   STX,  6/30/88
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/getopt.pro)

GETPRIMARYSCREENSIZE

 :Description:
   Provides a way to get the screen size of the primary monitor, especially when
   there are several being used.

 :Categories:
    Graphics

 :Params:
    none

 :Keywords:
     exclude_taskbar: in, optional, boolean, default=0
         Set this keyword to exclude the taskbar from the monitor size.
         This keyword is ignored on all but Windows machines.

 :Author:
       Dick Jackson, www.dick-jackson.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 8 March 2011. DJ
        Modified to only use IDLsysMonitorInfo for IDL 6.3 and higher. 23 Feb 2012. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/getprimaryscreensize.pro)

GETPRO

 NAME:
     GETPRO
 PURPOSE:
     Search !PATH for a procedure, and copy into user's working directory
 EXPLANATION:
     Extract a procedure from an IDL Library or directory given in the
     !PATH  system variable and place it in the current default directory
     (presumably to be edited by the user).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     GETPRO, [ proc_name ]          ;Find PROC_NAME in !PATH and copy

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
     proc_name - Character string giving the name of the IDL procedure or
               function.  Do not give an extension.   If omitted,
               the program will prompt for PROC_NAME.

 OUTPUTS:
     None.

 SIDE EFFECTS:
      A file with the extension .pro and a name given by PROC_NAME will
      be created on the user's directory.

 PROCEDURE:
      The FILE_WHICH() function is used to locate the procedure in the IDL
      !PATH.     When found, FILE_COPY is used to
      copy the procedure into the user's current default directory.    If not
      found in !PATH, then the ROUTINE_INFO() function is used to determine
      if it is an intrinsic IDL procedure.

 EXAMPLE:
       Put a copy of the USER library procedure CURVEFIT on the current
       directory

       IDL> getpro, 'CURVEFIT'

 RESTRICTIONS:
       User will be unable to obain source code for a native IDL function
       or procedure, or for a FORTRAN or C routine added with CALL_EXTERNAL.
       User must have write privilege to the current directory

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
      ZPARCHECK
 REVISION HISTORY:
      Written W. Landsman, STX Corp.   June 1990
      Now use intrinsic EXPAND_PATH() command  W. Landsman November 1994
      Use ROUTINE_NAMES() to check for intrinsic procs  W. Landsman July 95
      Update for Windows/IDL     W. Landsman      September 95
      Check if procedure is in current directory  W. Landsman  June 1997
      Use ROUTINE_INFO instead of undocumented ROUTINE_NAMES W.L. October 1998
      Use FILE_WHICH() to locate procedure W. Landsman May 2006
      Assume since V5.5, remove VMS support  W. Landsman Sep 2006
      Assume since V6.0, use file_basename() W.Landsman Feb 2009
      Test for .sav file, more robust test for write privilege W.L. Jul 2010

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/getpro.pro)

GETPSF

 NAME:
	GETPSF
 PURPOSE:
	To generate a point-spread function (PSF) from observed stars.
 EXPLANATION:
	The PSF is represented as a 2-dimensional Gaussian
	(integrated over each pixel) and a lookup table of residuals.
	The lookup table and Gaussian parameters are output in a FITS
	image file.   The PSF FITS file created by GETPSF can be
	read with the procedure RDPSF.      Adapted from the 1986 STSDAS
	version of DAOPHOT

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	GETPSF, image, xc, yc, apmag, sky, [ronois, phpadu, gauss, psf,
			idpsf, psfrad, fitrad, psfname, /DEBUG ]

 INPUTS:
	IMAGE  - input image array
	XC     - input vector of x coordinates (from FIND), these should be
		IDL (first pixel is (0,0)) convention.
	YC     - input vector of y coordinates (from FIND)
	APMAG  - vector of magnitudes (from APER), used for initial estimate
		of gaussian intensity.  If APMAG is multidimensional, (more
		than 1 aperture was used in APER) then the first aperture
		is used.
	SKY    - vector of sky values (from APER)

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
	The user will be prompted for the following parameters if not supplied.

	RONOIS - readout noise per pixel, (in electrons, or equivalent photons)
	PHPADU - photons per analog digital unit, used to scale the data
		numbers in IMAGE into photon units
	IDPSF  - subscripts of the list of stars created by
		APER which will be used to define the PSF.   Stars whose
		centroid does not fall within PSFRAD of the edge of the frame,
		or for which a Gaussian fit requires more than 25 iterations,
		will be ignored when creating the final PSF.
	PSFRAD - the scalar radius, in pixels, of the circular area within
		which the PSF will be defined.   This should be slightly larger
		than the radius of the brightest star that one will be
		interested in.
	FITRAD - the scalar radius, in pixels of the circular area used in the
		least-square star fits.  Stetson suggest that FITRAD should
		approximately equal to the FWHM, slightly less for crowded
		fields.  (FITRAD must be smaller than PSFRAD.)
	PSFNAME- Name of the FITS file that will contain the table of residuals,
		and the best-fit Gaussian parameters.    This file is
		subsequently required for use by NSTAR.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
	GAUSS  - 5 element vector giving parameters of gaussian fit to the
		first PSF star
		GAUSS(0) - height of the gaussian (above sky)
		GAUSS(1) - the offset (in pixels) of the best fitting gaussian
			and the original X centroid
		GAUSS(2) - similiar offset from the Y centroid
		GAUSS(3) - Gaussian sigma in X
		GAUSS(4) - Gaussian sigma in Y
	PSF    - 2-d array of PSF residuals after a Gaussian fit.

 PROCEDURE:
	GETPSF fits a Gaussian profile to the core of the first PSF star
	and generates a look-up table of the residuals of the
	actual image data from the Gaussian fit.  If desired, it will then
	fit this PSF to another star (using PKFIT) to determine its precise
	centroid, scale the same Gaussian to the new star's core, and add the
	differences between the actual data and the scaled Gaussian to the
	table of residuals.   (In other words, the Gaussian fit is performed
       only on the first star.)

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
	DEBUG - if this keyword is set and non-zero, then the result of each
		fitting iteration will be displayed.

 PROCEDURES CALLED
	DAOERF, MAKE_2D, MKHDR, RINTER(), PKFIT, STRNUMBER(), STRN(), WRITEFITS

 REVISON HISTORY:
	Adapted from the 1986 version of DAOPHOT in STSDAS
	IDL Version 2  W Landsman           November 1988
	Use DEBUG keyword instead of !DEBUG  W. Landsman       May 1996
	Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/getpsf.pro)

GETROT

 NAME:
    GETROT
 PURPOSE:
     Return the rotation and plate scale of an image from its FITS header
 EXPLANATION:
     Derive the counterclockwise rotation angle, and the X and Y scale
     factors of an image, from a FITS image header.   The input parameter
     may be either a FITS image header or an astrometry structure (as
     obtained by extast.pro)

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     GETROT, Hdr, [ Rot, CDelt, /SILENT, DEBUG =  ]
             or
     GETROT, Astr, Rot, CDelt, /SILENT, DEBUG = ]

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
     HDR - FITS Image header (string array).  Program will extract the
             astrometry structure
              or
     ASTR -  ASTROMETRY structure, of the type returned by EXTAST.
             See the documentation for EXTAST.PRO for details.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT PARAMETERS:
       ROT - Scalar giving the counterclockwise rotation of NORTH in DEGREES
               from the +Y axis of the image.
       CDELT- 2 element vector giving the scale factors in DEGREES/PIXEL in
               the X and Y directions.   CDELT[1] is always positive, whereas
               CDELT[0] is negative for a normal left-handed coordinate system,
               and positive for a right-handed system.

       If no output variables are supplied (or /DEBUG is set), then GETROT
       will display the rotation and plate scale at the terminal.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD

       ALT - single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying an alternate
             astrometry system present in the FITS header.   See extast.pro
             for more information on the ALT keyword.    Ignored if an
             astrometry structure rather than FITS header is supplied.
       DEBUG - if DEBUG is set, GETROT will print the rotation for both the
           X and Y axis when these values are unequal.  If DEBUG is set to 2,
           then the output parameter ROT will contain both X and Y rotations.

       /SILENT - if set, then do not provide a warning about a right-handed
           coordinate system
 PROCEDURE:
       If the FITS header already contains CDELT (and CD or CROTA) keyword,
       (as suggested by the Calabretta & Greisen (2002, A&A, 395, 1077) FITS
       standard) then this is used for the scale factor.

       If the header contains CD keywords but no CDELT keywords (as in IRAF
       headers) then the scale factor is derived from the CD matrix.

       In case of skew (different rotations of the X and Y axes), the rotations
       are averaged together if they are less than 2 degrees.   Otherwise,
       a warning is given and the X rotation is used.

 PROCEDURES USED:
       EXTAST, GSSS_EXTAST
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written W. Landsman STX January 1987
       Option to return both rotations added.  J. D. Offenberg, STX, Aug 1991
       Use new astrometry structure   W. Landsman  Mar 1994
       Recognize a GSSS header        W. Landsman  June 1994
       Correct rotation determination with unequal CDELT values WL October 1998
       Consistent conversion between CROTA and CD matrix  WL  October 2000
       Correct CDELT computations for rotations near 90 deg WL November 2002
       Preserve sign in the CDELT output  WL June 2003
       Check if latitude/longitude reversed in CTYPE  WL  February 2004
       Fix problem in latitude check  M.Lombardi/W.Landsman Sep 2004
       Added ALT keyword W. Landsman May 2005
       Account for any rotation of the native system by examining the value
        of LONGPOLE       H. Taylor/W. Landsman
       Account for case where X,Y rotations differ by 2*!pi WL. Aug 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/getrot.pro)

GETTOK

 NAME:
	GETTOK
 PURPOSE:
	Retrieve the first part of a (vector) string up to a specified character
 EXPLANATION:
	GET TOKen - Retrieve first part of string until the character char
	is encountered.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
	token = gettok( st, char, [ /EXACT, /NOTRIM ] )

 INPUT:
	char - character separating tokens, scalar string

 INPUT-OUTPUT:
	st - string to get token from (on output token is removed unless
            /NOTRIM is set), scalar or vector

 OUTPUT:
	token - extracted string value is returned, same dimensions as st
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       /EXACT -  The default behaviour of GETTOK is to remove any leading
              blanks and (if the token is a blank) convert tabs to blanks.
              Set the /EXACT keyword to skip these steps and leave the
              input string unchanged before searching for the  character
              tokens.

      /NOTRIM - if set, then the input string is left unaltered
 EXAMPLE:
	If ST is ['abc=999','x=3.4234'] then gettok(ST,'=') would return
	['abc','x'] and ST would be left as ['999','3.4234']

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       REPCHR()
 HISTORY
	version 1  by D. Lindler APR,86
	Remove leading blanks    W. Landsman (from JKF)    Aug. 1991
       V5.3 version, accept vector input   W. Landsman February 2000
       Slightly faster implementation  W. Landsman   February 2001
       Added EXACT keyword  W. Landsman March 2004
       Assume since V5.4, Use COMPLEMENT keyword to WHERE W. Landsman Apr 2006
       Added NOTRIM keyword W. L. March 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/gettok.pro)

GETWRD

 NAME:
       GETWRD
 PURPOSE:
       Return the n'th word from a text string.
 CATEGORY:
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       wrd = getwrd(txt, n, [m])
 INPUTS:
       txt = text string to extract from.         in
         The first element is used if txt is an array.
       n = word number to get (first = 0 = def).  in
       m = optional last word number to get.      in
 KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       Keywords:
         LOCATION = l.  Return word n string location.
         DELIMITER = d. Set word delimiter (def = space & tab).
         /LAST means n is offset from last word.  So n=0 gives
           last word, n=-1 gives next to last, ...
           If n=-2 and m=0 then last 3 words are returned.
         /NOTRIM suppresses whitespace trimming on ends.
         NWORDS=n.  Returns number of words in string.
 OUTPUTS:
       wrd = returned word or words.              out
 COMMON BLOCKS:
       getwrd_com
 NOTES:
       Note: If a NULL string is given (txt="") then the last string
             given is used.  This saves finding the words again.
             If m > n wrd will be a string of words from word n to
             word m.  If no m is given wrd will be a single word.
             n<0 returns text starting at word abs(n) to string end
             If n is out of range then a null string is returned.
             See also nwrds.
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Ray Sterner,  6 Jan, 1985.
       R. Sterner, Fall 1989 --- converted to SUN.
       R. Sterner, Jan 1990 --- added delimiter.
       R. Sterner, 18 Mar, 1990 --- added /LAST.
       R. Sterner, 31 Jan, 1991 --- added /NOTRIM.
       R. Sterner, 20 May, 1991 --- Added common and NULL string.
       R. Sterner, 13 Dec, 1992 --- Made tabs equivalent to spaces.
       R. Sterner,  4 Jan, 1993 --- Added NWORDS keyword.
       R. Sterner, 2001 Jan 15 --- Fixed to use first element if not a scalar.
       Johns Hopkins University Applied Physics Laboratory.

 Copyright (C) 1985, Johns Hopkins University/Applied Physics Laboratory
 This software may be used, copied, or redistributed as long as it is not
 sold and this copyright notice is reproduced on each copy made.  This
 routine is provided as is without any express or implied warranties
 whatsoever.  Other limitations apply as described in the file disclaimer.txt.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/jhuapl/getwrd.pro)

GET_COORDS

 NAME:
       GET_COORDS

 PURPOSE:
       Converts a string with angular coordinates  to floating point values.
 EXPLANATION:
       Although called by ASTRO.PRO, this is a general purpose routine.
       The user may input as floating point or sexigesimal.  If user inputs
       calling procedure's job to convert hours to degrees if needed.
       Since the input string is parsed character-by-character, ANY character
       that is not a digit, minus sign or decimal point may be used as a
       delimiter, i.e. acceptable examples of user input are:

       1:03:55 -10:15:31
       1 3 55.0 -10 15 31
       1*3 55              -10abcd15efghij31
       1.065278  hello   -10.25861

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GET_COORDS, Coords, [ PromptString, NumVals, INSTRING =, /QUIET ]

 OPTIONAL INPUT:
       PromptString - A string to inform the user what data are to be entered

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       InString - a keyword that, if set, is assumed to already contain the
               input data string to be parsed.  If this keyword is set, then
               the user is not prompted for any input.
       /Quiet - if set the program won't printout any error messages, but bad
               input is still flagged by Coords=[-999,-999].

 OUTPUT:
       Coords - a 2 element floating array containing the coordinates.  The
               vector [-999,-999] is returned if there has been an error.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       NumVals - the number of separate values entered by the user:  2 if the
               user entered the coordinates as floating point numbers, 6 if
               the user entered the coordinates as sexigesimal numbers.  Some
               calling procedures might find this information useful (e.g., to
               to print some output in the same format as the user's input).

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written by Joel Parker, 5 MAR 90
       Included InString and Quiet keywords.  Cleaned up some of the code and
       comments.  JWmP,  16 Jun 94

*******************************************************************************
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/get_coords.pro)

GET_DATE

 NAME:
       GET_DATE
 PURPOSE:
       Return the (current) UTC date in CCYY-MM-DD format for FITS headers
 EXPLANATION:
       This is the format required by the DATE and DATE-OBS keywords in a
       FITS header.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GET_DATE, FITS_date, [ in_date, /OLD, /TIMETAG ]
 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       in_date - string (scalar or vector) containing dates in IDL
            systime() format (e.g. 'Tue Sep 25 14:56:14 2001')
 OUTPUTS:
       FITS_date = A scalar character string giving the current date.    Actual
               appearance of dte depends on which keywords are supplied.

       No Keywords supplied - dte is a 10 character string with the format
               CCYY-MM-DD where <CCYY> represents a calendar year, <MM> the
               ordinal number of a calendar month within the calendar year,
               and <DD> the ordinal number of a day within the calendar month.
       /TIMETAG set - dte is a 19 character string with the format
               CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss where <hh> represents the hour in the day,
                <mm> the minutes, <ss> the seconds, and the literal 'T' the
               ISO 8601 time designator
       /OLD set - dte is an 8 character string in DD/MM/YY format

 INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /TIMETAG - Specify the time to the nearest second in the DATE format
       /OLD - Return the DATE format formerly (pre-1997) recommended for FITS
               Note that this format is now deprecated because it uses only
               a 2 digit representation of the year.
 EXAMPLE:
       Add the current date to the DATE keyword in a FITS header,h

       IDL> GET_DATE,dte
       IDL> sxaddpar, h, 'DATE', dte, 'Date header was created'

 NOTES:
       (1) A discussion of the DATExxx syntax in FITS headers can be found in
       http://www.cv.nrao.edu/fits/documents/standards/year2000.txt

       (2) Those who wish to use need further flexibility in their date
       formats (e.g. to use TAI time) should look at Bill Thompson's time
       routines in http://sohowww.nascom.nasa.gov/solarsoft/gen/idl/time

 PROCEDURES USED:
       DAYCNV - Convert Julian date to Gregorian calendar date
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written      W. Landsman          March 1991
       Major rewrite to write new DATExxx syntax  W. Landsman  August 1997
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Work after year 2000 even with /OLD keyword W. Landsman January 2000
       Don't need to worry about TIME_DIFF since V5.4 W. Landsman July 2001
       Assume since V5.4, remove LOCAL_DIFF keyword  W. Landsman April 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/get_date.pro)

GET_EQUINOX

 NAME:
       GET_EQUINOX
 PURPOSE:
       Return the equinox value from a FITS header.
 EXPLANATION:
       Checks for 4 possibilities:

       (1)  If the EQUINOX keyword is found and has a numeric value, then this
               value is returned
       (2)  If the EQUINOX keyword has the values 'J2000' or 'B1950', then
               either 2000. or 1950. is returned.
       (3)  If the EQUINOX keyword is not found, then GET_EQUINOX will return
               the EPOCH keyword value.   This usage of EPOCH is disparaged.
       (4)  If neither EQUINOX no EPOCH is found, then the RADESYS keyword
               (or the deprecated RADECSYS keyword) is checked.   If the value
               is 'ICRS' or 'FK5' then 2000 is is returned, if it is 'FK4' then
               1950 is returned.

       According Calabretta & Greisen (2002, A&A, 395, 1077) the EQUINOX should
       be written as a numeric value, as in format (1).   However, in older
       FITS headers, the EQUINOX might have been written using formats (2) or
       (3).
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Year = GET_EQUINOX( Hdr, [ Code ] )

 INPUTS:
       Hdr - FITS Header, string array, will be searched for the EQUINOX
               (or EPOCH) keyword.

 OUTPUT:
       Year - Year of equinox in FITS header, numeric scalar
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT:
       Code - Result of header search, scalar
               -1 - EQUINOX, EPOCH or RADECSYS keyword not found in header
               0 - EQUINOX found as a numeric value
               1 - EPOCH keyword used for equinox (not recommended)
               2 - EQUINOX found as  'B1950'
               3 - EQUINOX found as  'J2000'
               4 - EQUINOX derived from value of RADESYS or RADECSYS keyword
                   'ICRS', 'FK5' ==> 2000,  'FK4' ==> 1950
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       ALT -  single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying which
             astrometry system to use in the FITS header.    The default is
             to use the primary astrometry or ALT = ''.   If /ALT is set,
             then this is equivalent to ALT = 'A'.   See Section 3.3 of
             Greisen & Calabretta (2002, A&A, 395, 1061) for information about
             alternate astrometry keywords.
 PROCEDURES USED:
       ZPARCHECK, SXPAR()
 NOTES:
       Technically, RADESYS = 'ICRS' does not specify any equinox, but can be
       assumed to be equivalent to J2000 for all but highest-precision work.
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written  W. Landsman        STX              March, 1991
       Don't use !ERR          W. Landsman   February 2000
       N = 1 for check of EPOCH keyword, not 0 S. Ott July 2000
       Added ALT keyword, recognize RADESYS along with deprecated RADECSYS
              W. Landsman   Sep 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/get_equinox.pro)

GET_JULDATE

 NAME:
    GET_JULDATE
 PURPOSE:
     Return the current Julian Date

 EXPLANATION:
     In V5.4, GET_JULDATE became completely obsolete with the introduction
     of the /UTC keyword to SYSTIME().   So GET_JULDATE,jd is equivalent to
     jd = SYSTIME(/JULIAN,/UTC).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GET_JULDATE,jd

 INPUTS:
       None

 OUTPUTS:
       jd = Current Julian Date, double precision scalar

 EXAMPLE:
       Return the current hour, day, month and year as integers

       IDL> GET_JULDATE, JD                  ;Get current Julian date
       IDL> DAYCNV, JD, YR, MON, DAY, HOURS  ;Convert to hour,day month & year

 METHOD:
       A call is made to SYSTIME(/JULIAN,/UTC).

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written Wayne Landsman                March, 1991
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Assume since V5.4 Use /UTC keyword to SYSTIME()  W. Landsman April 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/get_juldate.pro)

GLACTC

 NAME:
       GLACTC
 PURPOSE:
        Convert between celestial and Galactic (or Supergalactic) coordinates.
 EXPLANATION:
       Program to convert right ascension (ra) and declination (dec) to
       Galactic longitude (gl) and latitude (gb) (j=1) or vice versa (j=2).

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GLACTC, ra, dec, year, gl, gb, j, [ /DEGREE, /FK4, /SuperGalactic ]

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
       year     equinox of ra and dec, scalar       (input)
       j        direction of conversion     (input)
               1:  ra,dec --> gl,gb
               2:  gl,gb  --> ra,dec

 INPUTS OR OUTPUT PARAMETERS: ( depending on argument J )
       ra       Right ascension, hours (or degrees if /DEGREES is set),
                         scalar or vector
       dec      Declination, degrees,scalar or vector
       gl       Galactic longitude, degrees, scalar or vector
       gb       Galactic latitude, degrees, scalar or vector

       All results forced double precision floating.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       /DEGREE - If set, then the RA parameter (both input and output) is
                given in degrees rather than hours.
       /FK4 - If set, then the celestial (RA, Dec) coordinates are assumed
              to be input/output in the FK4 system.    By default,  coordinates
              are assumed to be in the FK5 system.    For B1950 coordinates,
              set the /FK4 keyword *and* set the year to 1950.
       /SuperGalactic - If set, the GLACTC returns SuperGalactic coordinates
              as defined by deVaucouleurs et al. (1976) to account for the
              local supercluster. The North pole in SuperGalactic coordinates
              has Galactic coordinates l = 47.47, b = 6.32, and the origin is
              at Galactic coordinates l = 137.37, b= 0

 EXAMPLES:
       Find the Galactic coordinates of Altair (RA (J2000): 19 50 47
       Dec (J2000): 08 52 06)

       IDL> glactc, ten(19,50,47),ten(8,52,6),2000,gl,gb,1
       ==> gl = 47.74, gb = -8.91

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       BPRECESS, JPRECESS, PRECESS
 HISTORY:
       FORTRAN subroutine by T. A. Nagy, 21-MAR-78.
       Conversion to IDL, R. S. Hill, STX, 19-OCT-87.
       Modified to handle vector input, E. P. Smith, GSFC, 14-OCT-94
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added DEGREE keyword, C. Markwardt, Nov 1999
       Major rewrite, default now FK5 coordinates, added /FK4 keyword
       use external precession routines    W. Landsman   April 2002
       Add /Supergalactic keyword W. Landsman  September 2002
       Fix major bug when year not 2000 and /FK4 not set W. Landsman July 2003

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/glactc.pro)

GLACTC_PM

 NAME:
       GLACTC_PM
 PURPOSE:
        Convert between celestial and Galactic (or Supergalactic) proper
        motion (also converts coordinates).
 EXPLANATION:
       Program to convert proper motion in equatorial coordinates (ra,dec)
       to proper motion in Galactic coordinates (gl, gb) or Supergalacic
       Coordinates  (sgl,sgb)  or back to equatorial coordinates (j=2).
       The proper motion unit is arbitrary, but be sure to set /MUSTAR if
       units are the projection of the proper motion on the RA, Dec axis.
       It does precession on the coordinates but does not
       take care of precession of the proper motions which is usually a
       very small effect.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GLACTC_PM, ra, dec, mu_ra,mu_dec,year, gl, gb, mu_gl, mu_gb, j,
                  [ /DEGREE, /FK4, /SuperGalactic, /mustar ]

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
       year     equinox of ra and dec, scalar       (input)
       j        direction of conversion     (input)
		1:  ra,dec,mu_ra,mu_dec --> gl,gb,mu_gl,mu_gb
		2:  gl,gb,mu_gl,mu_gb  --> ra,dec,mu_ra,mu_dec

 INPUTS OR OUTPUT PARAMETERS: ( depending on argument J )
       ra       Right ascension, hours (or degrees if /DEGREES is set),
                         scalar or vector.
       dec      Declination, degrees,scalar or vector
       mu_ra    right ascension proper motion any proper motion unit
					(angle/time)
       mu_dec    declination proper motion in any proper motion unit
					(angle/time)
       gl       Galactic longitude, degrees, scalar or vector
       gb       Galactic latitude, degrees, scalar or vector
       mu_gl    galactic longitude proper motion in any time unit
       mu_gb    galactic latitude proper motion in any time unit
       All results forced double precision floating.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD PARAMETERS:
       /DEGREE - If set, then the RA parameter (both input and output) is
                given in degrees rather than hours.
       /FK4 - If set, then the celestial (RA, Dec) coordinates are assumed
              to be input/output in the FK4 system.    By default,  coordinates
              are assumed to be in the FK5 system.    For B1950 coordinates,
              set the /FK4 keyword *and* set the year to 1950.
       /SuperGalactic - If set, the GLACTC returns SuperGalactic coordinates
              as defined by deVaucouleurs et al. (1976) to account for the
              local supercluster. The North pole in SuperGalactic coordinates
              has Galactic coordinates l = 47.47, b = 6.32, and the origin is
              at Galactic coordinates l = 137.37, b= 0
	/mustar - if set then input and output of mu_ra and mu_dec are the
                projections of mu in the ra or dec direction rather than
		the d(ra)/dt or d(mu)/dt.  So mu_ra becomes mu_ra*cos(dec)
               and mu_gl becomes mu_gl*cos(gb).

 EXAMPLES:
       Find the SuperGalactic proper motion of M33 given its
       equatorial proper motion mu* =(-29.3, 45.2) microas/yr.
       Where the (*) indicates ra component is actual mu_ra*cos(dec)
		(Position: RA (J2000): 01 33 50.9, Dec (J2000): 30 39 36.8)

       IDL> glactc_pm, ten(1,33,50.9),ten(30,39,36.8),-29.3,45.2, 2000,$
				sgl,sgb,mu_sgl,mu_sgb,1,/Supergalactic,/mustar
       ==> SGL = 328.46732 deg, SGB = -0.089896901 deg,
			mu_sgl = 33.732 muas/yr, mu_gb = 41.996 muas/yr.
         And for the roundtrip:
       IDL> glactc_pm, ra,dec,mu_ra,mu_dec,2000,$
       IDL>  sgl,sgb,mu_sgl,mu_sgb,2,/Supergalactic,/mustar
        ==> ra=1.5641376 hrs., dec= 30.660277 deg,
            mu_ra= -29.300000 muas/yr, mu_dec=i 45.200000 muas/yr

 PROCEDURE CALLS:
       BPRECESS, JPRECESS, PRECESS
 HISTORY:
       Written                Ed Shaya, U of MD,  Oct 2009.
       Adapted from GLACTC  to make proper motion transformations,
       Correct occasional sign error in galactic longitude E. Shaya  Nov 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/glactc_pm.pro)

GROUP

 NAME:
      GROUP
 PURPOSE:
      Assign stars with non-overlapping PSF profiles into distinct groups
 EXPLANATION:
      Part of the IDL-DAOPHOT sequence

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      GROUP, X, Y, RCRIT, NGROUP

 INPUTS:
      X - vector, giving X coordinates of a set of stars.
      Y - vector, giving Y coordinates of a set of stars.
           If X and Y are input as integers, then they will be converted to
           floating point
      RCRIT - scalar, giving minimum distance between stars of two
               distinct groups.  Stars less than this distance from
               each other are always in the same group.    Stetson suggests
               setting the critical distance equal to the PSF radius +
               the Fitting radius.

 OUTPUTS:
      NGROUP - integer vector, same number of elements as X and Y,
               giving a group number for each star position.  Group
               numbering begins with 0.

 METHOD:
      Each position is initially given a unique group number.  The distance
      of each star is computed against every other star.   Those distances
      less than RCRIT are assigned the minimum group number of the set.   A
      check is then made to see if any groups have merged together.

 PROCEDURES USED:
      REM_DUP()

 REVISION HISTORY:
      Written W. Landsman  STX                  April, 1988
      Major revision to properly merge groups together  W. Landsman   Sep 1991
      Work for more than 32767 points    W. Landsman  March 1997
      Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
      Avoid overflow if X and Y are integers      W. Landsman  Feb. 1999

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/idlphot/group.pro)

GSSSADXY

 NAME:
      GSSSADXY
 PURPOSE:
       Converts RA and DEC (J2000) to (X,Y) for an STScI GuideStar image.
 EXPLANATION:
       The sky coordinates may be printed and/or returned in variables.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GSSSADXY, GSA, Ra,Dec, [ X, Y, /Print ]

 INPUT:
       GSA - the GSSS Astrometry structure created by GSSSEXTAST
       RA  - the RA coordinate(s) in *degrees*, scalar or vector
       DEC - the DEC coordinate(s) in *degrees*, scalar or vector

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       /PRINT - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then coordinates will be
               displayed at the terminal
 OUTPUT:
       X - the corresponding X pixel coordinate(s), double precision
       Y - the corresponding Y pixel coordinate(s), double precision

       X and Y will be in IDL convention (first pixel 0,0)
 EXAMPLE:
       Given a FITS header, hdr, from the STScI Guidestar Survey, determine
       the X,Y coordinates of 3C 273 (RA = 12 29 6.7  +02 03 08)

       IDL> GSSSEXTAST, hdr, gsa          ;Extract astrometry structure
       IDL> GSSSADXY, gsa, ten(12,29,6.7)*15,ten(2,3,8),/print

 NOTES:
       For most purpose users can simply use ADXY, which will call GSSSADXY
       if it is passed a GSSS header.

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       ASTDISP - Print RA, Dec in standard format
 HISTORY:
       10-JUL-90 Version 1 written by Eric W. Deutsch
               Derived from procedures written by Brian McLean
       Vectorized code   W. Landsman        March, 1991
       14-AUG-91 Fixed error which caused returned X and Y to be .5 pixels too
               large.  Now X,Y follows same protocol as ADXY.
       June 1994 - Dropped PRFLAG parameter, added /PRINT  W. Landsman (HSTX)
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       29-JUN-99 Added support for AMD[X,Y]1[2-3] for DSS images by E. Deutsch
       Reduce memory requirements for large arrays D. Finkbeiner April 2004

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/gsssadxy.pro)

GSSSEXTAST

 NAME:
      GSSSEXTAST

 PURPOSE:
      Extract IDL astrometry structure from a ST Guide Star Survey FITS header

 EXPLANATION:
      This procedure extracts the astrometry information from a ST Guide
      Star Survey FITS header and places it in an IDL structure for
      subsequent use with GSSSxyad and GSSSadxy.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      GSSSExtast, hdr, astr, noparams
 INPUT:
      h - the GSSS FITS header
 OUTPUT:
      astr  - Structure containing the GSSS Astrometry information
               .CTYPE  =  ['RA---GSS','DEC--GSS']
               .CRVAL = plate center Ra, Dec (from PLTRAH, PLTRAM etc.)
               .XLL,.YLL = offsets lower lefthand corner
               .AMDX, .AMDY = 12 transformation coefficients
               .XSZ,.YSZ = X and Y pixel size in microns
               .PLTSCL = plate scale in arc sec/mm
               .PPO3, .PPO6 - orientation coefficients
 NOTES:
      Most users should use EXTAST rather than this procedure.   EXTAST will
      call GSSSEXTAST if supplied with GSSS FITS header.

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
      SXPAR() - Extract parameter values from a FITS header
 HISTORY:
       01-JUL-90 Version 1 written by Eric W. Deutsch
       Code derived from Software by Brian McLean
       20-AUG-91 Modified to Double Precision Variables.  E. Deutsch
       June 94 Change astrometry tags to better agree with EXTAST  W. Landsman
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       29-JUN-99 Added support for AMD[X,Y]1[2-3] for DSS images by E. Deutsch
       Eliminate use of obsolete !ERR  W. Landsman    February 2000

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/gsssextast.pro)

GSSSXYAD

 NAME:
       GSSSXYAD
 PURPOSE:
       Convert (X,Y) coordinates in a STScI Guide Star image to RA and Dec
 EXPLANATION:
       The sky coordinates may be printed and/or returned in variables.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GSSSxyad, gsa, x, y, ra, dec, [ /PRINT ]
 INPUT:
       GSA  - The GSSS Astrometry structure extracted from a FITS header
              by GSSSEXTAST
       X - The X pixel coordinate(s) of the image, scalar or vector
       Y - The Y pixel coordinate(s) of the image, scalar or vector

 OUTPUT:
       RA - The RA coordinate of the given pixel(s) in *degrees*
       DEC - The DEC coordinate of the given pixel(s) in *degrees*

       Both RA and Dec will be returned as double precision

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
       /PRINT - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then coordinates will be
               displayed at the terminal
 EXAMPLE:
       Given a FITS header,hdr, from a GSSS image, print the astronomical
       coordinates of (X,Y) = (200.23, 100.16) at the terminal

       IDL> GSSSExtast, hdr, gsa        ;Extract astrometry structure
       IDL> GSSSxyad, gsa, 200.23, 100.16, /print

 NOTES:
       For most purpose users can simply use XYAD, which will call GSSSXYAD
       if it is passed a GSSS header.

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       ASTDISP - print RA, Dec in a standard format
 HISTORY:
       01-JUL-90 Version 1 written by Eric W. Deutsch
       Vectorized Code   W. Landsman        March, 1991
       14-AUG-91 Fixed error which caused returned RA and DEC to be off by
       -.5 pixels in both X,Y.  Now X,Y follows same protocol as ADXY.
       20-AUG-91 Modified to use AstDisp procedure.
       June 94 Added /PRINT keyword instead of PRFLAG W. Landsman June 94
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       29-JUN-99 Added support for AMD[X,Y]1[2-3] for DSS images by E. Deutsch

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/gsssxyad.pro)

GSSS_STDAST

 NAME:
      GSSS_STDAST

 PURPOSE:
      Insert the closest tangent projection astrometry into an GSSS Image

 DESCRIPTION:
       This procedure takes a header with GSSS (ST Guide Star Survey)
       astrometry and writes a roughly equivalent tangent projection
       astrometry into the header.     One might want to do this if (1)
       one needs to use software which does not recognize the GSSS astrometric
       parameters or (2) if the the image to be transformed, since the
       highly nonlinear GSSS solution does not transform easily.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       GSSS_STDAST, H, [Xpts, Ypts]

 INPUT - OUTPUT:
       H -  FITS header (string array) containing GSSS astrometry.
       GSSS_STDAST will write the roughly equivalent tangent projection
               astrometry solution into H.
 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       xpts, ypts -- Vectors giving the X and Y positions of the three
               reference points used to find approximate tangent projection.
               Default is Xpts = [0.2,0.8,0.5], Ypts = [0.2, 0.4, 0.8]
 METHOD:
       The procedures GSSSXYAD is used to exactly determine the RA and Dec
       at 3 reference points.    STARAST is then used to find the tangent
       projection astrometry that best matches these reference points.

 NOTES:
       Images from the STScI server (http://archive.stsci.edu/dss/) contain
       both a GSSS polynomial plate solution and an approximate WCS tangent
       projection.    The value  of the WCSNAME keyword in the FITS header
       is 'DSS'.    If WCSNAME = "DSS' then the more accurate DSS astrometry
       is extracted by EXTAST    This procedure changes the value of WCSNAME
       to 'DSS_TANGENT' to indicate that the tangent solution should be used.

       Some early GSSS images (before the 1994 CD-Rom) used keywords CRPIXx
       rather than CNPIXx.    The GSSS astrometry in these images could be
       corrupted by this procedure as the CRPIXx values will be altered.

       The tangent is only a approximation of the nonlinear GSSS astrometry,
       but is generally accurate to about 0.1 pixels on a 1024 x 1024 image.

 PROCEDURES USED:
       GSSSEXTAST, GSSSXYAD, STARAST, PUTAST, SXADDHIST, SXDELPAR

 HISTORY:
       13-AUG-91 Version 2 written from MAKEASTGSSS  Eric Deutsch (STScI)
       Delete CDELT* keywords from header   W. Landsman      May 1994
       Remove call to BUILDAST  W. Landsman                  Jan, 1995
       Added optional Xpts, Ypts parameters   E. Deutsch     Oct, 1995
       Add WCSNAME   W. Landsman                             Nov 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/gsss_stdast.pro)

HADEC2ALTAZ

  NAME:
     HADEC2ALTAZ
  PURPOSE:
      Converts Hour Angle and Declination to Horizon (alt-az) coordinates.
  EXPLANATION:
      Can deal with NCP/SCP singularity.    Intended mainly to be used by
      program EQ2HOR

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
      HADEC2ALTAZ, ha, dec, lat ,alt ,az [ /WS ]

 INPUTS
     ha -  the local apparent hour angle, in DEGREES, scalar or vector
     dec -  the local apparent declination, in DEGREES, scalar or vector
     lat -  the local latitude, in DEGREES, scalar or vector

 OUTPUTS
     alt - the local apparent altitude, in DEGREES.
     az  - the local apparent azimuth, in DEGREES, all results in double
           precision
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUT:
      /WS - Set this keyword for the output azimuth to be measured West from
            South.    The default is to measure azimuth East from North.

 EXAMPLE:
     What were the apparent altitude and azimuth of the sun when it transited
     the local meridian at Pine Bluff Observatory (Lat=+43.07833 degrees) on
     April 21, 2002?   An object transits the local meridian at 0 hour angle.
     Assume this will happen at roughly 1 PM local time (18:00 UTC).

     IDL> jdcnv, 2002, 4, 21, 18., jd  ; get rough Julian date to determine
                                       ;Sun ra, dec.
     IDL> sunpos, jd, ra, dec
     IDL> hadec2altaz, 0., dec, 43.078333, alt, az

       ===> Altitude alt = 58.90
            Azimuth  az = 180.0

 REVISION HISTORY:
      Written  Chris O'Dell Univ. of Wisconsin-Madison May 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/hadec2altaz.pro)

HASIMAGEMAGICK

 :Description:
   Searches for the ImageMagick "convert" command to see if ImageMagick is available
   on the system.

 :Categories:
    Utilities

 :Params:
    none.

 :Keywords:
     version: out, optional, type=string
        Returns the version number of the ImageMagick convert command, if found.

 :Examples:
    Used to determine if the ImageMagick convert command is available::
       IDL> available = SearchForImageMagick(Version=version)
       IDL> IF available THEN Print, version

 :Author:
       FANNING SOFTWARE CONSULTING::
           David W. Fanning
           1645 Sheely Drive
           Fort Collins, CO 80526 USA
           Phone: 970-221-0438
           E-mail: david@idlcoyote.com
           Coyote's Guide to IDL Programming: http://www.idlcoyote.com

 :History:
     Change History::
        Written, 17 January 2011. DWF.

 :Copyright:
     Copyright (c) 2011, Fanning Software Consulting, Inc.

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/coyote/hasimagemagick.pro)

HASTROM

 NAME:
       HASTROM
 PURPOSE:
       Transformation of an image to align it with a reference image
 EXPLANATION:
       A  transformation is applied (using POLY_2D) to an image so that
       its astrometry is identical with that in a reference header.  This
       procedure can be used to align two images.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HASTROM, oldim, oldhd, newim, newhd, refhd, [MISSING =, INTERP = ]
                            or
       HASTROM, oldim, oldhd, refhd, [MISSING =, INTERP ={0,1,2}, NGRID =,
                                      CUBIC =, DEGREE = ]

 INPUTS:
       OLDIM - Image array to be manipulated.  If only 3 parameters are
               supplied then OLDIM and OLDHD will be modified to contain
               the output image array and header
       OLDHD - FITS header array for OLDIM, containing astrometry parameters
       REFHD - Reference header, containing astrometry parameters.  OLDIM
               will be rotated, shifted, and compressed or expanded until
               its astrometry matches that in REFHD.
 OUTPUTS:
       NEWIM - Image array after transformation has been performed.
               The dimensions of NEWIM will be identical to the NAXIS1 and
               NAXIS2 keywords specified in REFHD.  Regions on the reference
               image that do not exist in OLDIM can be assigned a value with
               the MISSING keyword.
       NEWHD - Updated FITS image header associated with NEWIM

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       MISSING - Set this keyword to a scalar value which will be assigned
               to pixels in the output image which are out of range of the
               supplied imput image.  If not supplied, then linear
               extrapolation is used.   See the IDL manual on POLY_2D.
               ***NOTE: A bug was introduced into the POLY_2D function in IDL
               V5.5 (fixed in V6.1) such that the MISSING keyword
               may not work properly with floating point data***
       INTERP - Scalar, one of 0, 1, or 2 determining type of interpolation
               0 nearest neighbor, 1 (default) bilinear interpolation,
               2 cubic interpolation.
       CUBIC - a scalar value between -1 and 0 specifying cubic interpolation
               with the specified value as the cubic interpolation parameter.
              (see poly_2d for info).    Setting CUBIC to a value greater
               than zero is equivalent to setting CUBIC = -1.
       NGRID -  Integer scalar specifying the number of equally spaced grid
               points on each axis to use to specify the transformation.
               The value of NGRID must always be greater than DEGREE + 1.
               The default is DEGREE + 2 which equals 3 (9 total points) for
               DEGREE=1 (linear warping).
       DEGREE - Integer scalar specifying the degree of the transformation.
               See the routine POLYWARP for more info.   Default =
               1 (linear transformation) unless polynomial ('SIP') distortion
               parameters are present in either the input or reference FITS
               header.    In that case, the default degree is equal to the
               degree of the distortion polynomial.
 OPTIONAL OUTPUT KEYWORD:
       ERRMSG - If this keyword is supplied, then any error messages will be
               returned to the user in this parameter rather than depending on
               on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.   If no errors are encountered
               then a null string is returned.
 NOTES:
       (1) The 3 parameter calling sequence is less demanding on virtual
               memory.
       (2) The astrometry in OLDHD will be precessed to match the equinox
                given in REFHD.
       (3) If an ST Guidestar image is used for the reference header, then the
                output header will be converted to standard astrometry.
 EXAMPLE:
       Suppose one has an image array, IM, and an associated FITS header H.
       One desires to warp the image array so that it is aligned with another
       image with a FITS header, HREF.    Both headers contain astrometry info.
       Set pixel values to 0 where there is no overlap between the input and
       reference image, and use linear interpolation (default)

       IDL> hastrom, IM, H, HREF, MISSING = 0

 PROCEDURES USED:
       ad2xy, check_FITS, extast, get_EQUINOX(), gsssextast, hprecess,
       putast, sxaddpar, sxaddhist, sxpar(), xy2ad, zparcheck

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written  W. Landsman, STX Co.              Feb, 1989
       Updated to CHECK_FITS                      Dec, 1991
       New astrometry keywords                    Mar, 1994
       Recognize GSSS header   W. Landsman        June, 1994
       Added CUBIC keyword     W. Landsman        March, 1997
       Accept INTERP=0, Convert output GSS header to standard astrometry
                               W. Landsman        June 1998
       Remove calls to obsolete !ERR system variable   March 2000
       Added ERRMSG output keyword  W. Landsman    April 2000
       Need to re-extract astrometry after precession  W. Landsman Nov. 2000
       Check for distortion parameters in headers, add more FITS HISTORY
       information                        W. Landsman   February 2005
       Use different coefficient for nearest neighbor to avoid half-pixel
       shift with POLY_2D      W. Landsman   Aug 2006
       Return ERRMSG if no overlap between images  W. Landsman  Nov 2007
       Use V6.0 notation  W. Landsman  Jan 2012

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/hastrom.pro)

HBOXAVE

 NAME:
       HBOXAVE
 PURPOSE:
       Box average an image array and update the FITS header array
 EXPLANATION:
       The function BOXAVE() is used.  This procedure is recommended for
       integer images when photometric precision is desired, because it
       performs intermediate steps using REAL*4 arithmetic.   Otherwise, the
       procedure HREBIN is much faster.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HBOXAVE, Oldim, Oldhd, Newim, Hewhd, box
               or
       HBOXAVE, Oldim, Oldhd, box

 INPUTS:
       Oldim - the original image array
       Oldhd - the original image FITS header, string array

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       box - the box size to be used, integer scalar.  If omitted, then
               HBOXAVE will prompt for this parameter.

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
       Newim - the image after boxaveraging
       Newhd - header for newim containing updated astrometry info
               If output parameters are not supplied, the program
               will modify the input parameters OLDIM and OLDHD
               to contain the new array and updated header.
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUT:
       ERRMSG - If this keyword is supplied, then any error mesasges will be
               returned to the user in this parameter rather than depending on
               on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.   If no errors are encountered
               then a null string is returned.

 PROCEDURE:
       The parameters BSCALE, NAXIS1, NAXIS2, CRPIX1, and CRPIX2 and
       the CD (or CDELT) parameters are updated for the new FITS header.

 EXAMPLE:
       Compress the image in a FITS file 'image.fits' by a factor of 4 and
       update the astrometry in the FITS header

       IDL> im = readfits('image.fits',hdr)    ;Read FITS file into IDL arrays
       IDL> hboxave, im, hdr, 4                ;Boxaverage by 4
       IDL> writefits,'image.fits',im,hdr      ;Write a new FITS file

 CALLED PROCEDURES:
       CHECK_FITS - Check that the FITS header is appropriate to the image
       BOXAVE() - Performs box averaging of an image
       SXPAR(), SXADDPAR - Read and write FITS keyword values

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, Aug. 1986 W. Landsman, STI Corp.
       IDLV2 changes, sxaddpar format keyword added, J. Isensee, July,1990
       Fix 0.5 pixel offset in new CRPIX computation W. Landsman, Dec, 1991
       Update BSCALE even if no astrometry present   W. Landsman, May 1997
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added ERRMSG keyword, Use double formatting   W. Landsman   April 2000
       Recognize PC matrix astrometry format    W. Landsman   December 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/hboxave.pro)

HCONGRID

 NAME:
       HCONGRID
 PURPOSE:
       CONGRID an image and update astrometry in a FITS header
 EXPLANATION:
       Expand or contract an image using CONGRID and update the
       associated FITS header array.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HCONGRID, oldhd                       ;Update FITS header only
       HCONGRID, oldim, oldhd, [ newim, newhd, newx, newy, /HALF_HALF
                                 CUBIC = , INTERP=, OUTSIZE=, ERRMSG=, ALT= ]

 INPUTS:
       OLDIM - the original image array
       OLDHD - the original image FITS header, string array

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       NEWX - size of the new image in the X direction
       NEWY - size of the new image in the Y direction
               The OUTSIZE keyword can be used instead of the
               NEWX, NEWY parameters

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
       NEWIM - the image after expansion or contraction with CONGRID
       NEWHD - header for newim containing updated astrometry info
               If output parameters are not supplied, the program
               will modify the input parameters OLDIM and OLDHD
               to contain the new array and updated header.

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
      ALT - Single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying which astrometry
          system to modify in the FITS header.    The default is to use the
          primary astrometry of ALT = ' '.    See Greisen and Calabretta (2002)
          for information about alternate astrometry keywords.

       CUBIC - If set and non-zero, then cubic interpolation is used.   Valid
               ranges are  -1 <= Cubic < 0.   Setting /CUBIC is equivalent to
               CUBIC = -1 and also equivalent to INTERP = 2.   See INTERPOLATE
               for more info.    Setting CUBIC = -0.5 is recommended.
       ERRMSG - If this keyword is supplied, then any error mesasges will be
               returned to the user in this parameter rather than depending on
               on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.   If no errors are encountered
               then a null string is returned.
       /HALF_HALF - Due to edge effects, the default behaviour of CONGRID is
           to introduce a slight shift in the image center.  Craig Markwardt
           (http://cow.physics.wisc.edu/~craigm/idl/misc.html) has written
           a modified version of CONGRID called CMCONGRID that when used with
           the /HALF_HALF keyword eliminates any shift.   The use of the
           /HALF keyword emulates CMCONGRID and eliminates any shift in the
           image centroid.
       INTERP   - 0 for nearest neighbor, 1 for bilinear interpolation
               (default), 2 for cubic (=-1) interpolation.
       OUTSIZE - Two element integer vector which can be used instead of the
               NEWX and NEWY parameters to specify the output image dimensions
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUT:
       ERRMSG - If this keyword is supplied, then any error mesasges will be
               returned to the user in this parameter rather than depending on
               on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.   If no errors are encountered
               then a null string is returned.
 PROCEDURE:
       Expansion or contraction is done using the CONGRID function, unless
       HALF_HALF is set.

       The parameters BSCALE, NAXIS1, NAXIS2, CRPIX1, and CRPIX2 and
       the CD (or CDELT) parameters are updated for the new header.

 NOTES:
       A FITS header can be supplied as the first parameter without having
       to supply an image array.   The astrometry in the FITS header will be
       updated to be appropriate to the specified image size.

       If the FITS header contains astrometry from a ST Guide Star image,
       then the astrometry will be converted to an approximately equivalent
       tangent projection before applying CONGRID.
 EXAMPLE:
       Congrid an 512 x 512 image array IM and FITS header H to size 300 x 300
       using cubic interpolation.   Use the HALF_HALF keyword to avoid
       a shift of the image centroid

       IDL> hcongrid, IM ,H, OUT = [300, 300], CUBIC = -0.5, /HALF

       The variables IM and H will be modified to the new image size.

 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       CHECK_FITS, CONGRID(), EXTAST, GSSS_STDAST, SXADDHIST,
       SXADDPAR, SXPAR(), ZPARCHECK
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, Aug. 1986 W. Landsman, STI Corp.
       Added interp keywords, J. Isensee, July, 1990
       Add cubic interpolation W. Landsman HSTX   January 1994
       Recognize a GSSS FITS header   W. Landsman   June 1994
       Fix case where header but not image supplied  W. Landsman  May 1995
       Remove call to SINCE_VERSION()   W. Landsman   March 1996
       Assume since IDL V3.5, add CUBIC keyword      W. Landsman   March 1997
       Update BSCALE even if no astrometry present   W. Landsman   May 1997
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Added HALF_HALF keyword  W. Landsman  February 2000
       Added ERRMSG keyword, use double precision formatting W.L.  April 2000
       Recognize PC00n00m astrometry format  W. Landsman   December 2001
       Now works when both /INTERP and /HALF are set W. Landsman January 2002
       Fix output astrometry for non-equal plate scales for PC matrix or
       CROTA2 keyword, added ALT keyword.   W. Landsman May 2005
       Update distortion parameters if present  W. Landsman January 2008
       Don't update BSCALE/BZERO for unsigned integer W.Landsman Mar 2008

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/hcongrid.pro)

HEADFITS

 NAME:
       HEADFITS
 PURPOSE:
       Read a FITS (primary or extension) header into a string array.
 EXPLANATION:
       HEADFITS() supports several types of compressed files including
       gzip (.gz), Unix compressed (.Z), Bzip2 (.bz2) or FPACK (.fz
       http://heasarc.gsfc.nasa.gov/fitsio/fpack/ )

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       Result = HEADFITS(Filename/Fileunit ,[ ERRMSG =, EXTEN= , COMPRESS=,
                                            /SILENT ])

 INPUTS:
       Filename = String containing the name of the FITS file to be read.
                If set to an empty string, then user will be prompted for name.
                File names ending in '.gz' are assumed to be gzip'ed compressed
                and under Unix file names ending in '.Z' are assumed to be
                Unix compressed, and file names ending in .bz2 are assumed to
                be bzip2 compressed.    If this default behaviour is not
                sufficient then use the COMPRESS keyword.
                            or
       Fileunit - A scalar integer specifying the unit of an already opened
                  FITS file.  The unit will remain open after exiting
                  HEADFITS().  There are two possible reasons for choosing
                  to specify a unit number rather than a file name:
          (1) For a FITS file with many extensions, one can move to the
              desired extensions with FXPOSIT() and then use HEADFITS().  This
              is more efficient that repeatedly starting at the beginning of
              the file.
          (2) For reading a FITS file across a Web http: address after opening
              the unit with the SOCKET procedure.
 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
      EXTEN  = Either an integer scalar, specifying which FITS extension to
               read, or a scalar string specifying the extension name (stored
               in the EXTNAME keyword).   For example, to read the header of
               the first extension set EXTEN = 1.   Default is to read the
               primary FITS header  (EXTEN = 0).    The EXTEN keyword cannot
               be used when a unit number is supplied instead of a file name.
     COMPRESS - If this keyword is set and non-zero, then treat the file
              as compressed.  If 1 assume a gzipped file.   Use IDL's
              internal decompression facilities for gzip files, while for
              Unix or bzip2 compression spawn off a process to decompress and
              use its output as the FITS stream.  If the keyword is not 1,
              then use its value as a string giving the command needed for
              decompression.   See FXPOSIT for more info.
     /SILENT - If set, then suppress any warning messages about invalid
              characters in the FITS file.
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUT:
       ERRMSG	= If this keyword is present, then any error messages will be
                 returned to the user in this parameter rather than
                 depending on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.  If no errors are
                 encountered, then a null string is returned.

 OUTPUTS:
       Result of function = FITS header, string array

 EXAMPLE:
       Print the main FITS header of a file 'test.fits' into a string
       variable, h

       IDL>  print, headfits( 'test.fits')

       Print the second extension header of a gzip compressed FITS file
       'test.fits.gz'.  Use HPRINT for pretty format

       IDL> hprint, headfits( 'test.fits.gz', ext=2)

       Read the extension named CALSPEC

       IDL> hprint,headfits('test.fits.gz',ext='CALSPEC')

 PROCEDURES CALLED
       FXPOSIT(), MRD_HREAD
       The version of fxposit.pro must be post- May 2009.
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       adapted by Frank Varosi from READFITS by Jim Wofford, January, 24 1989
       Keyword EXTEN added, K.Venkatakrishna, May 1992
       Make sure first 8 characters are 'SIMPLE'  W. Landsman October 1993
       Check PCOUNT and GCOUNT   W. Landsman    December 1994
       Major rewrite, work for Unix gzip files,   W. Landsman  April 1996
       Added COMPRESS keyword  W. Landsman   April 2000
       Added ERRMSG keyword    W. Landsman   July 2000
       Added /SILENT keyword   W. Landsman    December 2000
       Option to read a unit number rather than file name W.L    October 2001
       Test output status of MRD_HREAD call October 2003 W. Landsman
       Allow extension to be specified by name Dec 2006 W. Landsman
       No need to uncompress FPACK compressed files  May 2009 W. Landsman
       Use V6.0 notation   W.L.   Feb. 2011

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/fits/headfits.pro)

HELIO

 NAME:
      HELIO
 PURPOSE:
      Compute (low-precision) heliocentric coordinates for the planets.
 EXPLANATION:
      The mean orbital elements for epoch J2000 are used.   These are derived
      from a 250 yr least squares fit of the DE 200 planetary ephemeris to a
      Keplerian orbit where each element is allowed to vary linearly with
      time.  For dates between 1800 and 2050, this solution fits the
      terrestrial planet orbits to ~25" or better, but achieves only ~600"
      for Saturn.

      Use PLANET_COORDS (which calls HELIO) to get celestial (RA, Dec)
      coordinates of the planets
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HELIO, JD, LIST, HRAD, HLONG, HLAT, [/RADIAN]
 INPUTS:
       JD = Julian date, double precision scalar or vector
       LIST = List of planets array.  May be a single number.
               1 = merc, 2 = venus, ... 9 = pluto.

 OUTPUTS:
       HRAD = array of Heliocentric radii (A.U).
       HLONG = array of Heliocentric (ecliptic) longitudes (degrees).
       HLAT = array of Heliocentric latitudes (degrees).
             These output parameters will be dimensioned Nplanet by Ndate,
             where Nplanet is the number of elements of list, and Ndate is
             the number of elements of JD.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       /RADIAN - If set, then the output longitude and latitude are given in
                 radians.
 EXAMPLE:
       (1) Find the current heliocentric positions of all the planets

        IDL> GET_JULDATE, jd      ;Get current Julian date
        IDL> HELIO,jd,indgen(9)+1,hrad,hlong,hlat  ;Get radius, long, and lat

       (2) Find heliocentric position of Mars on August 23, 2000
         IDL> JDCNV, 2000,08,23,0,jd
         IDL> HELIO,JD,2,HRAD,HLONG,HLAT
                  ===> hrad = 1.6407 AU hlong = 124.3197 hlat = 1.7853
         For comparison, the JPL ephemeris gives
                       hrad = 1.6407 AU hlong = 124.2985 hlat = 1.7845
       (3) Find the heliocentric positions of Mars and Venus for every day in
           November 2000
        IDL> JDCNV, 2000, 11, 1, 0, jd    ;Julian date of November 1, 2000
        IDL> helio, jd+indgen(30), [4,2], hrad,hlong,hlat   ;Mars=4, Venus=2
                   hrad, hlong, and hlat will be dimensioned [2,30]
                   first column contains Mars data, second column Venus
 COMMON BLOCKS:
       None
 ROUTINES USED:
       CIRRANGE - force angle between 0 and 2*!PI
 NOTES:
       (1) The calling sequence for this procedure was changed in August 2000
       (2) This program is based on the two-body model and thus neglects
           interactions between the planets.   This is why the worst results
           are for Saturn.  Use the procedure JPLEPHINTERp for more accurate
           positions using the JPL ephemeris.   Also see
           http://ssd.jpl.nasa.gov/cgi-bin/eph for a more accurate ephemeris
           generator online.
       (3) The coordinates are given for equinox 2000 and *not* the equinox
           of the supplied date(s)
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       R. Sterner.  20 Aug, 1986.
       Code cleaned up a bit      W. Landsman             December 1992
       Major rewrite, use modern orbital elements, vectorize, more accurate
         solution to Kepler's equation          W. Landsman August 2000
       Wasn't working for planet vectors        W. Landsman August 2000
       Work for more than 32767 positions       S. Leach Jan 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/helio.pro)

HELIO_JD

 NAME:
      HELIO_JD
 PURPOSE:
      Convert geocentric (reduced) Julian date to heliocentric Julian date
 EXPLANATION:
      This procedure correct for the extra light travel time between the Earth
      and the Sun.

       An online calculator for this quantity is available at
       http://www.physics.sfasu.edu/astro/javascript/hjd.html

       Users requiring more precise calculations and documentation should
       look at the IDL code available at
       http://astroutils.astronomy.ohio-state.edu/time/
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       jdhelio = HELIO_JD( date, ra, dec, /B1950, /TIME_DIFF)

 INPUTS
       date - reduced Julian date (= JD - 2400000), scalar or vector, MUST
               be double precision
       ra,dec - scalars giving right ascension and declination in DEGREES
               Equinox is J2000 unless the /B1950 keyword is set

 OUTPUTS:
       jdhelio - heliocentric reduced Julian date.  If /TIME_DIFF is set, then
                 HELIO_JD() instead returns the time difference in seconds
                 between the geocentric and heliocentric Julian date.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS
       /B1950 - if set, then input coordinates are assumed to be in equinox
                B1950 coordinates.
       /TIME_DIFF - if set, then HELIO_JD() returns the time difference
                (heliocentric JD - geocentric JD ) in seconds

 EXAMPLE:
       What is the heliocentric Julian date of an observation of V402 Cygni
       (J2000: RA = 20 9 7.8, Dec = 37 09 07) taken June 15, 1973 at 11:40 UT?

       IDL> juldate, [1973,6,15,11,40], jd      ;Get geocentric Julian date
       IDL> hjd = helio_jd( jd, ten(20,9,7.8)*15., ten(37,9,7) )

       ==> hjd = 41848.9881

 Wayne Warren (Raytheon ITSS) has compared the results of HELIO_JD with the
 FORTRAN subroutines in the STARLINK SLALIB library (see
 http://star-www.rl.ac.uk/).
                                                  Time Diff (sec)
      Date               RA(2000)   Dec(2000)  STARLINK      IDL

 1999-10-29T00:00:00.0  21 08 25.  -67 22 00.  -59.0        -59.0
 1999-10-29T00:00:00.0  02 56 33.4 +00 26 55.  474.1        474.1
 1940-12-11T06:55:00.0  07 34 41.9 -00 30 42.  366.3        370.2
 1992-02-29T03:15:56.2  12 56 27.4 +42 10 17.  350.8        350.9
 2000-03-01T10:26:31.8  14 28 36.7 -20 42 11.  243.7        243.7
 2100-02-26T09:18:24.2  08 26 51.7 +85 47 28.  104.0        108.8
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       bprecess, xyz, zparcheck

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Algorithm from the book Astronomical Photometry by Henden, p. 114
       Written,   W. Landsman       STX     June, 1989
       Make J2000 default equinox, add B1950, /TIME_DIFF keywords, compute
       variation of the obliquity      W. Landsman   November 1999

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/helio_jd.pro)

HELIO_RV

 NAME:
    HELIO_RV

 PURPOSE:
     Return the heliocentric radial velocity of a spectroscopic binary

 EXPLANATION:
    This function will return the heliocentric radial velocity of a
    spectroscopic binary star at a given heliocentric date
    given its orbit.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

  Result = HELIO_RV ( JD ,T ,Period ,Gamma , K, [,e ,Omega ] )

 INPUT:

 JD            - Time of observation
 T             - Time of periastron passage (max. +ve velocity
                 for circular orbits), same time system as JD
 Period        - the period in same units as JD
 Gamma         - systemic velocity
 K             - velocity semi-amplitude in the same units as Gamma.
 e             - eccentricity of the orbit, default is 0.
 Omega         - longitude of periastron in degrees. Must be specified for
                 eccentric orbits.

 OUTPUT:

  The predicted heliocentric radial velocity in the same units as Gamma
  for the date(s) specified by Reduced_HJD.

 RESTRICTIONS:

  The user should ensure consistency with all time systems being
  used (i.e. JD and T should be in the same units and time system).
  Generally, users should reduce large time values by subtracting
  a large constant offset, which may improve numerical accuracy.

  If using the the routines JULDATE and HELIO_JD, the reduced HJD
  time system must be used throughtout.

 EXAMPLES:

 Example 1

  What was the heliocentric radial velocity of the primary component of HU Tau
 at 1730 UT 25 Oct 1994?

 IDL> juldate ,[94,10,25,17,30],JD                 ;Get Geocentric julian date
 IDL> hjd = helio_jd(jd,ten(04,38,16)*15.,ten(20,41,05)) ; Convert to HJD
 IDL> print, helio_rv(hjd,46487.5303D,2.0563056D,-6.0,59.3)
      -62.965569

 NB. 1. The routines JULDATE and HELIO_JD return a reduced HJD (HJD - 2400000)
        and so T and P must be specified in the same fashion.
     2. The user should be careful to use double precision format to specify
        T and P to sufficient precision where necessary.

 Example 2

  Plot two cycles of an eccentric orbit, e=0.6, omega=45 for both
  components of a binary star

 IDL> phi=findgen(100)/50.0             ; Generates 100 phase points
 IDL> plot, phi,helio_rv(phi,0,1,0,100,0.6,45),yrange=[-100,150]
 IDL> oplot, phi,helio_rv(phi,0,1,0,50,0.6,45+180)

 This illustrates both the use of arrays to perform multiple calculations
 and generating radial velocities for a given phase by setting T=0 and P=1.
 Note also that omega has been changed by 180 degrees for the orbit of the
 second component  (the same 'trick' can be used for circular orbits).


 MODIFICATION HISTORY:

  Written by:  Pierre Maxted CUOBS, October, 1994

  Circular orbits handled by setting e=0 and omega=0 to allow
  binary orbits to be handled using omega and omega+180.
                                                      Pierre Maxted,Feb 95
  BUG - omega was altered by the routine - corrected Feb 95,Pierre Maxted
  Iteration for E changed to that  given by Reidel , Feb 95,Pierre Maxted
  /SINGLE keyword removed.                           May 96,Pierre Maxted
;
  Removed limitation of time system on HJD, C. Markwardt, 2011-04-15

  Change convergence test from relative to absolute precision on E
                                                     Pierre Maxted, Apr 12

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/helio_rv.pro)

HERMITE

 NAME:
       HERMITE
 PURPOSE:
       To compute Hermite spline interpolation of a tabulated function.
 EXPLANATION:
       Hermite interpolation computes the cubic polynomial that agrees with
       the tabulated function and its derivative at the two nearest
       tabulated points.   It may be preferable to Lagrangian interpolation
       (QUADTERP) when either (1) the first derivatives are known, or (2)
       one desires continuity of the first derivative of the interpolated
       values.    HERMITE() will numerically compute the necessary
       derivatives, if they are not supplied.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       F = HERMITE( XX, FF, X, [ FDERIV = ])

 INPUT PARAMETERS:
       XX - Vector giving tabulated X values of function to be interpolated
               Must be either monotonic increasing or decreasing
       FF - Tabuluated values of function, same number of elements as X
       X -  Scalar or vector giving the X values at which to interpolate

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
       FDERIV - function derivative values computed at XX.    If not supplied,
               then HERMITE() will compute the derivatives numerically.
               The FDERIV keyword is useful either when (1) the derivative
               values are (somehow) known to better accuracy than can be
               computed numerically, or (2) when HERMITE() is called repeatedly
               with the same tabulated function, so that the derivatives
               need be computed only once.

 OUTPUT PARAMETER:
       F - Interpolated values of function, same number of points as X

 EXAMPLE:
       Interpolate the function 1/x at x = 0.45 using tabulated values
       with a spacing of 0.1

       IDL> x = findgen(20)*0.1 + 0.1
       IDL> y = 1/x
       IDL> print,hermite(x,y,0.45)
               This gives 2.2188 compared to the true value 1/0.45 = 2.2222

       IDL> yprime = -1/x^2      ;But in this case we know the first derivatives
       IDL> print,hermite(x,y,0.45,fderiv = yprime)
             == 2.2219            ;and so can get a more accurate interpolation
 NOTES:
       The algorithm here is based on the FORTRAN code discussed by
       Hill, G. 1982, Publ Dom. Astrophys. Obs., 16, 67.   The original
       FORTRAN source is U.S. Airforce. Surveys in Geophysics No 272.

       HERMITE() will return an error if one tries to interpolate any values
       outside of the range of the input table XX
 PROCEDURES CALLED:
       None
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written,    B. Dorman (GSFC) Oct 1993, revised April 1996
       Added FDERIV keyword,  W. Landsman (HSTX)  April 1996
       Test for out of range values  W. Landsman (HSTX) May 1996
       Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
       Use VALUE_LOCATE instead of TABINV   W. Landsman   February 2001

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/math/hermite.pro)

HEULER

 NAME:
      HEULER

 PURPOSE:
       Change the coordinate system of a FITS header or astrometry structure
 EXPLANATION:
       Converts a FITS header or a astrometry structure containing WCS (world
       coordinate system) information between celestial, ecliptic, and
       Galactic coordinates

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HEULER, hdr, [/GALACTIC, /CELESTIAL, /ECLIPTIC, ALT_IN = , ALT_OUT=]
                      or
       HEULER, astr, /GALACTIC, /CELESTIAL, /ECLIPTIC

 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS:
       hdr - FITS header (string array) containing WCS information
                            or
       Astr - Astrometry structure as extracted from a FITS header
             by extast.pro (See EXTAST for more info).

       Header or astrometry structure will be modified by the program to
       contain astrometry in the new coordinates system.
 REQUIRED INPUT KEYWORDS:
       One of the following exclusive keywords is *required*
       /GALACTIC - Convert the header to Galactic coordinates
       /CELESTIAL - Convert the header to celestial (RA & Dec) coordinates
       /ECLIPTIC - Convert the header to ecliptic coordinates

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
      The following two keywords apply if the FITS header contains multiple
      WCS keywords. See Section 3.3 of Greisen & Calabretta (2002, A&A, 395,
      1061) for information about alternate astrometry keywords.

      ALT_IN -  single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying an
          alternate astrometry system present in the input FITS header.  The
          default isto use the primary astrometry or ALT = ' '.   If /ALT_IN
          is set, then this is equivalent to ALT_IN = 'A'.
      ALT_OUT - single character specifying the alternate WCS keywords
          to write the *output* astrometry.    If not specified, then ALT_OUT
          is set equal to ALT_IN.
 RESTRICTIONS:
       Currently assumes that celestial and ecliptic coordinates are in
       J2000.   Use HPRECESS if this is not the case.

       ST Guide Star (DSS) image headers are first converted to a standard
       tangent projection, prior to the coordinate conversion
 METHOD:
       The algorithm used is described in Section 2.7 of Calabretta & Greisen
       (2002, A&A, 395, 1077).    The CRVAL coordinates are transformed
       directly using EULER.    The new LONPOLE and LATPOLE values are then
       determined by transforming the pole of the new system to the old, and
       converted to native coordinates using WCS_ROTATE.
 EXAMPLE:
       A FITS header, hdr, has a standard tangent projection WCS information.
       Add an alternate 'G' Galactic projection.    Note that the original
       WCS information will be left unchanged

       IDL> heuler, hdr, /Galactic, alt='G'
 PROCEDURES USED:
       EULER, EXTAST, GSSS_STDAST, PUTAST, SXADDHIST, WCS_ROTATE
 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written    W. Landsman                  June 2003
       Use PV2 tag in astrometry structure rather than PROJP1 W. L. May 2004
       Use double precision to compute new North pole  W.L. Aug 2005

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/heuler.pro)

HEXTRACT

 NAME:
       HEXTRACT
 PURPOSE:
       Extract a subimage from an array and update astrometry in FITS header
 EXPLANATION:
       Extract a subimage from an array and create a new FITS header with
       updated astrometry for the subarray
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HEXTRACT, Oldim, Oldhd, [ Newim, Newhd, x0, x1, y0, y1, /SILENT ]
               or
       HEXTRACT, Oldim, Oldhd, [x0, x1, y0, y1, /SILENT, ERRMSG =  ]

 INPUTS:
       Oldim - the original image array
       Oldhd - the original image header

 OPTIONAL INPUTS:
       x0, x1, y0, y1 - respectively, first and last X pixel, and first and
       last Y pixel to be extracted from the original image, integer scalars.
       HEXTRACT will convert these values to long integers.
       If omitted,  HEXTRACT will prompt for these parameters

 OPTIONAL OUTPUTS:
       Newim - the new subarray extracted from the original image
       Newhd - header for newim containing updated astrometry info
               If output parameters are not supplied or set equal to
               -1, then the HEXTRACT will modify the input parameters
               OLDIM and OLDHD to contain the subarray and updated header.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORD:
      ALT - Single character 'A' through 'Z' or ' ' specifying which astrometry
          system to modify in the FITS header.    The default is to use the
          primary astrometry or ALT = ' '.    See Greisen and Calabretta (2002)
          for information about alternate astrometry keywords.
      /SILENT - If set and non-zero, then a message describing the extraction
               is not printed at the terminal.   This message can also be
               suppressed by setting !QUIET.
 OPTIONAL KEYWORD OUTPUT:
       ERRMSG - If this keyword is supplied, then any error mesasges will be
               returned to the user in this parameter rather than depending on
               on the MESSAGE routine in IDL.   If no errors are encountered
               then a null string is returned.

 PROCEDURE:
       The FITS header parameters NAXIS1, NAXIS2, CRPIX1, and CRPIX2 are
       updated for the extracted image.

 EXAMPLE:
       Read an image from a FITS file 'IMAGE', extract a 512 x 512 subimage
       with the same origin, and write to a new FITS file 'IMAGENEW'

       IDL> im = READFITS( 'IMAGE', hdr )      ;Read FITS files into IDL arrays
       IDL> hextract, im, h, 0, 511, 0, 511    ;Extract 512 x 512 subimage
       IDL> writefits, 'IMAGENEW', im ,h       ;Write subimage to a FITS file

 PROCEDURES CALLED
       CHECK_FITS, STRN(), SXPAR(), SXADDPAR, SXADDHIST
 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
       Written, Aug. 1986 W. Landsman, STX Corp.
       Use astrometry structure,   W. Landsman      Jan, 1994
       Minor fix if bad Y range supplied   W. Landsman    Feb, 1996
       Added /SILENT keyword              W. Landsman     March, 1997
       Added ERRMSG keyword    W. Landsman   May 2000
       Work for dimensions larger than 32767   W.L., M.Symeonidis Mar 2007
       Added ALT keyword  W.L. April 2007

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astrom/hextract.pro)

HGREP

 NAME:
     HGREP

 PURPOSE:
       Find a substring in a FITS header (or any other string array)

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HGREP, header, substring, [/KEEPCASE, /LINENUM ]

 INPUTS:
       header -  FITS header or other string array
       substring - scalar string to find in header; if a numeric value is
                 supplied, it will be converted to type string

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /KEEPCASE: if set, then look for an exact match of the input substring
                 Default is to ignore case .
       /LINENUM: if set, prints line number of header in which
                substring appears

 OUTPUTS:
       None, results are printed to screen

 EXAMPLE:
       Find every place in a FITS header that the word 'aperture'
       appears in lower case letters and print the element number
       of the header array:

       IDL> hgrep, header, 'aperture', /keepcase, /linenum

 HISTORY:
       Written, Wayne Landsman (Raytheon ITSS)      August 1998
       Adapted from STIS version by Phil Plait/ ACC November 14, 1997
       Remove trailing spaces if a non-string is supplied W. Landsman Jun 2002

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/hgrep.pro)

HISTOGAUSS

NAME:
       HISTOGAUSS

 PURPOSE:
       Histograms data and overlays it with a Gaussian. Draws the mean, sigma,
       and number of points on the plot.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:
       HISTOGAUSS, Sample, A, [XX, YY, GX, GY, /NOPLOT, /NOFIT, FONT=,
                               CHARSIZE = ]

 INPUT:
       SAMPLE = Vector to be histogrammed

 OUTPUT ARGUMENTS:
       A = coefficients of the Gaussian fit: Height, mean, sigma
               A[0]= the height of the Gaussian
               A[1]= the mean
               A[2]= the standard deviation
               A[3]= the half-width of the 95% conf. interval of the standard
                     mean
               A[4]= 1/(N-1)*total( (y-mean)/sigma)^2 ) = a measure of
                       normality

       Below: superceded. The formula is not entirely reliable.
       A[4]= measure of the normality of the distribution. =1.0, perfectly
       normal. If no more than a few hundred points are input, there are
       formulae for the 90 and 95% confidence intervals of this quantity:
       M=ALOG10(N-1) ; N = number of points
       T90=ABS(.6376-1.1535*M+.1266*M^2)  ; = 90% confidence interval
       IF N LT 50 THEN T95=ABS(-1.9065-2.5465*M+.5652*M^2) $
                  ELSE T95=ABS( 0.7824-1.1021*M+.1021*M^2)   ;95% conf.
       (From Martinez, J. and Iglewicz, I., 1981, Biometrika, 68, 331-333.)

       XX = the X coordinates of the histogram bins (CENTER)
       YY = the Y coordinates of the histogram bins
       GX = the X coordinates of the Gaussian fit
       GY = the Y coordinates of the Gaussian fit

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       /NOPLOT - If set, nothing is drawn
       /FITIT   If set, a Gaussian is actually fitted to the distribution.
               By default, a Gaussian with the same mean and sigma is drawn;
               the height is the only free parameter.
       CHARSIZE Size of the characters in the annotation. Default = 0.82.
       FONT - scalar font graphics keyword (-1,0 or 1) for text
       /WINDOW - set to plot to a resizeable graphics window
       _EXTRA - Any value keywords to the cgPLOT command (e.g. XTITLE) may also
               be passed to HISTOGAUSS
 SUBROUTINE CALLS:
       BIWEIGHT_MEAN, which determines the mean and std. dev.
       AUTOHIST, which draws the histogram
       GAUSSFIT() (IDL Library) which does just that

 REVISION HISTORY:
       Written, H. Freudenreich, STX, 12/89
       More quantities returned in A, 2/94, HF
       Added NOPLOT keyword and print if Gaussian, 3/94
       Stopped printing confidence limits on normality 3/31/94 HF
       Added CHARSIZE keyword, changed annotation format, 8/94 HF
       Simplified calculation of Gaussian height, 5/95 HF
       Convert to V5.0, use T_CVF instead of STUDENT_T, GAUSSFIT instead of
           FITAGAUSS  W. Landsman April 2002
       Correct call to T_CVF for calculation of A[3], 95% confidence interval
                P. Broos/W. Landsman   July 2003
       Allow FONT keyword to be passed.  T. Robishaw Apr. 2006
       Use Coyote Graphics for plotting W.L. Mar 2011
       Better formatting of text output W.L. May 2012

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/robust/histogauss.pro)

HOR2EQ

 NAME:
   HOR2EQ

 PURPOSE:
    Converts local horizon coords (alt-az) of something to equatorial (ra-dec).

 EXPLANATION:
     This is a nice code to calculate equatorial (ra,dec) coordinates from
     horizon (alt,az) coords.    It is typically accurate to about 1 arcsecond
     or better (I have checked the output against the publicly available XEPHEM
     software). It performs precession, nutation, aberration, and refraction
     corrections.  The perhaps best thing about it is that it can take arrays
     as inputs, in all variables and keywords EXCEPT Lat, lon, and Altitude
    (the code assumes these aren't changing), and uses vector arithmetic in
     every calculation except when calculating the precession matrices.

 CALLING SEQUENCE:

    HOR2EQ, alt, az, jd, ra, dec, [ha, LAT= , LON= , /WS, OBSNAME= , $
                       /B1950 , PRECESS_= 0, NUTATE_= 0, REFRACT_= 0, $
                       ABERRATION_= 0, ALTITUDE= , /VERBOSE, _EXTRA= ]


 INPUT VARIABLES
       alt  : altitude (in degrees) [scalar or vector]
       az   : azimuth angle (in degrees, measured EAST from NORTH, but see
              keyword WS below.) [scalar or vector]
       JD   : Julian Date [scalar or vector], double precision

       Note: if RA and DEC are arrays, then alt and az will also be arrays.
             If RA and DEC are arrays, JD may be a scalar OR an array of
              the same dimensionality.

 OPTIONAL INPUT KEYWORDS:
       lat   : north geodetic latitude of location in degrees
       lon   : EAST longitude of location in degrees
               (Specify west longitude with a negative sign.)
       /WS   : Set this to get the azimuth measured westward from south
               (not East of North).
       obsname   : Set this to a valid observatory name to be used by the
               astrolib OBSERVATORY procedure, which will return the latitude
               and longitude to be used by this program.
       /B1950  : Set this if your ra and dec are specified in B1950,
               FK4 coordinates (instead of J2000, FK5)
       precess_ : Set this to 1 to force precession [default], 0 for no
                 precession.
       nutate_  : Set this to 1 to force nutation [default], 0 for no nutation.
       aberration_ : Set this to 1 to force aberration correction [default],
                 0 for no correction.
       refract_  : Set to 1 to force refraction correction [default], 0 for
                   no correction.
       altitude: The altitude of the observing location, in meters. [default=0].
       /verbose: Set this for verbose output.  The default is verbose=0.
   _extra: This is for setting TEMPERATURE or PRESSURE explicitly, which are
           used by CO_REFRACT to calculate the refraction effect of the
           atmosphere. If you don't set these, the program will make an
           intelligent guess as to what they are (taking into account your
            altitude).  See CO_REFRACT for more details.

 OUTPUT VARIABLES
       ra   : Right Ascension of object  (J2000) in degrees (FK5); scalar or
              vector.
       dec  : Declination of object (J2000) in degrees (FK5), scalar or vector.
       ha   : hour angle (in degrees) (optional)

 DEPENDENCIES:
       NUTATE, PRECESS, ADSTRING(), SUNPOS, OBSERVATORY (from the astrolib)
       CO_NUTATE, CO_ABERRATION, CO_REFRACT, HADEC2ALTAZ

 BASIC STEPS
   Precess Ra-Dec to current equinox.
   Nutation Correction to Ra-Dec
   Aberration correction to Ra-Dec
   Calculate Local Mean Sidereal Time
   Calculate Local Apparent Sidereal Time
   Calculate Hour Angle
   Do Spherical Trig to find Apparent Alt-Az
   Apply refraction correction to find observed Alt.

CORRECTIONS I DO NOT MAKE:
   *  Deflection of Light by the sun due to GR. (typically milliarcseconds,
        can be arcseconds within one degree of the sun)
   *  The Effect of Annual Parallax (typically < 1 arcsecond)
   *  and more (see below)

 TO DO
    * Better Refraction Correction.  Need to put in wavelength dependence,
       and integrate through the atmosphere.
    * Topocentric Parallax Correction (will take into account elevation of
          the observatory)
    * Proper Motion (but this will require crazy lookup tables or something).
    * Difference between UTC and UT1 in determining LAST -- is this important?
    * Effect of Annual Parallax (is this the same as topocentric Parallax?)
    * Polar Motion
    * Better connection to Julian Date Calculator.

 EXAMPLE:

   You are at Kitt Peak National Observatory, looking at a star at azimuth
   angle 264d 55m 06s and elevation 37d 54m 41s (in the visible).  Today is
   Dec 25, 2041 and the local time is 10 PM precisely.  What is the ra and dec
   (J2000) of the star you're looking at?   The temperature here is about 0
   Celsius, and the pressure is 781 millibars.    The Julian date for this
   time is 2466879.7083333

  IDL> hor2eq, ten(37,54,41), ten(264,55,06), 2466879.7083333d, ra, dec, $
           /verb, obs='kpno', pres=781.0, temp=273.0

 The program produces this output (because the VERBOSE keyword was set):

 Latitude = +31 57 48.0   Longitude = *** 36  0.0   ; longitude prints weirdly b/c of negative input to ADSTRING!!
 Julian Date =  2466879.708333
 Az, El =  17 39 40.4  +37 54 41.0   (Observer Coords)
 Az, El =  17 39 40.4  +37 53 39.6   (Apparent Coords)
 LMST = +03 53 54.1
 LAST = +03 53 53.6
 Hour Angle = +03 38 30.1  (hh:mm:ss)
 Ra, Dec:  00 15 23.5  +15 25  1.9   (Apparent Coords)
 Ra, Dec:  00 15 24.2  +15 25  0.1   (J2041.9841)
 Ra, Dec:  00 13 14.1  +15 11  0.3   (J2000)

 The star is therefore Algenib!  Compare the derived Ra, Dec with what XEPHEM
 got:
 Ra, Dec:      00 13 14.2  +15 11  1.0   (J2000)

 AUTHOR:
   Chris O'Dell
       Univ. of Wisconsin-Madison
   Observational Cosmology Laboratory
   Email: odell@cmb.physics.wisc.edu
 REVISION HISTORY:
     Made all integers type LONG  W. Landsman   September 2007
     Fixed for case of scalar Julian date but vector positions W L June 2009

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/astro/hor2eq.pro)

HOST_TO_IEEE

 NAME:
     HOST_TO_IEEE
 PURPOSE:
     Translate an IDL variable from host to IEEE representation
 EXPLANATION:
     The variable is converted from the format used by the host architecture
     into IEEE-754 representation ("big endian" as used, e.g., in FITS data ).

     Duplicates most of the functionality of the SWAP_ENDIAN_INPLACE procedure
     with the addition of the IDLTYPE keyword.
 CALLING SEQUENCE:
     HOST_TO_IEEE, data, [ IDLTYPE = ]

 INPUT-OUTPUT PARAMETERS:
     data - any IDL variable, scalar or vector.   It will be modified by
             HOST_TO_IEEE to convert from host to IEEE representation.  Byte
             and string variables are returned by HOST_TO_IEEE unchanged

 OPTIONAL KEYWORD INPUTS:
     IDLTYPE - scalar integer (1-15) specifying the IDL datatype according
               to the code given by the SIZE function.      This keyword
               will usually be used when supplying a byte array that needs
               to be interpreted as another data type (e.g. FLOAT).

 EXAMPLE:
     Suppose FITARR is a 2880 element byte array to be converted to a FITS
     record and interpreted a FLOAT data.

       IDL> host_to_ieee, FITARR, IDLTYPE = 4

 METHOD:
     The BYTEORDER procedure is called with the appropriate keywords

 MODIFICATION HISTORY:
      Adapted from CONV_UNIX_VAX, W. Landsman   Hughes/STX    January, 1992
      Version for IDL V5.0  August 1997
      Converted to IDL V5.0   W. Landsman   September 1997
      Added new integer datatypes  C. Markwardt/W. Landsman  July 2000
      Use /SWAP_IF_LITTLE_ENDIAN keyword for 64bit types W. Landsman Feb 2003
      Do not use XDR keywords to BYTEORDER for much improved speed
                               W. Landsman   April 2006

(See $IDLUTILS_DIR/goddard/pro/misc/host_to_ieee.pro)

HPRECESS